JP7312477B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on the establishment of a starting condition, and to execute a game effect (variable effect) according to the result of the determination.

Among such gaming machines, there is known one that executes an effect using a predetermined effect device (effect button, movable member, lamp, image display device, etc.) (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-033816 A

However, the conventional gaming machine as described in the above patent document has a problem that the interest in the game is low.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, according to the present invention, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (production button, production lever) operable by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and executing the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not, and controllable state control means (main control board 110) to a specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game, and according to the result of the determinationAccompanied by variable display of production patterns on the display means (image display device)Game production(and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a variable production), and the production control means, during execution of the game production,Vibration effect that vibrates the operation means (pre-reading vibration effect, speech notice effect,Step-up announcement performance,Vibration effects related to pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, fixed effects, etc.)and a symbol change effect that changes the display size of the effect pattern (reduced display of effect symbols during SP reach effect/special SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect/reduced display of effect symbols during SPSP “7” reach effect);andWhen the game effect starts and/or ends, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (preparation action, swing display + swing action) that changes the effect pattern in a predetermined manner,The vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed in accordance with the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period, and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to anticipatory vibration effect, step-up advance effect, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, confirmation effect, etc.) executed without generating the operation effective period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration. The game effect includes a first game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the second vibration effect that may be executed during the first game effect in the specific game state. The number of types of the second vibration effect (prefetch vibration effect, step-up notice effect, pattern match, C pattern match, confirmation effect, etc.) that may be executed during the first game effect in the normal game state is greater than the number of types (vibration effect related to pattern matching, etc.).In addition, the pattern change effect pattern number is larger when the first game effect resulting in a loss is executed in the normal game state than in the case where the first game effect resulting in a loss is executed in the specific game state.It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a game machine. It is a rear view which shows the state which assembled|attached each unit to the base frame. FIG. 3 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG. 2; It is a figure which shows a main board case. It is an exploded perspective view including a base of a main board case. It is a rear perspective view when the main board case is disassembled. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a main-control board. It is a front view of a main board case when a main control board is accommodated. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a big-hit determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a special design determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table for normal. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table for probability variation / normal time reduction. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation|variation pattern determination table for special time saving. It is a figure which shows an example of a prior determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state setting table. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol storage determination process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing a special figure variation pattern determination process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol variation process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing a jackpot game end process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the main process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the customer waiting production|presentation processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a demonstration waiting time determination table. It is a figure which shows the menu operation process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead system production|presentation process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change scenario determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation execution process in a production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern determination table for pending icons; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a 1-step change pattern determination table for the icon, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a 2-step change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows the continuous announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous announcement type determination table for production modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous notice type determination table for production modes D to H (specific game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous announcement effect scenario determination table for effect modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous announcement effect scenario determination table for effect modes D~H (specific game state). It is a figure which shows the continuation notice production|presentation execution process in an production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the lamp change production|presentation execution process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the light emission production|presentation determination process at the time of winning in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the light emission effect pattern determination table at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a diagram showing an example of a variable effect pattern determination table for effect modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a variable production pattern determination table for production modes D to G (specific game state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern determination table for production|presentation mode H (specific game state). It is a figure which shows the timer production|presentation determination process in a production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an event timer frequency determination table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a first suggested event determination table for one timer; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a second suggested event determination table for two timers; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an update pattern determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the jackpot announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. It is a diagram showing an example of the variable start time accessory announcement determination table for production modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a variation start time accessory announcement determination table for production modes D to H (specific game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a pre-reach advance notice determination table for production modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a pre-reach advance notice determination table for production modes D to H (specific game state). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a dialog announcement pattern determination table; It is a figure which shows an example of a step-up notice pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a development effect pattern determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a cut-in effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a decided effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a re-lottery effect pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a fixed effect pattern determination table; FIG. It is a diagram showing the ratio of the advance notice limit period related to the loss variation effect of the effect modes A to C. It is a diagram showing the ratio of the advance notice limit period related to the loss fluctuation effect of the effect modes D to G. It is a figure which shows the ratio of the notice limitation period regarding the loss fluctuation|variation production|presentation of production|presentation mode H. It is a figure which shows the kind of vibration production|presentation for every production|presentation mode. It is a figure which shows the main process in an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial process in a lamp|ramp control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return processing in a lamp control part. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing initial operation processing in a lamp control unit; It is a figure which shows an example of a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no restoration abnormality in various accessories after power restoration; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power supply restoration. It is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is during the variable display of special symbols and with reserved storage. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in the case of restarting power supply only to the main control board after stopping; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example 2 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; It is a figure which shows the modification when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the modification of the accessory initial process in a lamp|ramp control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no restoration abnormality in various accessories after power restoration; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power supply restoration. It is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved storage. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows a specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes in a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of operating an operation part during a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of performing customization of production|presentation during a customer waiting state. It is a timing chart when a variable effect is started from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation which a variable production|presentation is started from a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of production|presentation which a variable production|presentation is started from a customer waiting state. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during the variable production. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased during the variable effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation which increases immediately after the number of reservations decreases. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during specific reach production. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased during the specific reach effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased or decreased before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a diagram showing the continuation of the effect example in which the number of pending is increased or decreased before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a diagram showing an effect example when the player changes the effect element during the first variable effect in the specific game state. It is a diagram showing an effect example when the player changes the effect element during the second variable effect in the specific game state. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case the look-ahead operation|movement production|presentation and step-up notice production|presentation are performed. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a continuation of the effect example when the look-ahead action effect and the step-up notice effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case the look-ahead vibration production|presentation and the dialogue announcement production|presentation are performed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a continuation of the effect example in the case where the anticipatory vibration effect and the speech announcement effect are executed; It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case the pseudo|simulated continuous production|presentation is performed before a ready-to-win production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case pseudo-continuous production is performed after a ready-to-win production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case a development production|presentation is performed and SP ready-to-win production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case an expansion production|presentation is performed and a SPSP ready-to-win production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case a cut-in production|presentation is performed during SP ready-to-win production|presentation and it becomes a big hit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect when a cut-in effect is executed during the SP ready-to-win effect and a big win is achieved. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect example 1 in a case where a determined effect is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win effect and a big win is achieved. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the continuation of the production example 1 in the case where the determined production is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win production and the jackpot is achieved. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect example 2 in the case where a determined effect is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win effect and a big win is achieved. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the continuation of the effect example 2 in the case where a determined effect is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win effect and a big win is achieved. It is a figure which shows the execution time of timer production|presentation for every fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case two timer production|presentations are performed during variable production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case special SP ready-to-win production|presentation is performed by the 2nd fluctuation|variation production|presentation in the production|presentation mode A (normal game state), and it becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation when chance production|presentation is performed by the 1st variation production|presentation in production|presentation mode G (specific game state), and it becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case variable probability mission production|presentation is performed during a big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of the opening production|presentation of a jackpot game for every game state, and an ending production|presentation. It is a diagram showing an example of the opening production and ending production of the jackpot game during the special time-saving game state. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in case a special time saving game state generate|occur|produces. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect when the special time-saving gaming state that occurred in the absence of a jackpot history ends. It is a diagram showing an example of the production when the special time-saving gaming state that occurred in the state where there is a jackpot history ends. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a continuation of the effect example when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. 1 is timing chart 1 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 1. FIG. Fig. 2 is a timing chart 2 when a command cannot be received normally; It is the example 1 of the production|presentation in the various timing of the timing chart 2. FIG. 3 is an example 2 of production at various timings of the timing chart 2. FIG. 3 is timing chart 3 when a command cannot be received normally. 3 is an example 1 of production at various timings of the timing chart 3. FIG. 3 is a production example 2 at various timings of the timing chart 3. FIG. 4 is timing chart 4 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 4. FIG. 5 is timing chart 5 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 5. FIG. 6 is timing chart 6 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 6. FIG. 7 is timing chart 7 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 7. FIG. 8 is timing chart 8 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 8. FIG. This is a modified example 1 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a modified example 2 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a modified example 3 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a modification 4 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a modification 5 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 9 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a concrete example 10 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 11 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 12 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 13 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 14 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 15 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 16 when the command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of the gaming machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the decided effect pattern determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the frame role-product initial motion pattern determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a diagram showing a specific example when a game ball struck left in the normal game state wins the starting hole. It is a diagram showing a specific example when the game ball struck left in the specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game state) wins the start opening. It is a figure which shows the special icon change production|presentation determination process of the production|presentation control part in 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table for MAX holding chance. (b) is a diagram showing an example of a puzzle pending chance effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case MAX holding chance production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in case puzzle pending|holding chance production|presentation is performed.

(First embodiment)
A first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment.

The game machine 1 is provided with an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, and a game board 5 having a game area 5a where game balls flow down.

The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front-rear direction, and is fixed to the island facilities of the game arcade via fixing members (for example, nails, fasteners, etc.).

The game board mounting frame 3 has a mounting portion (not shown) for mounting the game board 5 from the front, is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism 6 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, so that various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 can be maintained.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the front side of the game board mounting frame 3 so as to cover the front side of the mounting part of the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism part 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism part 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) opening in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (a glass plate, an acrylic plate, or the like) is attached so as to block the opening 8 from the rear.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, a sound output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), an upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as game balls paid out from a payout device 100 described later, a lower plate 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have flowed into an overflowing ball flow path described later without entering the upper plate 11, and a shooting operation device 13 for shooting game balls are provided. are

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two positions above the glass frame 4 with an interval therebetween, and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to produce sound (music, voice) effects. A plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 also includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to light/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a payout abnormality (to be described later) occurs.

The top plate 11 has a bottom surface of a game ball storage portion 11a that slopes downward toward the shooting operation device 13 (toward the right), and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1), which function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various productions described later, are arranged side by side on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11.

The production button device 16 is provided with a production button 17 (not shown) capable of performing a determination operation (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 9) for detecting an operation on the production button 17, and a button drive device 17b (see FIG. 9) for driving the production button 17, so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

The effect button 17 can perform effect light emission by lighting the effect button LED (full color), which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 9), in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white, red, rainbow color). In addition, it is possible to move vertically between a standby position (origin position) located below and a production position located above by the driving force of a button drive motor, which is a part of the button drive device 17b, and a button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position. Furthermore, the driving force of the button vibration motor, which is a part of the button driving device 17b, vibrates in a predetermined vibration mode, thereby making it possible to perform a performance operation, and the performance button 17 can be operated even while the button vibration motor is vibrating.

The selection button device 18 is provided with a cross key 19 (not shown) capable of performing operations such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 9) connected to the cross key 19 for detecting the operation of the cross key 19, so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

A lending operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11 for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing the remaining money. When the lending button of the lending operation part 20 is operated, the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) installed in the game machine 1 is subtracted to lend the game balls, and when the return button of the lending operation part 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed for receiving game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. - 特許庁In addition, a receiving tray full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 9) for detecting that the lower tray 12 is full of game balls is provided in the middle of the overflowing ball flow path, and while the receiving tray full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full, the payout of game balls by a payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The firing operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, a touch sensor 15a (see FIG. 9) for detecting that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 9) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a plurality of handle LEDs (frame lighting device 10) for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. are When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15, the ball sending solenoid 11b is activated to send game balls one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 is provided with a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a shooting device 26 for shooting game balls toward the game area 5a, a lock mechanism 27 for locking the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an open front at substantially the center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3, and is capable of accommodating the game board 5 from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices provided on the back side of the game board 5 face the game machine 1 through this opening.

The shooting device 26 includes a shooting member 28 for shooting a game ball, a shooting solenoid 28b (see FIG. 9) for driving the shooting member 28, a shooting rail 29 that slopes upward from the shooting member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board, and a stopper 30 that stops the game ball A at a shooting position that is the lower end of the slope of the shooting rail 29. When the game ball sent by the ball sending solenoid 11b is received at the shooting position, the game ball A is shot toward the game area 5a by the action of the hitting member 28. - 特許庁

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4 . When a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the game board mounting frame 3 is unlocked and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member 37 for guiding the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a are provided at positions near the outer edge of the game board 5. - 特許庁A shot ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball shot by the shooting device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a for guiding the game balls that have flowed down to outside the game area (recovery part of the game board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-like decorative frame 40, which is called a center case, is provided to restrict entry of game balls into the interior, and a performance space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. A warp device 41 for introducing the game balls flowing down the game area 5a into the interior of the decoration frame 40 is provided on the side of the decoration frame 40, and a stage portion 42 for rolling the game balls introduced into the interior of the decoration frame 40 by the warp device 41 to flow down the decoration frame 40 is provided in the lower part of the decoration frame 40.例文帳に追加

In the lower portion of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) general winning holes 43 in which game balls can always win (enter) are provided at intervals. When a game ball that has entered (entered) the general winning holes 43 is detected by a general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 9), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out from a payout device 100 (not shown) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. be done.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, normal pattern gates 44 (normal pattern start regions) through which game balls can pass are respectively provided. It should be noted that the winning lottery of normal symbols will be described later.

At the bottom of the game area 5a and directly below the stage portion 42, there is provided a first starting port 45 (special figure starting region) in which a game ball can always win (enter). When a game ball that has entered (entered) the first starting port 45 is detected by the first starting port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 9), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are paid out from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of a first special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Below the first starting port 45, there is provided a variable starting part 46 for converting from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to win (entering a ball) to an open state (special mode) in which it is possible or easier to enter a game ball (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a winning lottery for a normal symbol).

The variable starting unit 46 is provided with a second starting port 47 (special figure starting region) in which a game ball can win (ball entering), a second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 9) that detects the game ball winning (ball entering) to the second starting port 47, a movable member 48 that changes (variable) the second starting port 47 between the closed state and the open state, and a second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 9) for opening and closing the movable member 48. It is When the second starting port 47 is in a closed state, winning of the game ball is impossible or difficult, and when the second starting port 47 is in an open state, winning of the game ball (entering a ball) becomes possible or easy.

Further, when the game balls that have entered the second starting port 47 are detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11.例文帳に追加In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Between the first starting hole 45 and the variable starting part 46, there is provided a prize winning hole lamp NR (not shown) for causing the surroundings of the first starting hole 45 and the variable starting part 46 to emit light in a predetermined manner. It is possible to perform light emission effects by emitting light from a board lighting device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full-color LEDs, etc.).

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the normal figure gate 44 on the right side, there is provided a variable winning part 49 which is changed from a closed state (basic mode) in which a game ball cannot win a prize (entering a ball) to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can win a prize (entering a ball) based on establishment of a predetermined condition (won a jackpot judgment of a special symbol).

The variable winning section 49 is provided with a large winning opening 50 capable of winning (entering a ball) with a game ball, a large winning opening detection switch 50a (see FIG. 9) for detecting the winning (entrance) of a game ball into the large winning opening 50, an opening/closing member 51 for changing (variable) the opening/closing state of the opening/closing member 51, and a opening/closing solenoid 51b for opening/closing the opening/closing member 51. When the big prize winning port 50 is closed, the winning of the game ball is impossible or difficult, and when the big winning port 50 is open, the winning of the game ball (entering the ball) becomes possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has entered the big winning hole 50 is detected by the big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are paid out from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

On the back side of the game board 5, there is provided an out ball flow path that receives and collects the game balls that enter the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the big winning opening 50 and are detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the big winning opening detection switch 50a, and the game balls that flow into the out opening 39, collects them, and makes them flow down. An out-ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream portion. A game ball flowing down this out ball flow path and detected by the out ball detection switch 52a is discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island facility) from a discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1. - 特許庁

Outside the game area 5a, there are a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol reservation display device 63, a second special symbol reservation display device 64, and so on. A main consisting of a normal symbol holding display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 9) that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) described later is executed, a right-handed display 67 (see FIG. 9) that prompts the player to shoot a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a during the jackpot game (special game) or during the time-saving game state, and a state confirmation display 68 (see FIG. 9) that indicates that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode described later is set. An information display device 59 is provided.

Also, a winning probability display sticker is attached near the main information display device 59 (not shown). The probability of winning a jackpot (1/285 to 1/300) and set values (4 to 1) of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment are printed on the winning probability display sticker. It should be noted that the sticking position of the winning probability display sticker 200 is an example, and is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, and may be the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1. FIG.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the first special symbol jackpot determination performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45, and the second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (notifies) the result of the second special symbol jackpot determination performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47. The pattern display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery for the normal pattern, which is performed on the condition that the game ball enters the normal pattern gate 44 (entering the ball).

The first special pattern jackpot determination corresponds to acquiring a jackpot determination random number value (first special figure determination information) when a game ball wins (entrance) in the first start port 45, and comparing the acquired jackpot determination random number value with the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not it is a "jackpot". In addition, when the first special symbol jackpot determination is performed, the first special symbol display device 60 performs the variable display of the first special symbol, and after the lapse of a predetermined time, the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

The second special pattern jackpot determination corresponds to acquiring a jackpot determination random number value (second special figure determination information) when a game ball wins (entrance) in the second start port 47, and comparing the acquired jackpot determination random number value with the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not it is a "jackpot". In addition, when the second special symbol jackpot determination is performed, the second special symbol display device 61 performs the variable display of the second special symbol, and after the lapse of a predetermined time, the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

In addition, the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are respectively composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding indicators blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (big hit mode, losing mode) indicating the result of each big hit determination.

In the present embodiment, "jackpot" means a state in which the right to execute a jackpot game (special game) is obtained in the jackpot determination (special game determination) of the first special symbol or the jackpot determination (special game determination) of the second special symbol. The "jackpot game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big prize opening 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

Although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 50 in each round game are predetermined, one round game ends when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9 balls) enter the big winning hole 50 even before reaching the maximum opening times and the maximum opening time. In other words, the "jackpot game (special game)" is a game state that is advantageous to the player who can easily win prize balls. In this embodiment, it is possible to generate any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games with different degrees of advantage for the player, which will be described later in detail.

The winning lottery for the normal pattern corresponds to obtaining a random number value for hit determination when a game ball passes through a normal pattern gate 44, comparing the obtained random number value for hit determination with the hit determination value, and determining whether or not there is a "win". When the winning lottery for the normal symbols is performed, the normal symbols are variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 62, and after a predetermined time has passed, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed to indicate the result of the lottery. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

Incidentally, the normal symbol display device 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of normal symbols. Then, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (hitting mode or losing mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.

In the present embodiment, "hit" refers to a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a winning lottery of normal symbols. The term "hit game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the winning game (auxiliary game) ends when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, nine) enter the second starting port 47 even before reaching the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time. In other words, the "hit game (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed (the start condition of the variable display is likely to be established). In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described later in detail.

The first special symbol reservation display device 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rights (first reservation storage) for performing jackpot determination (variation display of the first special symbol) stored when a game ball wins (enters) the first starting port 45, and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reservation memories. Although the maximum number of first reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The second special symbol reservation display device 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rights (second reservation storage) for performing jackpot determination (variation display of the second special symbol) stored when a game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of second reservation memories. Although the maximum number of second reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The normal pattern holding display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rights (normal pattern holding storage) for performing a winning lottery (variation display of the normal pattern) of the normal pattern stored when the game ball wins (passes) the normal pattern gate 44, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of the normal pattern holding storage. In addition, although the general pattern reservation memory is designed to be stored up to four at maximum, it may be less than or more than four.

The first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by 7-segment LEDs. For example, ``7'' is stop-displayed when winning the jackpot judgment of the special pattern, and ``-'' is stop-displayed when the winning is lost, and extinguishing and ``-'' are repeated during the variable display. Before starting the variable display of the special pattern, the result of stopping the previous variable display is displayed by lighting the LED, so that the start of the variable display can be easily grasped by starting the variable display from extinguishing the LED.

A round number display 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a big winning state (special game state) occurs, starts lighting of the LEDs in a predetermined mode indicating the number of rounds at the start of the big winning game, keeps lighting the LEDs during the big winning game, and extinguishes the LEDs at the end of the big winning game. For example, if the jackpot game has two rounds, only the fourth LED from the left lights up, and if the jackpot game has 16 rounds, all the LEDs light up.

The right-handed display 67 is composed of one LED, and is for displaying a right-handed display prompting the player to shoot a game ball toward the right game area (so-called right handed) during the big win state (special game state) and the time saving game state, and the LED lights up during the big win state (special game state) and the time saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that a setting change mode to be described later or a setting confirmation mode to be described later is set. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is entered, the LED starts lighting, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is extinguished. Since the state confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front face (surface) of the game machine, it is possible to easily confirm whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set.

It should be noted that the installation position of the state confirmation display 68 is an example, and is not limited to the installation position of the present embodiment, and may be the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the same display mode (lighting display) is displayed regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it may be displayed so that it can be recognized which one is set. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the state confirmation display 68 may be lit and displayed, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the state confirmation display 68 may be blinked, or when the setting change mode is set, either the state confirmation display 68 or the second game information display device 69 may be lit, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, only the state confirmation display 68 may be lit.

In addition, in this embodiment, the state confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display for indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69, which will be described later, are turned off, so these display devices may be used. Specifically, one LED of either the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or all the LEDs of the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on.

At the lower right part inside the game area 5a, there is provided a sub-first variation display 81, a sub-second variation display 82, a first sub-holding display 83, a second sub-holding display 84, a sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, a sub-normal figure holding display 86, and a sub-right-hand hitting display 87 that encourages shooting a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right-hand hitting). The sub-information display device 80 is not provided with an indicator such as the status confirmation indicator 68 described above, which indicates that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set.

The first sub-variation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, and the second sub-variation display 82 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the second special symbol jackpot determination, each of which is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special pattern is started, the LED blinks at a predetermined interval (the first lamp pattern LZ or the second lamp pattern LZ is displayed variably), and when the corresponding special pattern is stop-displayed, the result of the big hit determination (lights up in the case of a big win, and extinguishes in the case of a loss) is stop-displayed.

The first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82 may blink during the variable display of the special symbols and turn on or off when the special symbols are displayed in a stopped manner so that only whether or not the special symbols are being variable-displayed can be grasped.

The first sub-reservation display 83 is for displaying the number of first reservation memories (number of reservations), and the second sub-reservation display 84 is for displaying the number of second reservation memories (number of reservations), and each consists of two left and right LEDs. When the number of reservations is '0', the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the number of reservations is '1', the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the number of reservations is '2', the left and right LEDs are turned on, when the number of reservations is '3', the left and right LEDs are turned on, and when the number of reservations is '4', the left and right LEDs are turned on and off.

The sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of normal symbols is started, the LED blinks (variable display) at predetermined intervals. Then, when the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lighting up in the case of winning, light-out in the case of losing) is stop-displayed.

In addition, in the sub normal pattern fluctuation display device 85, it may be possible to blink during the normal pattern fluctuation display and turn on or off when the stop display is performed so that only whether or not the normal pattern is being fluctuated display can be grasped.

The sub-normal pattern reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of normal pattern reservation storage (number of reservations), and is composed of two LEDs arranged side by side. When the number of reserved normal patterns is '0', the left and right LEDs are extinguished, when the number of reserved normal patterns is '1', the left LED is lit and the right LED is extinguished, when the number of reserved normal patterns is '2', the left LED flashes and the right LED lights, and when the number of reserved normal patterns is '4', the left and right LEDs flash.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided in the inner part of the effect space 40a, a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display formed with a smaller display area than the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided in the lower part of the effect space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a first movable member 73 imitating the face of a character is provided in the upper part of the effect space 40a. A circular second movable member 74 is provided on the right side of 40a.

The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) performs various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the performance display, there are a customer waiting demo performance executed during the customer waiting state (waiting state in which the game is not progressing) in which the variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and a variable performance accompanied by the variable display of the performance pattern 70a executed during the variable display of the special pattern.

A display section (effective display area) of a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is formed with three rows of variable display areas such as a left area, a central area, and a right area, and the variable display of the performance symbols 70a is performed by scrolling the performance symbols 70a displayed in the respective variable display regions in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment). Further, a special pattern display area is formed in the lower right corner of the display part of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area is scrolled vertically (from top to bottom in this embodiment) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, thereby performing the variable display of the special pattern TZ.

Incidentally, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are composed of patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", for example, and the production pattern 70a is variably displayed in correspondence with (synchronously with) the variable display of the special design executed by the first special design display device 60 and the second special design display device 61.例文帳に追加That is, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a is started corresponding to the start of the variable display of the special pattern, the temporary stop display (swing display) of the performance pattern 70a is performed before the stop of the variable display of the special pattern, and the stop display (stationary display) of the variable display of the performance pattern 70a is performed in response to the stop display of the variable display of the special pattern. Incidentally, as the effect pattern 70a, in addition to the patterns indicating numbers, patterns indicating alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be provided.

The ``temporary stop display'' means a mode in which the performance pattern 70a shakes slightly or is slightly deformed to give the player the impression that the performance pattern 70a is stopped (not completely stopped).

In the stop display of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a stops for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (losing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the big hit determination. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same performance patterns such as '777' or a combination of performance patterns with regularity such as '357', and the losing mode is other modes. In addition, the form of the variable display of the production pattern 70a is not limited to this, and may be scrolled in the horizontal direction, or may be rotated (rotated) on the spot.

In addition, during the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, various performance images such as ready-to-win performance, background images, characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) according to the result of the big win determination, thereby increasing the player's expectation for the execution of the big win (special game) (hereinafter referred to as "big win expectation").

Here, the ``ready-to-win performance'' means a variation mode in which a part of the combination of the performance patterns 70a reporting the big win is temporarily stopped and the other performance patterns 70a fluctuate, making the player expect the execution of the big win game. For example, when a combination of three-digit performance symbols 70a of ``777'' is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a (jackpot result mode) for reporting a big win, two performance symbols 70a temporarily stop at ``7'' in the left and right regions, and the remaining performance symbols 70a fluctuate in the central region.

Also, in the present embodiment, there are seven types of ready-to-win effects: "normal ready-to-win effects", "SP ready-to-win effects", "SPSP ready-to-win effects", "SPSP '7' ready-to-win effects", "full rotation ready-to-win effects" and "special SP reach".

The ``normal ready-to-win performance'' is a ready-to-win performance performed in a state in which a ready-to-win state is formed in which two performance patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in the left and right regions and the remaining one performance pattern 70a fluctuates in the central region while a background image before ready-to-win is displayed.

The ``SP ready-to-win performance'' is a ready-to-win performance performed after the normal ready-to-win performance, in which a performance pattern 70a forming a ready-to-win state is displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the screen, and a performance with a higher performance effect than the normal ready-to-win performance (higher expectation for a big hit) than the normal ready-to-win performance is performed.

The "SPSP ready-to-win effect" is executed after the normal ready-to-win effect or the SP ready-to-win effect, and is a ready-to-win effect in which the effect (higher expectations for a big hit) than the normal ready-to-win effect or the SP ready-to-win effect is performed.

The “all-rotation ready-to-win effect” is a ready-to-win effect that fluctuates at a low speed in a state in which all combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for reporting a big win are complete. In this embodiment, it is a ready-to-win effect that is executed only when winning in the jackpot determination.

The ``special SP ready-to-win'' is a ready-to-win performance executed after the normal ready-to-win performance, in which a performance pattern 70a forming a ready-to-win state is reduced and displayed at the corner of the screen, the performance effect is higher than that of the normal ready-to-win performance (there is a high expectation for a big win), and the performance different from the normal SP ready-to-win is performed.

In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot related to the ready-to-win performance is higher in the order of normal ready-to-win performance <SP ready-to-win performance <SPSP ready-to-win performance <full-rotation ready-to-win performance (jackpot confirmed), and in the order of normal ready-to-win performance <special SP ready-to-win performance.

Also, at the bottom of the display portion of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a first reserved icon display area 70B for displaying the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the number of first special figure reservations (U1), which is the number of current first reserved memories in the normal game state, and a second reserved icon display area 70D for displaying the number of second reserved icons corresponding to the number of second special figure reservations (U2), which is the number of current second reserved memories in the specific game state, and the normal game state. And the icon display area 70C for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed in the specific game state is formed.

The first reserved icon display area 70B is partitioned in the form of a first display section 70B1, a second display section 70B2, a third display section 70B3, and a fourth display section 70B4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C, and each display section 70B1 to 70B4 displays a number of first reserved icons corresponding to the number of first special figure reservations (U1). That is, the number of first reserved icons is also increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease in the number of first special figure reservations (U1).

Specifically, the first display portion 70B1 first displays a first pending icon H11 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is first displayed, the second display portion 70B2 displays the first pending icon H12 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is secondly displayed, and the third display portion 70B3 displays the first pending icon H13 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is thirdly performed. is displayed, and the fourth display portion 70B4 displays the first suspension icon H14 indicating the first suspension storage in which the variation display of the first special symbol is fourthly executed.

The second reserved icon display area 70D is divided in the form of a first display section 70D1, a second display section 70D2, a third display section 70D3, and a fourth display section 70D4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C, and the second reserved icons corresponding to the number of second special figure reservations (U2) are displayed in each display section 70D1 to 70D4. That is, the number of second reserved icons is also increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease of the second special figure reservation number (U2).

Specifically, the first display portion 70D1 displays a second pending icon H21 indicating the second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is first displayed, the second display portion 70D2 displays the second pending icon H22 indicating the second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is performed second, and the third display portion 70D3 displays the second pending icon H23 indicating the second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is performed third. is displayed, and the fourth display portion 70D4 displays a second suspension icon H24 indicating the second suspension storage in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed fourth. In addition, in this embodiment, the "first special figure reservation number" may be referred to as the "first reservation number" and the "second special figure reservation number" may be referred to as the "second reservation number".

In the icon display area 70C, the icon TI is displayed when the first pending icon displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B or the second pending icon displayed in the first display portion 70D1 of the second pending icon display area 70D moves (shifts) in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a), and the icon T is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) ends. I disappears (erases). In addition, the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). In the present embodiment, the "first pending icon", the "second pending icon", and the "subject icon" may be collectively referred to as "icons".

Also, on the left side of the display portion of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a first special figure reserved number display area 70E for displaying the first reserved number indicating the number of the current first special figure reserved number (U1) in the normal game state and the specific game state, and a second special figure reserved number display area 70F for displaying the second reserved number indicating the number of the current second special figure reserved number (U2) in the normal game state and the specific game state.

The first movable member 73 can emit light by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 9), in a predetermined light emission mode. It is detected that it is at the origin position.

The second movable member 74 can perform effect light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 9), in a predetermined light emission mode. omitted) detects that it is at the origin position.

Since the performance positions of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 partially overlap each other, basically the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not operate simultaneously so as not to collide with each other.

If the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, the other movable member may be moved to the performance position after one movable member moves to the performance position and returns to a position not overlapping the performance position of the other movable member.

Behind the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5 are a payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), a game ball storage unit (not shown) for storing game balls supplied from island facilities and supplying them to the payout device 100, a main control device 110A (not shown) containing a main control board 110 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game, and a payout from the main control board 110. A payout control device 120A (not shown) incorporating a payout control board 120 for controlling the payout device 100 in accordance with a control command, a production control device 130A (not shown) incorporating a production control board 130 for controlling production in response to a production control command from the main control board 110, a power supply device 160A (not shown) containing a power supply board 160 for supplying power supply voltage to various control devices, and game information (game signals) outside the game machine. A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 9) for outputting is provided.

In addition, an opening and closing door type cover member that opens and closes in the left and right direction around the rotation axis set on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device 110A and the entire production control device 130A from the rear is provided. A changeover switch 22 (see FIG. 9) is provided for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the light amount of the device 76).

On the surface side of the main control board 110, a main control unit 110m composed of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, an RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or updating the set value which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game (which makes the degree of advantage of the game different), and a signal for shifting to a state in which the set value can be changed or a state in which the set value can be confirmed by operation using the setting keys are input. A setting key switch 112a, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values, etc., which enables the actual performance of the game machine 1 to be grasped, are mounted.

The information display 113 is for displaying setting values and performance information (normal base values to be described later), and is configured by arranging four 7-segment displays having decimal points DP side by side. Two 7-segment displays corresponding to the upper two digits constitute an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information, and two 7-segment displays corresponding to the lower two digits constitute a numerical segment for displaying numerical information indicating numerical values of setting values and performance information.

(Structure of the back of the game board)
Next, the configuration of the back side of the game board will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG.
FIG. 2 is a rear view showing a state in which each unit is assembled to the base frame, and FIG. 3 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, etc., a base frame 170 (liquid crystal base frame) having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction is assembled to the back surface (rear surface) of the game board 5, and an image display unit (first image display device 70 and image display cover 185) 180 is assembled to the back side (rear surface side) of the base frame 170 so as to block the opening. A lamp relay board 186 is assembled to the rear surface (rear surface) of the image display cover 185 (liquid crystal cover), and a main controller 110A (main board case 200 housing the main control board 110) is attached to the lower rear surface of the image display cover 185 below the lamp relay board 186.

The base frame 170 (liquid crystal base) is a substantially rectangular annular body having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the annular front surface 171 thereof is attached to and fixed to the back surface of the game board 5 . A space for arranging various circuit boards and parts is provided on the back surface of the base frame 170 .
An effect control board 130 is arranged on the back side of the image display unit 180 (liquid crystal unit) fixed to the back of the base frame 170 . The image display unit 180 is configured to be slidably mounted in a gap (storage space) for storing the image display unit provided in front of the performance control board from the side (horizontal direction), the vertical direction, or the oblique direction of the base frame.
Various circuit boards arranged on the back surface of the base frame are covered with a lid member 190 .

As shown in FIG. 2, on the rear side of the main board case 200, at least the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a provided on the main control board 110 are exposed.
Also, the information display 113 provided on the main control board 110 can be visually recognized through the transparent main board case 200 .
The staff of the game parlor opens the door of the game machine, operates the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a while viewing the information display device 113 on the back of the game machine, and can perform operations such as RWM clear, setting change, setting confirmation, and confirmation of the performance information of the game machine.

The RWM clear switch 111a on the main control board 110 is not directly exposed, and an operation member 685 that can be operated by amusement arcade staff or the like protrudes from an opening provided in the main board case 200 at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a.
When a staff member or the like presses the operating member 685, the pressed operating member 685 presses the RWM clear switch 111a. As a result, the RWM clear switch 111a is operated.

The setting key switch 112a is provided with a keyhole for inserting a key in the end face of a tubular member protruding from the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
An end face of the setting key switch 112a having a keyhole is exposed through an opening provided in the main board case 200. As shown in FIG.
Amusement arcade staff or the like can operate the setting key switch 112a by inserting a key into the keyhole.

(main board case)
Next, the configuration of the main board case 200 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6. FIG.
In this embodiment, the game board 5 side of the main board case 200 will be described as the front side, and the opposite side of the game board 5 as the rear side. Therefore, the left-right direction in the drawing is the left-right direction when the main board case 200 is viewed from the side opposite to the game board 5 .

4 is a diagram for explaining the main board case 200, FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view including the pedestal of the main board case 200, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view when the main board case 200 is disassembled.
The main board case 200 of the present embodiment is attached to the back of a game machine such as a pachinko game machine via a pedestal 280 while housing the main control board 110 on which electronic components are mounted.

The pedestal 280 is connecting means for attaching the main board case 200 to the game machine side holding portion (the lamp relay board 186 in this embodiment) provided on the back side of the game machine main body.
Since the main board case 200 containing the main control board is assembled with the lower case piece 210 attached to the back surface of the game board such as a pachinko game machine through the pedestal 280, the electronic parts mounted on the internal main control board 110 can be visually recognized from the back side of the game board through the upper case piece 220.例文帳に追加

The pedestal 280 is a component used to attach the main board case 200 to the rear side of the game board 5 . As shown in FIG. 5, the pedestal 280 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape with two sides extending in the horizontal direction longer than the two sides extending in the vertical direction. The axial direction of the shaft portion 281 coincides with the left-right direction.

The main board case 200 is provided with a pair of hook portions 249 that are engaged with the respective shaft portions 281 . A pair of hook portions 249 are provided on the lower side of an upper case piece 220, which will be described later. The hook portion 249 is formed in a U shape that protrudes toward the front side.

When attaching the main board case 200 to the pedestal 280, the main board case 200 is arranged so that the hook portion 249 protrudes toward the back side. Then, the hook portions 249 are brought into a state in which they can be engaged with the shaft portions 281 , so that the main circuit board case 200 is brought closer to the pedestal 280 to engage the hook portions 249 with the shaft portions 281 .

After the hook portion 249 is engaged with the shaft portion 281 , the free end side of the main circuit board case 200 is rotated upward about the shaft portion 281 so that the main circuit board case 200 is superimposed on the pedestal 280 . At this time, the plate-shaped hook 282 provided on the upper side of the base 280 is hooked on the recess D provided on the upper side of the main board case 200 . Therefore, the main board case 200 is fixed to the pedestal 280 by the engagement between the hook portion 249 and the shaft portion 281 and the engagement between the plate-like hook 282 and the main board case 200 .

After that, the protective cover 229 is attached to the main board case 200 . Protective cover 229 covers the lower portion of main board case 200 including hook portion 249 . In this manner, the main controller 110A is attached to the rear side of the game board 5. FIG.

The main circuit board case 200 consists of two transparent resin case pieces (a lower case piece 210 and an upper case piece 220) that house a single-sided mounting type main control circuit board 110 (printed circuit board) in which electronic components are arranged only on one side. and a cap 240 detachably attached to the base portion 310 .

The main board case 200 encloses the main control board 110 with the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 mounted on the main control board 110 exposed. The main circuit board case 200 is made of a material having optical transparency, such as transparent plastic.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 constitute a main substrate case main body (sealing body 300).
A protective cover 229 is arranged below the upper case piece 220 to cover the connecting portion between the internal connector provided on the internal main control board 110 and the external connector.
In this embodiment, the lower case piece 210 is fixed to the upper case piece 220 by a crimping member with the main control board 110 interposed therebetween.

A crimping fastening portion 291 using a crimping member is arranged at an appropriate position along the edge of the main substrate case 200, and the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are locked in a closed state by driving (locking) the crimping member (locking member) into the crimping fastening hole (sealing portion) provided in the crimping fastening portion 291. The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 become openable and detachable by removing (breaking) the crimping member driven into (locked) the crimping fastening hole.

In the crimping fastening portion 291 of the main board case 200 of this embodiment, two crimping fastening holes are provided (crimping fastening holes 291A and 291B).
The respective caulking fastening holes 291A and 291B are formed by connecting a lower case side fastening hole 292 provided in the lower case piece 210 and an upper case side fastening hole 293 provided in the upper case piece 220 to each other.

Only one caulking fastening hole is used for fastening the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 once. After removing (breaking) the crimping member and releasing the fastening (after opening the main substrate case 200), when fastening is performed again, the fastening is performed by driving the crimping member into the other remaining crimping fastening hole. That is, the main board case of this embodiment can be opened up to twice.

The lower case piece 210 is combined with the upper case piece 220 to form an enclosing part 581 for enclosing the main control board 110 . The upper case piece 220 is provided on the rear side of the main substrate case 200, which is the side of the main controller 110m. The lower case piece 210 is provided on the front side of the main substrate case 200, which is the side opposite to the main control unit 110m side.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 respectively include control board housing portions 211 and 221 that house the main control board 110, and sealing portions 212 and 222 that constitute a sealing base portion 310, which will be described later. The control board housing portions 211 and 221 are formed to have substantially rectangular plate portions 211a and 221a, respectively, and flange portions 211b and 221b projecting from the peripheral edges of the plate portions 211a and 221a and surrounding one side surfaces of the plate portions 211a and 221a.

A cylindrical portion 565 extending rearward on the main control board 110 side is provided on the left portion of the plate portion 211 a of the lower case piece 210 . A hole portion 566 extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the cylindrical portion 565 . A thread is formed inside the hole 566 . A hole portion 567 is provided at a position facing the cylindrical portion 565 in the main control board 110 .

The main control board 110 is fixed to the lower case piece 210 . More specifically, behind the cylindrical portion 565 of the lower case piece 210, the hole portion 567 of the main control board 110 is arranged. A screw shaft for fixing the main control board 110 is inserted from the rear side of the main control board 110 through the hole 567 into the hole 566 of the cylindrical part 565 . The thread formed in the hole portion 567 of the cylindrical portion 565 is combined with the thread formed in the shaft portion of the screw. As a result, the main control board 110 is sandwiched between the head of the screw and the rear surface of the cylindrical portion 565 so that the main control board 110 is fixed to the lower case piece 210 . That is, the main control board 110 is screwed to the lower case piece 210 side.

Of the flange portion 211b of the control board housing portion 211, three L-shaped hooking pieces 211c are formed in each portion (hereinafter referred to as “male portion”) protruding from the plate portion 211a along two long sides of the plate portion 211a. On the other hand, of the flange portion 221b of the control board housing portion 221, the portion that protrudes from the plate portion 221a along the two long sides of the plate portion 221a (hereinafter referred to as the “female portion”) is formed into a double wall shape, and an insertion groove portion 221c into which the male portion of the control board housing portion 211 can be inserted is provided between the walls forming the double wall. A hooking piece 221d is formed in each insertion groove 221c.

When the lower case piece 210 to which the main control board 110 is screwed and the upper case piece 220 are combined, the male portion of the flange portion 211b is inserted into the female portion of the flange portion 221b. Then, the control board housing portions 211 and 221 are slid relative to each other in the direction of the arrow α in FIG. 6 along the horizontal direction. Then, the hooking piece 211c provided on the male portion engages with the hooking piece 221d, so that the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined so as not to come off unless they move in the direction opposite to the arrow α.

When combined in this manner, the control board housings 211 and 221 form a box-shaped inner envelope 581 that is internally shielded from the outside. Since the main control board 110 is housed in the encapsulating portion 581, the possibility of unauthorized replacement of the main control board 110 and the main control section 110m can be suppressed.

The main control board 110 is attached inside the control board housing portion 221 before the control board housing portions 211 and 221 are combined. At this time, an IC or the like mounted on the main control board 110 is attached so as to face the plate portion 221a of the control board housing portion 221. As shown in FIG. This is because the plate portion 221a is also made of transparent plastic, so even if the main control board 110 is housed in the main board case 200, it is possible to check from the outside through the plate portion 221a whether or not electronic components such as the main control section 110m mounted on the main control board 110 have been illegally replaced. In this embodiment, when the main controller 110A having the main board case 200 is attached to the game board 5, the electronic components mounted on the main control board 110 in the main board case 200 can be viewed from the back side of the game machine 1 through the upper case piece 220.

Sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided at the right end portions of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, respectively. As shown in FIG. 34, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are provided with a first screw-stopping piece 91 and a second screw-stopping piece 92 above the sealing portions 212 and 222, respectively. When the control board storage sections 211 and 221 are slid and combined, the sealing base section 310 is formed by the sealing sections 212 and 222 at the longitudinal ends of the sealing body 300 that combines them. Then, when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing body 300 over the sealing base part 310, the first screwing piece 91, the second screwing piece 92, and the third screwing piece 393 included in the cap 240 are superimposed on the ends of the sealing body 300 in the longitudinal direction to constitute the screwing part 390 for screwing.

The sealing portions 212 and 222 protrude rightward from the right end portions of the control board storage portions 211 and 221, respectively. The sealing portions 212 and 222 are formed to have the same height in the horizontal direction and the same width in the vertical direction. Long groove portions 212a and 222a are formed in the respective sealing portions 212 and 222 along the horizontal direction. Two parallel grooves 222a are formed in the left-right direction in the sealing portion 222 at a predetermined interval, and one groove 212a is formed in the sealing portion 212 in the left-right direction. When the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined, the sealing portions 212 and 222 form a sealing base portion 310 on the right side of the combined control board housing portions 211 and 221 . In the sealing base portion 310, the sealing portions 212 and 222 are arranged parallel to each other with a constant interval therebetween, and an inserting/removing space is formed between the faces of the sealing portions 212 and 222 facing each other.

The unsealing prohibition seal 250 is used as means for sealing the main circuit board case 200, and proves that it is a genuine product issued by an organization or the like having authentication qualifications. The unsealable seal 250 is made of an easy-to-cut material such as paper, and has an adhesive surface on one side, and has a plurality of cuts. As will be described later, for example, a hologram, a QR code (registered trademark), and the like are printed on the unsealable seal 250 . The unsealing prohibition seal 250 is also printed with the words "unsealing prohibited".
The cutting member 230 is formed in a shape having a base portion 230 a , a pair of knob portions 361 and a cutting portion 364 . A base portion 230a serving as the base of the cutting member 230 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. A cut portion 364 is formed on one of the two long sides of the base portion 230a. The cutting portion 364 is a portion where the tip of the base portion 230a is formed into a blade shape. The gripping portions 361 are provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the base portion 230a, and are formed in a shape that is bent as a whole. A left end portion of the knob portion 361 is referred to as a free end portion 361a.

The cap 240 is formed in a size that can be put on the sealing base portion 310 to cover the entire sealing base portion 310 and is detachably attached to the sealing base portion 310 . The cap 240 includes a bowl-shaped cap body 241 that covers the sealing base portion 310 and a third screw-stopping piece 393 formed at one longitudinal end of the cap body 241 . A protrusion 382 is provided on the inner surface of the cap body 241 at a position where the free end 361a of the knob 361 of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/removal space 310a is caught when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing base 310. A groove portion 386 is formed in the inner surface of the cap main body 241 .

The cutting member 230 is inserted into the insertion/removal space of the sealing base portion 310 . After that, the unsealing prohibition seal 250 is affixed. Furthermore, when the cap 240 is put on the sealing base portion 310, the groove portion 386 fits into a portion of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/removal space 310a. Also, the protrusion 382 engages with the free end 361 a of the knob 361 of the cutting member 230 .

When the cap 240 is put on the sealing base portion 310, the third screwing piece 393 overlaps the combination of the first screwing piece 91 of the lower case piece 210 and the second screwing piece 92 of the upper case piece 220 to constitute the screwing portion 390 for screwing. When the crimping member 94 is driven into the screwing portion 390, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220 and the cap 240 are fixed to each other.

When unsealing the main substrate case 200 , the crimping member 94 is removed and the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion 310 . The same applies when the main board case 200 is unsealed. Cutting member 230 and cap 240 are integrated. Therefore, when the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion 310, the cutting member 230 is also removed from the sealing base portion 310 at the same time. Then, the unsealable seal 250 is irreparably damaged by the cutting portion 364 or the like.

(main control board)
Next, the configuration of the main control board 110 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the structure of the main control board.
The main control board 110 that controls the game is mounted with a main control unit 110m, an RWM clear switch 111a, a setting key switch 112a, an information display 113, a plurality of electronic components 595 (ICs, resistors, connectors, capacitors, coils, etc.) different from the main control unit 110m, a plurality of connectors 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, and the like.

The main control unit 110m stores memory contents used for game control. In addition, the main control unit 110m stores memory contents that affect the game results.
The main control unit 110m is a one-chip microcomputer integrating a main CPU 110a, a main ROM 110b, and a main RAM 110c, which will be described later.
A plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from left to right on the lower portion of main control board 110 . A plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged inside six openings 779 provided in the lower part of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200 .

Two connectors 774 and 775 out of the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are called detection signal connectors 774 and 775 . The detection signal connectors 774, 775 receive signals from at least some of the first start hole detection switch 45a, the second start hole detection switch 47a, the general winning hole detection switch 43a, and the big winning hole detection switch 50a for detecting the winning of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are supplied with all signals of the first start hole detection switch 45a, the second start hole detection switch 47a, the general winning hole detection switch 43a, and the big winning hole detection switch 50a. The detection signal connectors 774 , 775 are a different color than the other connectors 771 , 772 , 773 , 776 . In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774, 775 are fluorescent, and the other connectors 771, 772, 773, 776 are different from fluorescent.

The main control unit 110m includes a plate-like main body extending in the left-right direction, and a plurality of signal pins (first signal pins) extending downward from the lower end of the main body and electrically connected to the main control board 110. A signal pin (first signal pin) is mounted (soldered) on the main control board 110 so as to be visible through the main board case 200 .
The plurality of electronic components 595 includes signal pins (second signal pins) provided to each of the plurality of electronic components. A signal pin (second signal pin) is mounted (soldered) on the main control board 110 so as to be visible through the main board case 200 .

The RWM clear switch 111a will be described.
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 8, the RWM clear switch 111a on the main control board 110 is not directly exposed. The upper case piece 220 of the board case 200 is provided with a recess 688 inside, and an opening 687 is provided in the recess 688 .
As can be seen from FIG. 5, the operation member 685 is provided at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a. As a result, the RWM clear switch 111a is operated.
A cover member 686 is provided within the recess 688 . The cover member 686 is rotatably supported in the recess 688 between a first position where the operating member 685 is closed and disabled and a second position where the operating member 685 is opened and operable.
By moving the operating member 685 to the second position, the RWM clear switch 111a can be operated.
By doing so, it is only necessary to provide an opening 687 large enough to insert the operation member 685 in the substrate case 200 . Further, the operation member 685 cannot be operated unless the cover member 686 is opened. Therefore, unauthorized access into the board case 200 can be prevented.
The RWM clear switch 111 a may have an end exposed through the opening 687 so that it can be directly operated without being operated using the operating member 685 .

The setting key switch 112a is provided with a keyhole for inserting a key in the end face of a tubular member protruding from the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
The end face of the setting key switch 112a having the keyhole is exposed through the opening 661 provided in the upper case piece 220 of the substrate case 200, but slightly lower than the surface of the substrate case 200. FIG.
A staff member or the like can operate by inserting a key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a.

(identification mark)
The identification display 520 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the identification marks 520 are attached to the main control board 110, the main control section 110m, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240. As shown in FIG.
The identification display 520 is a display containing information about the gaming machine 1 . In the following description, the identification display 520 provided on the main control board 110 is referred to as identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the main control unit 110m is referred to as identification display 522. FIG. The identification mark 520 provided on the upper case piece 220 is called identification mark 523 , the identification mark 520 provided on the lower case piece 210 is called identification mark 524 , and the identification mark 520 provided on the cap 240 is called identification mark 525 .

As shown in FIG. 5, the identification display 521 is displayed on the upper part of the back surface of the main control board 110 by silk printing. The identification display 521 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. The identification mark 522 is attached to the main control unit 110m by stamping. The identification display 522 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information.
Identification marks 523, 524, and 525 attached to the main board case 200 are information identification portions for displaying specific information. The identification mark 524 is formed on the upper right portion of the front surface of the lower case piece 210 by imprinting with a mold for manufacturing the lower case piece 210 (see FIG. 33).
The identification mark 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 240 by imprinting with the mold for manufacturing the cap 240 . A display mode of the identification display 523 will be described later.

Identifications 521 - 525 are related to each other and include at least the same identification 529 . In this embodiment, as an example, the identification display 521 is a character string "ABCD01", and the identification display 522 is a character string "ABCD02". The identification display 523 is a character string of "ABCD03", and the identification display 524 is a character string of "ABCD04". The identification display 525 is a character string of "ABCD05". The same identification 529 among the identifications 521 to 525 is "ABCD". The identification display 529 is, for example, a display corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, and the like. In this embodiment, as an example, in "ABCD", "AB" represents the manufacturer name and "CD" represents the model name.

Incidentally, in the identification displays 521 to 525, the maker name itself may be displayed instead of displaying the maker name as "AB" included in "ABCD". Also, instead of displaying the model name as "CD" included in "ABCD", the model name itself may be displayed. Further, the identification displays 521 to 525 may display the model of the gaming machine.

(Seal member)
The sealing member will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 8 , a sealing member 1560 and a sealing member 1561 are attached to the outer surface 531 of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200 .

The seal member 1560 is attached to the position display portion 561 provided on the left lower portion of the upper case piece 220 in the left-right direction, and the seal member 1561 is attached to the position display portion 561 provided on the upper right portion of the upper case piece 220.
Both of the sealing members 1560 and 1561 are made of a light-transmissive material, and in this embodiment, as an example, they are transparent (made of a transparent material).
Sealing members 1560 and 1561 are arranged across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 8), respectively. 5, illustration of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 positioned in front of the sealing members 1560 and 1561 is omitted.

Seal member 1560 is a seal for main board management.
In this example, a seal member body 1560A (base portion) of the seal member 1560 is provided with an anti-counterfeiting watermark. That is, the seal member 1560 (opener indication seal) is a processed seal obtained by watermarking the seal member main body 1560A.
A “watermark” is, for example, a display that looks different depending on the viewing angle.
However, the seal member main body 1560A is transparent even though it is subjected to a predetermined processing (watermark processing), and at least has high translucency to ensure a certain level of visibility.

The seal member 1560 has a white entry area 1570 (entry column), a code portion 1572, and an information display portion 1573 within a black frame with a headline such as "main board control number" on the seal member main body 1560A.
The entry area 1570, the code part 1572, the information display part 1573, and the character display associated with these areas, which will be described later, are non-translucent parts with low translucency because the transparent material of the sealing member main body 1560A is not exposed.
The seal member 1560 has a plurality of non-light-transmitting portions, and it is difficult to visually recognize the main control board 110 inside the main board case 200 through these non-light-transmitting portions.
The code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, and the writing area 1570 as non-light-transmitting portions are provided at positions on the sealing member main body 1560A that do not overlap the main control portion 110m and the information display 113. FIG.

On the other hand, areas other than the entry area 1570, the code part 1572, the information display part 1573, and the character display accompanying these areas in the sealing member main body 1560A are translucent parts 1574 having high translucency in which the transparent material of the sealing member main body 1560A is exposed.
The translucent part 1574 is the above-described viewing part that allows the electronic component 595 on the main control board 110 in the main board case 200 to be seen and confirmed through the transparent material.

In the main board case 200 , the main control board 110 can be visually recognized through the seal member 1560 and the main board case 200 . Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control board 110 . Therefore, the inspector can check the main control board 110 through the seal member 1560 and easily determine whether or not there is fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Moreover, regardless of the presence or absence of the light-transmitting portion or the non-light-transmitting portion, the seal member 1560 is attached at a position where the seal member 1562 attached to the main control portion 110m on the main control board 110 can be viewed from all angles.
Regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent portion and the non-translucent portion, the sealing member 1560 including the entry area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573 is provided so that the entire sealing member 1560 does not overlap the main control portion 110m from any angle.
Therefore, when the main circuit board case 200 is viewed from the front, the main controller 110m can be visually recognized through the main circuit board case 200 without fail.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main controller 110m. Therefore, the inspector can check the main control unit 110m and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Sealing member 1560, including writing area 1570, code portion 1572, and information display portion 1573, is provided so that the entirety of sealing member 1560 does not overlap information display 113 from any angle, regardless of the presence or absence of a light-transmitting portion or a non-light-transmitting portion.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the information display 113 can be visually recognized through the main board case 200 .

In FIG. 8, it cannot be said that the sealing member 1560 and the information display device 113 are positioned close to each other. may be located near each other.

The contents displayed on the seal member 1560 will be described in detail below.
The entry area 1570 is an area for entering the person who opened the main circuit board case 200 and the opening date.
A writing area 1570 is a white background formed on a transparent material and on which writing can be performed with a pen or the like.
As an example, the entry areas 1570 are provided in three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction for a total of six entry areas 1570, in which three sets of "opener" and "date of opening" can be entered.
The entry area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) background.

Headings such as "opener" and "opening date" are printed in black above the entry area 1570, and circled numbers indicating the number of the entry area are printed on the left side of each entry area.
That is, above the entry area 1570 on the upper left, "opener" is printed in black. Above the entry area 1570 on the upper right, "date of opening" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed to the left of the upper left writing area 1570 . A circle 2 is printed to the left of the entry area 1570 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed to the left of the lower left writing area 1570 .

For example, when the inspector opens the main board case 200, the inspector writes the name of the inspector in the entry area 1570 on the left side, and the date of opening the main board case 200 in the entry area 1570 on the right side. It should be noted that the inspector may enter in the entry area 1570 the date and the like when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 110 was tampered with.

The code portion 1572 is provided on the upper left portion of the seal member 1560 . Code portion 1572 includes predetermined information. The code portion 1572 is a portion where information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), barcode, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. In this embodiment, as an example, the code section 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code portion 1572 is associated with, for example, information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as “other device”).
For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code portion 1572, is read by a camera provided in a mobile information terminal or the like. The information portable terminal uses the URL to access the other device via the network. Information displayed on the information portable terminal as a result of accessing the other device includes information such as the delivery destination of the main control board 110 (for example, the name of the store where the game machine 1 was delivered) and whether or not the game machine 1 has been discarded. This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 and information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. Therefore, the inspector can check the delivery destination information and easily determine whether or not there has been fraudulent installation of the main control board 110 of a different delivery destination. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

The information display portion 1573 contains various information. The information display portion 1573 may include information similar to the identification display 529, for example. In this embodiment, as an example, in the information display section 1573, a character string “EF001” is printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. The character string is, for example, the management number of main control board 110 . With this management number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from the information associated with the management number held by the manufacturer. Note that the character string of the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model number, and the like. Also, the rectangular region of the information display portion 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code portion 1572 are connected in the horizontal direction.

A translucent portion 1574 (peek portion) included in the seal member 1560 will be described.
Translucent portion 1574 is a region other than entry region 1570, code portion 1572, information display portion 1573, notation of “main board control number”, frame, opening person, date of opening, and circles 1 to 3 in seal member main body 1560A.
The translucent part 1574 is, for example, an area extending in the left-right direction that exists between the writing areas 1570 in three rows in the vertical direction.
The translucent portion 1574 is also an area extending in the left-right direction between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged side by side and the upper two entry areas 1570 .
The translucent part 1574 is also an area extending vertically between the writing areas 1570 in two rows in the horizontal direction.
The inspector can confirm the electronic component 595 (see FIG. 62(a)) through the translucent portion 1574 . Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 595 has been tampered with compared to the case where the translucent portion 1574 is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

The sealing member 1561 will be explained.
The seal member 1561 is attached at a position where the seal member 1561 attached to the main control section 110m on the main control board 110 can be visually recognized from all angles.
The seal member 1561 is provided so as not to overlap the main control section 110m from all angles.
Therefore, when the main circuit board case 200 is viewed from the front, the main controller 110m can be visually recognized through the main circuit board case 200 without fail.
The sealing member 1561 is provided so as not to overlap the information display 113 from all angles.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the information display 113 can be visually recognized through the main board case 200 .

Also, the seal member 1561 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information.
For example, as specific information, at least one of model name, manufacturer name, rated voltage and total capacity is printed. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed. In the present embodiment, the portion on which these pieces of information are printed is also called a printing portion 1563 . Specific information displayed on the seal member 1561 is called an identification display 1595 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" including the model, the manufacturer name "AA company", the rated voltage and the total capacity (AC24V±5%, 250VA).
In addition, in the part where the model name is displayed, a background is formed with a conspicuous color such as red or yellow against a transparent material, and the model name is displayed in white letters on the background.

A seal member 1562 is attached to the main control unit 110m.
The seal member 1562 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the seal member 1562 is printed with the model name “CR AIU GH101” and the manufacturer name “AA Company” as predetermined information. Specific information displayed on the seal member 1562 is called an identification display 1596 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".
A QR code (registered trademark) indicating information specified by the identification display 1596 may be displayed on the sealing member 1562 .
Moreover, the sealing member 1561 and the sealing member 1562 are displayed including at least the same identification marks 1595 and 1596 . In the present embodiment, the species name "CR AIU", the model "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA company" in the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are all the same, but it is sufficient that some of them are the same.
Although the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are attached to the main circuit board case 200 and the main controller 110m, they may be attached to other members. For example, the main control board 110 may include and display the same identification marks as the identification marks 1595 and 1596 .

As described above, in the present embodiment, the sealing members 1560 and 1561 are arranged across at least a portion of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 8). Therefore, for example, by checking the positional relationship between the sealing members 1560 and 1561 and the electronic components 595, the inspector can determine whether or not the main control board 110 has been tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

In addition, since the seal member 1560 is provided with an area 1575, the inspector can enter the name of the inspector and the date when the main board case 200 is opened in the area 1575 (more specifically, the entry area 1570). In addition, the inspector can enter in the area 1575 the date when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 110 was tampered with. Further, since the translucent portion 1574 (peeping portion) is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than the case where only the region 1575 is provided. Therefore, it becomes easier for the inspector to check the characters or the like written in the area 1575 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Further, since the sealing member 1560 is provided with the translucent portion 1574 (peeping portion), the inspector can check the electronic component 595 through the translucent portion 1574 (peeping portion). Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 595 has been tampered with, compared to the case where the translucent portion 1574 (peeping portion) is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.
Also, the code portion 1572 is provided at a position not overlapping the main control portion 110m. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main controller 110m. Therefore, the inspector can check the main control unit 110m and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the code portion 1572 is associated with information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 . This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 using the code portion 1572 . Therefore, the inspector can check the delivery destination information and easily determine whether or not there has been fraudulent installation of the main control board 110 of a different delivery destination. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.
A seal member 1562 is attached to the main control unit 110m, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal member 1562. FIG. Therefore, by checking the sealing member 1562, the inspector can easily check whether the main control unit 110m has been replaced illegally. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.
In addition, since at least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed on the seal member 1561, the inspector can easily grasp at least one of the model name and manufacturer name. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name, and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

The various information displayed on the seal members 1560 and 1561 may be displayed at an angle that allows the mounting location of the main control unit 110m to be visually recognized.
The main board case 200, especially the upper case piece 220, does not have a vent.
The main board case 200 has date marks formed on the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 .
The date mark is a mark for lot management added during manufacturing (molding) of the case, which is a plastic molded product.
As a feature of the present embodiment, a component having a height that makes the seal member 1562 invisible should not be provided in the vicinity of the main control unit 110m.

As described above, the main control board 110 is mounted with the main control section 110m for controlling the game, the information display 113 for displaying the performance of the game machine, and other electronic components 595 different from these. A transparent sealing member 1560 is attached to the main control board 110 . Accordingly, other electronic components 595 can be visually recognized through the transparent sealing member 1560 and the main board case 200 . Also, the main controller 110m and the information display 113 can be directly viewed through the main board case 200. FIG.

Duplication of the seal member 1560 can be prevented by watermarking the transparent portion of the seal member 1560 which has a transparent portion and a plurality of non-transparent portions and which needs to be attached to the main substrate case 200 . In addition, by attaching the seal member 1560 to a position that does not cover the main control unit 110m and the information display 113, it is possible to reliably ensure the visibility of the main control unit 110m, which is an important board component, and the information display 113 that must be read accurately, without being affected by watermarking or multiple non-transparent portions.

For the electronic component 595, which is less important than the main control unit 110m and the information display 113, the state can be confirmed through watermarking through gaps between the plurality of non-transparent portions and the surrounding transparent portion 1574 (peek portion). Even if there are a plurality of non-transparent portions, the visibility of the substrate component can be ensured by the transparent portions. Further, the non-transparent portion can display predetermined information, for example, necessary information such as identifying the main control unit 110m. Different information can be displayed or written in the plurality of non-transparent portions.

Note that the information display 113 may be arranged on the lower end side of the main control board 110 instead of the upper end side. In that case, the connectors 771 to 776 are desirably arranged on the upper end side opposite to the information display 113 (opposite).
The information display 113 may be arranged on the left end side or the right end side of the main control board 110 . In that case, the connectors 771 to 776 are desirably arranged at the opposite (opposite) ends to the information display 113 .
Also, as described above, the information display 113 may be arranged inside the main control board 110 instead of at the end. Even in that case, they must be arranged at positions that do not overlap cables, harnesses, sealing members 1560, etc. extending from the connectors 771-776.

In the present embodiment, the RWM clear switch 111a is described as being arranged on the main control board 110, but it is not limited thereto and may be provided on the payout control board 120. Also, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 112a is described as being arranged on the main control board 110, but it is not limited to this. If the setting key switch 112a is electrically connected to the main control board 110, the setting key switch 112a can be arranged at another position separated from the main control board 110. FIG.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress of the game (basic actions). The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores a game control program and the like, and a main control unit 110m as a one-chip microcomputer having a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input port for main control, an output port, and the like. The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads a program stored in the main ROM 110b, and uses the main RAM 110c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to games, thereby controlling controlled devices (various solenoids and various displays) and transmitting predetermined commands based on the results of arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the performance control board 130, and the like.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to allow command (data) to be communicated bidirectionally, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is configured to allow the command (data) to be communicated only in one direction from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130.

The input port of the main control board 110 is connected to the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the gate detection switch 44a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the out ball detection switch 52a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, the information display 113, and the payout control board 120. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing corresponding to the detection signals is performed.

The output port of the main control board 110 is connected to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the main information display device 59, the game information output terminal board 90, the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various displays, and game information to be notified from the game information output terminal board to the outside of the game machine (hall computer, etc.) are output via the output port.

The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on the reception of payout commands from the main control board 110 and controls the shooting of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launcher 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs and the like, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, and the like. The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of game balls while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area, controls the payout device 100, or transmits a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the performance control board 130, or the like.

An input port of the payout control unit 121 is connected with an open detection switch 31a, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the payout device 100, a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit, and the like, and an output port of the payout control unit 121 is connected with a payout motor 100b provided in the payout device 100.

When a payout command is received from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 drives a payout motor 100b provided in the payout device 100 to perform control to put out a predetermined number of game balls.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, and the like, which are not shown. The input port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b, and the output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the ball feed solenoid 11b, the firing solenoid 28b, and the like.

When the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the shooting control unit 122 allows the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b to be energized. When the detection signal from the firing volume 15b detects that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed, the firing control unit 122 drives the ball feeding solenoid 11b and also drives the firing solenoid 28b so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. It is designed to shoot balls.

The shooting solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and a hitting member 28 is directly connected to a rotating shaft. Since the operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, the number of game balls shot per minute is about 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, game balls are shot approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The effect control board 130 is a subordinate control board (subordinate control means) that controls the effect (performed in the gaming machine 1) related to the game based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110 . The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores a performance control program, and a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing. It has a lamp control unit 150 that controls the lighting device 76 and the like, and an input port and an output port for effect control.

The sub CPU 130a reads the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b in response to the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, and performs arithmetic processing related to effects while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area. In response to commands received from the main control board 110 and input signals from the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, the sub CPU 130a controls various control units (display control unit 140, lamp control unit 150) to execute various effects (outputs data and commands). do).

The input port of the effect control board 130 is connected with the effect button detection switch 17a, the cross key detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), and the like. When a performance button detection signal indicating that the performance button 17 is operated is input from the performance button detection switch 17a or a cross key detection signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) indicating that the cross key 19 is operated is input from the cross key detection switch 19a, the performance control board 130 performs processing for executing performance according to the detection signal.

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m, and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image, or controls the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined sound.

The display control unit 140 includes an overall control unit 141 that comprehensively controls image display and audio output based on the reception of an effect control command from the effect control unit 130m; An audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) for controlling the audio output device 9 and an audio ROM 149 storing audio data and the like are provided.

The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 141b that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port to which an image control unit 145 (VDP) and an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) are connected.

The supervising CPU 141a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the supervising control program stored in the supervising ROM 141b, and uses the supervising RAM 141c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the effects. As a result, control processing for generating a display control command (display list) instructing the effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting it to the display control unit 140, control processing for generating an audio control command for instructing the effect sound to be output from the audio output device 9 and transmitting it to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI), and the like are performed.

The VRAM 143 provided in the image control unit 145 (VDP) has a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142a), a frame buffer area corresponding to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time drawing is started.

Therefore, based on an instruction (display list) from the overall control unit 141, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 in the “drawing frame buffer” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147, reads out the drawing data from the “display frame buffer” in the frame buffer area, generates video signals (such as RGB signals) based on the read drawing data, and generates the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71. (sub-liquid crystal) to display various images.

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is supplied with an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, and by dividing this operating clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) generate synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal and vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and output them to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). In the present embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second, but it may be 60 fps (1/60 second = about 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and controls the output of audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130m.

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and uses the lamp RAM 150c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to effects, thereby controlling controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform predetermined effects (outputs data and commands) according to the effect instruction commands received from the effect control unit 130m.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit are connected to the frame lighting device 10, the button driving device 17b, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80. Based on various performance data (including commands) sent from the performance control unit 130m (sub CPU 130a), lighting control of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80 is performed, and the button driving device 17b and the board driving device 75 are controlled. drive control of drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

The power board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the game machine 1 from the power supplied from the outside of the game machine 1, and supplies it to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power failure detection circuit 162 that detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the power failure (power failure), and a backup power supply circuit 163 that supplies backup power to the main control board 110 when power failure (power failure) occurs.

The power supply board 160 is provided with a power switch for switching between an ON state for supplying main power to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state for stopping the supply of main power to the gaming machine 1 so that it can be operated by a store clerk. The supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal goes high, the main CPU 110a becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal goes low, the main CPU 110a stops operating.

The backup power supply circuit 163 has a capacitor that stores electricity when the game machine is energized, and supplies the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110 when a power failure (power failure) occurs. As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is cut off (power outage), and the control state of the game can be restored to the state before the power cut off (blackout) after recovery from the power cutoff (blackout). A backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 .

(Description of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, it has a "low probability state" and a "high probability state" as the state related to the jackpot determination of the special symbol, and a "non-time-saving state" and a "time-saving state" as the state related to the movable member 48 of the second start port 47.

In this embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) Normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state) that is “low-probability state” and “non-time-saving state”
(2) Time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state) that is “low probability state” and “time-saving state”
(3) Probability variable gaming state (high probability time-saving gaming state) that is “high probability state” and “time-saving state”

In addition, the game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "low-probability short-time game state". In addition, in the present embodiment, the "low-probability short-time gaming state" and "high-probability short-time gaming state" may be referred to as "specific game state" because they are game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

In the present embodiment, the "low probability state" is, for example, a game state in which the winning probability of the jackpot is set as low as about 1/300 in the special symbol jackpot determination performed on the condition that the game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 when the set value (the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, is "1". On the other hand, the ``high-probability state'' refers to a game state in which the winning probability of the big win is improved compared to the low-probability state, and the winning probability of the big win is set as high as about 1/60 when the set value is ``1''.

Specifically, there are four types of setting values, 1 to 4. When the setting value is 1, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is about 1/300, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is about 1/60. The probability of winning the jackpot is about 1/290, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is about 1/58, and when the set value is ``4'', the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is about 1/285, and the winning probability of the jackpot in the high probability state is about 1/57.

Therefore, in the "high-probability state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability state". Also, the change from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is after the jackpot game, which will be described later, is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state is referred to as "variable probability jackpot". Also, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability state is called a "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, the ``non-time-saving state'' refers to a game state in which the average variation time of normal patterns corresponding to the lottery result is set longer than the ``time-saving state'' in the normal pattern win lottery performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, and the opening time of the second start port 47 when winning is likely to be set short. For example, when a game ball passes through a normal pattern gate 44, a winning lottery for normal patterns is performed, and the normal patterns are variably displayed on a normal pattern display device 62, but the normal patterns are stopped and displayed, for example, 30 seconds after the start of the variable display. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be open for 0.2 seconds, for example, after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the ``time-saving state'' means a game state in which the average fluctuation time of the ordinary patterns corresponding to the lottery result is set to 0.5 seconds shorter than the ``non-time-saving state'' in the winning lottery of the normal patterns performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44, and the opening time of the second start port 47 is set longer than the ``non-time-saving state'', for example, 2.5 seconds when the winning is won. Further, in the ``non-time-saving state'', the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery is set as low as 1/128, and in the ``time-saving state'', the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery is set as high as 127/128. Therefore, in the "time saving state", when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44 than in the "non-time saving state", the second starting port 47 is more likely to be controlled in the open mode. As a result, in the "time-saving state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game in a state where it is difficult to consume game balls.

Then, in the "time saving game state", a normal time saving game state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game described later (via the jackpot game), and a special time saving game state that is controlled (without going through the jackpot game) when the number of times of losing fluctuation display of the special symbol executed from the establishment of the predetermined condition (executing RWM clear, 0 clearing the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game) reaches a specified number (900 times in this embodiment) is set. are

In the embodiment, the "time saving state" is set so that the normal pattern fluctuation time, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the winning probability of the normal pattern lottery are advantageous compared to the "non-time saving state". In addition, in the non-time saving state, the probability of winning the winning lottery of the normal symbols may be set to 0/128, for example.

Further, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is five times the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state (common regardless of the set value).

Further, in the present embodiment, in judging a big win, a small win having a lower degree of advantage to the advantageous player than the big win is not won, but the small win may be won with a probability of about 1/100, for example. In this case, it is preferable to set the small winning probability to be the same regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "4".

Also, the larger the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the higher the probability of big win), but conversely, the smaller the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the higher the probability of big win).

In addition, the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the low probability state and / or the high probability state may be the same for all the setting values (1 to 4), for example, two or three setting values (1 and 2, 1 to 3, etc.) The probability of being determined to be a big hit in the low probability state and / or the high probability state may be the same. In addition, the set values in the present embodiment are in four stages from 1 to 4, but are not limited to four stages, and may be more or less than four stages (for example, one stage may be used).

In addition, a normal time-saving game state and a special time-saving game state are provided as the time-saving game state, but as a result of the jackpot determination processing, a special loss different from a normal loss is won, and as a result of the variable display of the special pattern, a special time-saving game state may be generated for a predetermined period (for example, until the variable display of the special pattern is executed 100 times) in response to the stop display of the special losing special pattern. For various controls in the specific time-saving gaming state, it is preferable to conform to the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15. FIG.

(jackpot determination table)
FIG. 10(a) is a first special symbol jackpot determination table for determining (big hit determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning (entrance) of the game ball to the first starting port 45, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 10(a) and 10(b), in the jackpot determination table, the current set value, the current probability state, the random number for jackpot determination, and the jackpot determination result (jackpot, lose) are associated with each other, and the approximate winning probability in the case of "jackpot" is described in the rightmost column for reference.

The main CPU 110a refers to the first special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 10A or the second special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG.

For example, according to the first special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 10(a), when the set value is "1" and the game is in the normal game state, 200 jackpot determination random numbers of "100" to "299" are determined to be "jackpot". Then, a random value for judging a big win other than that judged to be a big win is judged to be "losing".

The special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is stored in the first special figure determination information holding storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 is stored in the second special figure determination information holding storage area of the main RAM 110c. Then, when performing the jackpot determination, the special figure determination information stored in the first special figure determination information reservation storage area or the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the special figure determination information storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the jackpot determination is performed using the shifted special figure determination information.

In addition, the first special figure determination information holding storage area is divided into the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively, and the reserved icon corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in these first to fourth storage units is displayed in the first display unit 70B1 to the fourth display unit 70B4 of the first reserved icon display area 70B. The second special figure determination information holding storage area is divided into the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively, and the pending icon corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is displayed in the first display unit 70D1 to the fourth display unit 70D4 of the second storage icon display area 70D.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 11(a) is a big hit special pattern determination table for determining the type of special pattern when it is determined as a big win, and FIG. 11(b) is a special pattern determination table for loss for determining the type of special pattern when it is determined as a loss.

As shown in FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b), the special symbol determination table is associated with the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the random number for special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol, the stop special symbol data corresponding to the determination result, and the special symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are loss special symbols in which the jackpot game is not executed. The special patterns '01' and '04' are the big winning special patterns for executing the first big winning game, the special patterns '02' and '05' are the big winning patterns for executing the second big winning game, and the special patterns '03' are the big winning patterns for executing the third big winning game.

In the "first jackpot game", a round game is executed up to 6 times in which the big winning hole 50 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds. In addition, in the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time elapses. Further, after the end of the first jackpot game, the normal time-saving game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) is set until the variable display of the second special symbol is performed 50 times or 100 times.

In the "second jackpot game", a round game is executed up to 10 times, in which the big winning hole 50 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds. In addition, after the second jackpot game is finished, the probability variable game state (high probability short-time game state) is set until the variable display of the second special symbol is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost decided.

In the "third jackpot game", a round game is executed up to four times, in which the second big prize opening 56 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then the big prize opening is closed for 2 seconds. Further, after the third jackpot game is finished, the variable probability game state (high probability short-time game state) is set until the variable display of the second special symbol is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost decided.

Although each of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is associated with one unsuccessful special pattern, at least one of the first special design and the second special design may be associated with a plurality of unsuccessful special designs.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any one of FIGS. 11(a) to 11(b), determines the type of special symbol, the stop special symbol data and the special symbol designation command based on the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed and the random number for special symbol determination, and transmits the special symbol designation command to the effect control board 130.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the types of special symbols for big hits and the types of special symbols for loss are the same without changing depending on the setting values. By doing so, it is possible for the player to play the game with peace of mind without making the game complicated.

A second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the selection ratio of various jackpot special symbols and the selection ratio of various losing symbols are constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Normal special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a normal special figure variation pattern determination table referred to when determining a special symbol variation pattern in the normal game state.

Specifically, FIG. 12 (a) is a normal special figure variation pattern determination table 1 that is referred to when performing the basic special symbol variation display in the normal game state, and FIG.

(Special figure variation pattern judgment table for probability variation / normal time reduction)
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table for probability variation/usual time reduction referred to when determining the variation pattern of special symbols in the probability variation gaming state or normal time reduction gaming state.

Specifically, FIG. 13 (a) is a special figure variation pattern determination table 1 for probability variation/normal time reduction that is referred to when performing variation display of basic special symbols in the variable probability gaming state or normal time reduction gaming state, and FIG.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table for special time saving)
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table for special time saving which is referred to when determining a special symbol variation pattern in a special time saving gaming state.

Specifically, FIG. 14(a) is a special figure variation pattern determination table 1 for special time reduction that is referred to when performing variation display of special symbols when there is no jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c, FIG. A special figure variation pattern determination table 3 for special time reduction that is referred to when there is jackpot history information in 10c and executes variation display of special symbols before the end of the special time reduction game state, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the special figure variation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting port) that performs variation display, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), the reach determination random value, the first special figure reservation number (U1) or the second special figure reservation number (U2), the special figure variation pattern determination random value, the special figure variation pattern as the determination result, the special symbol variation time, and the special figure showing the special figure variation pattern. It is associated with a variation pattern specification command.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol variation pattern" can specify the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, and determines the special figure variation pattern based on the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stopped special figure data), the reach determination random number, the first special figure reservation number (U1) or the second special figure reservation number (U2), and the special figure variation pattern determination random number, and transmits a special figure variation pattern designation command according to the special figure variation pattern to the production control board 130.

Further, in the effect control board 130, as will be described later, according to the variation pattern designation command (big hit determination result, special symbol determination result, etc.), the content of the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a (effect mode) is determined. Therefore, the effect content that can be executed in the variable effect is described in the rightmost column of the special pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 as a reference.

``Normal variation'', ``shortened variation'', and ``ultra-shortened variation'', which are shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS.

Further, ``ready-to-win'' means a variation mode in which a part of the combination of the performance patterns 70a reporting the big win is temporarily stopped and the other performance patterns 70a fluctuate, making the player expect the execution of the big win game. For example, when a combination of three performance patterns 70a of ``777'' is set as a combination of performance patterns 70a for notifying a big win, the same performance patterns 70a are temporarily stopped at ``7'' in the left and right regions, and the remaining performance patterns 70a fluctuate in the central region.

The ``temporary stop'' means a mode in which the performance pattern 70a shakes slightly or is slightly deformed to make the player feel as if the performance pattern 70a is stopped (not completely stopped).

"Normal ready-to-win" means a ready-to-win performance in which the same performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left and right regions and the remaining one performance pattern 70a fluctuates in the central region, and is a ready-to-win performance with the lowest degree of expectation for a big win.

"SP ready-to-win" and "special SP ready-to-win" are super ready-to-win effects with a higher expectation for a big hit than normal ready-to-win, and the development effects are executed from the normal ready-to-win effects, and then executed. For example, the two production patterns 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the first image display device 70, and almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70 is used to perform a special ready-to-win production. In addition, in the "special SP reach", a more special effect than in the "SP reach" is executed.

"SPSP ready-to-win" and "SPSP '7' ready-to-win" are special ready-to-win productions with a higher expectation of a big win than super ready-to-win, and are executed after normal ready-to-win production or super ready-to-win production. For example, the development performance is executed from the normal ready-to-win performance, after which the three performance patterns 70a are reduced and moved to the corner of the first image display device 70, and almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70 is used to perform a special ready-to-win performance rather than "SP ready-to-win". In addition, in "SPSP ready-to-win", the ready-to-win effect is executed by the effect pattern 70a other than "7", and in "SPSP "7" ready-to-win", the ready-to-win effect is executed by the pattern of "7".

In addition, the "full rotation reach" is a reach at which the jackpot is determined, and is executed after the normal reach effect. For example, a development performance is executed from a normal ready-to-win performance, after which the three performance patterns 70a are changed at a low speed in a state where they are all the same, and a special ready-to-win performance (a ready-to-win performance for big win determination) is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70, rather than "SPSP ready-to-win" or "SPSP '7' ready-to-win".

In addition, the ``resurrection variation (hit)'' is a performance in which a resurrection performance is performed to suggest that the player will be restored to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player as a big hit, and is executed without going through reach after the completion notification performance that suggests the end of the specific game state that is advantageous to the player after shifting from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state.

"Chance effect variation (hit)" is a variable effect in which a chance effect is executed to suggest that there is a chance to execute a jackpot game, and is executed without going through reach. For example, after the character image of "chance is approaching" is displayed on the first image display device 70, an effect is performed in which the three effect symbols 70a are displayed together.

``Result variation'' is an effect in which, in the final variable display of the normal time-saving game state, a result display is performed to display the result of the game in a series of advantageous periods in which the time-saving game state continues, triggered by a big win game from the normal game state called so-called first hit. It should be noted that the results may be displayed during a series of advantageous periods during which the player continues to be in an advantageous state, rather than from the first win.

The ``result revival variation (hit)'' is a performance in which a revival performance is performed to suggest that the game will be revived to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player as a big hit, and is executed without going through the ready-to-win after the result display is performed in the final variation display of the normal time-saving game state.

``(Crash) ~ Fluctuation'' indicates that, in the case of the first variation of the special time-saving game state, a short rush performance suggesting entry into the special time-saving game state is performed in a relatively short time (for example, 2 seconds), and that the short rush performance is not performed when it is not the first time variation of the special time-saving game state.

The ``long entry performance variation'' is such that a long entry performance suggesting entry into the special time-saving game state is performed in a relatively long time (for example, 6 seconds) in the initial variation of the special time-saving game state, and the variation pattern is dedicated to the initial variation of the special time-saving game state in a state with a jackpot history.

``Immediate win variation (hit)'' is a performance in which a result (big hit) advantageous to the player is notified without going through the ready-to-win, and the performance is finally performed in which the three performance patterns 70a are aligned.

The ``finish suggesting variation'' is a presentation in which an end notification presentation suggesting the end of the special time-saving game state is performed, and is executed in the final variation display of the special time-saving game state with a big win history.

'End suggestive resurrection variation (hit)' is a performance in which a resurrection performance is performed to suggest that a player will be restored to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player as a big hit, and is executed without going through the ready-to-win after the end notification performance is started in the final variable display of the special time-saving game state.

Although the ``instant winning variation'' is not executed when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the normal game state, the ``immediate winning variation'' may be performed even when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

The first feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that during the fluctuation display that is the final round of the normal time-saving game state (series of advantageous periods), the fluctuation performance in which the result display is performed is performed. By doing so, the player can confirm the result of the game during the series of advantageous periods, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that the end notification effect is performed without performing the result display during the variation display that is the final round of the special time saving game state. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the dissatisfaction of the player from increasing due to the display of the game results in a series of advantageous periods even though the big win game is not executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that different special figure variation pattern determination tables are used in the normal time saving game state and the special time saving game state. By doing so, even in the same time-saving game state, the performance contents of the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state can be made different, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The fourth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that in the variation display during the special time-saving gaming state, different special figure variation pattern determination tables are used depending on the presence or absence of a big hit history (RWM clear). By doing so, it is possible to vary the content of the effect during the variable display in the special time-saving game state depending on whether or not there is a history of big wins, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The fifth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that in the initial variation during the special time-saving gaming state, different special figure variation pattern determination tables are used depending on the presence or absence of a big hit history (RWM clear). By doing so, it is possible to change the content of the effect during the first variable display in the special time-saving game state depending on whether or not there is a history of big wins, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that, in the first fluctuation during the special time-saving gaming state, the number of special figure fluctuation patterns is greater than the number of special figure fluctuation patterns when there is a jackpot history (RWM clear). By doing so, it is possible to change the content of the effect during the first variable display in the special time-saving game state depending on whether or not there is a history of big wins, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that when the first variation in the special time-saving gaming state with a jackpot history (RWM clear) is lost, the special figure variation pattern dedicated to the first time is determined. By doing so, it is possible to perform a dedicated effect (long rush effect) in the first time variation in the special time-saving game state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that in the final variation during the special time-saving gaming state, different special figure variation pattern determination tables are used depending on the presence or absence of a big hit history (RWM clear). By doing so, it is possible to vary the effect contents during the last variable display in the special time-saving game state depending on whether or not there is a big hit history, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that in the final variation during the special time-saving gaming state, the number of special figure variation patterns determined when there is no jackpot history is greater than the number of special figure variation patterns when there is a jackpot history (RWM clear). By doing so, it is possible to vary the effect contents during the last variable display in the special time-saving game state depending on whether or not there is a big hit history, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that when the final variation in the special time-saving gaming state with a jackpot history (RWM clear) is lost, the special figure variation pattern dedicated to the final round is determined. By doing so, it is possible to perform a dedicated production (end suggestion production) in the final variation during the special time-saving game state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that the number of types of special figure variation patterns (variation performance patterns) to be determined (executed) increases when the second special symbol loss variation display (second variation performance) is executed than when the first special symbol loss variation display (first variation performance) is performed during the special time-saving gaming state. By doing so, the player can be induced to perform the variable display of the second special symbol which is advantageous to the player in the special time-saving game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As a twelfth feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the average variation time of the special symbols (mainly the second special symbol) during the time reduction game state is longer than the average variation time of the normal symbols during the time reduction game state. In this way, even in a time-saving game state in which the average variation time of special symbols is shorter than in the normal game state, the second reserved memory is easily accumulated, and by speedily executing the variable display of the special symbols, the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Advance judgment table)
Figure 15 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a pre-determination table for the non-time-saving state for pre-determining (prefetching) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 during the non-time-saving state, and FIG. There is.

As shown in FIG. 15, the advance determination table is associated with the type of special symbol (starting port), the result of jackpot determination, the result of special symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, the random number for determination of the special figure variation pattern, the special figure scheduled variation pattern as the determination result, and the look-ahead designation command indicating the scheduled special figure variation pattern.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special figure variation pattern" can specify the special symbol type, the judgment result of the jackpot determination, the special symbol type, and the special figure variation pattern to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 15, determines a special figure scheduled variation pattern based on the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the ready-to-win determination random number, and the special figure variation pattern determination random number, and transmits a prefetch designation command corresponding to the special figure scheduled variation pattern to the effect control board 130.

(Game state setting table)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 16, the game state setting table includes stop special symbol data of the jackpot special symbol, game state information at the time of winning the jackpot, game state flags to be set (a time saving flag indicating a time saving state and a high probability flag indicating a high probability state), a first time saving number (J1) that is the number of times of fluctuation display of the first special pattern that ends the time saving game state, and a second time that is the number of times of fluctuation display of the second special pattern that ends the time saving game state. The short number of times (J2) is associated with the third time-saving number of times (J3), which is the number of fluctuation display of the sum of the first special symbol and the second special symbol for ending the time-saving gaming state.

The first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16 is that there is a jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the second number of times of time saving (J2) set when executed in the time saving state is greater than the second number of times of time saving (J2) set when executed in the normal game state. By doing so, it is possible to vary the second time reduction frequency (J2) set according to the type of the jackpot game, thereby improving the game performance and enhancing the interest of the game.

As a second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16, three types of times of shortening of time are set, so that the time saving state ends at an appropriate number of times regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed during the time shortening state, so that the fair time saving state can be provided among the players, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(main processing of the main control board)
Main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing main processing of the main control board 110 . This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of power supply voltage from the power supply substrate 160 is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S1, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S2, and waits for activation of other boards in step S3. Specifically, the activation of the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is waited for one second so that no command is missed from the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S4, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S5. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 26 .

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. When the backup flag is saved, the process is shifted to step S7 assuming that the power is restored, and when the backup flag is not saved, the process is shifted to step S8 assuming that the power is turned on for the first time.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S9 assuming that the setting change mode is entered, and if there is no setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S10.

The main CPU 110a performs setting change processing in step S9. Specifically, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or set is being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and the current set value saved in the set value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113, and a setting change designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130.

Further, each time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the setting value is changed (updated) within the range of "1" to "4", and the updated setting value is displayed on the 7-segment LED. When the setting key switch 112a is set to OFF from the ON state, the changed (updated) setting value is saved in the setting value area as confirmation of the setting value. and perform processing for terminating the setting change mode.

In addition, in the effect control board 130 that has received the setting change designation command, processing for executing setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed is performed. Specifically, a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 76 for the board are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) during the setting change. Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound ("setting is being changed") indicating that the setting is being changed.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S7. When the checksum is normal (no abnormality in the data in the RWM area for game), the process is moved to step S11, and when the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area for game is abnormal), the process is moved to step S12 assuming that the control state before power interruption cannot be normally restored.

If the backup flag is not saved, that is, if the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within the proper range (here, 1 to 4). When the set value in the set value area is determined to be within the proper range, the process is shifted to step S13, and when the set value in the set value area is determined to be out of the proper range, the process is shifted to step S12.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S12. Specifically, error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error is displayed on the information display device 113, and after transmitting an unrecoverable error specifying command indicating the occurrence of the unrecoverable error to the performance control board 130, interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt is set, an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of the unrecoverable error is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 after clearing the output port, and processing is performed to wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing non-restorable error notification is performed.

"Unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (game control is not performed), and is not canceled unless setting change processing is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply substrate 160 is turned off and then turned on without changing the setting, the power switch is not canceled, and the power switch must be turned on with the setting changing operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

Although the "unrecoverable error" is not canceled unless the setting change process is executed, it may also be canceled when the RWM clear without the setting change process is executed.

The "unrecoverable error notification" is a notification for recognizing that an unrecoverable error has occurred. An unrecoverable error screen ("Unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (e.g., red) until the power is turned off, and an unrecoverable error sound ("recoverable error" + buzzer sound) is emitted from the audio output device 9 to indicate that an unrecoverable error has occurred. It is to output until the power is turned off.
Note that the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the board lighting device 76 may be collectively referred to as a "drawing device."

In step S13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process proceeds to step S14 assuming that the RWM clear is to be executed, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process proceeds to step S16.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing in step S14. Specifically, a process for initializing the game control state (initializing areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area) is performed.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a low-probability short-time game state as a normal game state) to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130, and shifts the processing to step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing the power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized. The initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135") at the time of power-on is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 76 for the board are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), and a power-on notification sound from the voice output device 9 indicating that the RWM area has been initialized. ("RWM cleared" + buzzer sound) is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the RWM has been cleared.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. When there is a setting confirmation operation, the processing is shifted to step S17 assuming that the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and when there is no setting confirmation operation, the processing is shifted to step S18 to restore the control state of the game to the state before power-off.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S17. Specifically, the status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, the current setting value saved in the setting value area of the RWM area for game is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113, and a setting confirmation designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130.

Further, when the setting key switch 112a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state by a confirmation end operation, the display of the set value on the information display 113 is ended, the state confirmation display on the state confirmation display 68 is ended, and processing for ending the setting confirmation mode is performed.

In addition, in the effect control board 130 that has received the setting confirmation designation command, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation is being performed is performed. Specifically, a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, or the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) during the setting confirmation. Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“Confirming the setting value”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area, and sets the game RWM area when power is restored. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, in the effect control board 130, the processing for ending the setting confirmation notification and the like, which will be described later, and executing the power restoration notification is performed.

"Power restoration notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power interruption, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135") at the time of power restoration is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 76 for the board are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, blue) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds). It is to output a power restoration notification sound (“Power has been restored” + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the notification of power recovery, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the power has been restored.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a transmits other commands (first special figure reservation number (U1) and second special figure reservation number designation command indicating the second special figure reservation number (U2), normal figure reservation number designation command indicating the normal figure reservation number (G), etc.) to the effect control board 130. As a result, the performance control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols and the number of reserved normal symbols, and the processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the first image display device 70 is performed.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. In addition, this set value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted. Also, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time the variable display of the special symbol is started, or may be transmitted each time the big winning game is started.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S22, and permits all interrupts in step S23.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value and the special symbol determination random number value for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol, and in step S25 performs an initial value random value update process of updating the initial value random number value for jackpot determination, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred in step S26. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply substrate 160. If the power failure detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S24, and if the power failure detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S27.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, performs processing to clear the output port in step S28, performs processing to calculate the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c and saves it in the game RWM area in step S29, and saves the backup flag in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S30. Then, in step S31, processing for prohibiting RAM access is performed, and the system waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off.

In this way, since a plurality of conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, it is not possible to easily change the setting, so that cheating can be suppressed and the security of the game machine can be improved.

Further, since the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the number of conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and the setting confirmation operation, it is possible to increase the security of the setting change, which is the most likely to be fraudulent, and effectively prevent the fraud.

In addition, when the checksum is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, so that the game machine does not cause trouble to the game parlor and the players due to the unexpected operation of the game machine, and the reliability of the game machine can be improved.

In addition, when the value in the set value area is out of the proper range, that is, when there is a possibility that the previous power interruption occurred during the setting change, even if the checksum is normal, unrecoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, thereby preventing the progress of the game with a set value unintended by the game parlor side and improving the reliability of the game machine.

During setting change (in setting change mode) or setting confirmation (in setting confirmation mode), it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the state confirmation display 68, the image display devices 70 and 71, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1, and to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back (back). That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the gaming machine 1 .

Note that the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state as a condition. By doing so, since the number of conditions increases, cheating can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

In addition, when it is determined that there is no backup flag (this is the first time the power is turned on) and it is determined that there is no setting change operation, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing is executed. However, when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the game RWM area may be initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program, the initial value "1" may be saved in the set value area, and the process may be moved to step S13.

In addition, when it is determined that there is a backup flag (recovery of the power supply) and it is determined that no setting change operation has been performed, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game RWM area may be initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program, the initial value "1" may be saved in the set value area, and the process may be moved to step S13.

The power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted including the information indicating the current game state, but after transmitting the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command, the game state designation command indicating the current game state may be transmitted.

Also, when the power is turned off or turned on, the game program calculates the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c, but the checksum may be calculated by the information program. In this case, the calculated checksum should be saved in the information RWM area.

In addition, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but the checksum of all the RWM areas may be calculated, or the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if either one of the checksums is abnormal, the process may be shifted to unrecoverable error processing.

Also, the setting change designation command is transmitted at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on designation command is transmitted after the setting change processing is completed, but the setting change start designation command may be transmitted instead of the setting change designation command, and the setting change end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. In this case, the setting change end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting change process, or may be transmitted after the setting change process ends.

Further, when the setting is changed, the RWM clearing process is performed after the setting is changed, but the RWM clearing process may be performed before the setting is changed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control board)
Timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, performs time control processing for updating various timer counters, such as processing for updating the special symbol time counter, processing for updating the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric accessory, processing for updating the normal symbol time counter, processing for updating the opening/closing time of the movable member 48, and the like. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from a counter such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a starting opening timer counter, a starting opening closing timer counter, or the like is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a performs a specific random number update process for updating the random number value for judging a big hit, the random number value for judging a special symbol, the random number value for judging a special pattern variation pattern, the random number value for judging a hit condition, the random number value for determining a normal symbol pattern, and the random number value for determining a normal pattern variation pattern. Specifically, each random number value and the random number counter are updated by adding +1. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the corresponding initial value random value is set as a new cycle initial value to newly update the random value.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a performs initial value random value update processing for updating the initial value random value for big hit determination, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination in step S130.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, the out ball detection switch 52a, etc., and performs an input control process of setting predetermined data when there is an input. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure special electric control process for performing special figure pending number determination (jackpot determination, etc.), special symbol display control, opening/closing control of the big winning opening 50 (opening/closing member 51), game state control, and the like. In addition, the detail of special figure special electric control processing is mentioned later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a general pattern general electrical control process for performing general pattern storage number determination (hit determination, etc.), normal symbol display control, opening/closing control of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), and the like.

It should be noted that the type of normal pattern per determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electrical control process, the type of loss normal pattern is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various normal patterns determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, and the selection ratio of various losing normal patterns are constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a performs payout control processing for transmitting to the payout control board 120 a payout state confirmation designation command for checking the payout state of the payout control board 120, referring to later-described prize ball counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) and transmitting to the payout control board 120 a payout number designation command corresponding to each winning opening. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the payout device 100 .

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of magnetic anomaly or radio wave anomaly based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and performs magnetic/radio wave anomaly determination processing for transmitting a magnetic anomaly error designation command or radio wave anomaly error designation command to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 receives a magnetic anomaly error designation command or an electric wave anomaly error designation command, it performs control for performing magnetic anomaly error notification or electric wave anomaly error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (game information) from the game information output terminal plate 90, starting opening opening/closing data to be output to the second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, large winning opening opening/closing data to be output to the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, special symbol display data to be output to the first special symbol display device 60 and second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 62, and first special symbol. A data creation process for creating data such as special symbol reservation display data to be output to the reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 and normal symbol reservation display data to be output to the normal symbol reservation display 65 is performed.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing for outputting signals such as the external information data created in step S700, start opening/closing data, and big winning opening opening/closing data, display output processing for outputting signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol reserved display data, and normal symbol reserved display data, and payout command transmission for sending the command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120. Processing and an output control process for executing an effect command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 130 are performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs an information program calling process. Specifically, after the interrupt is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and the processing for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S810. Specifically, processing for counting the number of normal payouts, which is the number of payouts of prize balls based on the winning of game balls into various winning holes (general winning hole, big winning hole, starting hole) during the normal game state, the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a during the normal game state, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a regardless of the game state.

Note that the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are game information that is not affected by changes in the set values (irrelevant to the set values).

The main CPU 110a performs performance information calculation processing (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((normal medium payout number/normal medium out number)×100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place is saved in the first area of the base storage area set in the RWM area for information.

The game interval is updated each time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. The base storage area includes a first area for storing the normal base value for the current game interval, a second area for storing the normal base value for the previous game interval, a third area for storing the normal base value for the previous game interval, and a fourth area for storing the normal base value for the three previous game intervals. A base value will be saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S850. Specifically, a process of setting performance display data to be displayed on the information display device 113 while switching the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area every five seconds is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S870. Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to a test facility used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing for outputting signals such as the performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various displays and processing for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed.

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return processing. Specifically, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area, the interrupt is permitted, and the process for returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, no timer interrupt is executed in the setting change process, the RWM clear process, and the setting confirmation process, so that the number of payouts and the number of outs are not counted, the performance information of the game machine is not calculated, and the performance information of the game machine is not displayed.

Although the performance information calculation process is performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. FIG. Also, the game ball counting process may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110 . Specifically, it may be performed between step S25 and step S26.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
Input control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing input control processing in the main control board 110 .

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. In this general winning hole detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43 or not. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step S220.

When the detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the winning ball counter (5 winning ball counter) used for the winning balls is updated by adding the data indicating the 5 winning balls, and the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls entering the winning hole is updated by adding "1" (D←D+1), and then the general winning hole detection switch input processing is terminated.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process. In this big winning hole detecting switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the big winning hole detecting switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the big winning hole 50. If there is no detection signal input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step S230.

When a detection signal from a big winning hole detecting switch 50a is input, data indicating 15 winning balls is added to a winning ball counter (15 winning ball counter) for a big winning hole used for winning balls to update it, '1' is added to a winning ball counter (D) showing the number of game balls entering the winning hole and updated (D←D+1), and it is determined whether or not a big winning game (special game) is currently being performed. When a jackpot game is currently being played, ``1'' is added to a round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls winning the jackpot 50 to update (C←C+1), and the jackpot detection switch input processing is terminated.

When the current game state is not the special game state, the fraudulent prize winning ball counter (E) indicating the number of game balls that have won (entered) a specific prize winning port (second starting port 47, big winning port 50) outside the winning period is updated by adding "1" (E←E+1), and it is determined whether or not the value of the fraudulent winning ball counter (E) is larger than a specified number (e.g. 10), and the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is determined to be the specified number. In the following cases, the big winning hole detection switch input process is terminated.

When the value of the fraudulent winning ball counter (E) is larger than the prescribed number, it is determined that the fraudulent winning (illegal winning) in which a game ball wins (enters a ball) outside the winning possible period occurs, and an error designation command for fraudulent winning is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the error designation command for fraudulent winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 informs that the fraudulent winning has occurred by performing the fraudulent winning error notification.

Then, external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared, and the big winning opening detection switch input processing is completed. As a result, an illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible for an external device to recognize (specify) that an illegal winning has occurred.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. In this first starting hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the first starting hole detection switch 45a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first starting hole 45. The details of the first starting opening detection switch input process will be described later.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start opening detection switch input process. In this second starting opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second starting opening detection switch 47a is input, that is, whether the game ball has won the second starting opening 47 or not. The details of the second start opening detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44. If the detection signal is not input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control process is terminated.

When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of normal pattern reservations, which is the number of normal pattern reservation memories stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area, is less than four. When the number of general pattern reservations is not less than 4, the input control process is terminated.

When the normal pattern reservation number is less than 4, the normal pattern reservation number is updated by adding "1", normal pattern determination information (random number for hit determination, random number for normal pattern determination, random number for normal pattern variation pattern determination) is acquired, an empty storage part is searched in order from the first storage part in the normal pattern reservation storage area, the acquired normal pattern determination information is stored in the empty storage part, and the input control process is completed.

(Input processing of the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
20, the first starting port detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the first start hole detection switch 45a has been input (a game ball has won the first start hole 45). If the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and if the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first starting port detection switch input processing is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counter used for prize balls to update it, and in step S230-3, acquires special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, random number for special figure variation pattern determination).

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1) stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area is less than four in step S230-4. If the first special figure reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S230-5, and if the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, the first starting port detection switch input process of this time is terminated.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special figure reservation number (U1) to update it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, sets the first special figure reservation number designation command corresponding to the updated first special figure reservation number (U1) in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the 1st special figure reservation number specification command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the 1st special figure reservation number.

The main CPU 110a stores the acquired special symbol determination information in the first special symbol reservation storage area in step S230-7. Specifically, since the first special symbol reservation storage area is divided into the first storage part to the fourth storage part, the vacant storage parts are searched in order from the first storage part, and the acquired special figure determination information is stored in the vacant storage part.

As described above, in the predetermined storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, and random number for special figure fluctuation pattern determination) will be stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current gaming state is a non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state). When it is in the non-time-saving game state, the process is shifted to step S230-9, and when it is not in the non-time-saving game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state), the processing is shifted to step S230-12 assuming that a left-handed error has occurred.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special time-saving gaming state is within a predetermined number of fluctuations (eg, 5 times). If it is not within the predetermined number of fluctuations, the process is moved to step S230-10, and if it is within the predetermined number of fluctuations, the first start opening detection switch input process of this time is terminated as not executing the pre-reading judgment of the special figure judgment information.

The main CPU 110a performs first prefetch determination processing in step S230-10. In this first look-ahead determination processing, a pre-determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the special figure determination information (first reserved storage) acquired this time is pre-determined prior to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol based on the determination information, and the scheduled variation pattern, which is the variation pattern scheduled to be executed, is determined.

In step S230-11, the main CPU 110a sets the first look-ahead designation command corresponding to the determined scheduled variation pattern in the performance transmission data storage area, and terminates the current first start opening detection switch input process.

As a result, the first look-ahead designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 can execute a look-ahead foretelling performance for executing a predetermined foretelling performance over one or a plurality of variable displays executed before starting the variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the first look-ahead designating command. Note that the pre-reading preview effect is performed using one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the board lighting device 76.

In step S230-12, the main CPU 110a sets a left-handed error designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the current first starting opening detection switch input process. As a result, the left-handed error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 performs the left-handed error notification, thereby performing the notification for promoting the right-handed.

(Processing for inputting the second start opening detection switch on the main control board)
The second start opening detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the second starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start hole detection switch 47a has been input (the game ball has won the second start hole 47). If the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is input, the process proceeds to step S240-2, and if the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is not input, the current second starting port detection switch input processing is terminated.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a adds data indicating one prize ball to the one prize ball counter used for the prize ball to update it, and in step S240-3, acquires special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, random number for special figure variation pattern determination).

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation number (U2) stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is less than four in step S240-4. When the second special figure reservation number (U2) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S240-5, and when the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not less than 4, the second start opening detection switch input process of this time is terminated.

In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the second special figure reservation number (U2) to update it (U2←U2+1), and in step S240-6, sets the second special figure reservation number designation command corresponding to the updated second special figure reservation number (U2) in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the second special figure reservation number designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the second special figure reservation number.

The main CPU 110a stores the acquired special symbol determination information in the second special symbol reservation storage area in step S240-7. Specifically, since the second special symbol reservation storage area is divided into the first storage part to the fourth storage part, the vacant storage parts are searched in order from the first storage part, and the obtained special figure determination information is stored in the vacant storage part.

As described above, in the predetermined storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the second reservation memory (second reservation) consisting of the special figure determination information (random number value for jackpot determination, random number value for special symbol determination, random number value for reach determination, and random number value for special figure fluctuation pattern determination) will be stored.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variable gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. If it is in the probability variable game state or the time reduction game state, the process is shifted to step S240-9, and if it is not in the probability variable game state or the time reduction game state (in the case of the normal game state), the process is shifted to step S240-12 assuming that a right-handed error occurs.

In step S240-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of fluctuations is within a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) after the start of the time saving state or before the end. If it is not within the predetermined number of fluctuations, the process is moved to step S240-10, and if it is within the predetermined number of fluctuations, the second start opening detection switch input process of this time is terminated as not executing the pre-reading judgment of the special figure judgment information.

The main CPU 110a performs second prefetch determination processing in step S240-10. In this second look-ahead determination processing, a pre-determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the special figure determination information (second reservation storage) acquired this time is pre-determined prior to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol based on the determination information, and the scheduled variation pattern, which is the variation pattern scheduled to be executed, is determined.

In step S240-11, the main CPU 110a sets the second look-ahead designation command corresponding to the determined scheduled variation pattern in the effect transmission data storage area, and terminates the current second start opening detection switch input process.

As a result, the second look-ahead designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 can execute a look-ahead foretelling performance for executing a predetermined foretelling performance over one or a plurality of variable displays executed before starting the variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the second look-ahead designating command. Note that the pre-reading preview effect is performed using one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the board lighting device 76.

In step S240-12, the main CPU 110a sets a right hitting error designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and terminates the current second start opening detection switch input process. As a result, the right hitting error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 performs the right hitting error notification, so that the notification for promoting the left hitting is performed.

(Special special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special figure special electric control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S302, executes the processing corresponding to the branch destination address, and ends the current special figure special electric control processing.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the variable display of the special symbol is started based on the determination result of the reserved memory (special figure determination information), the variation time is set, and the command at the start (special symbol memory designation command, game state designation command, special design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and special design memory determination processing (step S310) for performing processing for changing the special design special electric processing data to "1", etc. is executed. . The details of the special symbol storage determination process will be described later.

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, the variable display of the special symbol is stopped by the passage of the variation time, the stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set, and the special symbol variation processing (step S320) for transmitting the command at the time of stop (special symbol stop command) to the production control board 130, the processing for changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "2", etc. is executed. The details of the special symbol variation process will be described later.

If the special symbol special electric processing data is 2, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0" if the special symbol is a losing special symbol and the opening time of the big winning game is set if the special symbol is a losing special symbol, and the special symbol stop processing (step S330) for transmitting the opening designation command to the performance control board 130 and changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "3" is executed.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the big winning game processing (step S340) for starting the round game by the passage of the opening time of the big winning game and transmitting the round number designation command to the performance control board 130, the processing for setting the ending time of the big winning game and transmitting the ending designation command to the performance control board 130 based on the end of the final round game, the processing for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "4", etc. is executed.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing for ending the jackpot game by the lapse of the ending time, the processing for setting the game state after the jackpot (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state, high-probability number, short-time game state), processing for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "0", etc. (step S350) are executed. The details of the jackpot game ending process will be described later.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed. If the special symbols are being variably displayed, the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the special symbols are not being variably displayed, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more in step S310-2. When the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S310-3, and when the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process is moved to step S310-4.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second special figure reservation number (U2) by subtracting "1", and in step S310-6, sets a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the second special figure reservation number (U2) after subtraction in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the processing for updating the display of the icon are performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, shifts the data stored in the second special figure determination information holding storage area, and shifts the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. The special figure determination information stored in the first storage part of the second special figure determination information holding storage area is shifted to the 0th storage part which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and the special figure determination information used in the previous game stored in the 0th storage part is erased.

On the other hand, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more in step S310-4. When the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S310-5, and when the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process is moved to step S319-1.

The main CPU 110a updates the first special figure reservation number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and sets a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first special figure reservation number (U1) after subtraction in step S310-6 in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the processing for updating the display of the icon are performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, shifts the data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area, and shifts the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storages to the previous storage.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area. The special figure determination information stored in the first storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage part which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and the special figure determination information used in the previous game stored in the 0th storage part is erased.

In addition, along with the shift processing of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first special figure reservation number (U1) and the second special figure reservation number (U2) after subtraction are set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information holding storage area is shifted with priority over the first special figure determination information holding storage area (the second special figure holding number is preferentially subtracted from the first special figure holding number), but in the order in which the game ball enters the starting opening, the first special figure judgment information holding storage area or the second special figure judgment information holding storage area is shifted (the first special figure holding number and the second special figure holding number are in the winning order may be subtracted), or the first special figure determination information reservation storage area may be prioritized over the second special figure determination information reservation storage area (first special figure reservation number over the second special figure reservation number may be preferentially subtracted).

In step S311, the main CPU 110a performs a big hit determination process. Specifically, the special figure determination information (random number value for jackpot determination) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is collated with the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. In addition, the special symbol determination information (random number for special symbol determination) stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area is collated with the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, and the type of special symbol to be stopped is determined.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the effect symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable effect is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs special figure variation pattern determination processing in step S313. Specifically, the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area is collated with the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The details of the special figure variation pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure variation pattern type determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special figure variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for determining a variation performance pattern, which is a performance mode of the variation performance performed during the variable display of the special symbols, is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316, starts variable display of the special symbol. As a result, the lighting data for the LED for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creating process of the step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of the step S800.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets "1" to the special symbol special electric processing data, and ends the current special symbol storage determination processing.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. When the customer waiting state flag is set, the special symbol storage determination processing of this time is ended, and when the customer waiting state flag is not set, the processing is moved to step S319-2. It should be noted that the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the variable display of special symbols and the special game (jackpot game) are not being executed, but the condition may include the fact that the variable display of normal symbols and the auxiliary game are not being executed.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3 sets a customer waiting state specifying command indicating a customer waiting state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and terminates the current special symbol storage determination process. As a result, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the customer waiting demonstration effect for prompting the player to play is performed.

(Special figure variation pattern determination processing of the main control board)
The special figure variation pattern determination processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a special figure variation pattern determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in the normal game state. If it is in the normal game state, the process is moved to step S313-2, and if it is not in the normal game state, the process is moved to step S313-3 assuming that it is the variable probability game state or the time-saving game state.

In step S313-2, the main CPU 110a selects a corresponding (matching game situation) table from the normal special figure variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 12) for determining the special figure variation pattern in the normal game state, and shifts the process to step S313-4.

In step S313-3, the main CPU 110a selects a corresponding (matches the game situation) table from the special figure variation pattern determination tables (see FIGS. 13 and 14) for determining the special figure variation pattern in the probability variable gaming state or the time saving gaming state, and moves the process to step S313-4.

In step S313-4, the main CPU 110a collates the special symbol type, jackpot determination result, special symbol determination result, reach determination random number, number of reservations (U1 or U2), and special figure variation pattern determination random number with the special figure variation pattern determination table to determine the special figure variation pattern.

The main CPU 110a sets the variation time corresponding to the determined special figure variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c in step S313-5, and sets the special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S313-6. As a result, the special figure variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect, is performed.

In step S313-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is the low probability state. If it is not a low probability state (probability variable gaming state), the process is shifted to step S313-9, and if it is a low probability state, in step S313-8, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c, specifically, the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol executed from the establishment of the predetermined condition (RWM clear, 0 clear of the fluctuation number based on the end of the jackpot game) is updated by +1. The number of fluctuations is updated by +1 regardless of whether it is a normal game state, a time-saving game state, a first special symbol variable display, or a second special symbol variable display. It should be noted that the number of fluctuations will be referred to in special symbol fluctuation processing, which will be described later.

In step S313-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is the time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state or special time-saving game state). When it is not in the time-saving game state, the current special figure variation pattern determination table is terminated, and when it is in the time-saving game state, in step S313-10, a time-saving number designation command corresponding to the remaining number of times of time-saving is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the command for specifying the number of times of shortening of working hours is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the remaining number of times of shortening of hours is notified. When this process is finished, the special figure variation pattern determination process of this time is finished.

(Special symbol variation processing of the main control board)
The special symbol variation processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation time set in the above-described special figure variation pattern determination process has elapsed. When the variation time has passed, the process is moved to step S320-2, and when the variation time has not passed, the special symbol variation process of this time is terminated.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a stop-displays the special symbol that has been determined in the above-described jackpot determination process, and in step S320-3 sets a stop time (basically 0.5 seconds) according to the gaming situation in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time saving flag is set in the main RAM 110c in step S320-4. When the time-saving flag is set, the processing is shifted to step S320-5 assuming that the number of times of remaining time-saving is updated, and when the time-saving flag is not set, the processing is shifted to step S320-10 assuming that the number of times of remaining time-saving is not updated.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current special symbol variable display is the first special symbol. If it is the first special symbol, in step S320-6, the first special symbol number saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c (J1), and the third symbol number (J3), which is the sum of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are subtracted by one. The second number of times of saving time (J2), which is the number of times of saving time of the second special symbol saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and the third number of times of saving time (J3) are subtracted by one.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S320-8 whether or not any one of the first number of times of time saving (J1), the number of times of second time saving (J2), and the number of times of saving time (J3) has become "0". When it becomes "0", the processing is moved to step S320-9 assuming that the time saving game state is terminated, and when it is not "0", the processing is moved to step S320-12.

In step S320-9, the main CPU 110a clears the high-probability flag, time-saving flag, and various time-saving times (J1, J2, J3) saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c to start the normal game state.

In step S320-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special jackpot symbol is stopped. If it is not a jackpot special pattern, the process is shifted to step S320-12, and if it is a jackpot special pattern, in step S320-11, a high probability flag, a time saving flag and various times of time saving (J1, J2, J3) saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c are cleared to start a normal game state. After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S320-16.

In step S320-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of variations saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c has reached a specified number (900 in this embodiment). When the number of times of variation reaches the specified number of times, the process is shifted to step S320-13 assuming that the special time-saving game state is started, and when the number of times of variation does not reach the specified number of times, the process is shifted to step S320-15 assuming that the special time-saving game state is not started.

In step S320-13, the main CPU 110a sets the special time saving number of times (J1=100, J2=750, J3=750) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S320-14 sets the special time saving flag in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c to shift to the special time saving game state.

In step S320-15, the main CPU 110a sets the number of times of time saving designation commands corresponding to the number of times of time saving (J1, J2, J3) saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the command for specifying the number of times of shortening of working hours is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the remaining number of times of shortening of hours is notified.

In step S320-16, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to "2", and in step S320-17 sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state (the game state specified by the presence or absence of the high probability flag and the time saving flag) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for updating the game state is performed in the effect control board 130. - 特許庁When this process is finished, the special symbol variation process of this time is finished.

In this way, when the number of times of variable display of special symbols executed from the establishment of a predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of times of variation based on the end of the jackpot game) reaches the specified number of times, a special time-saving game state is generated, so that the player can be given the unexpectedness that the time-saving state occurs without going through the jackpot game, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, since the number of fluctuations (900 times) in which the special time-saving game state occurs is larger than the maximum number of time-saving games (100 times) set in the normal time-saving game state, the special time-saving game state does not occur during the normal time-saving game state.

Further, when the special time-saving gaming state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is not cleared to 0. As a result, the special time-saving game state does not occur again between jackpot games (after the special time-saving game state is started or ended), the profit balance between the game parlor side and the player side can be secured, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Instead of setting the maximum number of times of time saving (100 times) in the normal time saving game state to be less than the number of fluctuations (900 times) in which the special time saving game state occurs, the maximum number of times of time saving in the normal time saving game state and the number of fluctuations in which the special time saving game state occurs may be the same number. In this way, the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state are seamlessly connected, the player can feel as if the normal time-saving game state is extended, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, when the special time-saving game state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is cleared to 0, and a special time-saving occurrence completion flag indicating that the special time-saving game state has occurred may be set in the main RAM 110c (game RWM). In this case, when the number of times of variation reaches a specified number (500 times), if there is no special time-reduction flag, the number of times of variation is cleared to 0 to generate a special time-reduction game state, and if there is a special time-reduction completion flag, the number of times of variation is cleared to 0 so that the special time-reduction game state is not generated.

(Jackpot game end processing of the main control board)
The jackpot game end processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing a jackpot game ending process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

The main CPU 110a acquires the stop special figure data set in the main RAM 110c in step S350-1, selects the game state setting table (see FIG. 16) in step S350-2, and checks the stop special figure data against the game state setting table in step S350-3 to determine the game state after the jackpot game ends.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a sets game state information (high probability flag, time saving flag, time saving count) corresponding to the determined game state in the main RAM 110c. As a result, the probability variable gaming state or the normal time-saving gaming state is generated.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a sets a time-saving number designation command corresponding to the set time-saving number of times (J1, J2, J3) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the time saving number designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing such as displaying the remaining number of time saving is executed.

In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the game state after setting in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S350-7, sets the special figure special electric processing data to "0", and ends the current jackpot game end processing. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for performing the effect corresponding to the current game state is executed.

(Main processing of production control section)
Next, the main processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the effect control section 130m.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupt in step E10, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub-ROM 130b, flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupt in step E30, and performs sub random number update processing in step E40. Specifically, processing for updating various random values stored in the sub-RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit)
The timer interrupt processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing a timer interruption process that is executed every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs input control processing in step E130. Specifically, it determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the production button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and performs processing of setting predetermined data when there is an input.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, it determines whether or not various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110, and if various commands have been transmitted, stores the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a performs setting change/confirmation processing in step E170. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a setting change designation command or a setting confirmation designation command has been received. If a setting change designation command has been received, the processing for executing the setting change notification is performed, and if a setting confirmation designation command has been received, the processing for executing the setting confirmation notification is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power-on designation command has been received, and if received, a process for executing power-on notification is performed. Specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 to cause the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display a power-on screen, or output a power-on sound from the audio output device 9.

The sub CPU 130a performs power failure recovery processing in step E250. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power restoration designation command has been received, and if received, a process for executing power failure restoration notification is performed. More specifically, a power restoration notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 to cause the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a power restoration screen, or output a power restoration sound from the audio output device 9.

In step E300, the sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting effect process. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received, and when the customer waiting state designation command has been received, a process for performing a customer waiting demonstration effect is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demonstration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and output a customer waiting demonstration sound from the voice output device 9. Details of the customer waiting effect processing will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs menu operation processing in step E320. Specifically, according to the operation of the effect button 17 or the cross key 19, various menu items (“model explanation” for explaining information about the model, “effect customization” for selecting settings in which execution ratios of various effects to be executed during the variable effect are set, “pachi log” for managing the game history in cooperation with a terminal such as a mobile phone owned by the player, and “end” for terminating the menu operation) are selected/determined, and processing according to the menu item is performed. Details of the menu operation process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state update process in step E350. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a game state designation command has been received, and if received, the game state information stored in the sub-RAM 130c is updated.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending information update process in step E400. Specifically, by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, it is determined whether or not the special figure reservation number designation command or the general figure reservation number designation command is received, and when it is received, the first special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number, the general figure reservation number, etc. stored (understood) in the sub RAM 130c are updated.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs look-ahead effect processing. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to determine whether or not the prefetching designation command is received, and if received, the icon change performance, the continuous notice performance, and the lamp change performance as the prefetch system performance are processed. The details of the look-ahead effect processing will be described later.

The 'icon change performance' is a type of fore-reading forewarning performance that makes a player expect a big win game to be executed by changing the display mode of the reserved icon and the icon, and the timing of the performance may overlap with the big win forewarning performance to be described later. Note that, in the present embodiment, an icon change effect for a suspended icon may be referred to as a "suspended icon change effect", and an icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as a "pertinent icon change effect".

The 'continuous advance notice performance' is a type of look-ahead advance notice performance that makes a player expect a big win game to be executed by executing a predetermined performance over one or a plurality of variable performances, and is executed in a predetermined period after the start of the variable performance, but the performance time does not overlap with the big win notice performance to be described later.
The 'lamp change performance' is a type of fore-reading forewarning performance that makes a player expect a big win game to be executed by changing the lighting mode of a prize winning hole lamp over one or a plurality of variable performances, and the timing of the performance may overlap with the big win forewarning performance to be described later.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a special special electric effect process. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to to determine whether or not a special pattern designating command, a special pattern variation pattern designating command, a special design stop designating command, an opening designating command for big win, a round number designating command, an ending designating command for big win, etc. are received, and processing for executing an effect corresponding to the command received when received is performed.

In step E700, the sub CPU 130a carries out a general/universal electric presentation process. Specifically, the receiving buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to to determine whether or not a normal pattern designation command, a normal pattern variation pattern designation command, a normal pattern stop designation command, an opening designation command for win, an ending designation command for win, etc. is received, and processing for executing performance corresponding to the received command is performed when the command is received.

In step E800, the sub CPU 130a performs effect mode update processing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not update conditions (change in game state, winning of mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP ready-to-win performance in which the result is lost, etc.) of the performance mode (performance stage) defining performance elements (background image, performance image, performance sound, etc.) in the voice output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc., are met or not, and processing for updating the performance mode to any one of a plurality of performance modes is performed when the update condition is met.

The ``performance modes'' are provided with performance modes A to C set in the normal game state, performance modes D to E set in the variable probability game state, performance modes F to G set in the normal time-saving game state, and performance mode H set in the special time-saving game state. In addition, when the power is controlled to the normal game state when the power is turned on (for example, after changing the setting, after clearing the RWM, after confirming the setting, etc.), the first production mode is always the production mode A, and when the power is turned on, the production mode is always the production mode D. When the power is turned on, the production mode is always the production mode F. The performance mode set first is always the performance mode H.

In the performance modes A to C, the performance pattern 70a is composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters (decorative parts) corresponding to the numbers + pattern effect images (decorative parts) for decorating the background of the numbers and characters, and the designs of the numbers and characters are different among the performance modes. In the production modes D to H, the production pattern 70a is composed only of numbers (identification characters), and the design of the numbers is common among the production modes. In addition, in the production modes A to H, the background image corresponding to each production mode is scrolled left and right (reciprocating motion, dynamic display) in the normal state.

In addition, in the normal game state, when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed, the condition for changing the performance mode is more likely to be satisfied than when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) is executed. When the variable display (first variable effect) is executed, the effect mode is more likely to change. Therefore, the performance effect can be varied depending on the type of variable display (variation performance) of the special symbols executed in the normal game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed in various time-saving game states, it is more difficult to establish the update condition of the performance mode (SP/SPSP ready-to-win performance in which the result is lost is difficult to be executed, it is easy to win the mode update lottery, the look-ahead zone performance is difficult to be executed, the number of performance modes is small, etc.) than when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to vary the production effect when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable production) is executed depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of performance modes in the variable probability game state and various time-saving game states (normal time-saving game state, special time-saving game state) is increased, and the performance mode may be changed more easily when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed than when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) is executed.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to determine whether or not an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command is received, and if received, the processing for executing the error notification performance corresponding to the received error designation command or the processing for ending the error notification performance corresponding to the received error cancellation designation command is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E900. Specifically, a process of outputting a signal such as predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150 is performed.

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

(Customer waiting effect processing of the effect control unit)
The customer waiting effect processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the customer waiting effect processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E300-1. When the customer waiting state designation command is not received, the processing is shifted to step E300-4, and when the customer waiting state designation command is received, in step E300-2, a demonstration waiting time determination table (see FIG. 30) for determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance is selected. Details of the demonstration standby time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demonstration standby time and sets the demonstration standby timer. Specifically, referring to the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 30, one demonstration standby time is determined from a plurality of demonstration standby times based on the current gaming state and current state.

In step E300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is waiting for a demonstration. Specifically, it is determined whether the demonstration standby timer is set. If it is not on standby for a demonstration, the current customer waiting effect processing is terminated assuming that the customer waiting demonstration effect will not be executed.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demonstration standby timer=0 in step E300-6. When the demonstration standby timer is not 0, the current customer waiting performance processing is terminated assuming that the customer waiting demonstration performance is not executed yet, and when the demonstration standby timer is 0, a customer waiting demonstration performance command is set in a transmission buffer in step E300-7, and the current customer waiting performance processing is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting demonstration effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the customer waiting demonstration effect for appealing to the player to play the game is executed.

(Demonstration waiting time determination table)
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a demonstration waiting time determination table referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect.

The game state, the current state, and the selected demo waiting time are associated with each other in the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. Four kinds of demonstration standby times of 30 seconds to 80 seconds are set as the demonstration standby time in the normal game state, and four kinds of demonstration standby time of 35 seconds to 85 seconds are set as the demonstration standby time in the specific game state.

The first feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 30 is that the demonstration standby time after the performance symbols are statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on, the demonstration standby time after the performance symbols are statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is restored, the demonstration standby time after the performance symbols are statically displayed after the variation display of the performance symbols is completed (the variation time has elapsed), and the demonstration standby time after the performance symbols are statically displayed after the customer waiting demonstration performance is completed are different. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the current state, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The second feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 30 is that the demonstration standby time after the variable display of the performance symbols is finished (fluctuation time has elapsed) and the performance symbols are statically displayed is longer than the demonstration standby time after the performance symbols are statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The third feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 30 is that the demonstration standby time after static display of the performance pattern on the image display device immediately after power recovery is longer than the demonstration standby time after the variable display of the performance pattern is finished (variation time elapses) and the performance pattern is statically displayed. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The fourth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 30 is that the demonstration standby time after static display of the performance symbols on the image display device immediately after power recovery is longer than the demonstration standby time after static display of the performance symbols on the image display device immediately after power is turned on. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

A fifth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 30 is that the demonstration standby time after the performance symbol is statically displayed after the end of the customer waiting demonstration performance is the shortest. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the appeal of the game to the player, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The sixth feature of the demonstration waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 30 is that each demonstration waiting time in the specific game state (low-probability short-time playing state, high-probability short-time playing state) is longer than each demonstration waiting time in the normal game state. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

(Menu operation processing of production control unit)
The menu operation processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing menu operation processing in the effect control section 130m.

In step E320-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the customer is currently waiting. If it is in a customer waiting state, the process is shifted to step E320-2, and if it is not in a customer waiting state (during variable performance or jackpot performance), the process is shifted to step E320-7 assuming that processing related to menu operation is not performed.

In step E320-2, the sub CPU 130a acquires the menu process number updated in each process of the menu operation process, refers to the branch destination address from the menu process number, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address.

Specifically, if the menu processing number is "0", various menu items (model description, effect customization, patch log, end) are displayed according to the operation of the effect button 17, the menu item is selected by operating the cross key 19, the menu item is determined by operating the effect button 17, and the menu process number corresponding to the determined menu item ("1" for "model description", "2" for "effect customization", "3" for "pachi log", and "0" for "end") is set. (Step E320-3) is executed to end the menu operation process.

If the menu processing number is "1", various explanatory information about the model is sequentially displayed according to the operation of the cross key 19, and the model explanation processing (step E320-4) is executed to set the menu processing number to "0" by selecting and determining the end item, and the menu operation processing is terminated.

If the menu processing number is "2", a normal setting (normal mode) in which various effects (e.g., icon change effect, continuous advance notice effect, timer effect, etc.) executed during variable effects in response to operation of the cross key 19 are executed at a normal rate, and a simple setting (simple mode) in which the reduction rate is lower than the normal rate are selected, effect customization processing (step E320-5) determined by operating the effect button 17 is executed, and the menu operation process is terminated.

If the menu processing number is "3", the input of the history password using the effect button 17 and the cross key 19 is accepted to start updating the game history, and processing such as issuing a history password according to the updated game history in response to the effect button 17 and the cross key 19 is performed, Pachi log processing (step E320-6) for managing the game history in cooperation with a terminal such as a mobile phone owned by the player is executed, and the menu operation processing is completed.

If the menu operation number=“4”, the menu operation is terminated and the menu processing number is set to “0” (step E320-7), thereby terminating the menu operation processing.

In this way, based on the operation of the production button 17 and the cross key 19, it is possible to set normal setting (normal mode) and simple setting (simple mode) with different execution ratios of various effects (icon change effect, continuous notice effect, timer effect, character notice effect at the start of fluctuation, etc.) executed during the change effect (to be described later). It is possible to

Instead of customizing the execution ratio of various effects (customization target effects) executed during the variable effect by selecting the normal setting and the simple setting, the effect balance may be customized by individually setting the level of the execution ratio of the various effects (customization object effects) executed during the variable effect, or by allowing the normal setting and the simple setting to be selected and individually setting the high and low execution ratios of the various effects (customization object effects) to customize the effect balance.

In addition, the customization target effects are not limited to the above-described icon change effect, continuous notice effect, timer effect, and fluctuation start character object notice effect, but it is also possible to set the execution ratio between the normal setting and the simple setting as customization object effects such as the change start character object notice effect, the before-reach notice effect (diaphragm notice effect, step-up notice effect), and the like, which will be described later.

In addition, the execution ratio of specific effects (for example, in the case of a dialogue announcement, a dialogue announcement pattern 6 related to an extremely hot dialogue with a high degree of expectation, a dialogue announcement pattern 1 related to a normal dialogue with a low expectation, etc.) may be individually set.

(Prefetching effect processing of the effect control unit)
With reference to FIG. 32, the look-ahead effect processing of the effect control section 130m will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the look-ahead effect processing in the effect control section 130m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the effect mode of the icon change effect. The details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E520, the sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect execution processing for executing the icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process (changing the display mode of the already displayed pending icon or the icon). The details of the icon change effect execution process will be described later.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs continuous announcement effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, the effect mode of the continuous announcement effect, and the like. The details of the continuous announcement effect determination process will be described later.

In step E540, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous announcement effect execution process for executing the continuous announcement effect determined to be executed in the continuous announcement effect determination process. The details of the continuous announcement effect determination process will be described later.

In step E550, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process for executing a lamp change effect (lighting the winning entrance lamp NR so as to have a light emission mode corresponding to the icon whose display mode has changed). The details of the ramp change effect execution process will be described later.

In step E560, the sub CPU 130a performs a winning light emitting effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a winning light emitting effect suggesting the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by causing a top lamp 10b in the upper center of the glass frame 4 of the frame lighting device 10 to emit light in a special light emitting mode different from the normal light emitting mode according to the result of the look-ahead determination when the game ball enters the start hole and determining the performance mode of the winning light emitting effect to be executed. The details of the prize-winning lighting effect determination process will be described later.

In step E570, the sub CPU 130a performs winning light emission effect execution processing for executing the winning light emission effect determined to be executed in the winning light emission effect determination processing, and terminates the current look-ahead effect processing.

(Icon change effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing icon change effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E510-1. If the prefetch designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E510-2, and if the prefetch designation command has not been received, the current icon change effect determination process is terminated.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received pre-reading designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is during the icon change effect executable period, the process moves to step E510-4, and if it is not the icon change effect executable period, the process moves to step E510-7.

The "executable period of the icon change effect" is a case where the jackpot game is not being executed, the icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Any one of the above three conditions, or only two conditions may be provided. In addition, when the received prefetch designation command is based on the winning of the first start port 45, it is in the normal game state, and when the received prefetch designation command is based on the winning of the second start port 47, it may be in a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state).

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determination random value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-5 selects the final icon display mode determination table (see FIG. 34) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the final display mode of the icon in step E510-6. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 34, and determines one final icon display mode from a plurality of final icon display modes based on the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the prefetch designation command and the selection rate (%) of each final icon display mode.

In step E510-7, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. If it is the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-9, and if it is not the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-12.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a selects the change scenario determination table (see FIG. 32) for determining the change scenario of the icon change effect. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the pending icon to the disappearance thereof.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 32, one change scenario is determined from a plurality of change scenarios based on the final display mode of the icon, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, sets the icon display command for the winning icon in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect determination processing. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), or a predetermined effect sound is output.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the suspended icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), or a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the final icon display mode.

In the icon final display mode determination table, the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode in normal setting and simple setting by effect customization, and the icon final display mode to be selected are associated with each other, and for reference, the type of notification sound when the icon is generated for each icon type is described.

A white icon as a normal icon and a blue icon, a red icon and a rainbow icon as special icons suggesting the possibility of a big win (a big win game is executed) are set in the icon final display mode.

The degree of expectation for winning a big win related to the special icon increases in the order of (white icon<) blue icon<red icon<rainbow icon, and the rainbow icon is an icon that confirms a big win.

When the white icon is displayed on the image display device, the first generated notification sound is output, when the blue icon is displayed, the second generated notification sound is output, when the red icon is displayed, the third generated notification sound is output, and when the rainbow icon is displayed, the fourth generated notification sound is output.

Note that the ratio of blue and red icons selected in the simple setting is 1/2 of the ratio of blue and red icons selected in the normal setting, but it may be more or less than 1/2.

Here, as a first feature of the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 34, the selection rate of the final icon display mode is varied according to the planned variation pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the scheduled variation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, the special icon is selected at a higher rate than when the scheduled variation pattern is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach.

A second feature of the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 34 is that the execution ratio of the icon change effect changes depending on the effect customization setting (normal setting, simple setting) by the player. By doing so, it is possible to set an effect balance that suits the taste of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the case of a big win, the normal icon (white icon) is not selected as the final icon display mode, but it may be selected.

In addition, although different notification sounds are set for a plurality of icon display modes (four types), two types of notification sounds may be set, namely, the notification sound generated when a white icon is generated and the change notification sound when the icon changes to a blue icon, a red icon, and a rainbow icon. Also, for the rainbow icon that is determined to be a big hit, a dedicated notification sound may be provided to provide three types.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table referred to when determining a change scenario.

In the change scenario determination table, the final display mode of the icon, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected are associated with each other.

"Advance variation" is a variation display (variation performance) executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command, and "the relevant variation" is a variation display (variation performance) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

The change scenarios include a scenario (for example, scenario 01) in which the icon display mode does not change during the execution of the preliminary variation (the pending icon change effect is not executed) but changes during the execution of the variation (the icon change effect is executed), a scenario in which the icon display mode changes (the pending icon change effect is executed) but does not change during the execution of the variation (the icon change effect is not executed) (for example, the scenario 02), a scenario in which the icon display mode is during the preliminary change, and A scenario (for example, scenario 15, etc.) that changes during execution of the change (in which the pending icon change effect and the icon change effect are executed) is set.

In the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, the scenario in which the display mode of the icon is changed is determined regardless of whether or not the ready-to-win effect (which may be a ready-to-win effect other than the normal ready-to-win effect) is executed in the preliminary variation. When such a change scenario determination table is used, it is preferable to set various scenarios so that the icon display mode does not change during the execution of the advance variation in which the ready-to-win performance is executed, and the icon display mode changes during the execution of the advance variation in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the change in the display mode of the icon occurs during the execution of the advance variation in which the ready-to-win performance is executed and the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed, but the change in the icon display mode occurs at a higher rate during the execution of the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed than during the execution of the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win performance is executed.

(Icon change effect execution processing of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect execution processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing icon change effect execution processing in the effect control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a special figure variation pattern designation command from the main control board 110 in step E520-1. When the special figure variation pattern specification command is received, the process is moved to step E520-2, and when the special figure variation pattern specification command is not received, the current icon change effect execution processing is terminated.

In step E520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E520-3 determines whether or not there is a pending icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated) in the current variable effect. If there is a pending icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-4, and if there is no pending icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-7.

In step E520-4, sub CPU 130a selects the change pattern determination table for pending icon (see FIG. 37) for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the pending icon to be changed. The details of the pending icon change pattern determination table will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines a pending icon change pattern in step E520-5. Specifically, referring to the pending icon change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37, one pending icon change pattern is determined from among a plurality of pending icon change patterns based on the mode of pending icon change in the current variable effect and the selection rate (%).

In step E520-6, sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined pending icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the first image display device 70 changes according to the change timing according to the change pattern of the hold icon and the change stage in the change timing, or a predetermined effect sound (change sound) is output.

In step E520-7, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a scenario (change scenario, non-change scenario) of the icon is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of sub RAM 130c. When the scenario of the icon is stored, the process is shifted to step E520-8, and when the scenario of the icon is not stored, the scenario is cleared from the look-ahead information storage area. The scenario is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area due to the power supply recovery or winning prize command (special figure reservation number designation command, look-ahead designation command) cannot be normally received.

In step E520-8, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). If there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process proceeds to step E520-9, and if there is no icon whose display mode is to be changed, the current icon change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E520-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern determination table (see FIG. 38) for the icon according to the stage of change of the icon in the current variation effect from among a plurality of change pattern determination tables for the icon for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed. Details of the change pattern determination table for the icon corresponding to the change stage will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-10. Specifically, a change pattern determination table for the selected icon is referred to, and one icon change pattern is determined from among the plurality of icon change patterns based on the icon change mode in the current variation performance and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern.

In step E520-11, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect execution process. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the display mode of the icon displayed on the first image display device 70 is changed according to the change timing corresponding to the icon change pattern and the change stage of the change timing, or a predetermined effect sound (change sound) is output.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a pending icon change pattern determination table referred to when determining a pending icon change pattern.

In the change pattern determination table for the pending icon, the mode of change of the pending icon in the current variable performance, the selection rate (%) of each pending icon change pattern, and the pending icon change pattern to be selected are associated, and for reference, the pending icon change performance occurrence timing and the change stage in each pending icon change pattern are described.

The hold icon change patterns include a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shift-displayed (at the start of variation) in response to the disappearance of the icon, a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes during variation accompanied by the output of the sound effect, a character action change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the icon changes as an action effect acting on the icon is performed with the character as the starting point when the character appears, and the display mode of the icon changes as a result of the change effect. A pattern action change pattern 01 is set in which a change notification pattern indicating that the icon is to be set is temporarily stopped and displayed, and an action performance acting on the reservation icon is performed with the change notification pattern as a starting point to change the display mode of the reservation icon.

The change performance generation timing of the reserved icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable performance, and includes when the variable performance is started (at the start of the variation), when the variation performance is being executed (during fluctuation), and when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

The change stage of the reserved icon is set to 1UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a blue icon, or from a blue icon to a red icon) in which the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot changes to a display mode one level higher, and 2UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a red icon) in which the degree of expectation for winning a big win changes to a display mode two levels higher.

Although the above-described three timings are used as the timings for generating the change effect of the pending icon, the timings are not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it is possible to provide a state during execution of a variable effect until a reach is established (during fluctuation), during execution of a normal reach, during execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the icon to be referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, FIG. 38(a) is a table to be referred to when changing the display mode of the icon by one step, and FIG. 38(b) is a table to be referred to when the display mode of the icon is to be changed by two steps.

In the change pattern determination table for the icon, the manner of change of the icon in the current variation effect, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the icon change pattern to be selected are associated with each other, and for reference, the change effect generation timing and change stage of the icon in each icon change pattern are described.

As the icon change pattern, there are set a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes at the start of variation accompanied by the output of sound effect, a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes during fluctuation accompanied by the output of sound effect, and a character action change pattern 01 in which action presentation acting on the icon is performed with the character as a starting point and the display mode of the icon changes when a character appears.

The change performance generation timing of the icon is classified in relation to the state of progress of the variable performance, and includes when the variable performance is started (at the start of variation), when the variable performance is being executed (during fluctuation), and when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

The change stages of the icons are set to 1UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a blue icon, or from a blue icon to a red icon) in which the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot is changed to a display state one step higher, and 2UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a red icon, or a change from a blue icon to a rainbow icon) in which the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot is changed to a display state two steps higher.

Although the pattern effect change pattern 01 is not selected in the change pattern determination table for the icon of the present embodiment, it may be selected. For example, in the variation effect for performing the pseudo-continuous effect, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed when the effect symbol 70a before the pseudo-variation is temporarily stopped and displayed.

"Pseudo-continuous effect" is to make it appear as if the variable display of the performance symbols has been executed multiple times for the jackpot determination based on the winning (entering the ball) to the starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) once. It is a variable display of a special mode of effect symbol that performs re-variable display once or multiple times.

Although the above-mentioned two timings are used as the timings for generating the change effect of the icon, the timings are not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it is possible to provide a state during execution of a variable effect until a reach is established (during fluctuation), during execution of a normal reach, during execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Continuous notice effect determination processing of effect control unit)
Continuous advance notice effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing continuous announcement effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E530-1. When the prefetching designation command is received, the processing is shifted to step E530-2, and when the prefetching designation command is not received, the current continuous announcement effect determination processing is ended.

In step E530-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E530-3, it is determined whether or not the current period is the period during which the continuous announcement effect can be executed. If it is in the execution possible period of continuous announcement performance (read-ahead operation presentation, read-ahead effect presentation, read-ahead vibration presentation, look-ahead zone presentation), the process is shifted to step E530-4, and if it is not the execution period of continuous announcement presentation, the process is moved to step E530-16 assuming that the continuous announcement presentation based on the read-ahead designation command received this time is not executed.

The ``forecasting action performance'' is a performance intermittently suggesting the degree of expectation for execution of a special game by executing an operation performance (announcement performance) for operating the second movable member 74 in a prescribed manner at the timing immediately after the start of the variable performance in one or a plurality of variable performances.

The ``forecast effect performance'' is a performance intermittently suggesting the degree of expectation for execution of a special game by executing an effect performance (announcement performance) for displaying an effect image of a predetermined color around a performance pattern 70a at the timing immediately after the start of the variable performance in one or a plurality of variable performances.

The ``predictive vibration performance'' is a performance intermittently suggesting the degree of expectation for execution of a special game by executing a vibration performance (announcement performance) in which the performance button 17 is vibrated in a predetermined mode without generating an effective period of the performance button 17 at the timing immediately after the start of the variable performance in one or a plurality of variable performances.

The ``prefetching zone performance (forereading mode performance)'' is a performance continuously suggesting the degree of expectation for execution of a special game by executing a zone performance (announcement performance) for displaying a zone image from a predetermined timing in one or a plurality of variable performances.

The ``executable period of continuous notice performance'' includes that there is no precedence reservation in which the continuous notice performance is executed, that the jackpot game is not being executed, that it is in a normal game state when a prefetch designation command based on winning at the first start port 45 is received, and that it is in a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state) when a prefetch designation command based on winning at the second start port 47 is received.

In step E530-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a continuous notice type determination table (see FIGS. 40 and 41) corresponding to the current effect mode, and in step E530-5, refers to the continuous notice type determination table and determines a continuous notice type (whether or not to execute a continuous notice effect, the type of continuous notice effect to be executed). Details of the continuous announcement type determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is the continuous announcement type for executing the continuous announcement effect. When the continuous announcement performance is not executed, the process is shifted to step E530-16, and when the continuous announcement performance is executed, the continuous announcement scenario determination table (see FIGS. 42 and 43) corresponding to the current performance mode is selected in step E530-7. Details of the continuous announcement scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E530-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous announcement type for executing the look-ahead action rendering has been determined. If the look-ahead action performance is not to be executed, the processing is shifted to step E530-10, and if the look-ahead action performance is to be executed, in step E530-9, a continuous announcement scenario determination table is referred to determine the announcement scenario of the look-ahead operation presentation and set it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E530-10 whether or not the continuous announcement type for executing the look-ahead effect rendering has been determined. When the look-ahead effect performance is not executed, the processing is shifted to step E530-12, and when the look-ahead effect performance is to be executed, in step E530-11, a continuous announcement scenario determination table is referred to determine the announcement scenario of the look-ahead effect performance and set it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous announcement type for executing the anticipatory vibration effect has been determined. If the read-ahead vibration performance is not executed, the processing is shifted to step E530-14, and if the read-ahead vibration performance is executed, a continuous announcement scenario determination table is referred to determine the announcement scenario of the read-ahead vibration performance and set it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c in step E530-13.

In step E530-14, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous announcement type for executing the look-ahead zone effect (look-ahead mode effect) has been determined. If the look-ahead zone (look-ahead mode performance) performance is not executed, the present continuous notice performance determination processing is ended, and if the look-ahead zone performance is executed, the read-ahead zone performance (read-ahead mode performance) notice scenario is determined by referring to the continuous notice scenario determination table and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c in step E530-15, and the current continuous notice performance determination processing is completed.

In step E530-16, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-notice scenario of the continuous announcement effect (notice scenario indicating that the continuous announcement effect is not executed), sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current continuous announcement effect determination processing.

The advance notice scenario or non-advanced scenario set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to in the above-described continuous advance notice effect execution processing at step E540, and the processing for executing the continuous advance notice effect or the processing for not executing the continuous advance notice effect is performed.

Thus, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 39, since the look-ahead motion effect related to the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is not executed in the normal game state, the look-ahead motion effect (the operation of the second movable member 74) is more likely to be executed when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed than when the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is possible to enhance the production effect related to the variable display (variation production) of the first special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 39, since the anticipation vibration effect related to the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is not executed in the normal game state, in the normal game state, the anticipation vibration effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) is more likely to be executed when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed than when the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is possible to enhance the production effect related to the variable display (variation production) of the first special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 39, since the look-ahead operation effect related to the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is not executed in the specific game state, in the specific game state, the look-ahead operation effect (operation of the second movable member 74) is more likely to be executed when the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed than when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the variable display (variation performance) of the second special symbol in the specific game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 39, since the anticipation vibration effect is not executed in the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol in the specific game state, in the specific game state, the anticipation vibration effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) is more likely to be executed when the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed than when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the variable display (variation performance) of the second special symbol in the specific game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Continuous notice type determination table)
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a continuous announcement type determination table referred to in order to determine the continuous announcement type in production modes A to C (normal game state), and FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a continuous announcement effect determination table referred to in order to determine the continuous announcement type in production modes D to H (specific game state).

As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the continuous announcement type determination table is associated with a look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern), a selection rate (%) of each continuous announcement type in normal setting and simple setting by effect customization, and a selected continuous announcement type. "Foreseeing effect presentation & foreseeing vibration presentation" and "forereading action presentation & foreseeing zone presentation" are provided in which two kinds of continuous notice presentations are executed.

For example, when the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern) is a failure and the SP ready-to-win performance is executed, ``non-execution'' is determined at 85%, the ``read-ahead effect performance'' is determined at 5%, the ``read-ahead motion performance'' is determined at 4%, the ``read-ahead vibration performance'' is determined at 3%, the ``read-ahead zone performance'' is determined at 2%, and the ``read-ahead effect performance & look-ahead vibration performance'' is determined at 1%.

The rate of selection of various continuous advance notice performances in the simple setting is set to 1/2 of the rate of selection of various continuous notice performances in the normal setting, but it may be more or less than 1/2.

Here, as a first feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. 40 to 41, when the first variable production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set by the production customization according to the operation of the production button 17 and the cross key 19, the execution ratio of the first continuous notice production (any one of the look-ahead effect production, the look-ahead chance stage production, the look-ahead operation production, the look-ahead vibration production, and the look-ahead zone production) is set at the highest rate. If the execution ratio of the second continuous notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead action effect, the look-ahead vibration effect, and the look-ahead zone effect other than the first continuous notice effect) is the second ratio, and the second variable effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the first continuous notice effect (either the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead motion effect, the look-ahead motion effect, or the look-ahead vibration effect) is the second ratio. 1) is different from the first rate (here, 0%), and the execution rate of the second continuous notice performance (one of look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance performance, look-ahead action performance, and look-ahead vibration performance other than the first continuous notice performance) is set to a rate (here, 0%) different from the second rate. Therefore, even when the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the performance effect can be changed according to the type of variable performance (special pattern), and the interest in the game can be improved.

The second feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. 40 to 41 is that when the first variable effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after the simple setting (simple mode) is set in the effect customization according to the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19, the execution ratio of the first continuous notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead motion effect, the look-ahead vibration effect, and the look-ahead zone effect) is the first. If the execution ratio of the second continuous notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead action effect, the look-ahead vibration effect, and the look-ahead zone effect other than the first continuous notice effect) is the second ratio, and the second variable effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the first continuous notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead motion effect, the look-ahead motion effect, and the look-ahead vibration effect) is the second ratio. ) is different from the first rate (here, 0%), and the execution rate of the second continuous notice performance (one of look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance performance, look-ahead motion performance, and look-ahead vibration performance other than the first continuous notice performance) is different from the second rate (here, 0%). Therefore, even when the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the performance effect can be changed according to the type of variable performance (special pattern), and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as a third feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. 40 to 41, when the second variable production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set by the production customization according to the operation of the production button 17 and the cross key 19, the execution ratio of the first continuous notice production (any one of the look-ahead effect production, the look-ahead chance production, the look-ahead operation production, the look-ahead vibration production, and the look-ahead zone production) is set to the first. If the execution ratio of the second continuous notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead motion effect, the look-ahead vibration effect, and the look-ahead zone effect other than the first continuous notice effect) is the second ratio, and the first variable effect (the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in a specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the first continuous notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead motion effect, the look-ahead motion effect, and the look-ahead vibration effect) is the second ratio. ) is different from the first rate (here, 0%), and the execution rate of the second continuous notice performance (one of look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance performance, look-ahead motion performance, and look-ahead vibration performance other than the first continuous notice performance) is different from the second rate (here, 0%). Therefore, even when the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the performance effect can be changed according to the type of variable performance (special pattern), and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as a fourth feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. 40 to 41, when the second variable production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state after the simple setting (simple mode) is set by the production customization according to the operation of the production button 17 and the cross key 19, the execution ratio of the first continuous notice production (any one of the look-ahead effect production, the look-ahead chance stage production, the look-ahead operation production, the look-ahead vibration production, and the look-ahead zone production) is the first. If the execution ratio of the second continuous notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead action effect, the look-ahead vibration effect, and the look-ahead zone effect other than the first continuous notice effect) is the second ratio, and the first variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in a specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the first continuous notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead motion effect, the look-ahead motion effect, and the look-ahead vibration effect) is the second ratio. ) is different from the first rate (here, 0%), and the execution rate of the second continuous notice performance (one of look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance performance, look-ahead motion performance, and look-ahead vibration performance other than the first continuous notice performance) is different from the second rate (here, 0%). Therefore, even when the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the performance effect can be changed according to the type of variable performance (special pattern), and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as a fifth feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. 40 to 41, when the first variable production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set by the production customization according to the operation of the production button 17 and the cross key 19, the execution ratio of the first continuous notice production (any one of the look-ahead effect production, the look-ahead chance production, the look-ahead operation production, the look-ahead vibration production, and the look-ahead zone production) is the first. If the execution ratio of the second continuous notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead action effect, the look-ahead vibration effect, and the look-ahead zone effect other than the first continuous notice effect) is the second ratio, and the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in a specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the first continuous notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead motion effect, the look-ahead motion effect, and the look-ahead vibration effect) is the second ratio. ) is different from the first rate (here, 0%), and the execution rate of the second continuous notice performance (one of look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance performance, look-ahead motion performance, and look-ahead vibration performance other than the first continuous notice performance) is different from the second rate (here, 0%). Therefore, even when the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the performance effect can be changed according to the game state and the type of variable performance (special pattern), and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, as a sixth feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. 40 to 41, when the second variable effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set by the effect customization according to the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19, the execution ratio of the first continuous notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead motion effect, the look-ahead vibration effect, and the look-ahead zone effect) is the first. If the execution ratio of the second continuous notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead action effect, the look-ahead vibration effect, and the look-ahead zone effect other than the first continuous notice effect) is the second ratio, and the second variable effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the first continuous notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead motion effect, the look-ahead motion effect, and the look-ahead vibration effect) is the second ratio. ) is different from the first rate (here, 0%), and the execution rate of the second continuous notice performance (one of look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance performance, look-ahead motion performance, and look-ahead vibration performance other than the first continuous notice performance) is different from the second rate (here, 0%). Therefore, even when the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the performance effect can be changed according to the game state and the type of variable performance (special pattern), and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, as a seventh feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. 40 to 41, when the second variable effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set by the effect customization according to the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19, the execution ratio of the first continuous notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead operation effect, the look-ahead vibration effect, and the look-ahead zone effect) is the first. If the execution ratio of the second continuous notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead action effect, the look-ahead vibration effect, and the look-ahead zone effect other than the first continuous notice effect) is the second ratio, and the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in a specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the first continuous notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead motion effect, the look-ahead motion effect, and the look-ahead vibration effect) is the second ratio. ) is different from the first rate (here, 0%), and the execution rate of the second continuous notice performance (one of look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance performance, look-ahead motion performance, and look-ahead vibration performance other than the first continuous notice performance) is different from the second rate (here, 0%). Therefore, even when the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the performance effect can be changed according to the game state and the type of variable performance (special pattern), and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, as the eighth feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. 40 to 41, in the second specific game state (special time-saving game state) after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the production customization according to the operation of the production button 17 and the cross key 19 When the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the first continuous notice production (prefetch effect production, foresight chance eye production, foresight operation production, foresight vibration production, foresight zone production) or one) is the first rate, and the execution rate of the second continuous notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead action effect, the look-ahead vibration effect, and the look-ahead zone effect other than the first continuous notice effect) is the second ratio, and the first variable effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the first continuous notice effect (the first continuous notice effect effect). , look-ahead chance presentation, look-ahead motion presentation, and look-ahead vibration presentation) is different from the first rate (here, 0%), and the execution rate of the second continuous notice presentation (one of look-ahead effect presentation, look-ahead chance presentation, look-ahead action presentation, and look-ahead vibration presentation other than the first continuous notice presentation) is different from the second rate (here, 0%). Therefore, even when the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the performance effect can be changed according to the game state and the type of variable performance (special pattern), and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, as a ninth feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. 40 to 41, when the second variable production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the first specific game state (normal time reduction game state) after the normal setting (normal mode) is set by the production customization according to the operation of the production button 17 and the cross key 19, the first continuous notice production (forecast effect production, foreseeing chance eye production, foreseeing operation production, foreseeing vibration production, and foreseeing zone production) or one) is the first ratio, and the execution ratio of the second continuous notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead action effect, the look-ahead vibration effect, and the look-ahead zone effect other than the first continuous notice effect) is the second ratio, and the first variable effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the second specific game state (special time-saving game state) after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization. , look-ahead chance presentation, look-ahead motion presentation, and look-ahead vibration presentation) is different from the first rate (here, 0%), and the execution rate of the second continuous notice presentation (one of look-ahead effect presentation, look-ahead chance presentation, look-ahead action presentation, and look-ahead vibration presentation other than the first continuous notice presentation) is different from the second rate (here, 0%). Therefore, even when the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the performance effect can be changed according to the game state and the type of variable performance (special pattern), and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Consecutive notice production scenario decision table)
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a continuous announcement scenario determination table for production modes A to C (normal game state), and FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a continuous announcement scenario determination table for production modes D to H (specific game state).

The continuous announcement scenario determination table is associated with the reserved number of special symbols, the pre-reading designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each announcement scenario, and the announcement scenario to be selected, and for reference, the advance variations in each scenario (before 4 variations, before 3 variations, before 2 variations, and before 1 variation) and the production mode of continuous announcement effects in the variations are described.

"Advance variation" is a variation display (variation performance) executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command, and "the relevant variation" is a variation display (variation performance) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

The "weak notice" means that the mode of presentation differs depending on the type of continuous notice. In the case of the look-ahead action presentation, the second movable member 74 performs a weak action in which the second movable member 74 emits light in blue and the weak action effect sound is output. In the case of the look-ahead zone effect, a blue zone image is displayed and a zone effect sound is output.

The "strong notice" means that the presentation mode differs depending on the continuous notice type, and in the case of the look-ahead action presentation, the second movable member 74 performs a strong action by emitting light in red and a strong action effect sound is output. In the case of the look-ahead zone effect, a red heat zone image is displayed and a heat zone effect sound is output.

The continuous notice production scenario includes a scenario (for example, scenario 11) in which neither weak notice nor strong notice is executed during the advance fluctuation and a weak notice or strong notice is executed during the change (for example, scenario 11), or a scenario (for example, scenario 22) in which the weak notice or strong notice is executed during the advance change and the change.

As a first feature of various tables related to continuous advance notice performances shown in FIGS. 40 to 43, the degree of expectation for big wins is higher when a plurality of types of continuous notice performances are executed than when one type of continuous notice performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that the continuous notice performance is more likely to be executed (execution rate is higher) in the performance modes D to H (specific game state) than in the performance modes A to C (normal game state), that is, the degree of expectation for the big hit is lowered when the continuous notice performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

Instead of differentiating the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice performance between the production modes A to C and the production modes D to H, the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice production may be changed between the production modes A to C such that the continuous advance notice production is easier to execute in the production mode B than the production mode A, or the continuous advance notice production execution ratio may be changed between the production modes D to H such that the continuous advance notice production is easier to be executed in the production mode E than the production mode D. By doing so, the degree of expectation for the big win of the continuous advance notice effect changes between the effect modes, so it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a third feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. 40 to 43, continuous notice effects (here, look-ahead effect effects, look-ahead operation effects) are more likely to be executed when the normal reach effect is scheduled to be executed (read-ahead result) in the effect modes D to H (specific game state) than when the normal reach effect is scheduled to be executed (read-ahead result) in the effect modes A-C (normal game state). Therefore, in the specific game state in which the (super) shortening fluctuation tends to increase more than in the performance modes A to C (normal game state), it is possible to prevent the variable performance from becoming monotonous and improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43, continuous notice performance (here, look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead operation performance, and look-ahead zone performance) is more likely to be executed when SP ready-to-win performance is scheduled to be executed (read-ahead result) in performance modes D to H (specific game state) than when SP ready-to-win performance is scheduled to be executed (read-ahead result) in performance modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, in the specific game state in which the (super) shortening fluctuation tends to increase more than in the performance modes A to C (normal game state), it is possible to prevent the variable performance from becoming monotonous and improve the interest of the game.

A fifth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that the continuous notice effect (here, the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead operation effect, and the look-ahead zone effect) is more likely to be executed when the SPSP ready-to-win effect is scheduled to be executed (read-ahead result) in the effect modes D to H (specific game state) than when the SPSP ready-to-win effect is scheduled to be executed (read-ahead result) in the effect modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variable performance from becoming monotonous in the specific game state in which the super-shortening variation is more likely to occur than in the performance modes A to C (normal game state), thereby improving the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that the continuous notice effect (here, the look-ahead action effect, the look-ahead zone effect) is more likely to be executed when the full-rotation ready-to-win effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in the effect modes D to H (specific game state) than when the full-rotation ready-to-win effect is scheduled to be executed (read-ahead result) in the effect modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variable performance from becoming monotonous in the specific game state in which the super-shortening variation is more likely to occur than in the performance modes A to C (normal game state), thereby improving the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that the effect modes A to C (normal game state) are more likely to execute the anticipatory vibration effect (vibration effect without the effective period of the effect button 17 or the display of the operation promotion image) (the execution ratio is high = the degree of expectation for the big win is different) than in the effect modes D to G (specific game state). Therefore, in the performance modes A to C (normal game state) in which the staying period tends to be longer than in the performance modes D to H (specific game state), the player can easily experience the read-ahead vibration performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, in the performance modes D to H (specific game state) in which the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in the performance modes A to C (normal game state), the read-ahead vibration performance can be made to have rarity, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the performance modes D to H may be easier to execute the look-ahead vibration performance (execution rate may be higher) than the performance modes A to C. In addition, in the normal game state, the performance mode A makes it easier to execute the look-ahead continuous performance than in the performance mode B or C, so that the execution ratio of the look-ahead vibration performance can be made different between the performance modes A to C, and in the specific game state, the performance mode D makes it easier to execute the look-ahead vibration performance than the performance modes E to H, so that the execution ratio of the look-ahead vibration performance can be made different between the performance modes D to H. By doing so, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for a big win when the anticipatory vibration effect is executed between the effect modes, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the eighth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 40 to 43, a specific reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is scheduled to be executed (prefetch result) in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), and a specific reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is scheduled to be executed (prefetch result) in the effect modes D to H (specific game state). , there is a point that the look-ahead vibration effect is less likely to be executed (the execution ratio is low). Therefore, in the performance modes D to H (specific game state) in which the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in the performance modes A to C (normal game state), the read-ahead vibration performance can be made to have rarity, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As the ninth feature of various tables related to the continuous advance notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43, performance modes D to H (specific game state) are easier to execute (execution ratio is higher) than performance modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, in the performance modes D to H (specific game state) in which the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in the performance modes A to C (normal game state), the read-ahead vibration performance can be made to have rarity, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

A tenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that the ready-to-win effects (normal ready-to-win effects, SP ready-to-win effects, and SPSP ready-to-win effects) are less likely to be executed (normal reach effects, SP reach effects, and SPSP reach effects) in the variable effects that are subject to the notice of the continuous advance notice effects when the continuous notice effects that end with one variable effect are executed in the effect modes D to H (specific game state) than when the continuous advance notice effects that end with one variable effect are executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state). low rate of Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that the ready-to-win effects (normal ready-to-win effects, SP ready-to-win effects, and SPSP ready-to-win effects) are more likely to be executed in the variable effects that are subject to the notice of the continuous advance notice effects when the continuous notice effects ending with two variable effects are executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) than when the continuous advance notice effects that end with two variable effects are executed in the effect modes D to H (specific game state). mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

A twelfth feature of various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that when continuous notice effects can be executed over multiple variable effects (the number of reservations is 2 to 4), the continuous notice effect with only one variable effect in production modes D to H (specific game state) is executed more than the case where the continuous notice effect with only one variable effect is executed in production modes A to C (normal game state). (Normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SP SP reach effect) is difficult to execute. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

A thirteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that the ready-to-win performance (normal ready-to-win performance, SP ready-to-win performance, SPSP ready-to-win performance) is more likely to be executed in the variable performance to be notified of the continuous notice performance in the case where the continuous notice performance over three times of the variable performance is executed in the performance modes A to C (normal game state) than in the case where the continuous notice performance over three times of the variable performance is executed in the performance modes D to H (specific game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

The fourteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that when the continuous notice effects over three variable effects are executed in the effect modes D to H (specific game state) than in the case where the continuous notice effects over three times of the variable effects are executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), the ready-to-win effects (for example, the SP reach effect, the SPSP reach effect) are more likely to be executed in the variable effects that are subject to the notice of the continuous notice effects. mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifteenth feature of various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. 40 to 43, the same movable member (second movable member 74) can be used to execute the look-ahead motion effect in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to H (specific game state). be done. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

The sixteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that when executing the look-ahead action effect in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to H (specific game state), the ratio (100%) of operating the second movable member 74 that is not used in the decision effect is higher than the ratio (0%) of operating the first movable member 73 that is used in the decision effect described later. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that a big win has occurred just because the look-ahead action effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the first movable member 73 may be operated instead of the second movable member 74 in the strong advance notice of the look-ahead motion effect. Even in this case, when the look-ahead motion effect is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to H (specific game state), the ratio of operating the second movable member 74 should be higher than the ratio of operating the first movable member 73.

A seventeenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that, when the look-ahead vibration effect is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to H (specific game state), the ratio (0%) of the effect button 17 in the normal state is higher than the ratio (0%) in which the effect button 17 is in the projected state. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the effect button 17 projecting (projecting only in a decided effect, which will be described later), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the strong notice of the anticipatory vibration effect, the effect button 17 may be vibrated in a protruding state instead of being vibrated in the normal state. Even in this case, when the pre-reading vibration performance is executed in the performance modes A to C (normal game state) and the performance modes D to H (specific game state), it is preferable that the ratio of setting the performance button 17 to the normal state is higher than the ratio of the performance button 17 to the projecting state.

As an eighteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 40 to 43, in a predetermined period after the start of the variable effect that is the notice target of the continuous notice effect (from the start of the fluctuation to the first high-speed change period of the effect pattern 70a), the display of the operation promotion image is accompanied by the display of the operation promoting image, rather than the weak notice of the look-ahead action effect (weak action of the first movable member 73 + blue light emission) or the weak notice of the look-ahead effect effect (display of the blue effect image around the effect pattern 70a). When the weak notice of the look-ahead vibration effect (weak vibration of the effect button 17 for one second) is executed, the expectation for the big win is higher. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player by using the operation means that the player can operate, and to improve the interest of the game.

40 to 43, the 19th feature of the various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect is that in a predetermined period after the start of the variable effect to be notified of the continuous notice effect (from the start of the fluctuation to the first high-speed fluctuation period of the effect pattern 70a), the strong notice of the look-ahead vibration effect is stronger than the strong notice of the look-ahead motion effect (strong operation of the first movable member 73 + red light emission) or the strong notice of the look-ahead effect effect (display of the red effect image around the effect pattern 70a). The big hit expectation is higher when (strong vibration of the effect button 17 for 3 seconds) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player by using the operation means that the player can operate, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Continuous notice effect execution processing of effect control unit)
The continuous announcement effect execution processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing continuous advance notice effect execution processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a special figure variation pattern designation command from the main control board 110 in step E540-1. When the special figure variation pattern designation command is received, the process is moved to step E540-2, and when the special figure variation pattern designation command is not received, the current continuous notice performance execution processing is terminated.

At step E540-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the announcement scenario of the continuous announcement performance (read-ahead operation presentation, look-ahead effect presentation, look-ahead vibration presentation, look-ahead zone presentation) stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and at step E540-3, determines whether or not the announcement scenario of the continuous announcement presentation is stored. When the advance notice scenario is stored, the processing is shifted to step E540-4, and when the advance notice scenario is not stored, the current continuous advance notice performance execution processing is terminated assuming that the power source is restored or the command abnormality (missing of the prefetching designation command, etc.) occurs.

In step E540-4, the sub CPU 130a determines a notice pattern (type of continuous notice performance, weak notice, strong notice) to be executed in the current variable performance in accordance with the notice scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and sets a continuous notice performance command corresponding to the determined notice pattern in a transmission buffer in step E540-5. As a result, the continuous announcement effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the continuous announcement effect corresponding to the determined announcement pattern is executed. When this process ends, the current continuous announcement effect execution process ends.

According to the continuous notice performance execution processing shown in FIG. 44, when the performance scenario of the continuous notice performance is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area due to the restoration of the power supply or the occurrence of the command abnormality (missing of the look-ahead designation command, etc.), the continuous notice performance is not executed in the variable performance to be started from now on. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the execution of the continuous announcement effect becomes unstable due to the restoration of the power supply or the occurrence of the command abnormality, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Ramp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit)
The lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing a lamp change effect execution process in the effect control section 130m.

In step E550-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not an icon change scenario is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the icon change scenario is stored, the process is shifted to step E550-2 assuming that the icon change effect is executed, and if the icon change scenario is not stored, the change scenario is cleared from the sub RAM 130c.

In step E550-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is time to change the icon. If it is the icon change timing, the process proceeds to step E550-3, and if it is not the icon change timing, the current lamp change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E550-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color after the icon change in the transmission buffer. As a result, a lamp performance command is transmitted to the lamp control part 150, and the lamp change performance is executed by changing the light emission mode (light emission color, lighting/blinking) of the winning entrance lamp NR corresponding to the color change of the icon.

In step E550-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag indicating that the lamp changing effect is being executed is set in the sub RAM 130c. When the lamp changing flag is set, the current lamp changing performance execution processing is ended, and when the lamp changing flag is not set, the lamp changing flag is set and the current lamp changing performance execution processing is ended.

In step E550-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process proceeds to step E550-7, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the current ramp change effect execution process is terminated.

The sub CPU 130a clears the lamp changing flag set in the sub RAM 130c in step E550-7, sets a lamp effect end command in the transmission buffer in step E550-8, and ends the current lamp change effect execution process. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the lamp change effect being executed is terminated.

Thus, according to the lamp change effect execution processing shown in FIG. 45, the lamp change effect is executed by changing the lighting mode (light emission color, lighting/blinking) of the winning entrance lamp NR corresponding to the icon change in the icon change effect. Therefore, synergistic effect with the icon change effect can enhance the performance effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the lamp change performance execution processing shown in FIG. 45, unlike the icon change performance and the continuous advance notice performance, the lamp change performance is not executed again even when the power is restored during the execution of the lamp change performance. Therefore, it is possible to secure the rarity of the lamp change effect while reducing the control burden, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the lamp change performance execution processing shown in FIG. 45, when the variation display of the second special symbol (second variation performance) is executed in the normal game state, the icon change performance is not executed, so the lamp change performance is not executed either. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is possible to encourage the game ball to enter the first start hole 45 and improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the lamp change performance execution processing shown in FIG. 45, when the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation performance) is executed in the specific game state, the icon change performance is not executed, so the lamp change performance is not executed either. Therefore, in the specific game state, it is possible to encourage the winning of the game ball to the second start hole 47, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when power restoration occurs like the icon change production, the lamp change production may be executed again in the fluctuation production started after the power recovery. In this case, it is preferable to execute the lamp change effect so as to correspond to the icon change effect that starts after the power is restored.

Further, instead of executing the lamp change performance corresponding to the icon change performance, the final light emission mode of the prize winning entrance lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the previous change to the relevant change, etc. may be determined by lottery, and the lamp change performance may be executed.

In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) is executed in the normal game state, or when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed in the specific game state, when the lamp change performance (the lamp change performance for the pending memory to be executed later) is already executed, the lamp change performance may be terminated and not restarted, or the lamp change performance may be interrupted and restarted after the variable display of the special symbol is completed.

(Light emission effect determination processing at the time of winning of the effect control unit)
Using FIG. 46, the prize-winning lighting effect determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the win-time light emission effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m, and this process is executed in the above-described special figure special electric effect process.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E560-1. When the prefetching designation command is received, the processing is moved to step E560-2, and when the prefetching designation command is not received, the winning lighting effect determination processing is ended.

In step E560-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the prefetch designation command received from the main control board 110, and in step E560-3, determines whether or not the current time is the period during which the prize-winning lighting effect can be executed. If it is in the executable period of the light emission performance at the time of winning, the processing is shifted to step E560-4, and if it is not the period in which the light emission performance at the time of winning can be executed, the light emission performance at the time of winning is not executed based on the prefetch designation command received this time, and the current light emission performance determination processing at the time of winning is ended.

The ``executable period of light emitting performance at the time of winning'' includes the fact that the jackpot game is not being executed, the normal game state when the prefetching designation command based on the winning to the first start port 45 is received, and the time-saving game state when the prefetching designation command based on the winning to the second start port 47 is received.

In step E560-4, the sub CPU 130a acquires a winning light emission effect pattern determination random value for determining the effect pattern of the winning light emission effect to be executed in the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10, and in step E560-5 selects a winning light emission effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 47) for determining the winning light emission effect pattern. The details of the win-time light emission effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E560-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a winning light effect pattern. Specifically, by referring to a winning light emission performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47, one winning light emission performance pattern is determined from among a plurality of winning light emission performance patterns based on the type of special symbol, the type of pre-reading designation command (scheduled variation pattern), and the selection rate (%) of each winning light emission performance pattern.

In step E560-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined winning-time light-emitting effect pattern is a pattern for executing a winning-time light-emitting effect. In the case of the pattern of executing the light emission effect at the time of winning, the processing is shifted to step E560-8, and in the case of the pattern of not executing the light emission effect at the time of winning, the current light emission effect determination processing at the time of winning is ended.

In step E560-8, the sub CPU 130a sets the winning light emission effect execution command corresponding to the determined winning light emission effect pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current winning light emission effect determination process. As a result, the win light emission effect execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the win light emission effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the win light emission effect execution command.

(Light emission effect pattern determination table at the time of winning)
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of a winning-time light-emitting effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a winning-time light-emitting effect pattern.

The type of special pattern, the type of prefetching designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each winning light emission performance pattern, and the winning light emission performance pattern to be selected are associated with the winning light emission performance pattern determination table, and the performance mode for each winning light emission performance pattern is described as a reference.

As the winning lighting performance patterns, a winning lighting performance pattern 00 in which the winning lighting performance is not executed and winning lighting lighting performance patterns 01 and 02 in which the winning lighting performance is executed are set, and in the winning lighting performance patterns 01 and 02, the top lamp 10b of the lighting device 10 for the frame emits white or yellow light and a predetermined sound is output from the voice output device 9.例文帳に追加

A first feature of the light emission effect pattern determination table at the time of winning shown in FIG. 47 is that the light emission effect at the time of winning is more likely to be executed with a look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern) with high expectation of big win than with a look-ahead designation command with low expectation of big win (scheduled variation pattern). By doing so, it becomes easy to increase the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the variable performance with a high degree of expectation for a big win, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the winning-time light-emitting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that the winning-time light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for a big win, and to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the winning light emission pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that there is no winning light emission effect pattern (performance mode) for determining the big win (accurate), unlike the icon final display mode shown in FIG. By doing so, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the player from the time when the game ball enters the starting hole until the result of the variable performance is derived, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a prize-winning light-emitting performance pattern for finalizing a big win (for example, the top lamp 10b emits light in rainbow colors and outputting a final notification sound from the voice output device 9) may be provided, and in this case, the winning-time light-emitting performance pattern for finalizing a big win may be determined at the lowest rate when the all-rotation ready-to-win is executed.

(Variation production pattern determination processing of production control unit)
Fluctuation effect pattern determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation effect pattern determination process in the effect control unit 130m, and this process is executed in the above-described special figure special electric effect process.

First, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received variation pattern specification command in step E610-1, and selects a variation pattern determination table (see FIGS. 49 to 51) corresponding to the current presentation mode in step E610-2. The details of the variation effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E610-3, the sub CPU 130a refers to the selected variable effect pattern determination table, determines one variable effect pattern from a plurality of variable effect patterns, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E610-4, the sub CPU 130a sets the variable effect pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and terminates the current variable effect pattern determination process. As a result, the variable effect pattern instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed.

(Variation production pattern judgment table)
49 is a diagram showing a variable production pattern determination table for production modes A to C that is referred to for determining a variable production pattern in production modes A to C (normal game state), FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a variable production pattern judgment table for production modes D to G (specific game state) that is referenced to determine a variable production pattern in production modes D to G, and FIG. It is a figure which shows.

As shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the variable performance pattern determination table is associated with a special figure variation pattern designation command, a selection rate (%) of each variable performance pattern, and a selected variable performance pattern, and for reference, the performance configuration in each variable performance pattern is described.

"Variation" in the column of effect configuration indicates that normal variable display is executed in which the ready-to-win state by the effect pattern 70a is not formed.
"Shortened variation" indicates that a shortened variation display is performed in which the reach state is not formed for a shorter period of time than the normal variation display.

``Pseudo-failure'' indicates that a pseudo-continuous failure performance resulting in no pseudo-continuous performance is executed after performing a performance to incite whether or not the pseudo-continuous performance to change again after temporarily stopping the performance pattern 70a during one-time variable display of the special symbols is performed.
“Pseudo-success” indicates that after performing an effect inciting whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed, the pseudo-continuous success effect is executed as a result of the pseudo-continuous effect being performed.
``(Variation→pseudo-success)×2'' indicates that two sets of performances are performed, with one set of performances in which pseudo-continuous success performances as a result of performing pseudo-continuous performances are performed after the stimulating performances for inciting whether or not the pseudo-continuous performances are performed.
``(Variation→pseudo-success)×3'' indicates that three sets of performances are performed, with one set of performances in which pseudo-continuous success performances as a result of performing pseudo-continuous performances are performed after the stimulating performances for inciting whether or not the pseudo-continuous performances are performed.

"Variation (first episode)" indicates that there is a possibility of being executed in a variable presentation including pseudo-failure and pseudo-success, and that the first-stage presentation (movie reproduction of the first episode of the story) of the stage presentation (story presentation) in which the presentation can progress step by step is performed.
"Variation (Second episode)" indicates that there is a possibility that a variable presentation including pseudo-failure and pseudo-success will be executed, and that the second stage presentation (movie reproduction of the second story following the first episode) of the stage presentation (story presentation) in which the presentation can be progressed in stages will be performed.
"Variation (3rd story)" indicates that there is a possibility of being executed in variable performances including pseudo-failure and pseudo-success, and that the 3rd-stage performance (movie reproduction of the 3rd story following the 2nd story) of the staged performance (story performance) in which the performance can progress step by step is performed.

"N reach" indicates that the above-described normal reach effect is executed.
“N “7” ready-to-win” indicates that the above-described normal ready-to-win effect is executed in a state where the ready-to-win state is formed by the effect symbol 70a of “7”.
"SP reach" indicates that the above-described SP reach effect is executed.
"Special SP reach" indicates that the above-described special SP reach effect is executed.
"SPSP ready-to-win" indicates that the above-described SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed.
"Full rotation reach" indicates that the above-described full rotation reach effect is executed.

"SP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that an SP ready-to-win effect will be executed.
"SPSP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that an SPSP ready-to-win effect is to be executed.
“Full spin development” indicates that a development effect suggesting full spin reach is executed.

"CI" indicates that one of a plurality of cut-in effects with different degrees of expectation for big wins is executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period or the elapse of the valid period.
"Decision" indicates that a decision effect suggesting whether or not a jackpot game is to be executed is executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period or the elapse of the effective period.
"Failure" indicates that a determined failure effect suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is executed as a result of the determined effect.
"Success" indicates that a determined success effect suggesting that a jackpot game is performed is executed as a result of the determined effect.

"Losing" means that the game is temporarily stopped by forming a losing dot (a losing display mode such as "358" or "948" different from the initial dots to be described later) by the production pattern 70a which is composed of only numbers and does not include characters.
"c symbol loss" indicates that the performance symbol 70a of the display mode including the character forms a losing dot (a losing display mode such as "358" or "948" different from the initial dot to be described later) and temporarily stops.
"IC" indicates that an eye-catching effect is executed in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped is displayed on the image display device.
"Pattern match" means that the game is temporarily stopped after forming a big hit result (a big hit display mode such as "222" or "777") by the effect pattern 70a which does not include characters but only numbers.
"c pattern match" indicates that the game is temporarily stopped after forming a big hit result (big win display mode such as "222" or "777") by the effect pattern 70a of the display mode including characters.

The ``re-lottery'' means whether or not the effect pattern 70a temporarily stopped with the big win (big win display mode) becomes an advantageous big win for the player (whether or not the even-numbered effect pattern that normally causes a big win becomes an odd-numbered effect pattern that causes a certain variable big win, or whether or not the effect pattern becomes "7" that causes the most advantageous big win game to be executed). It shows that the re-lottery effect that is performed is executed.

"Strong vibration 4 seconds" indicates that a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 4 seconds.
"Strong vibration for 1 second" indicates that a strong vibration effect (big win confirmation vibration effect) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second.

"Special symbol variation (continuation of end notification effect)" means that only the variable display of the special symbol TZ is performed without performing the variable display of the effect symbol 70a while continuing the end notification effect executed during the last variable effect in the special time-saving game state described later.
"Resurrection effect" indicates that a resurrection effect is performed in which a special time-saving game state ends and a jackpot is announced.
"Special pattern matching" means that the special pattern TZ forms a big hit (jackpot display mode such as "222" or "777") and stops displaying in a state where the production pattern 70a is not displayed.

The “chance effect” indicates that the above-described chance effect (effect of displaying a character image of “chance approaching” on the first image display device 70) is performed.
The ``acquisition performance (strong descending movement of the character)'' indicates that a big win acquisition performance (a performance in which the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position and the success effect image SEF is displayed) suggesting that the big win has been won is performed.

"Result display" indicates that the above-described result display is performed.
The ``resurrection performance (strong descending motion of the character)'' indicates that a revival performance (a performance in which the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operation position and the success effect image SEF is displayed) is performed to inform the player of a big win by pretending that the normal time-saving game state is finished.

“Variation (short rush effect)” means that the above-described short rush effect is performed when it is the first change in the special time-saving game state, and the above-described short rush effect is not performed when it is not the first time change of the special time-saving game state.
"Variation + long rush effect" indicates that the above-described long rush effect is performed in the first time fluctuation of the special time saving game state.

"Immediate hit success" indicates that an effect is performed in which the player is notified of a favorable result (jackpot) without going through the reach.
"Immediate hit success (strong descending motion of character object)" indicates that an effect (a effect in which the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position and a success effect image SEF is displayed) is performed to inform the player of a favorable result (jackpot) without going through reach.

“End notification effect (door closed)” means that the above-described end notification effect (effect in which the door image is closed and a character image notifying the end of the special time-saving gaming state is displayed) is performed.

A first feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that when the SP ready-to-win performance or the SPSP ready-to-win performance is executed, an eye-catching performance suggesting that the performance pattern 70a is stopped is executed and the performance pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with the change of the display mode of the performance pattern 70a, and it is possible to suggest in advance that the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A second characteristic of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that there are a variable performance pattern in which a determined success performance is executed and patterns are aligned when a big win is obtained, and a variable performance pattern in which a determined success performance is executed after the symbols are aligned. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect in the case of a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that, in a variable performance pattern for a big hit, a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmed vibration performance) is executed by strongly vibrating the performance button 17 for 4 seconds when the performance patterns 70a not including characters are aligned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A fourth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is executed by strongly vibrating the performance button 17 for one second when the performance pattern 70a including the character is aligned (c pattern alignment). Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The fifth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that the ratio of the ready-to-win performance with the even-numbered performance pattern 70a (the performance pattern that normally results in the big win by the big win) is higher than the ratio of the ready-to-win performance (normal reach performance, SP ready-to-win performance, SPSP ready-to-win performance) in the odd-numbered performance pattern 70a other than "7" (the performance pattern in which the big win results in the probability variable jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when the odd-numbered performance symbol 70a other than "7" results in a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The sixth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that the ratio of the ready-to-win performance (normal ready-to-win performance, SP ready-to-win performance, SPSP ready-to-win performance) to the performance pattern 70a of "7" (the most advantageous probability variable jackpot performance design by becoming the jackpot) is lower than the ratio of the ready-to-win performance to the even-numbered performance pattern 70a (the performance pattern to usually become a big hit by becoming a big win). Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when the performance symbol 70a of "7" results in a big win, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The seventh feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that reach production (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production) is performed with odd production patterns 70a other than "7" (production patterns that become a definite variable jackpot by becoming a big hit) than reach production (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production). One of the points is that the ratio of the hit effect and the SPSP reach effect) to be performed is lower. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when the performance symbol 70a of "7" results in a big win, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The eighth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that the expectation of big win is higher when the ready-to-win performance is executed with the performance pattern 70a of "7" than when the ready-to-win performance is executed with the even-numbered performance pattern 70a or the odd-numbered performance pattern 70a other than "7". Therefore, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player as to which kind of effect pattern the ready-to-win effect is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

A ninth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that the performance modes D to G (specific game state) are more likely than the performance modes A to C (normal game state) to execute the ready-to-win performance (SPSP ready-to-win performance) with the performance pattern 70a of "7" (the performance symbol to become the most advantageous probability variable big hit by becoming the big win) when the most advantageous variable big win is achieved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the performance modes D to G (specific game state), and to improve the interest of the game.

A tenth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that in the performance modes A to C (normal game state), even if the ready-to-win performance is executed with the performance symbol 70a of "7", the big win is not determined, but in the performance modes D to G (specific game state), when the ready-to-win performance is executed with the performance symbol 70a of "7", the big win is determined. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the performance modes D to G (specific game state), and to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that the same variable performance pattern is more likely to be executed when the first special symbol loss variation display (loss first variation performance) is executed in the special time-saving game state than when the first special symbol loss variation display (loss first variation performance) is executed in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to make different performance effects in the case where the loss variation display (first variation performance) of the first special pattern is executed depending on the game state, and to prompt the player to win the game ball through the second start port 47 in the special time-saving game state, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A twelfth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that the same variable performance pattern is more likely to be executed when the first special symbol loss variation display (loss first variation performance) is executed in the special time reduction game state than when the second special symbol loss variation display (loss second variation performance) is executed in the normal time reduction game state. Therefore, it is possible to vary the production effect depending on the game state and the type of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a thirteenth feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, when the second special symbol losing fluctuation display (loss second fluctuation production) is executed in the special time reduction gaming state, and when the first special symbol loss fluctuation display (losing first fluctuation production) is executed in the special time reduction gaming state, A sign production (reach fanning production) that suggests the possibility that the reach production will be executed is executed, but the reach production is executed. The point is that the execution ratio of the variable production that is not performed is different (the execution ratio is high when the second special symbol loss first fluctuation production is executed in the special time saving game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the presentation effect of whether or not ready-to-win is executed depending on the game state and the type of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, rather than the case where the first special design fluctuation display (the first fluctuation effect of losing) of the first special design (the first fluctuation production of losing) is executed in the special time -time gaming technique, it is more likely that the reach production will be executed if the second special pattern fluctuation display (the second fluctuation production of the losing) is executed (Reach Higing Action. The execution ratio of fluctuations in which the reach is executed but the reach production is not executed, but the vice versa may be the other way around. In this case, in both the case of executing the first variable performance of loss and the case of executing the second variation performance of loss in the special time-saving game state, the variable performance in which the ready-to-win staggering performance is executed but the ready-to-win performance is not executed may be executed, and then the execution ratio of the first variable performance of losing may be increased.

The fourteenth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is the first period in the normal game state (during the consumption period of the remaining second suspension after the end of the time saving game state) and the second period different from the first period (after the consumption period of the remaining second reservation after the end of the time reduction game state). are different. Therefore, even in the normal game state, it is possible to vary the presentation effect of whether or not ready-to-win is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fifteenth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, when the second special symbol losing variation display (loss second variation performance) is executed in the normal time saving game state, and when the first special symbol losing variation display (losing first variation performance) is executed in the special time reduction gaming state, A predictive performance (reach fanning performance) that suggests the possibility that the ready-to-win performance will be executed is executed, but the ready-to-win performance is executed. The point is that the execution ratio of the variable production that is not performed is different. Therefore, it is possible to vary the presentation effect of whether or not ready-to-win is executed depending on the game state and the type of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A sixteenth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that a stage performance (story performance) that can progress step by step in the variable performance in which the pseudo-continuous performance is executed can be executed, and the second stage performance (movie reproduction of the second story story) can be executed after the normal ready-to-win performance with a low expectation is executed, while the second-stage performance (movie reproduction of the second story episode) is not executed after the execution of the SP/SPSP ready-to-win performance with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect by making it different depending on the type of the ready-to-win performance whether or not the stage performance progresses, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the ready-to-win performance is always executed in the variable performance pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, a variable performance pattern in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed even if the pseudo-continuous performance is executed may be provided.

In addition, if the game is temporarily stopped with a losing result after the cut-in performance or the determined failure performance, it is determined that the game will be lost, but after the cut-in performance or the determined failure performance, it is possible to execute a revival performance that determines that the game will be a big win.

In addition, when the variable display of the first special pattern (first variable performance) is executed in the special time-saving game state, a predictive performance (ready-to-win fanning performance) suggesting the possibility of executing the ready-to-win performance is executed, but the ready-to-win performance is not executed to prevent the variable performance to be executed, but it may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute at a lower rate than when the second special symbol losing variation display (second variation effect) is executed in the normal game state or the normal time-saving game state.

(Timer effect determination processing in the effect control unit)
The timer effect determination processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the timer effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m, and this process is executed after the variation effect pattern determination process (the process of determining the variation effect pattern based on the special figure variation pattern designation command) in the special figure special electric effect process described above.

In step E620-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the current variation performance pattern, and in step E620-2, determines whether or not a performance (SP ready-to-win performance, SPSP ready-to-win performance, all-rotation ready-to-win performance, special SP ready-to-win performance, chance performance) above the ready-to-reach performance (including chance performance) is to be executed. If an effect equal to or higher than the ready-to-win effect is to be executed, the processing is shifted to step E620-3, and if an effect equal to or greater than the SP ready-to-win effect is not executed, the current timer effect determination processing is terminated.

In step E620-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the number of event timer effects (“0 times” to “2 times”) to be executed during the current variable effect using the event timer frequency determination table (see FIG. 53). Specifically, the big hit lottery result, variation effect pattern, etc., are collated with the event timer frequency determination table. Details of the event timer frequency determination table will be described later.

The event timer performance means that any one of a plurality of suggestive events (except icon change) expected to execute a jackpot game occurs in the execution process of the variable performance, and the performance suggests the timing of the occurrence of the suggestive event, but it is difficult for the player to discriminate the kind of the suggestive event when the event timer performance is executed, but the player can discriminate the kind of the suggestive event when the suggestive event occurs.

Suggestion events include normal reach effects, pseudo-runs, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects, all-rotation reach effects, special SP reach, effective period, jackpot pattern stop, and the like.

In step E620-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined number of times of the event timer effect is to execute the event timer effect. If the event timer effect is to be executed (the number of times of the event timer effect is "1 time" or "2 times"), the processing is shifted to step E620-5, and if the event timer effect is not to be executed (the number of times of the event timer effect is "0 times"), the current timer effect determination processing is terminated.

In step E620-5, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined number of event timer effects is one. If it is once, the process moves to step E620-6, and if it is twice instead of once, the process moves to step E620-9.

In step E620-6, sub CPU 130a determines a suggested event suggested by the event timer effect and a timer type classified according to the type and length of the timer, using the suggested event determination table for one timer (see FIG. 54). Specifically, the variation performance pattern and the like are collated with the suggestive event determination table for one-time timer. Details of the suggested event determination table for one timer will be described later.

The timer types include a short timer that is a short timer time category, a middle timer that is a long timer time category, and a long timer that is a long timer time category. Note that the timer times set according to the three types of timers are short timer<middle timer<long timer.

In step E620-7, sub CPU 130a determines the timer update pattern (drawing mode) in the event timer effect using the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 56). Specifically, the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, and the like are checked against the update pattern determination table. Details of the update pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E620-8, the sub CPU 130a sets a suggested event and a timer effect pattern command indicating an update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and terminates the current timer effect determination process. As a result, the timer effect pattern command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the event timer effect during the variable effect is performed.

In step E620-9, the sub CPU 130a determines the suggested event suggested by the first event timer effect and the timer type classified according to the type and length of the timer, using the first suggested event determination table for two timers (see FIG. 55(a)). Specifically, the variation effect pattern and the like are collated with the first suggested event determination table for two timers. The details of the first suggested event determination table for two timers will be described later.

In step E620-10, the sub CPU 130a determines the timer update pattern (drawing mode) in the first event timer effect using the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 56). Specifically, the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, and the like are checked against the update pattern determination table. Details of the update pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E620-11, the sub CPU 130a sets a suggested event and a timer effect specifying command indicating an update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the timer effect specifying command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the first event timer effect during the variable effect is performed.

In step E620-12, the sub CPU 130a determines the suggested event suggested by the second event timer effect and the timer type classified by the length of the timer using the second suggested event determination table for two timers (see FIG. 55(b)). Specifically, the variation performance pattern and the like are collated with the second suggestive event determination table for two timers. The details of the second suggested event determination table for two timers will be described later.

In step E620-13, the sub CPU 130a determines the timer update pattern (effect mode) in the second event timer effect using the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 56). Specifically, the timer type, the jackpot determination result, and the like are checked against the update pattern determination table. Details of the update pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E620-14, the sub CPU 130a sets a suggested event and a timer effect pattern command indicating an update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and terminates the current timer effect determination process. As a result, the timer effect designation command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the second event timer effect during the variable effect is performed.

(Event timer count determination table)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an event timer number determination table referred to when determining the number of times of event timer effects to be executed during variable effects. The event timer frequency determination table is associated with a jackpot determination result, a variable performance pattern, a distribution ratio (%) for each frequency of each event timer performance between normal setting and simple setting by performance customization, and the determined frequency of event timer performance.

The number of times of event timer performance is set to three kinds of "0 times" that the event timer performance is not executed, "1 time" that the event timer performance is executed once, and "2 times" that the event timer performance is executed twice.

It should be noted that "(special 1)" described in the column of the variable production pattern means that it is a variable production pattern related to the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(special 2)" means that it is a variable production pattern related to the second variable production corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

Also, the ratio of selecting each number of times (once, two times) at which the event timer performance is executed in the simple setting is 1/2 of the ratio at which each number of times (once, two times) at which the event timer performance is executed is selected, but it may be larger or smaller than 1/2.

The first feature of the event timer frequency determination table shown in FIG. 53 is that the event timer performance is more likely to be executed in the case of a big win than in the case of a big win determination result, and that the event timer performance is more likely to be executed in the case of a ready-to-win performance with a high degree of expectation for a big win than in the case of a ready-to-win performance with a low degree of expectation for a big win. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the event timer count determination table shown in FIG. 53 is that the number of times the event timer effects are executed is more likely to occur in the event of a big win than in the case of a loss. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the number of executions of the event timer effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the event timer number-of-times determination table shown in FIG. 53 is that the number of executions of the event timer performance tends to increase when a ready-to-win performance with a high degree of expectation for a big win is executed, rather than when a ready-to-win performance with a low degree of expectation for a big win is executed. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the event timer number-of-times determination table shown in FIG. 53 is that the execution ratio of the timer effect changes depending on the effect customization setting (normal setting, simple setting) made by the player. By doing so, it is possible to set an effect balance that suits the taste of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the performance modes A to C, when the second variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the special SP ready-to-win performance pattern, the timer performance is executed, but the timer performance may not be executed (limited). In this case, when the second variable performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed during the performance modes A to C, and when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed during the performance modes D to H, the timer performance is not executed.

(Suggestion event determination table for one timer)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a suggestive event when one event timer effect is executed during a variable effect, and a suggestive event determination table for one-time timer referred to when determining the timer type. The suggestive event determination table for one-time timer is associated with a variable effect pattern, a distribution ratio (%) for each suggestive event, a suggestive event to be determined, and a timer type.

Eight types of suggestive events are set: normal reach, pseudo-run, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, all-rotation reach performance, special SP reach, effective period, and jackpot symbol stop.

In addition, three timer types are set as timer types: a short timer that is a short timer time category, a middle timer that is a long timer time category, and a long timer that is a long timer time category. Note that the timer times set according to the three types of timers are short timer<middle timer<long timer.

A first feature of the suggestive event determination table for one-time timer shown in FIG. 54 is that the types of suggested events are set differently according to the variable effect pattern. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the timer effect, prevent the player from getting bored, and improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the suggestive event determination table for one-time timer shown in FIG. 54 is that the higher the expectation of the big win is, the easier it is to determine the timer type in which the longer timer time is set (the higher the expectation of the big win, the easier it is to determine the long timer as the timer type). By doing so, the longer the timer time in the timer presentation, the higher the degree of expectation for a big win, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for the length of the timer time, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Suggestion event determination table for timer 2 times)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a suggestive event when the event timer effect is executed twice during the variable effect, and a suggestive event determination table for two timers referred to when determining the timer type. The suggestive event determination table for two timers is associated with a variable effect pattern, a distribution ratio (%) for each suggestive event, a suggested event to be determined, and a timer type.

FIG. 55(a) is a diagram showing a double-timer first suggested event determination table for determining the type of the first suggested event and the type of the timer type, and FIG. 55(b) is a diagram showing a second suggested event determination table for the double-timer for determining the type of the second suggested event and the type of the timer type.

Seven kinds of suggestive events are set: normal reach, pseudo-run, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, effective period, all-rotation reach performance, and jackpot symbol stop.

In addition, three timer types are set as timer types: a short timer that is a short timer time category, a middle timer that is a long timer time category, and a long timer that is a long timer time category. Note that the timer times set according to the three types of timers are short timer<middle timer<long timer.

A first feature of the suggestive event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 55 is that the kind of suggested event is set differently according to the variable effect pattern. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the timer effect, prevent the player from getting bored, and improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the suggestive event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 55 is that both an event executed early in the variable performance and an event executed late in the variable performance are likely to be determined as suggestive events as two event timer performances to be executed during the variable performance. By doing so, the expectation of the player can be improved for a long period of time, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The third feature of the suggested event determination table for the double timer shown in FIG. 55 is that the higher the expectation of a big win is, the easier it is to determine a timer type in which a longer timer time is set (the higher the expectation of a big win, the easier it is to determine a long timer as the timer type). By doing so, the longer the timer time in the timer presentation, the higher the degree of expectation for a big win, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for the length of the timer time, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Update pattern determination table)
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an update pattern determination table referred to when determining a timer update pattern (effect mode). The update pattern determination table is associated with the timer type, jackpot determination result, distribution ratio (%) for each update pattern, and determined update pattern, and for reference, the timer time for each update pattern, the timer display mode, the timer display position, and the possibility of execution of the standby display indicating that the execution of the timer effect is waiting are described.

The “normal pattern” is a normal update pattern in which the timer displayed in a predetermined area of the first image display device 70 is subtracted by 1 from the initial number of seconds until it reaches 0 seconds.
The "special pattern" is a special update pattern in which the timer displayed in a predetermined area of the first image display device 70 is decremented by 1 from the initial number of seconds until it reaches 0 seconds, and then decremented by 1 until the timer (number of seconds) is rewound and becomes 0 seconds again.

The expected degree of jackpot for each update pattern corresponding to the short timer is normal pattern 1<normal pattern 2<normal pattern 3.
The expected degree of jackpot for each update pattern corresponding to the middle timer is normal pattern 11<normal pattern 12<normal pattern 13.
The expected jackpot for each update pattern corresponding to the long timer is normal pattern 21<normal pattern 22<normal pattern 23<normal pattern 24<normal pattern 25<special pattern 1<normal pattern 26<normal pattern 27<special pattern 2<normal pattern 28.

In this way, in the timer effect, a plurality of timer times (update patterns) are set, but the timer effect counts down to 0 seconds to cause predetermined events (icon change effect, various ready-to-reach effects, zone effect, count-up effect, effective period of the effect button 17, stop display of the jackpot pattern, etc.) and the effect to suggest the timing of the occurrence of the predetermined event. are

A first feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56 is that an update pattern with a longer timer time is more likely to be determined in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss in the big win lottery result, regardless of the timer type. By doing so, the longer the timer time in the timer presentation, the higher the degree of expectation for a big win, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for the length of the timer time, and the interest in the game can be improved.

A second feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56 is that even if the timer time is the same, the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on the display mode (character color) of the timer. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the display mode of the timer, and to improve the amusement of the game. Specifically, the degree of expectation for a big win related to the display mode (character color) of the timer is white<blue<red<rainbow (confirmed big win).

(Jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
Using FIG. 57, the jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the jackpot announcement effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m, and this process is executed after the variation effect pattern determination process (the process of determining the variation effect pattern based on the special figure variation pattern designation command) in the special figure special electric effect process described above.

In step E650-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable performance pattern to be executed in the current variable performance, and in step E650-2, selects a variable start role announcement determination table (see FIGS. 58 and 59) for determining the role announcement pattern that makes the player expect that the jackpot game will be executed at the time of fluctuation start, and determines the role announcement pattern. The details of the fluctuation start accessory announcement determination table will be described later.

"Variation start role announcement effect" is a kind of big win announcement effect in which the role object (first movable member 73) is operated in an operation mode according to the degree of expectation of a big win at the start of the change effect.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice pattern of the change start role product notice effect is to execute the change start role product notice effect. If the variable start role product announcement performance is not to be executed, the processing is shifted to step E650-5, and if the start role announcement performance is to be executed, a role product announcement performance command corresponding to the role product announcement pattern is set in the transmission buffer in step E650-4. As a result, the character product announcement effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the variation start character product announcement effect corresponding to the character product announcement pattern is executed at the start of the variation effect.

At step E650-5, the sub CPU 130a selects a pre-reach announcement determination table (see FIG. 60) for determining the announcement pattern of the pre-reach announcement performance that makes the player expect that the jackpot game will be executed in the pre-reach performance period (high-speed fluctuation period), and determines the announcement pattern. The details of the pre-reach announcement determination table will be described later.

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice effect is to execute the dialogue notice effect. If the dialogue foretelling effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-7, and if the dialogue foretelling effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-9.

The ``word foretelling effect'' is a kind of big win foretelling effect in which an effective period is generated during the variable performance (high-speed fluctuating period), and in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period or the elapse of the effective time, a word image suggesting the degree of expectation for the big win is displayed on the image display device and a voice corresponding to the word image is output from the voice output device 9. - 特許庁

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects a dialogue announcement pattern determination table (see FIG. 62) for determining a dialogue announcement pattern for a dialogue announcement effect to determine a dialogue announcement pattern, and in step E650-8 sets a dialogue announcement effect command corresponding to the dialogue announcement pattern in a transmission buffer. As a result, the dialog announcement effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the dialog announcement effect corresponding to the dialog announcement pattern is executed during the fluctuation effect (high-speed fluctuation period). The details of the dialog announcement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice effect is to execute the step-up notice effect. If the step-up notice effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-10, and if the step-up notice effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-12.

The 'step-up notice performance' is a kind of jackpot notice performance in which the step performance is executed in a predetermined order until one of a plurality of steps (steps) from the first step (first stage) to the fifth step (final stage) occurs without generating the effective period of the performance button 17 during the variable performance (high-speed fluctuation period).

At step E650-10, the sub CPU 130a selects a step-up notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 63) for determining the step-up notice pattern of the step-up notice effect to determine the step-up notice pattern, and at step E650-11 sets a step-up notice effect command corresponding to the step-up notice pattern in the transmission buffer. Thereby, the step-up notice performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the step-up notice performance corresponding to the step-up notice pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). The details of the dialog announcement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern for executing a pseudo-continuous effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a pseudo-continuous effect, the process moves to step E650-13, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that does not execute a pseudo-continuous effect, the process moves to step E650-15.

At step E650-13, the sub CPU 130a selects a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 64) for determining a pseudo-continuous effect pattern for determining a pseudo-continuous effect pattern, and at step E650-14 sets a pseudo-continuous effect command corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the pseudo-continuous effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pseudo-continuous effect corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Details of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a development effect (SP development effect, SPSP development effect, all-rotation development effect). If it is the variable effect pattern for executing the development effect, the process is shifted to step E650-16, and if it is not the variable effect pattern for executing the development effect, the process is shifted to step E650-18.

At step E650-16, the sub CPU 130a selects a development performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 65) for determining the development performance pattern of the development performance to determine the development performance pattern, and at step E650-17 sets a development performance command corresponding to the development performance pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the development effect corresponding to the development effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Details of the development effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-18, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a ready-to-win effect (post-reach effect). If it is a variable performance pattern for executing a ready-to-win performance, the process is shifted to step E650-19, and if it is not a variable performance pattern for executing a ready-to-win performance, this time's jackpot announcement performance determination processing is terminated.

In step E650-19, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect. If it is a variable effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-20, and if it is not a variable effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-22.

At step E650-20, the sub CPU 130a selects a cut-in effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 66) for determining the cut-in effect pattern of the cut-in effect to determine the cut-in effect pattern, and at step E650-21 sets a cut-in effect command corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern in a transmission buffer. As a result, the cut-in effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the cut-in effect corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Details of the cut-in effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-22, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a determined effect. If it is a variable effect pattern for executing a fixed effect, the process is shifted to step E650-23, and if it is not a variable effect pattern for executing a fixed effect, the process is shifted to step E650-25.

At step E650-23, the sub CPU 130a selects a determined effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 67) for determining the determined effect pattern of the determined effect to determine the determined effect pattern, and at step E650-24 sets a determined effect command corresponding to the determined effect pattern in a transmission buffer. As a result, the determined effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the determined effect corresponding to the determined effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. The details of the determined effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-25, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a re-lottery effect. If it is a variable performance pattern for executing a re-lottery performance, the process is moved to step E650-26, and if it is not a variable performance pattern for executing a re-lottery performance, the process is moved to step E650-28.

At step E650-26, the sub CPU 130a selects a re-lottery performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 68) for determining the re-lottery performance pattern of the re-lottery performance to determine the re-lottery performance pattern, and at step E650-27 sets a re-lottery performance command corresponding to the re-lottery performance pattern in a transmission buffer. Thereby, the re-lottery effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the re-lottery effect corresponding to the re-lottery effect pattern is executed during the variation effect. The details of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-28, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern capable of executing a fixed effect (a big hit). If it is a variable performance pattern that can execute a fixed performance, the process is shifted to step E650-29, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that can execute a fixed performance, this time's jackpot announcement performance determination processing is terminated.

At step E650-29, the sub CPU 130a selects a confirmed effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 69) for determining the confirmed effect pattern of the confirmed effect to determine the confirmed effect pattern, sets a confirmed effect command corresponding to the confirmed effect pattern in a transmission buffer at step E650-30, and terminates the current jackpot announcement effect determination process. As a result, the fixed effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the fixed effect corresponding to the fixed effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Details of the fixed effect pattern determination table will be described later.

(Advance notice decision table at the start of fluctuation)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a fluctuation start role announcement determination table for production modes A to C (normal game state) that is referred to when determining the notice pattern of the fluctuation start role announcement effect in production modes A to C, and FIG.

A performance mode, a jackpot determination result, a variation performance pattern, a selection rate (%) of each variation start performance announcement pattern, and a variation start performance announcement pattern to be selected are associated with the fluctuation start performance announcement determination table.

In the variable start accessory notice pattern, there are set no notice, a rattling motion of swinging the first movable member 73 up and down at the initial position (standby position) at the start of the variable performance, and a weak lowering motion of lowering the first movable member 73 from the initial position to an intermediate position between the initial position and the performance position and then returning to the initial position at the start of the variable performance.

It should be noted that "(special 1)" described in the column of the variable production pattern means that it is a variable production pattern related to the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(special 2)" means that it is a variable production pattern related to the second variable production corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

The first feature of the fluctuation start role announcement determination table shown in FIGS. 58 and 59 is that when the second fluctuation production is executed in the production modes A to C (normal game state), the slight downward movement is not executed as the fluctuation start role announcement pattern, that is, the execution of the fluctuation start role announcement production is restricted. By doing so, in the performance modes A to C (normal game state) in which hitting left is advantageous to the player, the execution of the first variable performance performed by the winning of the game ball in the first start port 45 can be promoted, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

A second feature of the fluctuation start role announcement determination table shown in FIGS. 58 and 59 is that when the second fluctuation production corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the production modes A to C (normal game state), the slight downward movement is not executed as the fluctuation start role announcement pattern, that is, the execution of the fluctuation start role announcement production is restricted. By doing so, in the performance modes A to C (normal game state) in which hitting left is advantageous to the player, the execution of the first variable performance performed by the winning of the game ball in the first start port 45 can be promoted, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

A third feature of the fluctuation start role announcement determination table shown in FIGS. 58 and 59 is that, in the production modes D to G (probability variable game state, normal time short game state), when the first fluctuation production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the slight downward movement is not executed as the fluctuation start role announcement pattern, that is, the execution of the fluctuation start role announcement production is restricted. In this manner, in the performance modes D to G (probability variable game state, normal time reduction game state) in which hitting to the right is advantageous to the player, the execution of the second variable performance performed by winning the game ball in the second start port 47 can be promoted, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

A fourth feature of the fluctuation-start role announcement determination table shown in FIGS. 58 and 59 is that when the first fluctuation production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the production mode H (special time-saving game state), the slight downward motion is not executed as the fluctuation-start role announcement pattern, that is, the execution of the fluctuation-start role announcement production is restricted. By doing so, in the performance mode H (special time-saving game state) in which hitting right is advantageous to the player, the execution of the second variable performance performed by the winning of the game ball in the second start port 47 can be promoted, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the performance modes A to C (normal game state), when the second variation performance corresponding to the variation display of the second special pattern is executed in the special SP ready-to-win performance pattern, the announcement of the character at the start of variation (rattling operation) is executed, but the announcement of the character at the start of variation may not be executed (restricted).

Further, when the first variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern is executed in the chance performance pattern in the performance modes D to G (probability variable game state, normal time-saving game state), the announcement of the character at the start of the variation (rattling operation) is executed, but the announcement of the character at the start of the variation may not be executed (restricted).

In the performance mode H (special time-saving game state), when the first variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern is executed in the special SP ready-to-win performance pattern, or when the first variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern is executed in the end-suggesting revival performance pattern, the announcement of the role at the start of the fluctuation (rattling operation) is executed, but the announcement of the role at the start of the fluctuation may not be executed (limited).

Further, in the performance modes D to H (specific game state), when the first variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the weak downward movement of the first movable member 73 is not executed, but the weak downward movement of the first movable member 73 may be executed. In this case, the first movable member 73 should be weakly lowered at a lower rate than when the first variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the performance modes A to C (normal game state).

Also, although the performance for notifying the accessory at the time of fluctuation start is not a customization target performance in which the execution ratio changes depending on the setting between the normal setting and the simple setting, it may be a customization target performance. In this case, the selection rate (execution rate) of the ``rattling motion'' and the ``slightly falling motion'' in the simple setting should be lower than the selection rate (execution rate) of the normal setting (for example, 1/2, 1/3, etc.), similarly to the other effects to be customized.

(Preliminary decision table before reach)
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a pre-reach notice determination table for production modes A to C (normal game state) that is referred to when determining the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice effect in production modes A to C (normal game state), and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the before-reach notice determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and the notice pattern to be selected.

Three types of advance notice patterns of the advance notice are set, ie, "no notice" in which the advance notice effect before reach is not executed, "word notice effect" in which the dialogue notice effect is executed, and "step-up notice effect" in which the step-up notice effect is executed, and the degree of expectation for execution of the jackpot game (percentage of execution of the vibration effect associated with the above-mentioned pattern matching) is no notice<serif notice effect<step-up notice effect.

It should be noted that "(special 1)" described in the column of the variable production pattern means that it is a variable production pattern related to the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(special 2)" means that it is a variable production pattern related to the second variable production corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

A first feature of the pre-reach announcement determination table shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 is that the pre-reach announcement performance is more likely to be executed in the case of a big win than in the case of a big win determination result, and that the pre-reach announcement performance is more likely to be executed when a variable performance pattern with a high big win expectation is determined than when a variation performance pattern with a low big win expectation is determined. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 is that, in the case of a loss, the pre-reach advance notice effects (both the dialogue advance notice effect in which the vibration effect can be executed with the effective period of the effect button 17 and the step-up advance notice effect in which the vibration effect can be executed without the effective period of the effect button 17) are less likely to be executed (the execution ratio is low) in the effect modes D to G (specific game state) than in the effect modes A to C (normal game state). be done. Therefore, useless pre-reach announcement effects are less likely to be executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state) in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shortened, making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the pre-reach announcement determination table shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 is that the production modes D to G (specific game state) are more difficult to execute than the production modes A to C (normal game state) even in the case of a big win, when the variable production pattern is a pattern to execute a normal ready-to-win production and a pattern to execute an SP ready-to-win production (execution rate is low). Therefore, useless pre-reach announcement effects are less likely to be executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state) in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shortened, making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A fourth feature of the before-reach notice determination table shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 is that the degree of expectation for big wins (percentage of execution of the vibration performance accompanying the above-described pattern matching, ratio of execution of the vibration performance with the final performance to be described later, etc.) is higher in the case where the step-up notice performance without the validity period of the performance button 17 is executed than in the case where the dialogue foreknowledge performance with the validity period of the performance button 17 is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the degree of expectation for a big win (percentage of execution of vibration performance associated with pattern alignment, ratio of execution of vibration performance associated with success performance described later, etc.) may be higher in the case of execution of the speech advance notice performance than in the case of execution of the step-up notice performance. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, in the performance modes A to C (normal game state), when the second variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the advance notice performance before reach (speech notice performance) is executed, but the advance notice performance before reach may not be executed (limited).

Also, in performance modes D to G (probability variable game state, normal time reduction game state), when the first variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, the pre-reach announcement performance (word announcement performance) is executed, but the pre-reach announcement performance may not be executed (restricted).

In the performance mode H (special time-saving game state), when the first variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, the pre-reach announcement performance (word announcement performance) is executed, but the pre-reach announcement performance may not be executed (limited).

In addition, in performance modes D to H (specific game state), when the first variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the step-up notice performance (vibration performance such as pattern 5 described later in which the effective period does not occur) is not executed, but the step-up notice performance may be executed. In this case, step-up notice performance (vibration performance such as pattern 5 to be described later in which the effective period does not occur) should be executed at a lower rate than when the first variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state).

In addition, although the pre-reach announcement effect (dialogue announcement effect, step-up announcement effect) was not a customization target effect in which the execution ratio changes depending on the setting between the normal setting and the simple setting, it may be a customization target effect. In this case, as with the other effects to be customized, the selection rate (percentage of execution) of the "dialogue notice effect" and/or the "step-up notice effect" in the simple setting should be lower than the selection rate (execution ratio) of the normal setting (for example, 1/2, 1/3, etc.).

(Dialogue notice pattern decision table)
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a dialog announcement pattern determination table referred to when determining the announcement pattern of the dialog announcement effect.

As shown in FIG. 62, the speech announcement pattern determination table is associated with a presentation mode, a jackpot determination result, a variation presentation pattern type, a selection rate (%) of each speech announcement pattern, and a speech announcement pattern to be selected, and the presentation configuration (effective suggestion presentation, valid period, presentation contents) of each speech announcement pattern is described as a reference.

'Effective suggestive effect' is an introductory effect suggesting that an effective period may occur, and specifically, it is a effect of moving and displaying a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 on the first image display device 70 and gathering the translucent effect button images toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the speech announcement effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The ``promoting performance'' in the valid period column is a performance to prompt the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period, specifically, it is a performance to display an opaque performance button image imitating the performance button 17 at a specific position and to display a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge. It should be noted that operation sound 1 is output when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period.

``Normal button white'' in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 which is in a non-protruding normal state and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image.

``Button state'' in the effective period column indicates the state of the performance button 17 during the effective period, and ``Normal (white)'' in the button state column indicates that the performance button 17 is in a normal state in which the performance button 17 does not protrude, and the performance button 17 emits light in white with a low expectation of big win.

The ``description contents'' indicate the contents of the performance executed when the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period, and the ``word display period of 3 seconds'' indicates that the display period of the word image is 3 seconds.

``Normal dialogue (black)'' in the column of the dialogue performance mode indicates that normal dialogue not suggesting the possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in black characters and that normal dialogue is output by voice.
"Chance dialogue (black)" means that a chance dialogue with the possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in black characters and the chance dialogue is output by voice.
“Reach dialogue (black)” indicates that the reach dialogue that confirms the execution of the reach performance is displayed in black characters and that the reach dialogue is output as voice.
“Reach dialogue (red)” indicates that the reach dialogue for which execution of the reach effect is confirmed is displayed in red characters, and that the reach dialogue is output by voice.

“Heat speech (red)” indicates that a heat speech that has a high possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in red characters, and that heat speech is output by voice.
“Extremely hot speech (gold)” indicates that an intensely hot speech that has a very high possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in gold letters, and that the intensely hot speech is output by voice.
“Confirmed line (rainbow)” indicates that the confirmed line that confirms the execution of the jackpot game is displayed in rainbow colored characters, and that the confirmed line is output by voice.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration indicates that a weak vibration performance is executed in which a button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 weakly vibrates for 1 second from the start of display of lines (=when the performance button 17 is operated or when the effective period ends).
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that a strong vibration performance is executed in which a button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from the start of display of lines (=when the performance button 17 is operated or when the effective period ends).

The expected degree of jackpot in each dialogue production mode is “normal dialogue” < “chance dialogue (black)” < “reach dialogue (black)” < “reach dialogue (red)” < “heat dialogue (red)” < “hot dialogue (gold)” < “fixed dialogue (rainbow)”. Also, the degree of expectation for a big hit of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect"<"strong vibration effect".

A first feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that, when a speech with a high expectation for a big win (heat speech or higher) is displayed, a vibration presentation of vibrating the presentation button 17 can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The second feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that the vibration presentation of the presentation button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is higher) when the speech notice presentation of the intense serif, which has a higher expectation for a big hit than the heat speech, is performed than when the speech notice presentation of the heat speech is performed, and the vibration presentation of the presentation button 17 is executed when the speech notice presentation performance of the heat speech is not performed. The point is that the expectation of the jackpot is higher when it is done. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the dialogue forewarning effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that the vibration effect executed when a speech with high expectation for a big win (heat speech or higher) is displayed is for a relatively short time. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A fourth feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that there are two types of vibration intensity of the vibration performance executed when a speech with a high degree of expectation for a big win (more than a hot speech) is displayed according to the degree of expectation for a big win. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

A fifth feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that the vibration period (1 second) of the effect button 17 during the display of the dialogue image is shorter than the display period (3 seconds) of the dialogue image. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a sense of anticipation before the ready-to-win effect is executed, but it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive sense of anticipation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

There are a weak vibration performance and a strong vibration performance as vibration performances to be executed in the speech advance notice performance, but only the weak vibration performance or only the strong vibration performance may be performed, or the vibration time of the strong vibration performance may be set longer than the vibration time of the weak vibration performance.

In addition, the performance modes A to C (normal game state) and the performance modes D to G (specific game state) have the same degree of expectation for the big win when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed during the speech announcement performance, but the degree of expectation for the big win may be higher in the performance modes A to C (normal game state), or may be higher in the performance modes D to G (specific game state). In this way, it is possible to make the playability different depending on the kind of the performance mode, and it is possible to easily increase the expectation of the player in the performance modes D to G which are advantageous for the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, although the effective period is terminated by the operation of the performance button 17 or the elapse of the effective time and the speech foretelling performance is executed, the dialogue foretelling performance may not be executed when the effective period is terminated by the elapse of the effective time.

In addition, although the speech advance notice performance is executed by generating an effective period, the speech advance notice performance may be executed without generating the effective period, and the vibration performance to be executed in that case may be only weak vibration performance for 1 second or only strong vibration performance for 1 second.

(Step-up notice pattern decision table)
FIG. 63 shows a step-up notice pattern determination table referred to when deciding the notice pattern of the step-up notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 63, the step-up notice pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each step-up notice pattern, and the step-up notice pattern to be selected.

"1→2" in the step-up effect mode column indicates that the first and second step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3" indicates that the 1st to 3rd step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4" indicates that the 1st to 4th step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4→5" indicates that the 1st to 5th step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→5" indicates that after the 1st to 3rd step effects are executed in order, the 4th step effect is skipped and the 5th step effect is executed.
In each step-up performance mode, the performance time of the step performance before the last step performance is 1 second, and the performance time of the last step performance is 3 seconds.

Weak vibration (1 second) at ``5'' in the column of button vibration indicates that a weak vibration performance is executed in which a button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 weakly vibrates for 1 second from the start of the fifth step performance.

The ``button state'' indicates the state of the performance button 17 during execution of the step-up notice performance, and ``normal (off)'' in the column of the button state indicates that the performance button 17 is in a normal state in which the performance button 17 is not projected and the performance button 17 is extinguished.

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each step-up effect mode is ``1→2''<``1→2→3''<``1→2→3→4''<``1→2→3→4→5''<``1→2→3→5''.

A first feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that, when a step performance (fifth step performance) with a high expectation of a big win is performed, a vibrating performance of vibrating the performance button 17 can be executed without generating an effective period of the performance button 17.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the vibration performance executed when the step performance (fifth step performance) with a high expectation of big win is displayed is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that there is only one predetermined type (weak vibration (1 second)) of the vibration mode (vibration intensity, vibration time) of the vibration performance executed when the step performance (fifth step performance) with a high expectation of a big win is displayed. Therefore, in the step-up notice performance in which the player does not operate the performance button 17 and it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration performance, it is possible to suppress the complication of the performance mode and improve the amusement of the game.

A fourth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the step-up notice performance with a low degree of expectation is less likely to be executed (execution ratio is low) in the performance modes D to G (specific game state) than in the performance modes A to C (normal game state) when the jackpot is achieved. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

A fifth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that when a jackpot is achieved in production modes D to G (specific game state) than in production modes A to C (normal game state), weak vibration production is easily executed (execution ratio is high). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

A sixth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the effect modes D to G (specific game state) have a higher expectation for a big hit than the effect modes A to C (normal game state) when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 without an effective period (operation promotion image display) is executed in the step-up notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

A seventh feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the vibration period (1 second) of the effect button 17 during execution of the fifth step effect is shorter than the display period (3 seconds) of the fifth step effect in the step-up notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a sense of anticipation before the ready-to-win effect is executed, but it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive sense of anticipation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Note that the performance modes A to C (normal game state) may have a higher expectation for a big hit than the performance modes D to G (specific game state) when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 without the valid period (display of the operation promoting image) is executed in the step-up notice performance. Even in this case, the playability can be varied depending on the type of the performance mode, and the expectation of the player can be easily increased in the performance modes D to G advantageous to the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 64, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each pseudo-continuous effect pattern, and the selected pseudo-continuous effect pattern, and for reference, the effect structure (effective suggestion effect, effective period, effect content) of each pseudo-continuous effect pattern is described.

'Effective suggestion effect' is an introduction effect suggesting that the effective period may occur, and specifically, it is a effect of moving and displaying a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 on the first image display device 70 and gathering the semi-transparent effect button images toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the pseudo continuous effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The ``promoting performance'' in the valid period column is a performance to prompt the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period, specifically, it is a performance to display an opaque performance button image imitating the performance button 17 at a specific position and to display a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 2 different from the operation sound 1 described above is output.

``Normal button white'' in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 which is in a non-protruding normal state and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image.
“Protruding button white” indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

``Button state'' in the effective period column indicates the state of the performance button 17 during the effective period, ``Normal (white)'' in the button state column indicates a normal state in which the performance button 17 does not project and the performance button 17 emits light in white with a low expectation for big win, and ``Protrusion (red)'' indicates a projecting state in which the performance button 17 projects and the performance button 17 emits light in red with a high expectation for big win.

'Production content' indicates the content of the production related to the pseudo-continuous production, and 'temporary stop period of pseudo-continuous symbol 2 seconds' indicates that the period during which the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped is 2 seconds, which will be described later.

``Pseudo-failure'' in the column of the pseudo-continuous performance mode indicates that the pseudo-failure performance in which the central performance pattern 70a suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuation is not temporarily stopped but the normal performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped and a failure effect sound is output is executed.
The ``pseudo-success'' indicates that the pseudo-continuous success performance in which the central performance pattern 70a suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuation is temporarily stopped, the success effect sound is output, the second movable member 74 is weakly operated, and the pseudo-continuous performance is performed is executed.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration indicates that a weak vibration performance is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from when the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped (=when the performance button 17 is operated or when the effective period ends).
``Strong vibration (1 second)'' indicates that a strong vibration performance is executed in which a button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from when the pseudo pattern is temporarily stopped (=at the time of operation of the performance button 17 or at the end of the effective period).

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each promotion effect is "normal button white" < "protruding button white". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot in each button state is "normal" < "protruding". Also, the degree of expectation for a big hit of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect"<"strong vibration effect".

A first feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that, when a variable performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for big win and a pseudo-continuous success performance is performed, a vibrating performance for vibrating the performance button 17 by generating an effective period of the performance button 17 is sometimes executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the variation performance pattern has a high degree of expectation for big win and the vibration performance executed when the pseudo-continuous success performance is performed has a relatively short time. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the variation performance pattern has a high degree of expectation for big win, and there are two types of vibration intensity of the vibration performance executed when the pseudo-continuous success performance is performed according to the degree of expectation for big win. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fourth feature of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64, it is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) using the same effect device (production button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) in production modes A to C (normal game state) and production modes D to G (specific game state). One of the points is that the expectation of the big hit is high when the pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) using the movable member 74 or the like is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the game performance depending on the type of the performance mode, and it is possible to easily increase the expectation of the player in the performance modes D to G which are advantageous for the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A fifth feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that there are cases where the pseudo-continuous performance (quasi-continuous success performance) is executed using the second movable member 74, and where pseudo-continuous performance (quasi-continuous success performance) is executed using the second movable member 74 and the button vibration motor that vibrates the performance button 17. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the pseudo-continuous performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A sixth feature of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the vibration period of the effect button 17 during the temporary stop of the pseudo-symbol (1 second) is shorter than the temporary stop period (2 seconds) of the pseudo-symbol suggesting execution of the pseudo-continuous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have expectations before the execution of the SP ready-to-win performance or the SPSP ready-to-win performance, but to prevent the players from having excessive expectations, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Incidentally, the effect button 17 during the effective period may be in a protruding state when the simulated consecutive success performance is performed in a variable performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, but it may not be in a protruding state.

In addition, although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effects executed in the pseudo continuous success effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed.

Further, the pseudo continuous success performance and the pseudo consecutive failure performance are executed by generating the effective period, but the pseudo continuous success performance and the pseudo continuous failure performance may be executed without generating the effective period, and the vibration performance to be executed in the pseudo continuous success performance may be only weak vibration performance for 3 seconds or only strong vibration performance for 3 seconds, or only weak vibration performance for 1 second or strong vibration performance for 1 second.

In addition, in production modes A to C (normal game state), the degree of expectation for a jackpot when a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) using the same production device (production button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed may be higher than in production mode D-G (specific game state). The degree of expectation for a big win when executed may be higher, or the degree of expectation for a big win may be higher in the performance modes D to F than in the performance mode G when the pseudo-continuous performance (quasi-continuous success performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, the second movable member 74, etc.) is executed.

Further, in the pseudo-continuous performance (pseudo-continuous success performance), the motion performance using the second movable member 74 is executed, but the motion performance using the first movable member 73 may be executed, and in this case, the execution ratio of the motion performance using the second movable member 74 should be higher than that using the first movable member 73.

(Development effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a development effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the development effect.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the development performance pattern determination table, performance modes, jackpot judgment results, variable performance pattern types, development performance types to be determined for development performance patterns, selection rates (%) of each development performance pattern, and development performance patterns to be selected are associated with each other.

'Effective suggestion effect' is an introduction effect suggesting that the effective period may occur, and specifically, it is a effect of moving and displaying a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 on the first image display device 70 and gathering the semi-transparent effect button images toward a specific position.
"None" in the effective suggestive effect column indicates that the effective suggestive effect is not executed, "Yes (gase)" indicates that the effective suggestive effect is executed but the valid period does not occur thereafter, and "Yes" indicates that the effective suggestive effect is executed and the valid period occurs thereafter.

The 'effective period (long press for 4 seconds)' indicates that the development effect progresses step by step by pressing the effect button 17 for a long time and that the effective period of the development effect ends when 4 seconds elapse.
The ``promoting performance'' in the valid period column is a performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period, specifically, as a result of gathering a plurality of translucent performance button images at a specific position, an opaque performance button image is displayed at a specific position and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 3 different from the operation sounds 1 and 2 described above is output.

``Normal button white'' in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 which is in a non-protruding normal state and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image.
“Normal button red” indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

``Button state'' in the effective period column indicates the state of the performance button 17 during the effective period, ``Normal (white)'' in the button state column indicates the normal state in which the performance button 17 does not protrude and the performance button 17 emits light in white with low expectation for big win, and ``Normal (red)'' indicates the normal state in which the performance button 17 does not protrude and the performance button 17 emits light in red with high expectation for big win.

'Production content' indicates the content of the production relating to the development production, and 'provisional pattern temporary stop period 2 seconds' indicates that the period in which the expansion pattern described later is temporarily stopped is 2 seconds.

"SP notification" in the column of the development mode indicates that the SP development pattern indicating the development to the SP ready-to-win mode is derived and displayed as a result of the development mode, and the SP development mode for outputting the first development effect sound is executed.
"SPSP notification" indicates that an SPSP development pattern is derived and displayed as a result of the development performance to suggest development to the SPSP ready-to-win performance, and the SPSP development performance of outputting the second development effect sound is executed.
The ``notification of full rotation'' indicates that the full rotation development pattern is derived and displayed to suggest the development to the full rotation ready-to-win performance as a result of the development performance, and that the full rotation development performance of outputting the third development effect sound is executed.

"Weak action" in the column of character action means that the second movable member 74 emits light in blue when various symbols are derived and displayed (=at the end of the valid period), and a weak action effect with a small action width is executed.
"Strong action" indicates that the second movable member 74 emits light in red when various symbols are derived and displayed (=at the end of the valid period), and a strong action effect with a large swing width is executed.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration indicates that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 weakly vibrates for 1 second from the time when various development patterns are derived and displayed (=the end of the effective period), and the weak vibration effect is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that a weak vibration performance is executed in which a button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from the time of derivation display of various patterns (=end of effective period).

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each action production is "weak action"<"strong action". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration production is "weak vibration" < "strong vibration".

It should be noted that "(special 1)" described in the column of the variable production pattern means that it is a variable production pattern related to the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(special 2)" means that it is a variable production pattern related to the second variable production corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

A first feature of the development performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that, when a variation performance pattern with high expectation for big win and development performance (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) with high expectation for big win are performed, a vibrating performance for vibrating the performance button 17 by generating an effective period of the performance button 17 may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the development performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that when a full-rotation development performance with a higher expectation for a big win is executed than when the SPSP development performance is executed, the vibration performance of the performance button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) is easily executed (execution ratio is high), and when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed when the SPSP development performance is executed, the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is higher than when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is not executed. points. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player as to whether or not the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed when the SPSP development performance is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the development performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that the vibration performance executed when the variation performance pattern with high expectation for big win and the development performance (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) with high expectation for big win is performed is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The fourth feature of the development performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that the vibration intensity of the vibration performance executed when the variation performance pattern with high expectation for big win is performed and the development performance (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed, is of two types according to the expectation for big win. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fifth feature of the development production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65, production modes A to C (normal game state) and production modes D to G (specific game state) can execute development production (SPSP development production, etc.) using the same production device (production button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.). 4, etc.), there is a high degree of expectation for a big hit when the development production using ) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the game performance depending on the type of the performance mode, and it is possible to easily increase the expectation of the player in the performance modes D to G which are advantageous for the player, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The sixth feature of the development pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that the temporary stop period (2 seconds) of the development pattern and the vibration period (2 seconds) of the production button 17 during the temporary stop of the development pattern are the same, or the ratio of the difference between the temporary stop period (2 seconds) of the development pattern and the vibration period (3 seconds) of the production button 17 is smaller than that of the pre-ready notice production. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of anticipation and improve the amusement of the game.

Although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effects executed in the development effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed.

In addition, in production modes A to C (normal game state), the degree of expectation for a jackpot when a development performance (SPSP development performance, etc.) using the same production device (production button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is performed may be higher than in production mode D to G (specific game state). Alternatively, the degree of expectation for a big win may be higher in the performance modes D to F than in the performance mode G when the development performance using the same performance device (the performance button vibration motor, the second movable member 74, etc.) is executed.

(Cut-in effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the cut-in effect.

As shown in FIG. 66, the cut-in effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each cut-in effect pattern, and the cut-in effect pattern to be selected, and the effect configuration (effective suggestion effect, effective period, effect contents) of each cut-in effect pattern is described for reference.

'Effective suggestive effect' is an introductory effect suggesting that an effective period may occur, and specifically, it is a effect of moving and displaying a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 on the first image display device 70 and gathering the translucent effect button images toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 4 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the cut-in effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 4 seconds elapse.

The ``promoting performance'' in the valid period column is a performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, as a result of not executing the effective suggestive performance or as a result of executing the effective suggestive performance, an opaque performance button image is displayed at a specific position and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid term by the length of the gauge is displayed. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 4 different from the operation sounds 1 to 3 described above is output.

``Normal button white'' in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 which is in a non-protruding normal state and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image.
"Protruding button red" indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.
“Protruding button rainbow” indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

``Button state'' in the effective period column indicates the state of the performance button 17 during the effective period, and ``Normal (white)'' indicates that the performance button 17 is in a normal state in which the performance button 17 does not protrude, and that the performance button 17 emits light in white with a low expectation for a big win. "Protrusion (red)" indicates that the effect button 17 is in a protruding state and that the effect button 17 emits light in red, which is highly expected for a big hit. "Protrusion (rainbow)" indicates that the effect button 17 is in a projecting state, and the effect button 17 emits light in a rainbow color to confirm a big hit.

The ``description contents'' indicate the contents of the performance executed when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period or when the valid period elapses, and the ``cut-in display period 3 seconds'' indicates that the cut-in image display period is 3 seconds.

"Blue cut-in" in the column of cut-in effect mode indicates that a blue cut-in effect in which a blue frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a first cut-in effect sound is output is executed.
“Green cut-in” indicates that a cut-in image in a green frame is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a green cut-in effect is executed in which a second cut-in effect sound is output.
“Red cut-in” indicates that a cut-in image with a red frame is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a red cut-in effect is executed in which a third cut-in effect sound is output.

"Weak vibration (3 seconds)" in the column of button vibration indicates that a weak vibration performance is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 weakly vibrates for 3 seconds from the start of display of the cut-in image (=when the performance button 17 is operated or when the effective period ends).
"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" indicates that a strong vibration performance is executed in which a button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds from the start of display of the cut-in image (=when the performance button 17 is operated or when the effective period ends).

The expected degree of jackpot for each cut-in is "blue cut-in" < "green cut-in" < "red cut-in". Also, the degree of expectation for a big hit of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect"<"strong vibration effect".

It should be noted that "(special 1)" described in the column of the variable production pattern means that it is a variable production pattern related to the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(special 2)" means that it is a variable production pattern related to the second variable production corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

A first characteristic of the cut-in performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that, when a cut-in image with high expectation for big win is displayed (cut-in performance is executed), a vibrating performance for vibrating the performance button 17 by generating an effective period of the performance button 17 may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the cut-in performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that the vibration performance executed when a cut-in image with high expectation for big win is displayed (cut-in performance is executed) has a relatively long time. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the cut-in performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that there are two types of vibration intensity of vibration performance executed when a cut-in image with a high degree of expectation for big win is displayed (execution of cut-in performance), depending on the degree of expectation for big win. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

A fourth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that the cut-in image display period (3 seconds) and the vibration period (3 seconds) of the effect button 17 during display of the cut-in image are the same (the ratio of the difference between the cut-in image display period (3 seconds) and the effect button 17 vibration period (3 seconds) is smaller than the pre-reach announcement effect). Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of anticipation and improve the amusement of the game.

Although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effects executed in the cut-in effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed.

Also, the cut-in performance is executed by generating the effective period, but the cut-in performance may be executed without generating the effective period, and the vibration performance to be executed in that case may be only weak vibration performance for 3 seconds or only strong vibration performance for 3 seconds, or may be only weak vibration performance for 1 second or only strong vibration performance for 1 second.

(decision production pattern decision table)
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a determined effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the determined effect.

As shown in FIG. 67, the determined effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the big hit determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each determined effect pattern, and the determined effect pattern to be selected, and the effect structure (effective suggestive effect, effective period, effect content) of each determined effect pattern is described as a reference.

'Effective suggestion performance' is an introduction performance suggesting that the effective period may occur, and specifically, it is a performance in which a plurality of translucent performance button images imitating the performance button 17 are moved and displayed on the first image display device 70, and the button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 5 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the final effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 5 seconds elapse.

The ``promoting performance'' in the valid period column is a performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, as a result of not executing the effective suggestive performance or as a result of executing the effective suggestive performance, an opaque performance button image is displayed at a specific position and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid term by the length of the gauge is displayed. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 5 different from the operation sounds 1 to 4 described above is output.

``Normal button white'' in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 which is in a non-protruding normal state and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image.
"Protruding button red" indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.
“Protruding button rainbow” indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

``Button state'' in the effective period column indicates the state of the performance button 17 during the effective period, and ``normal (white)'' indicates that the performance button 17 is in a normal state in which the performance button 17 does not protrude, and that the performance button 17 emits light in white with a low expectation of a big win. "Protrusion (red)" indicates that the effect button 17 is in a protruding state and that the effect button 17 emits light in red, which is highly expected for a big hit. "Protrusion (rainbow)" indicates that the effect button 17 is in a projecting state, and the effect button 17 emits light in a rainbow color to confirm a big hit.

The 'performance content' indicates the content of the performance executed when the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period or when the effective period elapses, and 'decided success performance period 11 seconds (6 seconds for performance mode H)' indicates that the performance execution period related to the determined success performance in the performance mode other than the performance mode H is 11 seconds, and that the performance execution period related to the determined success performance in the performance mode H is 6 seconds.

``Failure'' in the column of the determination mode means that the first movable member 73 does not operate and the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color, so that the determination failure performance suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is executed.
"Success" means that the first movable member 73 operates to the maximum operating position and emits light in rainbow colors, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, thereby indicating that a determined success performance suggesting execution of a jackpot game is executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the column of button vibration indicates that the button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 determines that a strong vibration performance (determined success vibration performance) is executed in which strong vibration is performed for 4 seconds from the start of the successful performance (=when the performance button 17 is operated or at the end of the effective period), and then for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second.

"Rainbow light emission (11 seconds)" in the column of button light emission indicates that the performance button LED for lighting the performance button 17 is determined to emit rainbow light for 11 seconds (longer period than the strong vibration of the performance button 17) from the start of the successful performance (=when the performance button 17 is operated or when the effective period ends).

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each promotion effect is "normal button white" < "protruding button red" < "protruding button rainbow". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot in each button state is "normal" < "protruding".

It should be noted that "(special 1)" described in the column of the variable production pattern means that it is a variable production pattern related to the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(special 2)" means that it is a variable production pattern related to the second variable production corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

A first feature of the determined performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that, when a determined success performance is executed, a vibrating performance is executed by generating an effective period and vibrating the performance button 17.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a big winning game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that the effective period of the effect button 17 generated during the variable effect is the longest. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player misses the operation of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that the effect button 17 vibrates for the longest period of time as the strong vibration effect that occurs during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of the winning performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A fourth characteristic of the decided effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Therefore, even after the vibration of the effect button 17 ends, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fifth feature of the determination performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67, the ratio of the difference between the execution period (11 seconds) of the determination success performance and the vibration period (9 seconds) of the performance button 17 during execution of the determination success performance is smaller than that of the pre-reach announcement performance. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of anticipation and improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, although the action performance using the first movable member 73 is executed in the decision performance (decision success performance), the action performance using the second movable member 74 may be executed, and in this case, it is preferable that the execution ratio of the action performance using the first movable member 73 is higher than the performance performance using the second movable member 74. - 特許庁

(Re-lottery effect pattern decision table)
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a re-lottery effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 68, in the re-lottery performance pattern determination table, the performance mode, the presence or absence of promotion (whether promotion is planned), the selection rate (%) of each re-lottery performance pattern, and the re-lottery performance pattern to be selected are associated with each other, and as a reference, the performance configuration of each re-lottery performance pattern (effective suggestion performance, effective period, performance contents) is described.

'Effective suggestive effect' is an introductory effect suggesting that an effective period may occur, and specifically, it is a effect of moving and displaying a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 on the first image display device 70 and gathering the translucent effect button images toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the re-lottery effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The ``promoting performance'' in the valid period column is a performance to prompt the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period, specifically, it is a performance to display an opaque performance button image at a specific position without executing the effective suggestive performance and to display a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge. It should be noted that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 6 different from the operation sounds 1 to 5 described above is output.

``Normal button white'' in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 which is in a non-protruding normal state and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image.
“Normal button red” indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.
"Normal button rainbow" indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 which is in a non-protruding normal state and emits rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

``Button state'' in the effective period column indicates the state of the performance button 17 during the effective period, and ``Normal (white)'' in the button state column indicates that the performance button 17 is in a normal state in which the performance button 17 does not protrude and that the performance button 17 emits light in white with a low promotion expectation. "Normal (red)" indicates that the effect button 17 is in a normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude, and that the effect button 17 emits light in red, which is highly expected for promotion. "Normal (rainbow)" indicates that the effect button 17 is in a normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude, and the effect button 17 emits light in a rainbow color indicating confirmation of promotion.

The ``contents of performance'' indicate the contents of the performance executed when the performance button 17 is operated during the validity period or the validity period passes, and the ``successful promotion performance period of 4 seconds'' indicates that the execution period of the promotion success performance is 4 seconds.

The ``promotion failure performance'' in the column of the re-lottery performance mode indicates that the non-promotion symbols (for example, even number symbols→even number symbols, odd number symbols other than "7"→odd number symbols other than "7") that do not become advantageous performance symbols for the player as a result of the re-lottery performance are derived and displayed (temporarily stopped) and non-promotion sound effects are output.
The ``successful promotion performance'' indicates that promotion patterns (for example, even-numbered patterns→odd-numbered patterns, odd-numbered patterns other than "7"→"7" patterns), which are advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery performance, are derived and displayed (temporarily stopped), and a promotion effect sound is output.

``Strong vibration (3 seconds)'' in the column of button vibration indicates that a strong vibration performance is executed in which a button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds from the time of derivation display of the promotion pattern (=end of the effective period). ``Strong vibration (2 seconds)'' indicates that a strong vibration performance is executed in which a button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 2 seconds from the time when the promotion pattern is derived and displayed (=the end of the valid period).

"Rainbow luminescence (4 seconds)" in the column of button light emission indicates that the performance button LED for illuminating the performance button 17 emits rainbow light for 4 seconds (longer period than the strong vibration of the performance button 17) from the time of derivation display of the promotion pattern (=end of the effective period). 'Rainbow light emission (3 seconds)' indicates that the performance button LED for lighting the performance button 17 emits rainbow light for 3 seconds (longer period than the strong vibration of the performance button 17) from the time of derivation display of promotion pattern (=end of effective period).

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each promotion effect is “normal button white” < “normal button red” < “normal button rainbow”.

A first feature of the re-lottery performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68 is that, when a promotion success performance is executed, a vibrating performance for vibrating the performance button 17 by generating an effective period is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the fact that the pattern has been promoted to an advantageous performance symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68 is that the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained even after the strong-vibration presentation ends, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

A third feature of the re-lottery performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68 is that the ratio of the difference between the execution period (4 seconds or 3 seconds) of the promotion success performance and the vibration period (3 seconds or 2 seconds) of the performance button 17 during execution of the promotion success performance is smaller than that of the pre-reach announcement performance. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of anticipation and improve the amusement of the game.

Note that the re-lottery performance (promotion failure performance, promotion success performance) is executed by generating the validity period, but the re-lottery performance may be executed without generating the validity period.

(Fixed production pattern decision table)
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a confirmed effect pattern determination table that is referred to when deciding the effect pattern of the confirmed effect.

As shown in FIG. 69, the finalized performance pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, the variable performance pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each finalized performance pattern, and the selected final performance pattern, and the performance configuration (execution timing, performance contents) of each finalized performance pattern is described as a reference.

"-" in the execution timing column indicates the timing at which the fixed effect is not executed, and "○" indicates the timing at which the fixed effect is executed.
"Determined sound" in the voice column indicates that a determined sound indicating that a jackpot game is to be executed is output.
"Handle rainbow light emission" in the light emission column indicates that the handle LED for light emission of the shooting handle 15 emits light in rainbow color from the time of outputting the fixed sound until the fluctuation stops (for 4 seconds or more until the production pattern is stopped and displayed).

``Strong vibration (3 seconds)'' in the column of button vibration indicates that a strong vibration performance is executed in which a button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds from the time of outputting the fixed sound.

It should be noted that "(special 1)" described in the column of the variable production pattern means that it is a variable production pattern related to the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(special 2)" means that it is a variable production pattern related to the second variable production corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

A first feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 69 is that when the fixed effect is executed, the vibrating effect of vibrating the effect button 17 is executed without generating the effective period. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a big winning game is to be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 69 is that the rainbow emission of the firing handle 15 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained even after the strong-vibration presentation ends, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Summary of various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69)
Here, as the first feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, when the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second or strong vibration 1 second) is executed in the dialog announcement effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, when the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is executed in the step-up notice effect not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the probability of executing the vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds) accompanying the pattern matching is higher, and the vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds → 5 seconds) is executed) is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the degree of expectation for a big win (percentage of execution of the vibration performance (strong vibration 4 seconds) associated with the above-described pattern alignment, rate of execution of the vibration performance (strong vibration 4 seconds→5 seconds) in the decided performance described later, etc.) may be higher in the case where the vibration performance (weak vibration 1 second or strong vibration 1 second) is executed in the dialogue announcement performance with the effective period of the performance button 17 than in the case where the vibration performance (weak vibration 1 second) is executed in the step-up announcement performance not accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest in the game.

The second feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the vibration effects executed as the jackpot announcement effects include a first vibration effect with a relatively short vibration period (at the time of a dialogue announcement effect, a step-up notice effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a development effect (1 second)), and a second vibration effect with a longer vibration period (duration) than the first vibration effect (at the time of a cut-in effect, at the time of a successful decision, at the time of a fixed effect, etc., which is longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, etc.). 4 seconds → 5 seconds)), and in the variable performance having a second performance period (normal ready-to-reach performance) and a third performance period (SP/SPSP ready-to-reach performance) after the first performance period (pre-reach performance), the first vibration performance is more likely to be executed (executed rate is higher) in the first performance period than in the second performance period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation without misleading the player into thinking that the game is a big win, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, although the look-ahead vibration performance is also the first vibration performance with a relatively short vibration period, even when the look-ahead vibration performance is included, the first vibration performance is more likely to be executed (executed rate is higher) in the first performance period than in the second performance period in the variable performance having the second performance period (normal reach performance) and the third performance period (SP/SPSP ready-to-reach performance) after the first performance period (pre-reach performance). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation without misleading the player into thinking that the game is a big win, and to improve the interest in the game.

The third feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that, in variable effects in which there is a third effect period (SP/SPSP ready-to-reach effect) after a second effect period (normal reach effect) after a first effect period (pre-ready effect), the first vibration effect (vibration effect (one second) such as a speech advance notice effect, a step-up advance notice effect, a simulated continuous effect, a development effect, etc. (one second)) is more likely to be executed (performed at a higher rate) during the first effect period than during the third effect period. points. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation without misleading the player into thinking that the game is a big win, and to improve the interest in the game.

As a fourth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, the vibration effects executed as the jackpot announcement effect include a first vibration effect with a short vibration period (at the time of a dialogue announcement effect, a step-up notice effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a development effect (1 second)) and a second vibration effect with a longer vibration period than the first vibration effect (during a cut-in effect, a determined success effect, a confirmed effect, etc., with a longer vibration effect than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds). ), and in the variable performance having a second performance period (normal ready-to-reach performance) or a third performance period (SP/SPSP ready-to-reach performance) after the first performance period (pre-reach performance), the second vibration performance is more likely to be executed (executed rate is higher) in the second performance period than in the first performance period. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, in a variable performance in which there is a third performance period (SP/SPSP reach performance) after a second performance period (normal reach performance) after a first performance period (pre-ready performance), the second vibration performance (longer than 1 second vibration performance (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) such as during cut-in performance, determined successful performance, and fixed performance (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)) is more likely to be performed during the third performance period than during the first performance period. (the rate of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

A sixth characteristic of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that in the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the ratio of executing the first vibration effect (1 second) with the effect button 17 in the normal state is higher than the ratio of executing the first vibration effect with the effect button 17 in the protruded state. Therefore, the expectation of the player is not excessively aroused during the first presentation period, and the interest in the game can be improved.

A seventh feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that during the third performance period (SP/SPSP ready-to-win performance), the ratio of executing the second vibration performance (3 seconds or more) with the performance button 17 in the protruded state is higher than the ratio of executing the second vibration performance with the performance button 17 in the normal state. Therefore, the expectation of the player is not excessively aroused during the first presentation period, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The eighth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the vibration effects executed as the jackpot announcement effect include a first vibration effect with a short vibration period (at the time of a dialogue announcement effect, a step-up notice effect, a simulated continuous effect, a development effect, etc. (1 second)) and a second vibration effect with a longer vibration period (production period) than the first vibration effect (at the time of a cut-in effect, at the time of a successful decision effect, at the time of a fixed effect, etc., which is longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds). → 5 seconds)), and in the variable performance in which the continuous performance (pseudo-continuous performance) is executed for a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice) and the ready-to-win performance is executed, the second vibration performance is easier to execute (the execution rate is higher) when the first vibration performance is executed than when the first vibration performance is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of whether or not the first vibration effect will be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a ninth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, the vibration effect executed as a jackpot announcement effect has a second vibration effect with a longer vibration period (effect period) than the first vibration effect (at the time of cut-in effect, at the time of determined success effect, at the time of fixed effect, etc.). The ready-to-reach production by the second type of production pattern (even number pattern) is more likely to be executed (the ratio of execution is higher) than the ready-to-win production by the design), the ready-to-reach production by the third type production pattern ("7" production pattern) is less likely to be executed (the ratio of execution is lower) than the ready-to-win production by the second type of production pattern. The point is that the 2-vibration effect is easily executed (the execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the type of effect symbol for executing the ready-to-win effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A tenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that, in the jackpot variation effect in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, the number of executions of the vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect) without the effective period (display of the operation promoting image) during the effect before the ready-to-win effect (development effect, matching pattern, C pattern matching, confirmed effect) without the effective period (display of the operation promoting image) during the effect after the ready-to-win effect tends to increase. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the sense of expectation during the post-reach performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The eleventh feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the number of executions of vibration performances (development performance, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, fixed performance) without an effective period during the ready-to-win performance tends to increase in the jackpot variation performance in which a specific reach performance (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) is executed, rather than the jackpot variation performance in which a predetermined reach performance (normal reach performance, all-rotation reach performance) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the big win variation presentation from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A twelfth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that in the losing variation performance in which the ready-to-win performance is executed, the number of times of execution of the vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, step-up notice performance, fixed performance) without an effective period during the ready-to-win performance (pre-reading vibration performance, step-up notice performance, fixed performance) is likely to be greater than the number of times of execution of the vibration performance (development performance, pattern matching, C pattern matching, fixed performance) without an effective period during the ready-to-win performance. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win by means of a vibration effect that does not accompany an effective period, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a thirteenth feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, the vibration effect of the production button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high) when the after-reach forewarning effect (cut-in effect) with a higher expectation for big win than the pre-reach forewarning effect is executed, and the vibration effect for the effect button 17 is not executed when the pre-reach forenotifying effect is executed. It can be pointed out that the degree of expectation for the big win is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when the effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player as to whether or not the vibration performance of the performance button 17 will be executed when the pre-reach announcement performance is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A fourteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the performance modes D to G (specific game state) are higher than the performance modes A to C (normal game state) in that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the vibration performance with the effective period of the performance button 17 (display of the operation promotion image) is executed in the advance notice performance after reach. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the performance modes A to C (normal game state) may have a higher expectation for a big hit than the performance modes D to G (specific game state) when the vibrating performance accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17 (display of the operation promoting image) is executed in the post-ready notice performance. Even in this case, the playability can be varied depending on the type of the performance mode, and the expectation of the player can be easily increased in the performance modes D to G advantageous to the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fifteenth feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, in the first effect period (before ready-to-win) in the variable effect, when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed, the expectation of the big win is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed. Vibration production at the time of alignment and C pattern alignment) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the game will be a big win by means of the vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

A sixteenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that a vibration effect (one of vibration effects such as dialogue announcement effect, simulated continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, etc.) accompanied by an effective period (display of an operation promoting image) of the effect button 17 executed during the variable effect is executed in any of a plurality of types of vibration modes (weak vibration, strong vibration) with different degrees of expectation for big wins, but the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promoting image) executed during the variable effect is determined. The unaccompanied vibration performance (one of the vibration performances such as step-up notice performance, pattern matching, C pattern matching, etc.) is executed in one predetermined vibration mode. Therefore, when it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration mode without the effective period, it is possible to suppress the complication of the presentation mode of the vibration presentation and improve the interest of the game.

As the seventeenth feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, in the pre-reach performance period in the jackpot variation performance, the vibration performance (vibration performance at the time of the dialogue notice performance) with the effective period of the performance button 17 (display of the operation promotion image) is executed, and the vibration performance (vibration performance at the time of the step-up notice performance) without the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image) is executed. Vibration performance for 3 seconds or more such as time and C pattern matching) is executed at a different rate, and the vibration performance (vibration performance at step-up notice performance) not accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17 is more easily executed (execution ratio is higher) during the normal game state (performance modes A to C) than during the specific game state (performance modes D to G). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the vibration performance that is not accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As an eighteenth feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, when the jackpot variable effect is executed, the type of jackpot effect pattern (even number pattern, odd number pattern other than "7", "7" pattern) to match the pattern (including C pattern match) It is possible to vary the execution mode (whether or not to execute, execution timing, etc.) of the vibration effect in the big hit notice effect, but when the vibration effect is executed along with the execution of the success effect or the confirmed effect, the figure The point is that the vibration mode is the same regardless of the type of the jackpot production pattern to be pattern-matched (including C pattern match). Therefore, it is possible to uniformly congratulate the player on winning a big win while heightening the expectation for the big win by the vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

34 to 69, the 19th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that after the vibration performance (decision success performance, etc.) with the effective period (display of the operation prompting image) is executed in the jackpot fluctuation performance, the vibration performance (symbol alignment, C symbol alignment, etc.) without the effective period (display of the operation prompting image) can be executed, and the vibration performance (decision performance, etc.) with the effective period (display of the operation prompting image) is variable depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17, while the effective period is. Vibration effects (matching of symbols, matching of C symbols, etc.) without accompanying (display of operation prompting image) include a point that the timing of starting vibration is predetermined. Therefore, depending on whether or not the valid period (display of the operation prompting image) is accompanied, the vibration effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The twentieth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the production modes A to C (normal game state) and the production modes D to G (specific game state) can execute a specific production (pseudo continuous production, development production, etc.) using the same movable member (second movable member 74), but the jackpot expectation when the specific production is executed in the production modes A to C (normal game state) and the production modes D to G (specific game state) is different. be done. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a 21st feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, production modes A to C (normal game state) and production modes D to G (specific game state) can execute step production (step-up notice production, pseudo continuous production, etc.) that progresses to one of a plurality of stages with different expectations for big wins. There is a difference in the degree of expectation for a big win when progressing to the same stage (one of the 3rd step performance, the 4th step performance and the 5th step performance in the case of a step-up notice performance, or once or twice in the case of a pseudo-continuous performance). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a 22nd feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, production modes A to C (normal game state) and production modes D to G (specific game state) can execute any of a plurality of operation promotion effects with different jackpot expectations, and can execute operation production (any of development production, cut-in production, and decision production) according to the operation of the production button 17, production modes A to C (normal game state) and production modes D to G (specific game state). ), the degree of expectation for a big win when the same operation promotion performance (for example, normal button white) is executed is different, and in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to G (specific game state), when the operation performance is executed, the big win expectation is higher when the effective suggestion performance is executed and the operation promotion performance is executed than when the operation promotion performance is executed without the effective suggestion performance. Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for whether or not the effective suggestive effect is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

A twenty-third feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the vibration effect with a relatively short vibration period (for example, 1 second) executed with the big win notice effect is executed with the effective period of the effect button 17 or without the effective period, but the vibration effect with a relatively long vibration period (3 seconds or more) executed with the big win notice effect is executed with the effective period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect for the operation of the performance button 17, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a twenty-fourth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, in the special time-saving gaming state, the operation effects (dialogue announcement effect, development effect, decided effect, re-lottery effect) involving the operation of the valid period are easier to execute when the second special symbol loss change display (loss second change effect) is executed than when the first special symbol loss change display (loss first change effect) is executed. Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the production effect can be varied depending on the type of the special symbol (variation production), and the interest in the game can be improved.

The twenty-fifth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, and a first variable effect (first special display) in a specific game state. The execution ratio of the first vibration performance is different (the execution ratio is high when the second variation performance is executed) when the pattern variation display is executed and when the second variation performance is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration production depending on the type of the variable production (special symbol), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The execution ratio of the first vibration performance is higher when the second variation performance is executed in the specific game state than when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state, but the opposite may be done.

The twenty-sixth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration performance (development performance, cut-in performance, final performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration performance (prefetching vibration performance, step-up notice performance, confirmation performance, etc.) executed without generating the valid period. The execution ratio of the first vibration performance during execution of the specific performance is different (the execution ratio is high when the second fluctuation performance is executed) between the case where the first fluctuation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in which the performance etc. is executed and the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in which the specific performance (various reach performance, chance performance, etc.) that expects the execution of the big winning game in the specific game state is executed. Therefore, when a variable performance is executed in which a specific performance is executed in a specific game state, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied according to the type of the variable performance (special pattern), and the amusement of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the execution ratio of the first vibration effect during the execution of the specific effect is higher when the second variable effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in which the specific effect (various reach effects, chance effect, etc.) is executed in which the execution of the jackpot game is expected in the specific game state than when the first variable effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in which the specific effect (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) that expects the execution of the jackpot game is executed in the specific game state. You may make it become reverse.

The twenty-seventh feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (prediction vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmed effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, and a first variable effect (first special display) in a specific game state. The execution ratio of the second vibration performance is different (the execution ratio is high when the second variation performance is executed) when the pattern variation display) is executed and when the second variation performance (the second special pattern variation display) is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration production depending on the type of the variable production (special symbol), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The execution ratio of the second vibration performance is higher when the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the specific game state than when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state, but the opposite may be done.

As the 28th feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, the first vibration production (development production, cut-in production, decision production, re-lottery production, etc.) is executed in response to the operation of the production button 17 during the valid period. The execution ratio of the second vibration performance during execution of the specific performance is different (the execution ratio is high when the second variation performance is executed) between the case where the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) in which the hit performance, the chance performance, etc.) is executed and the case where the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in which the specific performance (various reach performance, chance performance, etc.) is executed to expect the execution of the jackpot game in the specific game state. Therefore, when a variable performance is executed in which a specific performance is executed in a specific game state, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied according to the type of the variable performance (special pattern), and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the specific game state, the execution ratio of the second vibration effect during the execution of the specific effect is higher in the case where the second variable effect (variation display of the second special symbol) in which the specific effect (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) is executed is executed than in the case where the first variable effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in which the specific effect (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) is executed to expect the execution of the jackpot game in the specific game state. You may make it reverse.

As a twenty-ninth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, a first action effect (prefetching action effect, variable start performance, etc.) in which the first movable member 73 (or the second movable member 74) is operated in the first mode can be executed, and a second action effect (decision success effect, etc.) can be executed in the second mode. However, in the first variation performance of losing in a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states), the execution of the first action performance is restricted, and in the first variation performance of the big win in the normal game state and the first variation performance of the big win in the specific game state, the second action performance can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to change the presence or absence of execution of the action presentation depending on whether or not the jackpot has been won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirtieth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, it is possible to execute a lamp change effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game being executed by lighting the winning hole lamp in a predetermined manner, and to execute an operation effect (prefetching operation effect, variable start accessory announcement effect) that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game being executed by operating the first movable member 73 (or the second movable member 74) during the execution of the variable effect, and losing in the normal game state. During the execution of the first variation performance (variation display of the first special pattern), the light emission performance and the operation performance can be executed, and the execution of the light emission performance and the operation performance can be restricted during the execution of the first variation performance of losing in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, the performance effect during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

A thirty-first feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the modes of the lighting device (winning gate lamp NR, top lamp 10b, etc.) include the first mode (white flashing of the winning gate lamp), the second mode (blue lighting of the winning gate lamp), the third mode (top lamp emission), and the fourth mode (winning gate lamp & top lamp off). When the time light emission performance is executed, the lighting device can be set to the third mode, and the ratio of the lighting device to the fourth mode is higher when the first variation performance is performed in the special time-saving game state than when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special pattern) is performed in the normal game state. Therefore, the performance effect during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As a 32nd feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, it is possible to execute an operation effect that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period (line notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, etc.). , it is difficult to execute the operation production. Therefore, the performance effect during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The thirty-third feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (prediction vibration effect, step-up advance notice effect, confirmed effect, etc.) executed without generating the valid period, and the first variable effect (first special effect) in the normal game state. The execution ratio of the first vibration performance is different between when the variable display of patterns is executed and when the first variable performance is executed in the special time-saving game state (it is higher when the first variable performance is executed in the normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect during the first variable effect depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The execution ratio of the first vibration performance is higher when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special pattern) is executed in the normal game state than when the first variation performance is executed in the special time-saving game state, but the opposite may be done.

The thirty-fourth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (prediction vibration effect, step-up advance notice effect, confirmed effect, etc.) executed without generating the valid period, and the first variable effect (first special effect) in the normal game state. The execution ratio of the second vibration performance is different between when the variable display of the pattern is executed and when the first variable performance is executed in the special time-saving game state (the execution ratio is high when the first variable performance is executed in the normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect during the first variable effect depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The execution ratio of the second vibration performance is higher when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special pattern) is executed in the regular game state than when the first variation performance is executed in the special time-saving game state, but the opposite may be done.

The thirty-fifth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (diaphragm announcement performance, pseudo-continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, decision performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period, and the second vibration performance (prediction vibration performance, step-up notice performance, confirmation performance, etc.) executed without generating the valid period. The execution ratio of the first vibration performance (mainly the vibration performance related to the determined performance) is different (the execution ratio is high when the second variation performance is executed) between when the special pattern variable display) is executed and when the first variable performance (first special pattern variable display) is executed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect according to the game state and the type of the variable effect, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the execution ratio of the first vibration performance (mainly the vibration performance related to the determined performance) is higher in the case where the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state than in the case where the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state, but the opposite may be done.

The thirty-sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration performance (diaphragm announcement performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, decision performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration performance that is executed without generating an effective period (prediction vibration performance, step-up notice performance, confirmation performance, etc.), and a second fluctuation performance (second) in a special time-saving game state. The execution ratio of the second vibration performance (mainly the vibration performance related to the fixed performance) is different (the execution ratio is high when the second variation performance is executed) between when the special symbol variable display is executed and when the first variable performance (first special symbol variable display) is executed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect according to the game state and the type of the variable effect, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The execution ratio of the second vibration performance (mainly the vibration performance related to the fixed performance) is higher in the case where the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state than in the case where the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state, but the opposite may be done.

As the 37th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, the first action production that operates the first movable member 73 (or the second movable member 74) in the first mode (predictive action production, variable start time role announcement production, etc.) and the second action production that operates in the second mode (decision success production, etc.) can be executed, and the second fluctuation production of the jackpot in the normal time-saving game state (variation display of the second special symbol) and the large amount in the special time-saving game state. In the winning first variation performance, the second operation performance can be executed, and in the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbol) of loss in the normal time-saving game state, the first operation performance can be executed, but in the first variation performance of loss in the special time-saving game state, the execution of the first operation performance is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to change the presence or absence of execution of the action presentation depending on whether or not the jackpot is won, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The thirty-eighth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration performance (diaphragm announcement performance, pseudo-continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, decision performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) executed according to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration performance (prediction vibration performance, step-up notice performance, confirmation performance, etc.) executed without generating the valid period. The execution ratio of the first vibration performance is different between when the special pattern variable display) is executed and when the first variable performance (first special pattern variable display) is executed in the special time-saving game state (the execution ratio is high when the second variable performance is executed in the normal time-saving game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect according to the game state and the type of the variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The execution ratio of the first vibration performance is higher when the second variation performance (variation display of the second special pattern) is executed in the normal time-saving game state than when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special pattern) is executed in the special time-saving game state, but the opposite may be done.

The thirty-ninth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (prediction vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmed effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period. The execution ratio of the second vibration performance is different between when the special pattern variable display) is executed and when the first variable performance (first special pattern variable display) is executed in the special time-saving game state (the execution ratio is high when the second variable performance is executed in the normal time-saving game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect according to the game state and the type of the variable effect, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The execution ratio of the second vibration performance is higher when the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is performed in the normal time-saving game state than when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed in the special time-saving game state, but the opposite may be done.

The 40th feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes an operation effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) that performs a predetermined effect in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 without generating an effective period (prediction vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.). , the execution ratio of the vibration production in a predetermined period after the start of the fluctuation production (until the first temporary stop after the high-speed fluctuation) is different. Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect according to the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the 41st feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, an operation effect that performs a predetermined effect according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc. Vibration effect related to) and vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 without generating a valid period (prediction vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.), including a normal game state and a special time saving game state. The execution ratio of the vibration performance that does not generate the valid period in a predetermined period after the start of the fluctuation performance (until the first temporary stop after the high-speed fluctuation) is different (the execution ratio in the normal game state is high). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration presentation according to the game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the normal game state, the execution ratio of the vibration performance that does not generate the effective period in the predetermined period after the start of the fluctuation performance (until the first temporary stop after the high-speed fluctuation) is higher in the normal game state than in the special time-saving game state, but it may be reversed.

The forty-second feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes an operation effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) for performing a predetermined effect in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and a vibration effect for vibrating the effect button 17 without generating an effective period (pre-reading vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.). , and the vibration effect, the effect button 17 can be vibrated in a different manner. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game clerk from misunderstanding that the initial vibration was performed when the vibration performance was performed (there was a fraudulent act such as turning ON/OFF the power supply of the game machine), and the performance effect of the vibration performance can be improved, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The forty-third feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes an operation effect for performing a predetermined effect in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period (vibration effect related to speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) and vibration effect to vibrate the effect button 17 without generating an effective period (pre-reading vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.). When the vibration effect is executed during the game, the vibration associated with the vibration effect is transmitted to the player via the operation means. Therefore, even if the vibrating performance is executed without generating the effective period of the performance button 17, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player is not aware of, and to improve the interest of the game.

The forty-fourth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes an operation effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) that performs a predetermined effect in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 without generating an effective period according to the look-ahead result (prediction vibration effect). The ratio of executing the vibration effect is higher before the ready-to-win effect than during the ready-to-win effect. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation even before execution of the ready-to-win effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

A forty-fifth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effects related to speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed in response to operation of effect button 17 during the effective period, and a second vibration effect executed without generating an effective period (vibration effect related to anticipation vibration effect, step-up advance notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.). The execution ratio of the second vibration performance in a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the fluctuation performance is different between when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state and when the first variation performance is executed in the normal time-saving game state (or probability variable game state) (the execution ratio is high when the first variation performance is executed in the normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect during the first variable effect depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The execution ratio of the second vibration performance in a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable performance is higher in the case where the first variable performance is executed in the normal time-saving game state (or the probability variable game state) than in the case where the first variable performance is executed in the normal time-reduction game state (or the probability variable game state), but the opposite may be done.

The forty-sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) that is executed in response to operation of effect button 17 during the effective period, and a second vibration effect that is executed without generating an effective period (vibration effect related to anticipatory vibration effect, step-up notification effect, confirmation effect, etc.), and the effect period overlaps the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. The execution ratio of the second vibration performance in a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable performance is different between when the first variable performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state and when the second variable performance is executed in the normal time-saving game state (or probability variable game state) (the execution ratio is high when the first variable performance is executed in the normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect according to the game state and the type of the variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The execution ratio of the second vibration performance in a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable performance is higher in the case where the first variable performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state than in the case where the second variable performance is executed in the normal time-saving game state (or the probability variable game state), but the opposite may be done.

The forty-seventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed in response to operation of effect button 17 during the effective period, and a second vibration effect executed without generating an effective period (vibration effect related to anticipatory vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmed effect, etc.). The execution ratio of the second vibration performance in a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the fluctuation performance is different between when the first game performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state and when the first variation performance is executed in the special time-saving game state (the execution ratio is high when the first fluctuation performance is executed in the normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect during the first variable effect depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The execution ratio of the second vibration performance in a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variation performance is higher in the case where the first game performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state than in the case where the first variation performance is executed in the special time-saving game state, but the opposite may be done.

A forty-eighth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effects related to speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed in response to operation of effect button 17 during the effective period, and a second vibration effect executed without generating an effective period (vibration effect related to anticipatory vibration effect, step-up notification effect, confirmation effect, etc.), and the effect period overlaps the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. The execution ratio of the second vibration performance in a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variation performance is different between when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed in the normal game state and when the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is performed in the special time-saving game state (it is higher when the first variation performance is performed in the normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect according to the game state and the type of the variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The execution ratio of the second vibration performance in a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variation performance is higher in the case where the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state than in the case where the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state, but the opposite may be done.

The forty-ninth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) that is executed in response to operation of effect button 17 during the effective period, and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to anticipatory vibration effect, step-up notification effect, confirmation effect, etc.) that is executed without generating an effective period. The execution ratio of the second vibration performance in a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable performance is different between when the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving game state (or probability variable game state) and when the second variation performance is executed in the special time-saving game state (the execution ratio of the second vibration performance is higher when the second variation performance is executed in the normal time-saving game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect during the second variable effect depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The execution ratio of the second vibration performance in a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable performance is higher in the case where the second variable performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving game state (or the probability variable game state) than in the case where the second variable performance is executed in the special time-saving game state, but the opposite may be done.

The fiftieth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to dialog announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) that is executed in response to operation of effect button 17 during the effective period, and a second vibration effect (vibration effect that is related to anticipatory vibration effect, step-up notification effect, confirmation effect, etc.) that is executed without generating an effective period. The execution ratio of the second vibration performance in a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variation performance is different between when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed in the special time-saving game state and when the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is performed in the special time-saving game state (it is higher when the second variation performance is performed). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect during the second variable effect depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the execution ratio of the second vibration performance in a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable performance is higher in the case where the second variable performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state than in the case where the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state, but the opposite may be done.

The fifty-first feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed in response to operation of effect button 17 during the effective period, and a second vibration effect executed without generating an effective period (vibration effect related to anticipatory vibration effect, step-up advance notice effect, confirmed effect, etc.). The execution ratio of the second vibration performance in a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable performance is different between when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving game state (or the probability variable game state) and when the second variable performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving game state (or the probability variable game state) (it is higher when the second variable performance is executed). Therefore, in the normal time-saving game state (or the probability variable game state), the performance related to the vibration production can be varied depending on the type of the variation production, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the execution ratio of the second vibration performance in a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable performance is higher when the second variable performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or the probability variable gaming state) than when the first variable performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or the probability variable gaming state), but the opposite may be done.

The fifty-second feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effects related to speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) that is executed in response to operation of effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect that is executed without generating an effective period (vibration effect related to anticipation vibration effect, step-up notice effect, final effect, etc.). The execution ratio of the second vibration performance in a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variation performance is different between when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed in the special time-saving game state and when the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is performed in the special time-saving game state (it is higher when the second variation performance is performed). Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration production depending on the type of the variation production, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

When the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state, the execution ratio of the second vibration performance in a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable performance is higher than when the first variable performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state, but the opposite may be done.

The fifty-third feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed in response to operation of effect button 17 during the effective period, and a second vibration effect executed without generating an effective period (vibration effect related to anticipatory vibration effect, step-up advance notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.). It is possible to vibrate the effect button 17 in different modes between the initial vibration of the effect button 17 after power-on and the second vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game clerk from misunderstanding that the initial vibration was performed when the second vibration performance was performed (there was a fraudulent act such as turning on and off the power of the game machine), and the performance effect of the vibration performance can be improved to improve the interest of the game.

The fifty-fourth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effects related to speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed in response to operation of effect button 17 during the effective period, and a second vibration effect executed without generating an effective period (vibration effect related to anticipatory vibration effect, step-up advance notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.). It is possible to vibrate the effect button 17 in different modes between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. Therefore, it becomes easy to distinguish whether it is the first vibration performance or the second vibration performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifty-fifth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) that is executed in response to operation of effect button 17 during the effective period, and a second vibration effect that is executed without generating an effective period (vibration effect related to anticipation vibration effect, step-up advance notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.). For example, when the second vibration performance is executed during the operation of the operation means such as the cross key 19, the vibration related to the second vibration performance is transmitted to the player via the operation means. Therefore, even if the second vibration performance is executed in which the effective period of the performance button 17 does not occur, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player does not notice, and to improve the interest of the game.

A fifty-sixth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed in response to operation of effect button 17 during the effective period, and a second vibration effect (prefetching vibration effect) executed without generating an effective period according to the look-ahead result. When a variable performance in which a ready-to-win performance is performed during a normal game state is executed, the ratio of execution of the second vibration performance is higher before the ready-to-win performance than during the ready-to-win performance. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation even before execution of the ready-to-win effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The fifty-seventh feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed in response to operation of effect button 17 during the effective period, and a second vibration effect executed without generating an effective period (vibration effect related to anticipatory vibration effect, step-up advance notice effect, confirmed effect, etc.). When the second vibration performance is executed during the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbol) in the normal time-saving game state (or the variable probability game state), the expectation for the execution of the big win game is higher than when the second vibration performance is executed during the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) in the normal game state. Therefore, the expectation for the second vibration effect can be varied depending on the game state and the type of the variable effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The fifty-eighth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration performance (vibration performance related to pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, etc.) executed in response to operation of performance button 17 during the effective period, and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to confirmation performance, pattern matching, etc.) executed without generating the effective period. During the variable display of the first special symbol), the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be executed, and the execution of the first vibration performance is restricted during the first variation performance in the normal time-saving game state (or probability variable game state), but the second vibration performance can be executed, and the performance button 17 can be vibrated in different modes between the initial vibration of the performance button 17 after turning on the power and the first vibration performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game clerk from misunderstanding that the initial vibration was performed when the vibration performance was performed (there was a fraudulent act such as turning ON/OFF the power supply of the game machine), and the performance effect of the vibration performance can be improved, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The fifty-ninth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration performance (vibration performance related to a simulated continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, etc.) executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a final performance, pattern matching, etc.) executed without generating an effective period. During the variable display of the first special symbol), the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be executed, and the execution of the first vibration performance is restricted during the first variation performance in the normal time-saving game state (or probability variable game state), but the second vibration performance can be executed, and the performance button 17 can be vibrated in different modes between the initial vibration of the performance button 17 after turning on the power and the second vibration performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game clerk from misunderstanding that the initial vibration was performed when the vibration performance was performed (there was a fraudulent act such as turning ON/OFF the power supply of the game machine), and the performance effect of the vibration performance can be improved, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

As the 60th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, the first vibration production (prediction vibration production, serif notice production, step-up notice production, etc.) is executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable production. The execution ratio of the first vibration performance is different (higher when the second variation performance is executed) between when one variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed and when the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving game state (or probability variable game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance of the vibration production according to the type of the variable production in the normal time-saving game state (or the variable probability game state), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the execution ratio of the first vibration performance is higher when the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time reduction game state (or the probability variable game state) than when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time reduction game state (or the probability variable game state), but the opposite may be done.

As the 61st feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, the first vibration production (prediction vibration production, dialogue notice production, step-up notice production, etc.) is executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable production, and the second vibration production (vibration production related to development production, cut-in production, decision production, re-lottery production, etc.) is executed at a timing different from the first vibration production (during reach). The execution ratio of the second vibration performance is different (higher when the second variation performance is executed) between when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed and when the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving game state (or probability variable game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance of the vibration performance depending on the type of the variable performance in the normal time-saving gaming state (or the probability variable gaming state), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the execution ratio of the second vibration performance is higher when the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time reduction game state (or probability variable game state) than when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time reduction game state (or probability variable game state), but the opposite may be done.

As the 62nd feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, the first vibration production (prediction vibration production, dialogue notice production, step-up notice production, etc.) is executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the fluctuation production. The execution ratio of the first vibration performance is different (higher when the second variation performance is executed) between when the variable display of patterns is executed and when the second variable performance (variation display of the second special patterns) is executed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the performance of the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of the variable performance, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The execution ratio of the first vibration performance is higher when the second variation performance (variation display of the second special pattern) is executed in the special time-saving game state than when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special pattern) is executed in the special time-saving game state, but the opposite may be done.

As the 63rd feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, the first vibration production (prediction vibration production, dialogue notice production, step-up notice production, etc.) is executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable production. The execution ratio of the second vibration performance is different (higher when the second variation performance is executed) between when the variable display of patterns is executed and when the second variable performance (variation display of the second special symbols) is executed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the performance of the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of the variable performance, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The execution ratio of the second vibration performance is higher when the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state than when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special pattern) is executed in the special time-saving game state, but the opposite may be done.

As the 64th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, the first vibration production (prediction vibration production, serif notice production, step-up notice production, etc.) is executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable production. The execution ratio of the first vibration performance is different between (game state) and the first vibration performance, and the performance button 17 can be vibrated in a different mode between the initial vibration of the performance button 17 after turning on the power and the first vibration performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game clerk from misunderstanding that the initial vibration was performed when the first vibration performance was performed (there was a fraudulent act such as turning ON/OFF the power of the game machine), and the performance effect of the first vibration performance can be improved to improve the amusement of the game.

The 65th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration production (prediction vibration production, dialogue notice production, step-up notice production, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable production, and the second vibration production (development production, cut-in production, decision production, re-lottery production, etc.). The execution ratio of the first vibration performance is different between (game state) and the second vibration performance, and the performance button 17 can be vibrated in different modes between the initial vibration of the performance button 17 after turning on the power and the second vibration performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game clerk from misunderstanding that the initial vibration was performed when the second vibration performance was performed (there was a fraudulent act such as turning ON/OFF the power supply of the game machine), and the performance effect of the second vibration performance can be improved, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The sixty-sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration performance (vibration performance related to a look-ahead vibration performance, a dialogue notice performance, a step-up notice performance, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable performance, and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to development performance, cut-in performance, decision performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) executed at a timing different from the first vibration performance (during reach). When the first vibration effect is executed, the effect button 17 is more likely to emit light in the first light emission mode (white light emission or the like) with a low expectation of a big win. Therefore, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the effect button 17 depending on the type of vibration effect and the degree of expectation for a big win, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As the 67th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, the first vibration production (prediction vibration production, serif notice production, step-up notice production, etc.) is executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable production. The execution ratio of the first vibration performance is different between the game state and the game state), and the performance button 17 is more likely to emit light in the first light emission mode (white light emission, etc.) with a lower expectation of big win when the first vibration performance is executed than when the second vibration performance is executed in the big win variation performance. Therefore, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the effect button 17 depending on the type of vibration effect and the degree of expectation for a big win, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A sixty-eighth characteristic of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the valid period of the effect button 17 includes a first valid period (effective period related to dialogue announcement effect and pseudo-continuous effect) that occurs at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable effect and a second valid period (effective period related to cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during reach) after the first valid period, and the effect button 17 is activated when the effect button 17 is operated during the second valid period. Vibration performance can be executed, the performance button 17 can be vibrated in different modes depending on the initial vibration and vibration performance of the performance button 17 after power-on, and different operation sounds can be output when the performance button 17 is operated during the first effective period and when the performance button 17 is operated during the second effective period. Therefore, it is possible to make the presentation effect different between when the first valid period occurs and when the second valid period occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixty-ninth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the valid period of the effect button 17 includes a first valid period (valid period related to dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect) that occurs at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable effect and a second valid period (valid period related to cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during reach) after the first valid period, and when the effect button 17 is operated during the first valid period. Vibration performance can be executed, the performance button 17 can be vibrated in different modes depending on the initial vibration and vibration performance of the performance button 17 after power-on, and different operation sounds can be output when the performance button 17 is operated during the first effective period and when the performance button 17 is operated during the second effective period. Therefore, it is possible to make the performance effect different between when the first valid period occurs and when the second valid period occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a 70th feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, the effective period of the effect button 17 includes a first effective period (a period of validity related to a dialogue announcement effect and a pseudo-continuous effect) that occurs at a predetermined timing (before reach) during a variable effect (a period of validity related to a dialogue announcement effect and a pseudo-continuous effect), and a second period of validity (a valid period related to a development effect, a fixed effect, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during reach) after the first effective period. The execution ratio of the vibration performance corresponding to the operation of the performance button 17 during the first valid period is different between the two (higher in the normal game state), and the number of vibrations of the vibration performance corresponding to the operation during the first valid period is different from the vibration number of the vibration performance corresponding to the operation during the second valid period (the number of vibrations in the vibration performance corresponding to the operation during the second valid period is large). Therefore, it is possible to vary the presentation effect depending on the game state and the type of valid period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The execution ratio of the vibration performance corresponding to the operation of the performance button 17 during the first effective period in the normal game state is higher than the execution ratio of the vibration performance according to the operation of the performance button 17 during the first effective period in the normal game state (or the variable probability game state), but the opposite may be done. Also, the number of vibrations in the vibration performance corresponding to the operation during the second valid period is greater than the number of vibrations in the vibration performance corresponding to the operation during the first valid period, but the opposite may be done.

As the 71st feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, the effective period of the effect button 17 includes a first effective period (dialogue announcement effect, effective period related to pseudo continuous effect) that occurs at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable effect (valid period related to dialogue announcement effect, pseudo continuous effect), and a second effective period (effective period related to development effect, determined effect, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during reach) after the first effective period. The execution ratio of the vibration performance corresponding to the operation of the performance button 17 is different (higher in the normal game state), and the vibration frequency of the vibration performance corresponding to the operation during the first effective period is different from the vibration frequency of the vibration performance corresponding to the operation during the second effective period (vibration frequency according to the operation during the second effective period is larger). Therefore, it is possible to vary the presentation effect depending on the game state and the type of valid period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The execution ratio of the vibration performance corresponding to the operation of the performance button 17 during the first effective period in the normal game state is higher than the execution ratio of the vibration performance according to the operation of the performance button 17 during the first effective period in the special time-saving game state, but the opposite may be done. Also, the number of vibrations in the vibration performance corresponding to the operation during the second valid period is greater than the number of vibrations in the vibration performance corresponding to the operation during the first valid period, but the opposite may be done.

As a 72nd feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, it is possible to set a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode) in which the execution ratio of a specific effect (continuous notice effect, icon change effect, timer effect, etc.) that expects execution of a jackpot game according to the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19 is different. For example, the execution rate of the continuous advance notice performance) is the first rate (high) and the execution rate of the second specific performance (for example, the timer performance) is the second rate (high), and in the special time-saving game state after being set to the normal setting state. When the second variable performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the execution rate of the first specific performance is different from the first rate (low rate) and the execution rate of the second specific performance is different from the second rate (low rate). Therefore, even in the normal game state after being set to the normal setting state, the effect can be changed according to the type of the variable effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the execution ratio of the first specific performance and the execution ratio of the second specific performance when the second variable performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state after being set to the normal setting state may be higher than the execution ratio of the first specific performance and the execution ratio of the second specific performance when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after being set to the normal setting state.

As a 73rd feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, it is possible to set a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode) in which the execution ratio of a specific effect (continuous notice effect, icon change effect, timer effect, etc.) that expects execution of a jackpot game according to the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19 is different. For example, the execution rate of the continuous advance notice performance) is the first rate (high) and the execution rate of the second specific performance (for example, the timer performance) is the second rate (high), and when the first variable performance is executed in the normal time-saving game state (or the probability variable game state) after being set to the normal setting state, the execution rate of the first specific performance is different from the first rate (low rate) and the execution rate of the second specific performance is different from the second rate (low rate). Therefore, even in the first variable production after setting to the normal setting state, the production effect can be changed according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The execution ratio of the first specific performance and the execution ratio of the second specific performance when the first variable performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving game state after being set to the normal setting state may be higher than the execution ratio of the first specific performance and the execution ratio of the second specific performance when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after being set to the normal setting state.

As the 74th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, a specific effect (continuous notice effect, icon change effect, timer effect, etc.) that expects the execution of the jackpot game according to the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19. It can be set to a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode) with different execution ratios, and the second variable effect (variation display of the second special symbol) in the normal time-saving game state (or variable probability game state) after setting to the normal setting state. is executed, the execution ratio of the first specific production (for example, continuous notice production) is the first ratio (high) and the execution ratio of the second specific production (for example, the timer production) is the second ratio (high), and when the first variable production is executed in the special time-saving game state after being set to the normal setting state, the execution ratio of the first specific production is different from the first ratio (low ratio), and the execution ratio of the second specific production is different from the second ratio (low ratio). Therefore, even in the second variable production after being set to the normal setting state, the production effect can be varied depending on the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the execution ratio of the first specific performance and the execution ratio of the second specific performance when the first variable performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time reduction game state after being set to the normal setting state may be higher than the execution ratio of the first specific performance and the execution ratio of the second specific performance when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time saving game state after being set to the normal setting state.

The 75th feature of the various tables shown in FIG. 34 to 69 is the normal setting status (normal mode) with different execution ratio (normal mode) with different execution ratio of specific directing (continuous notice production, icon change production, timer production, etc.) that expects the execution of a jackpot in accordance with the operation of the production button 17 and the cross key 19. It can be set as simple mode), and when the second fluctuation production (fluctuation display of the second special pattern) is executed in the normal time -showing technique state (or probable change gaming state) after setting to the normal setting state, the executive ratio of the first specific effect (eg, continuous notification production) is the 1st ratio (high) and the second specific production (for example, a timer production). When the 1st fluctuation production (floating display of the first special pattern) is executed in the normal gaming state after setting the normal setting state, the execution ratio of the first specific effect is different from the 1st ratio (low percentage), and the executive ratio of the second specific production is different from the 2nd ratio (low percentage). Therefore, even in the specific game state after being set to the normal setting state, the effect can be changed according to the type of variable effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the execution ratio of the first specific performance and the execution ratio of the second specific performance when the first variable performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after being set to the normal setting state may be higher than the execution ratio of the first specific performance and the execution ratio of the second specific performance when the second variation performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time saving game state (or probability variable game state) after being set to the normal setting state.

As a 76th feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, a specific effect (continuous notice effect, icon change effect, timer effect, etc.) that expects execution of a jackpot game according to the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19. It can be set to a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode) with different execution ratios, and when the second variable effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state after being set to the normal setting state, the first specific effect. The execution ratio of the production (for example, continuous notice production) is the first ratio (high), and the execution ratio of the second specific production (for example, timer production) is the second ratio (high), and the normal time-saving game state (or variable probability game state) after setting the normal setting state. are Therefore, even in the specific game state after being set to the normal setting state, the effect can be changed according to the type of the variable effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the execution ratio of the first specific performance when the second variable performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state after being set to the normal setting state is higher than the execution ratio of the second specific performance.

As the 77th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, a specific effect (continuous notice effect, icon change effect, timer effect, etc.) that expects the execution of the jackpot game according to the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19 It can be set to a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode) with different execution ratios, and a second variable effect (variation display of the second special symbol) in the normal time-saving game state (or probability variable game state) after setting to the normal setting state. is executed, the execution ratio of the first specific effect (for example, continuous notice effect) is the first ratio (high) and the execution ratio of the second specific effect (for example, timer effect) is the second ratio (high), and in the special time-saving game state after being set to the normal setting state. are Therefore, even in the specific game state after being set to the normal setting state, the effect can be changed according to the type of variable effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the execution ratio of the first specific performance when the second variable performance (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time reduction game state (or probability variable game state) after being set to the normal setting state is the execution ratio of the second specific performance.

A seventy-eighth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that when the first variable effect is executed in the specific game state, the predetermined first vibration effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo continuous effect, vibration effect related to cut-in effect) is not executed, but the specific first vibration effect (vibration effect related to development effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the performance effect when the first variable performance is executed in the specific game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As the 79th feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, the execution ratio of the vibration performance related to the re-lottery performance (execution ratio of the variation performance related to the re-lottery performance) differs between when the first variation performance is executed in the specific game state and when the second variation performance is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, in the specific game state, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration performance related to the re-lottery performance depending on the type of the variable performance (special symbol), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

34 to 69, the 80th feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that a first operation effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) in which no effective suggestion effect suggesting the occurrence of the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17, etc.) is performed, and a second operation effect (advancement effect, cut-in announcement effect, fixed effect, etc.) in which an effective suggestion effect suggesting the occurrence of the valid period of the effect button 17 is performed can be executed, and the normal game state is performed. The first operation performance is more likely to be executed when the first variation performance of loss is executed in the special time-saving game state than when the first variation performance of loss (variation display of the first special pattern) is executed in the state. Therefore, the performance effect during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As the eighty-first feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, when the vibration performance is executed by operating the performance button 17 during the effective period, the operation performance of the movable performance member 73 is more likely to be executed than when the vibration performance is not executed by operating the performance button 17 during the valid period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the vibration effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A specific operation effect is provided in which a predetermined effect is executed according to the operation during the effective period but the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed, and the case where the first vibration effect (vibration effect relating to the dialogue announcement effect, the pseudo continuous effect, the development effect, the cut-in effect, the decision effect, the re-lottery effect, etc.) executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effect period is executed is more effective than the case where the specific operation effect is executed. display of a plurality of translucent effect button images, etc.) can be easily executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for the first vibration effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Proportion of advance notice restriction period)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the ratio of the notice limit period related to the loss fluctuation effect of the production modes A to C, FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the ratio of the notice limit period related to the loss fluctuation effect of the production modes D to G, and FIG.

The "notice restriction period" is a period in which the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and/or the special symbol TZ and the dynamic display of the background image are executed, but the execution of the jackpot announcement effect (variable start character object announcement effect, dialog announcement effect, step-up announcement effect, cut-in announcement effect, fixed effect, etc.) is restricted (regulated). It is a period during which there is a possibility that

For example, in the variation performance pattern 3, the first half of the normal variation is the advance notice period, the latter half of the normal variation and the normal ready-to-win performance are the limit period, the rate of the limit period in the variation performance is 70%, and the number of occurrence of the limit period is one.

Here, the loss variation performance is illustrated, but the big hit variation pattern also differs only in the final result of the variation performance and whether or not the re-lottery performance is executed, so basically when compared with the loss variation performance having the same performance structure, the ratio between the notice period and the restriction period is the same.

A first feature relating to the advance notice limit period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that the ratio of the advance notice limit period tends to be larger in the loss fluctuation performance pattern in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed than in the loss fluctuation performance pattern in which the ready-to-win performance is executed. Therefore, the period during which the big win announcement effect can be executed changes according to the degree of expectation for the big win of the variable effect pattern, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a second feature relating to the advance notice limit period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the number of occurrences of the advance notice limit period tends to be smaller in the loss fluctuation performance pattern in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed than in the loss fluctuation performance pattern in which the ready-to-win performance is executed. Therefore, the number of times the big win notice effect can be executed changes according to the degree of expectation of the big win of the variable effect pattern, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

70 to 72, the third feature related to the notice limit period shown in Figs. 70 to 72 is that the proportion of the notice limit period tends to increase when the first special symbol losing variable display (first variable effect) is executed in the production mode H (special time-saving game state) rather than when the first special symbol losing variable display (first variable effect) is executed in the production modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to prompt the execution of the variable display (second variable performance) of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player in the performance mode H (special time-saving game state), and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature related to the notice limit period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the number of occurrences of the notice limit period tends to be smaller when the first special symbol losing variable display (first variable effect) is executed in the production mode H (special time-saving game state) than when the first special symbol losing variable display (first variable effect) is executed in the production modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to prompt the execution of the variable display (second variable performance) of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player in the performance mode H (special time-saving game state), and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fifth feature related to the notice limit period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, when the first special symbol losing fluctuation display (first fluctuation production) is executed in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), and when the first special symbol losing fluctuation display (first fluctuation production) is executed in production mode H (special time saving game state), the execution ratio of the fluctuation production to be the notice restriction period over the entire period is different (when the first fluctuation production is executed in the special time saving game state). execution ratio is high). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance effect when the first variable performance is executed depending on the type of performance mode, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In production mode H (special time-saving game state), the execution ratio of the fluctuation performance to be the advance notice limit period is higher in the case where the loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation performance) of the first special symbol is executed in performance mode H (special time-saving game state) than in the case where the loss fluctuation display (first variation performance) of the first special symbol is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state), but it may be reversed.

As a sixth feature related to the notice limit period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the case where the loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation production) of the first special symbol is executed in production modes A to C (normal game state) is more likely to be executed during the entire period when the loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation production) of the first special symbol is executed in production mode H (special time-saving game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance effect when the variable performance is executed depending on the performance mode and the type of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a seventh feature related to the notice limit period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the ratio of the notice limit period is likely to increase when the first special symbol loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation production) is executed in production mode H (special time reduction game state) than when the second special symbol loss fluctuation display (second fluctuation production) is executed in production modes D to G (normal time reduction game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance effect when the variable performance is executed depending on the performance mode and the type of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The eighth feature relating to the notice limit period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that the number of occurrences of the notice limit period tends to be smaller when the first special symbol loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation production) is executed in production mode H (special time reduction game state) than when the second special symbol loss fluctuation display (second fluctuation production) is executed in production modes D to G (normal time reduction game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance effect when the variable performance is executed depending on the performance mode and the type of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a ninth feature related to the notice limit period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, when the second special symbol losing fluctuation display (second fluctuation production) is executed in production mode D to G (normal time reduction game state), and when the first special symbol loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation production) is executed in production mode H (special time reduction game state), the execution ratio of the fluctuation production to be the notice restriction period over the entire period is different (the second fluctuation production is executed in the special time reduction game state). The execution rate is high when Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance effect when the variable performance is executed depending on the performance mode and the type of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In production mode H (special time-saving game state), the execution ratio of the fluctuation performance to be the notice limit period is higher in performance mode H (special time-saving game state) than in performance modes D to G (normal time-saving game state).

A tenth feature related to the notice limit period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that the proportion of the notice limit period tends to increase when the first special symbol loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation production) is executed in production mode H (special time reduction game state) than when the second special symbol loss fluctuation display (second fluctuation production) is executed in production modes D to G (normal time reduction game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance effect when the variable performance is executed depending on the performance mode and the type of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the loss variation display (first variation performance) of the first special symbol is executed in the performance mode H (special time-saving game state), the length of the notice limit period differs between the normal variation performance pattern (first reservation number = 0) and the ultra-short variation performance pattern (first reservation number = 1 to 3), but the length of the notice restriction period may be the same. In this case, on the premise that both the normal variable performance pattern and the super-shortened variable performance pattern are executed, the length of the notice limit period may be the same, or the length of the notice limit period may be made the same on the premise that only one of the normal variable performance pattern and the super-shortened variable performance pattern is executed regardless of the first reservation number.

(Types of vibration production for each production mode)
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing types of vibration effects for each effect mode.

Vibration performances that can be executed during the variable display (first variation performance) of the first special pattern in performance modes A to C (normal game state) have six kinds of vibration performances in which an effective period occurs, and five kinds of vibration performances in which an effective period does not occur.
In addition, the vibrating performance that can be executed during the variable display (second variable performance) of the second special symbol in the performance modes A to C (normal game state) has one kind of vibrating performance that generates an effective period, and three kinds of vibrating performance that does not generate an effective period.

Vibration performances that can be executed during the variable display (first variation performance) of the first special symbol in performance modes D to G (probability variable game state/ordinary time reduction game state) are one type of vibration performance with valid period and one type of vibration performance without valid period.
In addition, the vibrating performance that can be executed during the variable display (second variable performance) of the second special symbol in the performance modes D to G (probability variable game state/ordinary time reduction game state) has six kinds of vibrating performances in which the valid period occurs and four kinds of vibrating performance in which the valid period does not occur.

Vibration performances that can be executed during the variable display (first variation performance) of the first special pattern in the performance mode H (special time-saving game state) are one type of vibration performance for which an effective period occurs and one type of vibration performance for which an effective period does not occur.
In addition, there are four types of vibrating performances that generate an effective period and three types of vibrating performances that do not generate an effective period of vibration performances that may be executed during the variable display (second variable performance) of the second special pattern in performance mode H (special time-saving game state).

In addition, in the initial action of the production button 17 executed when the game machine is turned on, the vibrating action of the production button 17 is 2.5 seconds of strong continuous vibration or 2.5 seconds of strong intermittent vibration. Therefore, the vibration mode (vibration time, vibration pattern, etc.) is different from the vibrating action (vibration production) of the production button 17 in which the effective period is generated during the variable production and the vibrating action (vibration production) of the production button 17 in which the effective period is not generated (vibration production).

In this way, the number of types of vibration performances that do not generate an effective period that can be executed during the variable display (first variable performance) of the first special symbol in performance modes D to G (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) is greater than the number of types of vibration performance that does not generate an effective period that can be executed during variable display (first variable performance) of the first special symbol in performance modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance effect when the first variable performance is executed depending on the type of the performance mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of types of vibration performances that do not generate an effective period that can be executed during the variable display (first variable performance) of the first special symbol in performance modes A to C (normal game state) is greater than the number of types of vibration performance that does not occur during the variable display (first variable performance) of the first special symbol in the performance mode H (special time-saving game state). The performance effect when the first variable performance is executed can be made different depending on the type of performance mode, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the number of types of vibration performance in which the effective period which may be executed during the variable display (second variable performance) of the second special symbol does not occur in performance modes D to G (probability variable game state, time reduction game state) is larger than the number of types of vibration performance in which the effective period which may be executed during the variable display (first variable performance) of the first special symbol in performance modes A to C (normal game state) does not occur. It is possible to make the performance effect of executing the variable performance different depending on the performance mode and the type of the special symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of types of vibration performances that do not generate an effective period that may be executed during the variable display (first variable performance) of the first special symbol in performance modes A to C (normal game state) is greater than the number of types of vibration performance that may be executed during the variable display (second variable performance) of the second special symbol in the performance mode H (special time-saving game state). It is possible to make the performance effect of executing the variable performance different depending on the performance mode and the type of the special symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Main processing of the integrated control unit)
Main processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing main processing of the integrated control unit 141 . This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the overall CPU 141a.

First, the supervising CPU 141a prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, CPU initialization such as setting of built-in registers, access permission to the general RAM 141c, initialization (0 clear) of all RWM areas of the general RAM 141c, activation of CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating timer interrupts, etc. are performed, and all interrupts are permitted in step T3.

The overall CPU 141a performs adjustment mode switching processing in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9 with reference to the input signal from the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk, the light amount (value) of the backlight of the display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the volume and the light amount (whether the volume can be adjusted, whether the light amount can be adjusted, the initial value of the volume value (any of 0 to 5), the initial value of the light value (any of 0 to 5), A process for switching the adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5) of the volume value and the adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5) of the light amount value is performed.

It should be noted that the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the changeover switch 22 can always be performed when the game machine 1 is in the power ON state (after the integrated control unit 141 is activated).

The supervising CPU 141a performs volume adjustment processing in step T5. Specifically, based on the detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 operable by the player, processing for adjusting the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the sound output device 9 is performed.

The supervising CPU 141a performs light amount adjustment processing in step T6. Specifically, based on detection signals (lower button detection signal, upper button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player, processing for adjusting the light amount (value) of the backlight of the display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is performed.

The setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the cross key 19 is regulated (restricted) at the start of the variable performance and at the end of the variable performance (stop of the performance pattern 70a). In addition, during the period from power-on to the start of game progress control (specifically, during the setting change mode, during the RWM clear preparation mode, during the setting confirmation mode, during the initial operation of various drive sources of the board unit 500, etc.), important (high security level) abnormalities (power-on, power recovery, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) that should be notified with priority over plate full errors and payout errors. is regulated (restricted) even during notification (output of notification sound).

Further, during the output of the abnormality notification sound, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, the volume of various effect sounds (BGM, etc.) output from the voice output device 9 is reduced from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality notification sound ends, the volume of the various effect sounds is returned to the volume before the reduction.

The supervising CPU 141a performs eco mode control processing in step T7. Specifically, it performs processing for controlling the start and end of the eco mode for suppressing power consumption by reducing the amount of backlight of the display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71).

In step T8, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not it has received an effect instruction command or a notification instruction command transmitted from the effect control section 130m. If the performance instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process proceeds to step T11, and if the performance instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process proceeds to step T9.

The supervising CPU 141a performs animation pattern setting processing in step T9. Specifically, an animation pattern is determined from the animation group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and set in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c.

The supervising CPU 141a performs a sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process of determining a sound pattern from the type of sound group corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and setting it in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c is performed.

In step T11, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not a frame switching flag is set in the supervising RAM 141c. If there is a frame switching flag, the process moves to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process moves to step T4.

The frame switching flag is set by V blank interrupt processing executed each time the general control unit 141 receives a V blank signal transmitted from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every 1/30 second (time required for completion of rendering/display of the effect image for one frame). Therefore, the processes of steps T12 to T15 described below are executed each time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

The general CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the general RAM 141c in step T12, and performs scene update processing in step T13. Specifically, the scene switching counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter updated by the V-blank interrupt processing described above are referred to, and the animation scene address is updated based on the animation pattern determined in step T9, and the sound scene address is updated based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The supervising CPU 141a performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, according to the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs, a display list consisting of a drawing control command group is generated from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and also performs processing for displaying the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn in the display frame buffer on the display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). In other words, the frame update timing is set to the start timing and end timing of various effects (image display and sound output such as pending display, variable effect, big hit notice effect, look-ahead effect, etc.) performed by the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71.例文帳に追加

Note that the effects directly controlled by the effect control unit 130m and the lamp control unit 150 (holding display by the first sub-holding display 83 and second sub-holding display 84, and the production operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) may or may not match the frame update timing.

The overall CPU 141a performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a process of generating an audio control command from the sound information at the updated address and outputting this audio control command to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) is performed.

As a result, the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) performs processing for outputting various effects and notification sounds from the audio output device 9 based on the audio control command. When this processing ends, the processing moves to step T4.

In this way, at the start of the variable performance and at the end of the variable performance (stop of the performance pattern 70a), volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment by the changeover switch 22 operable by the game clerk are possible, but volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment by the cross key 19 operable by the player are regulated (restricted). Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to miss important points such as the start of the variable performance and the end of the variable performance, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, during the notification (output of notification sound) of important (high security level) abnormalities (power-on, power recovery, unrecoverable error, fraudulent winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) that should be reported with priority over plate full error and payout error, volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment by the changeover switch 22 operable by the game clerk are possible, but volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment by the cross key 19 operable by the player are restricted (restricted). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment on the amusement parlor side while avoiding the inconvenience that a player trying to adjust the volume and light intensity does not notice the occurrence of an abnormality.

Further, during the output of the abnormality notification sound, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, the volume of various performance sounds (BGM, etc.) output from the voice output device 9 is reduced from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality notification sound is finished, the volume of the various performance sounds is returned to the volume before the reduction. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing an abnormality notification sound due to various effects sounds, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

Note that while the abnormality is being notified (output of the notification sound), setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the cross key 19 that the player can operate may be disabled, or the adjustment range of the volume value and the light amount value may be limited, for example, between 0 and 2.

(Accessory initial processing of lamp control unit)
The accessory initial processing of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the character object initial processing of the lamp control unit 150, and this processing is executed within the timer interrupt processing executed by the lamp control unit 150 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) has been received from the main control board 110 or not. If the power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a sets the initial processing number updated in each processing of the accessory initial processing to "1" for executing the origin return processing of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17).

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "1" in step R103. When the initial processing number is not '1', the processing is shifted to step R105 assuming that the origin return processing of the accessory is not executed, and when the initial processing number is '1', the origin return processing is performed in step R104, and the present initial processing of the accessory is terminated. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) are returned to the origin position, and the initial processing number is set to "2". Details of the origin return processing will be described later.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "2" in step R105. When the initial processing number is not ``2'', the current role initial processing is terminated assuming that the initial action processing of the role is not executed, and when the initial processing number is ``2'', the initial action processing is performed and the current role initial processing is terminated. Specifically, an initial operation and initial light emission are performed to confirm whether or not the accessory operates normally, and an initial processing number is set to "0". Details of the initial operation process will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 75, the origin return processing for performing the operation of returning various accessories to the origin position and the initial operation processing for performing the initial operation and initial light emission of various accessories are not executed at the same time. Therefore, the return operation to the origin position of various roles and the initial operation and initial light emission of various roles are not mixed, and the return operation, the initial operation and the initial light emission can be separately confirmed.

Further, according to the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 75, the origin return process is executed before the initial action process. Therefore, the various accessories are initially moved from the origin position, and it is possible to easily grasp whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Origin return processing of lamp control unit)
The return-to-origin process of the lamp controller 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing origin return processing in lamp control unit 150 .

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the return-to-origin status of the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is "0". When the board accessory processing number is not "0", the processing is shifted to step R105-3, and when the board accessory processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the first movable member 73 is set as an object to be driven to return to the origin, and the processing is shifted to step R105-5.

The ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R105-3. When the board accessory processing number is not "1", the processing is shifted to step R105-12, and when the board accessory processing number is "1", in step R105-4, the second movable member 74 is set as the driven object to return to the origin, and the processing is shifted to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the movable member to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that each movable member is at the origin position is determined. If the movable member to be driven is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-6, and if the movable member to be driven is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the ramp CPU 150a drives the drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven so that the movable member to be driven returns to the origin position, and in step R105-7, updates the board function abnormality determination timer by +1 for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality in which the movable member does not return to the origin position within a predetermined time.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). When the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that the movable member to be driven has a return abnormality, and the processing is shifted to step R105-9, and when the board accessory abnormality determination timer is not the upper limit value, the processing is shifted to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information (first movable member return abnormality information, second movable member return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-10 clears the board accessory abnormality judgment timer.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-11. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is '0', the board accessory processing number is updated to '1' so as to drive the second movable member 74, and if the board accessory processing number is '1', the board accessory processing number is updated to '2' to end the processing of returning the board accessory (the first movable member and the second movable member) to the origin.

At step R105-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the state of returning to the origin of the frame role object (production button 17) is "0". If the frame role object processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R105-13, and if the board role process number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R105-20.

At step R105-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the effect button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the production button 17 is at the origin position is determined. If the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-14, and if the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-19.

In step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a drives the button driving motor for moving the production button 17 so that the production button 17 returns to the origin position, and in step R105-15, the production button 17 updates +1 the frame accessory abnormality judgment timer for judging the occurrence of return abnormality in which the production button 17 does not return to the origin position within a predetermined time.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). When the frame role object abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that return abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17, and the processing is shifted to step R105-17.

In step R105-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information indicating that the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-18 clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to end the process of returning the frame accessory (production button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R105-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, sets "2" for executing the initial action processing of the accessory to the above-described initial processing number, and ends the current origin return processing.

Thus, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 76, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are not returned to the origin positions at the same time (simultaneously), but are returned to the origin positions in a predetermined order (first movable member 73→second movable member 74). Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not various board accessories have returned to the origin position. In addition, when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in contact with each other with difficulty in separation, it is possible to prevent the two movable members from applying loads to each other, and to prevent the inconvenience that both the movable members are damaged at the same time.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 76, the operation of returning the board accessories (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) to the origin position and the operation of returning the frame accessory (the effect button 17) to the origin position can be performed at the same time (at the same time). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return motion of various roles, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial motions of various roles to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 76, an upper limit is set for the time required for each accessory to return to the origin position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories never ends. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the various accessories are performing the returning motions even during the variable performance and the performance motions are not performed, and it is possible to prevent the amusement of the game from being lowered.

In addition, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 76, when both the operation of returning the board accessory (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) to the origin position and the operation of returning the frame accessory (the production button 17) to the origin position are completed, the processing for shifting to the initial operation processing is performed. As a result, the return operation of various accessories to the origin position and the initial operation of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and the return operation and initial operation of various accessories can be separately confirmed.

Although the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are designed to return to the origin positions in a predetermined order (in the order of the first movable member 73 → the second movable member 74), the operations to return to the origin positions may be started at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return motions of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and it is possible to smoothly transition to the initial motions of various characters to be executed next.

(Initial operation processing of lamp control section)
Initial operation processing of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing initial operation processing of lamp control unit 150 .

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board accessory is "0". When the board accessory processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R107-2, and when the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. When the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory are performed, and when the return abnormality information is set, the board function processing number is set to "2" assuming that the board accessory is not initialized and the process is transferred to step R107-7.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects a board role item initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 78) for determining the board role item initial motion pattern. The details of the board accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial motion pattern of the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, one initial operation pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial operation patterns by referring to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table and based on the type of power-on command and the presence/absence of recovery abnormality information.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-6. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-7. When the board accessory processing number is not '1', the processing is shifted to step R107-11, and when the board accessory processing number is '1', the initial operation of the board accessory is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the board accessory set in the lamp RAM 150c in step R107-8.

In step R107-9, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not all steps of the initial action of the board accessory have been completed. If the initial action of the board role has not been completed in all processes, the process is shifted to step R107-11, and if the initial action of the board role has been completed in all processes, the board role process number is updated by +1 in step R107-10. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the board accessory.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation state of the frame role object (effect button 17) is "0". If the frame role-playing product processing number is "0", the process moves to step R107-12, and if the frame role-playing process number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of the effect button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. When the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-14 assuming that the initial action of the frame role is performed, and when the return abnormality information is set, the frame role processing number is set to "2" assuming that the frame role is not initialized, and the process is transferred to step R107-17.

At step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects a frame role-playing object initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 79) for determining the initial motion pattern of the frame role-playing object. The details of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

At step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame role item (effect button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, with reference to the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table, one initial motion pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial motion patterns based on the type of power ON command.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-16. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "0", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the frame role-playing product.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-17. When the frame role processing number is not '1', the process is shifted to step R107-21, and when the frame role processing number is '1', in step R107-18, the initial operation of the frame role object is executed according to the frame role object initial operation pattern set in the lamp RAM 150c.

At step R107-19, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial motion of the frame role-thing has been completed. When the initial motion of the frame role has not been completed in all steps, the process is shifted to step R107-21, and when the initial motion of the frame role has been completed in all steps, the frame role processing number is updated by +1 in step R107-20. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "1", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the frame role-playing.

In step R107-21, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, this initial operation process is terminated.

The ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the initial processing number described above in step R107-23, and ends this initial operation processing.

Thus, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 77, the initial action of the board accessory (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) and the initial action of the frame accessory (the production button 17) can be performed simultaneously (simultaneously). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial action of various accessories, and to prevent obstruction of the production actions of various accessories during the game.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 77, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 constituting the board accessories, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movable member from being completely broken down or damaged by forcibly initializing the movable member in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 77, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not executed when the effect button 17 constituting the frame accessory has a return abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as complete breakdown or breakage of the performance button 17 by forcibly initializing the performance button 17 in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 77, even if the initial operation of the board role object in which the return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame role object in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed, and even if the initial operation of the frame role object in which the return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the board role object in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the action of the accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred.

Further, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 77, the initial action process ends when both the initial action of the board accessory (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) and the initial action of the frame accessory (the effect button 17) are completed. As a result, even though one of the board accessory and the frame accessory performs the initial action, the other performs the performance action, and the state in which it is unclear whether it is the initial action or the performance action does not occur.

(Board accessories initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74).

Types of commands at power-on, presence/absence of recovery abnormality information, and initial operation patterns to be selected are associated with the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described for reference.

The initial operation pattern includes patterns 01 to 03 determined when a power-on designation command is received, patterns 04 to 06 determined when a first power restoration designation command indicating a customer waiting state is received, and patterns 07 to 09 determined when a second power restoration designation command indicating that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a third power restoration designation command indicating that a jackpot game is being played is received.

The "initial operation pattern 01" is determined when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 have no return abnormality, and after the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent → return to origin → large descent → return to origin, the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement → return to origin.
The "initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, the first movable member 73 does not operate, the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement→origin return, and the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white during that period.
The "initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and after the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent→origin return→large descent→origin return, the second movable member 74 does not operate, and the first movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white during that period.

"Initial operation pattern 04" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 01 except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 05" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 06" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and the second movable member LED does not light up in blue.

"Initial operation pattern 07" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 01 or the initial operation pattern 04 except that the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off.
"Initial operation pattern 08" is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 or the initial operation pattern 05 except that it is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality and the second movable member 74 is turned off.
"Initial operation pattern 09" is the same as the initial operation pattern 03 or the initial operation pattern 06 except that it is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality and the first movable member 73 is turned off.

In the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 05, and the initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described.

In the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the second movable member LED is not described.

The first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78 is that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the board accessory (the first movable member and the second movable member) is the same when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory.

Note that the operation mode of the initial operation is the same as long as the movement pattern of the board accessory is the same at least in each process, and the operation time in each process may be the same, or the operation time in each process may be different.

Further, the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, or the operation aspects of the initial operation of both the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 (the number of steps, operation of each step) may be different. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

Further, when the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is turned on may be performed in the initial operation when the power is restored, or an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be performed in the initial operation when the power is restored. In this way, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78 is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) differs between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78 is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored when the customer waiting state is resumed, while the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is different.

Also, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the recovery of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78 is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78 is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) is different between when the power is restored to the customer waiting state and when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply to restore the customer waiting state, the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply during the variable display of the special symbols, or during the jackpot game.

It should be noted that both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are extinguished during the variable display of the special symbols or when the power is restored during the jackpot game.

As a sixth feature of the board accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78, regardless of whether the power is turned on or when the power is restored, if there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 but not in the second movable member 74, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is performed without performing the initial movement of the first movable member 73, and if there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 but there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74, the first movable member 73 is initialized. The point is that the second movable member 74 does not perform the initial operation. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation according to the presence or absence of the recovery abnormality.

(Frame Accessory Initial Operation Pattern Decision Table)
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17).

The type of command at the time of power ON and the initial operation pattern to be selected are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described for reference.

The 'initial operation pattern 01' is determined when a power-on designation command is received, the performance button 17 operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration→return to origin→intermittent vibration, and the performance button LED lights up (lights) in the order of red→green→blue during that period.
The 'initial operation pattern 02' is determined when a first power supply restoration designation command indicating that the machine is in a state of waiting for customers is received, and the performance button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration->return to origin, and the performance button lights up (lights up) in blue during that period.
The ``initial operation pattern 03'' is determined when receiving a second power restoration designation command indicating that special patterns are being varied and displayed or a third power restoration designation command indicating that a jackpot game is being played, the performance button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration→origin return, and the performance button LED is extinguished during that period.

Note that the continuous vibration time (2.5 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2.5 seconds) of the performance button 17 are different from the vibration time of the vibration performance executed during the variable performance (vibration performance during speech announcement performance, vibration performance during step-up announcement performance, vibration performance during pseudo-continuous performance, vibration performance during development performance, vibration performance during cut-in performance, vibration performance during determination performance, vibration performance during re-lottery performance, and vibration performance during fixed performance).

The first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79 is that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the frame role object (production button 17) differs between when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

As a second feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79, the initial operation of the effect button 17 at the time of power on is to execute an operation that is not in the initial operation of the effect button 17 at the time of power restoration. Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

It should be noted that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame object.

The third feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79 is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the frame role object (production button 17) differs between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The fourth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79 is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board role object (first movable member, second movable member) is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The performance button LED is extinguished during the variable display of the special symbols or when the power supply is restored during the jackpot game, but the performance button LED may be lit in the same light emission mode as when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state.

A fifth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79 is that the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on differs from the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

Although the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, the opposite may be done.

The sixth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79 is that the light emission color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on includes a light emission color that is not included in the light emission color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

It should be noted that the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power restoration may include a emission color that is not included in the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power-on.

A seventh feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79 is that the time during which the production button 17 vibrates when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is different from the time during which the production button 17 vibrates during the operation production executed by operating the production button 17 during the effective period generated during the execution of the variable production. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the vibration is the initial action of the effect button 17 .

The eighth characteristic of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79 is that the initial vibration of the button vibration motor, which does not detect whether or not it is at the origin position, is performed by overlapping the initial operation of the production button 17, which detects whether or not it is at the origin position. Therefore, the confirmation of the operation of the performance button 17 and the confirmation of the operation of the button vibration motor can be performed at the same time, and the time required for confirmation of the operation can be shortened.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power-on with initialization of main RAM 110c.

Power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process being performed. Here, a case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed to turn on the customer waiting lighting (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T9, when the first special figure reserved number designation command (first special figure reserved number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the first reserved number of the first special figure reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong" is output from the voice output device 9.

At the timing of T10, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the variation production (variation display of the production design 70a and the special design TZ, movement of the reservation icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin processing is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormal notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed, and when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed at the timing of T6, the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, when the first special figure pending number designation command (first special figure pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the first pending number in the first special figure pending number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B. At the same time, the first sub-suspension display 83 changes to a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the prize winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the variation production (variation display of the production design 70a and the special design TZ, movement of the reservation icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED turn on during variation, and the first sub-suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case in which the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 complete the restoration operation in a state in which the first movable member 73 returns abnormally, the first movable member LED flashes red (abnormal notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the abnormal return, and the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed, and when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T6, the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, when the first special figure pending number designation command (first special figure pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the first pending number in the first special figure pending number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B. At the same time, the first sub-suspension display 83 changes to a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the prize winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the variation production (variation display of the production design 70a and the special design TZ, movement of the reservation icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first fluctuation display 81 starts the fluctuation display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the production button after turning on the power)
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed in the state that the performance button 17 has the return abnormality, the performance button LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the second movable member 74 starts the restoration operation. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the presentation button 17 is not started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed. Initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed. sound state.

At the timing of T8, when the first special figure reserved number designation command (first special figure reserved number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the first reserved number of the first special figure reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the variation production (variation display of the production design 70a and the special design TZ, movement of the reservation icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED is terminated, and the sub-first variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 83, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process has been described, but in the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change is performed, the setting change-in-progress screen is displayed by the effect control board 130 receiving the setting change designation command after the initial screen is displayed, and then the power-on designation command is received by the effect control board 130 to display the first standby screen. , the return motion and initial motion of various accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the production button 17) are started. Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a specific example in which there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed to turn on the customer waiting lighting (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T8, when the first special figure reserved number designation command (first special figure reserved number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the first reserved number of the first special figure reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the variation production (variation display of the production design 70a and the special design TZ, movement of the reservation icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin processing is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormal notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed, and when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed at the timing of T6, the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reserved number designation command (first special figure reserved number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the first reserved figure in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the variation production (variation display of the production design 70a and the special design TZ, movement of the reservation icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED turn on during variation, and the first sub-suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 complete the restoration operation in a state in which the first movable member 73 returns abnormally, the first movable member LED flashes red (abnormal notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the abnormal return, and the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED light up in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed, and when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T6, the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reserved number designation command (first special figure reserved number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the first reserved figure in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the variation production (variation display of the production design 70a and the special design TZ, movement of the reservation icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first fluctuation display 81 starts the fluctuation display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the production button after the power is restored)
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed in the state that the performance button 17 has the return abnormality, the performance button LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the second movable member 74 starts the restoration operation. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the presentation button 17 is not started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reserved number designation command (first special figure reserved number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the first reserved number of the first special figure reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the variation production (variation display of the production design 70a and the special design TZ, movement of the reservation icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED is terminated, and the sub-first variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved memory)
FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and with reserved storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED and the performance button LED are maintained to be turned off, the image display device displays a screen during recovery including characters ``Please restart the game'', and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 3, second reservation number = 0) is received as a command at power ON, a screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device, so a state is maintained in which the second reservation number is not displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E or the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the first sub-suspension display 83 has a display mode indicating "3", and the second sub-suspension display 84 has a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T5, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop designation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 outputs the stop sound "Don♪".

At this time, three first suspended icons are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in such a state that a performance image such as a background image can be displayed (a pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "2", and the variation production (variation display of the production design 70a and the special design TZ, movement of the reservation icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the variable, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "2".

In addition, when the state after the power restoration is during the variable display of the special symbol (loss variable display) and there is no pending memory, "0" is displayed on the sub first pending display 83 at the timing of T2, and the basic operation flow from the timing of T1 to the timing of T8 described above is the same except that the customer waiting state designation command is not received and the variable effect is not started at the timing of T9.

(Concrete example when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

When the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power supply line is disconnected to the main control board 110, or power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the disconnection state (including half-inserted state) of the connector of the power line. Second case, the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected. Although there are the third case and the like, the first case will be explained here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without power supply to the main control board 110 . At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying characters "reading" is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the performance control board 130 enters a control state capable of executing a performance corresponding to the command.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for initializing the control state of the game is performed, and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return processing is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 to the origin position is started in spite of being in a control state capable of executing the performance corresponding to the command.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of ``135'', which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). Further, the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed to turn on the customer waiting lighting (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed. After that, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

Although the first standby screen is displayed when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the first standby screen may be displayed after displaying a dark display screen as a kind of initial screen for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately. In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the first standby screen.

(Concrete example when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

The case where the power restoration designation command cannot be received normally is the first case where power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the main control board 110 is not supplied with power (only the main power supply) due to the power line being disconnected (including the half-inserted state), the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, and the third case where the command communication line connector is in the disconnected state (including the half-inserted state). However, the first case will be explained here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without power supply to the main control board 110 . At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying characters "reading" is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the performance control board 130 enters a control state capable of executing a performance corresponding to the command.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed, and a power restoration specifying command for customer waiting is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command, the origin return processing is started, and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of ``753'', which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed). Also, the audio output device 9 is in a silent state.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed to turn on the customer waiting lighting (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

Although the second standby screen is displayed when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command, the second standby screen may be displayed after displaying a dark display screen as a kind of initial screen for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately. In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the second standby screen.

In addition, although the voice output device 9 is set to be in a silent state when the power restoration designation command is received, it may be configured to output a notification sound (alert, etc.) indicating (to be comprehensible) that the power is turned on. In this case, the same alarm as when the power-on designation command is received may be issued, or a different alarm may be issued.

(Concrete example when the command at power-on cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

The case where the command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on includes a first case in which power is supplied to the effect control board 130 but not to the main control board 110, a second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, and a third case in which the connector of the command communication line is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state).The third case will be described here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the characters "reading" is displayed.

At the timing of T2, while the effect control board 130 does not receive the power-on time command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110, when the special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) is received, the image display device maintains the state in which the initial screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are kept turned off.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the first special figure reserved number designation command (first special figure reserved number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the initial screen is maintained on the image display device, but the sub first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

At the timing of T4, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). output) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Concrete example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in the customer waiting state (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process have been completed.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped includes a case where the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 contacts due to an external factor after disconnection, and a case where the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 becomes disconnected (including half-inserted state) and then becomes connected.

Here, a case will be described where power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted after power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during a customer waiting state (including execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance) which is one of control states in which the production control board 130 can execute productions according to commands.

At the timing of T1, the return operation of various actors, initial operation, and the output of the initialization newsletter after the output of the initialization news, and the image display device is the production pattern of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power recovery, and the special pattern TZ is suspended (indicated). The 2nd waiting screen of the state or the customer waiting demo production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the directing button LED are lit.

When the timing of T1 is the state of waiting for customers after the completion of the variable performance executed after the completion of the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, the image display device displays the standby screen in which the losing performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration performance screen.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first suspension display 83, sub second suspension display 84, sub normal fluctuation display 85, sub normal rotation suspension display 86) also maintains the display contents. .

Even if only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, when the demonstration standby time elapses during the display of the standby screen (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether or not the fluctuation performance is finished, or after the previous customer waiting demonstration performance is finished), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is initialized and the game control state is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, sub normal pattern reservation display 86) also maintains the display content.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off, and in the image display device, instead of the second waiting screen or customer waiting demo production screen, the initial design of "135", which is the initial pattern at the time of the power, and the special plate pattern TZ is stopped. The first standing screen in the stopped display (still display) is displayed, and the initialization news of the audio is output from the audio output device 9, which consists of a sound of "RAM clear".

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and turned on during customer waiting (white lighting), and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the waiting-for-customer lighting (white lighting) occurs.

Even if only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during a control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the execution of the variable effect (loss change effect) or during the execution of the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) after the return action, the initial action, and the output of the initialization notification sound have already been completed, the screen displayed on the image display device will not be displayed until the power-on designation command is received at the timing of T4. Except that it is a variable performance screen (losing variable performance screen, jackpot variable performance screen) or a big win performance screen (opening performance screen, round game performance screen, ending performance screen), it is the same as when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the customer waiting state, and the return operation and initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) are performed, and an initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9. It will be.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red blinking) in the abnormality notification mode are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

(Concrete example 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in the customer waiting state (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed.

Here, a case will be described where the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is resumed while the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is continued during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance) which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command.

At the timing of T1, a customer waiting state has already been reached after the return operation and initial operation of various roles and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, and the image display device displays a second standby screen or a customer waiting demo effect screen in which the initial symbol 70a of ``753'' and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit during customer waiting.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance executed after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device displays the standby screen in which the performance symbol 70a indicating the failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first suspension display 83, the sub second suspension display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub general figure suspension display 86) also maintains the display contents.

Even if the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, when the demonstration standby time elapses during the display of the standby screen (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether or not the variable performance is finished, or after the previous customer waiting demonstration performance is finished), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the first sub variable display 81, the second sub variable display 82, the first sub reservation display 83, the second sub display 84, the sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, the sub normal pattern reservation display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, and instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration performance screen, the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of '753', which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) are displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 becomes silent.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed to turn on the customer waiting lighting (white lighting), and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

In addition, when there is a recovery abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

(Concrete example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the variable effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130).

Here, a case will be described where the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is resumed while the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is continued during the execution of the variable performance which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance corresponding to the command.

At timing T1, the variable effect is being executed, the image display device displays the variable effect screen, and the audio output device 9 outputs variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during variation. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 is performing variable display, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is displaying the pending number "1".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first variable display 81, the sub second variable display 82, the sub first holding display 83, the sub second holding display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub normal figure holding display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the fluctuation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game", and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first suspension display 83, sub second suspension display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure suspension display 86). preserves the displayed content.

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and turned off, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is performed in the loss of the variable effect. At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``753'', which is an initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and a stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and a stop sound ``Don'' is output from the voice output device 9. - 特許庁In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, the first sub-variation display 81 is in a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that there is a loss.

In addition, when the result of this time's variable performance becomes a big hit, when the performance control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command, the determination display of the big hit of the variable performance is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a production pattern 70a such as ``777'', which is a big winning production pattern, and a fixed screen in a state where the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the first sub-variation display 81 displays a big winning display mode indicating a big winning.

At the timing of T11, when the variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first reservation number of the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the variation performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the reservation icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T6, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED become the initial light emission mode at the time of power restoration, but it may be turned off or set to a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode at the time of power restoration, so that it is possible to grasp that the power restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

Further, even when the execution time of the variable performance recognized by the performance control board 130 has passed before receiving the special figure stop designation command, the temporary stop display and stop display of the performance pattern 70a are not performed, and the variable display on the sub-first variable display device and the sub-second variable display device is not ended.

(Concrete example 4 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted while the jackpot effect is being executed after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130).

Here, a case will be described where the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is resumed while the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is continued during the execution of the jackpot performance which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance corresponding to the command.

At timing T1, a big win performance (first round performance here) is being executed, a big win performance (round performance) screen is displayed on the image display device, a right hitting image MU suggesting right hitting is displayed at the upper right of the screen, and a special jackpot pattern TZ ("777") is stopped (still displayed) at the lower right of the screen. In addition, "1" is displayed as the first reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variation display 81 displays the big win (lights up).

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first reservation display 83, the sub second reservation display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub normal figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the first sub variable display 81, the second sub variable display 82, the first sub reserve display 83, the second sub reserve display 84, the sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, the sub normal pattern reserve display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for mid-jackets transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are put into a state of being extinguished, and the image display device displays a mid-jackpot recovery screen including the characters "Please restart the game (during the jackpot)", and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub-information display device 80 (sub-first change display 81, sub-second change display 82, sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84, sub-normal figure change display 85). , Sub-normal map holding display 86) maintains the display contents.

It should be noted that instead of displaying the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot, the same during-return screen as when the power supply (only the main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the variation performance shown in FIG. 94 may be displayed.

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and turned off, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the big hit effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot performance (round performance) screen instead of a normal jackpot performance screen, and the jackpot special pattern TZ ("777") is not displayed.

In addition, "1" is displayed as the first reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F. Furthermore, the sound output device 9 outputs a big hit effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during the big win.

After that, when the performance control board 130 receives a command for designating the number of rounds for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, a normal big win performance (round performance) screen is displayed on the image display device instead of the special big win performance (round performance) screen.

Note that when the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command, not when the performance control board 130 receives the round number designation command while the special jackpot performance screen is being displayed, the normal ending performance screen is displayed.

In addition, instead of switching to the normal jackpot performance screen when a round number designation command is received while the special jackpot performance screen is displayed, the special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command, or the special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives the customer waiting state designation command or the variation start command after the big win game is finished.

Also, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED become the initial light emission mode at the time of power restoration, but it may be set to a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode at the time of extinguishing or the power restoration, so that it is possible to grasp that the power restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

In FIGS. 92 to 95, when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is received, various roles (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) are restored, but the initial actions of the various roles may be performed without performing the restoration.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the control state of the game is initialized, the first initial effect pattern ("135") in which the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of effect patterns 70a are the first combination is displayed, and when the control state of the game is restored, the second initial effect pattern ("753") in which the identification characters in the plurality of effect patterns 70a are in the second combination is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to perform a specific display suggesting the resumption of the power supply before displaying the production pattern 70a on the image display device, and the display mode of the specific display to be displayed on the image display device when recovering to the customer waiting state (initial screen display only), and the display mode of the specific display to be displayed on the image display device after recovery to the variable display of the special symbol and no hold memory/with hold memory (initial screen + return). display on the middle screen). Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the pending icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, second pending icon display area 70D) and the sub pending display device (sub first pending display device 83, sub second pending display device 84) can perform a pending display indicating the number of pending memories, and when the power supply stopped in a state where there is a pending memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting the restart of the power supply on the image display device ( During recovery screen display), the hold display is not executed in the hold icon display area, but the hold display can be executed in the sub hold display. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of reserved memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to suppress the decline of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the power supply stopped during the customer-waiting demonstration effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the customer-waiting demonstration effect screen is not displayed again, but the second standby screen in which the initial symbol "753" at the time of power restoration is stopped (still displayed) is displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to be conscious of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration performance, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control when the game control state is restored after the power supply is restarted.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, with respect to the sub-variation display device (the first sub-variation display device 81 and the second sub-variation display device 82), when the power supply stopped during the variation performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the variation display (blinking display) is not performed during the variation display of the special symbol even if the variation display of the special symbol is being executed (the screen during recovery is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after restarting the power supply.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (the screen during recovery is displayed) when the control state of the game is restored, the variable display (blinking display) may be performed by the sub-variation display device (the first sub-variation display device 81 and the second sub-variation display device 82). In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) is returned to the image display device. When the screen is displayed, it is designed to be a display mode showing the number of holds from (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variable display and when the special figure hold number designation command is received). Therefore, the player can grasp the number of pending games immediately after the game control state is restored, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when performing variable display (blinking display) on the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82) while the returning screen is being displayed on the image display device, the sub suspension display (sub first suspension display 83, sub second suspension display 84) may display the number of suspensions in accordance with the start of this variable display. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed when the control state of the game is restored, and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, the return operation of various characters is performed at the same timing as when power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, at the timing when the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (timing when the initial screen ends). Therefore, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the returning operation of various characters, and to reduce the processing load of the returning operation of various characters.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, the light-emitting portions (first movable member LED, second movable member LED, presentation button LED) of various roles are turned off during the return operation of various roles (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). Therefore, it can be distinguished from the initial motion of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the return motion is in progress.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when there is a recovery abnormality in any of the various roles, the abnormality is notified by flashing red (abnormality notification mode) of the light emitting part of the role having the recovery abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the accessory having the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the abnormality is notified by flashing red the light emitting part of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification is continued until the next fluctuation effect is started. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the role, a return operation may be performed for returning the role having the return abnormality to the origin position at the timing when the next variable effect is started. Further, in the case where the abnormality notification is performed by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the initial operation of various roles (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the production button 17) is performed from the timing after the production pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (when the return operation is completed immediately, the production pattern 70a is displayed), but the power supply stopped during the variable display of the special pattern is resumed. When the control state of the game is restored, the initial action of various accessories is performed from the timing (during the display of the screen during restoration) before the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device. Therefore, it is possible to perform initial actions of various accessories at appropriate timing according to the state when power supply occurs.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, regarding the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, when the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device (during the variable display of the special symbol and before the display of the effect symbol 70a), the sub-suspension display (the first sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display) 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of pending, the initial operation is performed. Therefore, the initial action of the board role can be performed after the player grasps the number of pending games (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, regarding the frame role (effect button 17), when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the sub-suspension display (the first sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display 84) indicates the number of suspensions while the recovery screen is being displayed on the image display device (during the variable display of the special symbol and before the display of the effect symbol 70a). The initial operation is performed after the mode is set. Therefore, the initial action of the frame role can be performed after the player has grasped the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, the initial operation of various roles is performed at the same timing as when power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, at the timing after the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (when the return operation is completed immediately, the performance pattern 70a is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the initial motions of various roles, and to reduce the processing load of the initial motions of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even when the stop screen is displayed after the screen during recovery is displayed, the stop sound of the production pattern 70a is output. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the initial screen is only displayed, and the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the initial light emission are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that an abnormality has occurred in which the power ON command cannot be received.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even when the initial screen is displayed due to the inability to receive the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), the production control board 130 receives the special figure reservation number designation command based on the winning of the game ball from the main control board 110 to the starting port when it is in a control state capable of executing the production according to the command, and the winning sound is output. Therefore, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has entered the starting hole.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, when a variation start command is received from the main control board 110 while the performance control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing a performance corresponding to the command, the variable performance is executed without displaying the standby screen. Therefore, the start of the variable performance is executed without delay, and the variable performance can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbols.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, when a variation start command is received from the main control board 110 while the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which the performance corresponding to the command can be executed, the variable performance is executed without executing the return operation or initial operation of various characters. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect using various accessories without being hindered by a return motion or an initial motion during execution of a variable effect.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even in a control state in which the production control board 130 can execute an production according to the command, such as the return operation of various characters and the customer waiting state after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed. including light emission). Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even when the effect control board 130 is in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the return operation of the various characters and during the variable effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply designation command and the power restoration designation command are received again from the main control board 110, the return operation of the various characters and the initial operation (initial light emission) are performed again. including). Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even during the jackpot game after the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are already completed, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute an effect according to the command, such as in a customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended, the initialization notification sound is output again when a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended, the initialization notification sound is output again when the power supply designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute an effect according to the command, such as during a jackpot game (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended, the power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then restarted, and when the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound may be output from the voice output device 9 instead of executing the recovery operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission).

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute an effect according to the command, such as a return operation of various characters and a customer waiting state after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and the main control board is displayed. When the power restoration designation command is received from 110 again, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Even when the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command, such as during the variable performance after the output of the initialization notification sound is already finished or during the jackpot game, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed but the first standby screen is displayed. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even when the effect control board 130 is in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the return operation of various characters and during the variable effect after the completion of the initial operation (including initial light emission), when the power supply restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed but the return screen is displayed, such as restarting after only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped. . Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even in a control state in which the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command, such as during the jackpot performance after the end of the initial operation (including the initial light emission) and the return operation of various roles, the initial screen is not displayed when a power restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by restarting only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110, without displaying the initial screen. is displayed. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even when the effect control board 130 is in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended or during the jackpot game, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and the main control board 110 is displayed. When the power supply restoration designation command is received from again, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated and cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means can be smoothly carried out.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the production control board 130 is continued in the control state (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, in the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command, even if the power supply to the performance control board 130 is continued and the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then the power supply is restarted, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Modification 1 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 96 shows a modification 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in the customer waiting state (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed.

Here, a case will be described where only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted during the customer waiting state which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command.

At the timing of T1, a customer waiting state has already been reached after the returning operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, and the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the initial symbol "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during customer waiting.

Incidentally, when the timing of T1 is the state of waiting for customers after the completion of the variable performance executed after the completion of the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, the image display device displays a standby screen in which the losing performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed).

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 stops, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first suspension display 83, the sub second suspension display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub general figure suspension display 86) also maintains the display contents.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, when the demonstration standby time elapses during the display of the standby screen (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether the variation performance is finished or after the previous customer waiting demonstration performance is finished), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, instead of the second standby screen, the image display device displays an initial screen including characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are extinguished.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, sub normal pattern holding display 86) becomes non-display.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started to return to the origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED light up in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and turned on during customer waiting (white lighting), and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the waiting-for-customer lighting (white lighting) occurs.

Even when the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect after the return action, the initial action, and the output of the initialization notification sound of the various roles has already been completed, the variable effect (loss change effect, jackpot change effect), or the jackpot effect (opening, round game, ending) is restarted after being stopped, the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 will be the customer waiting demo effect screen or the fluctuation effect screen (loss change effect). 93 to 95 except for the point that it is a screen, jackpot fluctuation effect screen) or a jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen).

(Modification 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a modified example 2 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed.

Here, a case will be described where the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is resumed while the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is continued during the customer waiting state which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance corresponding to the command.

At the timing of T1, if the return operation of various actors, initial operation, and the output of the initialization newsletter are already waiting after the output of the initialization news, the production pattern of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power recovery, is suspended (indicated). The 2nd waiting screen or the customer waiting demo production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED are on the waiting button LED.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance executed after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device displays the standby screen in which the performance symbol 70a indicating the failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first suspension display 83, the sub second suspension display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub general figure suspension display 86) also maintains the display contents.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, when the demonstration standby time elapses during the display of the standby screen (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether the variation performance is finished or after the previous customer waiting demonstration performance is finished), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the process for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are extinguished.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, sub normal pattern holding display 86) becomes non-display.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are kept turned off, and instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of ``753'', which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed).

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed and turned on during customer waiting (white lighting), and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

It should be noted that even if only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of the various roles has already been completed, during the execution of the variable effect (loss variation effect, jackpot variation effect), or during the execution of the jackpot effect (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 will be the customer waiting demo effect screen or the fluctuation effect screen (loss change effect). 93 to 95 except for the point that it is a screen, jackpot fluctuation effect screen) or a jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen).

In FIGS. 96 and 97, when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is received, various roles (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) are restored, but the initial actions of the various roles may be performed without performing the restoration.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the standby screen displaying the effect pattern 70a is switched to an initial screen different from the standby screen. Therefore, it becomes possible to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Further, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off from the initial screen display. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Instead of starting the initial actions of various characters from the timing of switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, the initial actions of various characters may be started from the timing of switching to the initial screen or from the timing until the switching from the initial screen to the standby screen.

Also, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the standby screen may be switched to the initial screen at the stage of receiving a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command). In this case, the initial actions of various roles may be started at the timing when the standby screen is switched to the initial screen or the timing until the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, or the initial actions of the various roles may be started at the timing when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen.

Further, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the initial screen may be displayed after switching from the standby screen to the non-display state. In this case, the initial action of various characters may be started at the timing when the non-display state is switched to the initial screen or the timing until the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, or the initial action of the various characters may be started at the timing when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen.

(Modified example in the case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a modification in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension indicator 83 and the second sub-suspension indicator 84 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin processing is completed in a state where the return abnormality occurs in the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED is completed, lighting during customer waiting (white lighting) is performed, and the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.例文帳に追加

At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has passed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T7, when the first special figure pending number specification command (first special figure pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the first pending number in the first special figure pending number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B. At the same time, the first sub-suspension display 83 changes to a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the prize winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the variation production (variation display of the production design 70a and the special design TZ, movement of the reservation icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during variation, and the sub-first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

Even when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality when the power is turned on, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.

Further, even when the power supply is restored, if there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 98, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the initial operation is not executed not only for the movable member with the return abnormality, but also for the movable member without the return abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that one movable member collides with the other movable member and breaks down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable member (particularly, the movable member in which the return abnormality does not occur) from becoming inoperable during the execution of the game (fluctuation performance, jackpot game), and to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 98, when there is a return abnormality in one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red to notify the return abnormality. Therefore, compared with the case where only the movable member LED provided for one of the movable members having the return abnormality is blinking in red, it is possible to easily recognize that the movable member has an abnormality.

Further, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 98, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the initial action is executed for the presentation button 17 which has no risk of colliding with the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74. Therefore, the operation of the effect button 17 can be confirmed, and the abnormality of the effect button 17 can be grasped.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 98, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the effect button LED provided in the effect button 17 does not blink red for notifying the return abnormality, and performs initial light emission. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that the effect button 17 has not returned abnormally.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the initial action process may be terminated without executing the initial action for the presentation button 17 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may flash red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Further, when the performance button 17 has a return abnormality, the initial action process may be ended without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may flash red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

(Modified example of accessory initial processing of lamp control unit)
A modification of the accessory initial processing of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a modification of the accessory initial processing of the lamp control unit 150. FIG.
Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same processes as the role product initial process shown in FIG. 75, and the description thereof is omitted, and the different processes will be described.

In step R101A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a power ON flag to be set in the lamp RAM 150c when power supply is started. If there is no power ON flag, the process proceeds to step R102A, and if there is a power ON flag, the power ON flag is cleared in step R101B.

In step R102A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received. If the power-on command is received, the process proceeds to step R102B, and if the power-on command is not received, the process proceeds to step R104.

In step R102B, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on. If a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds, which should have completed the restoration operation and the initial operation since the previous power-on) has passed, the process is shifted to step R103, and if the predetermined period of time has not passed, the process is shifted to step R104.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a sets the initial processing number updated in each processing of the accessory initial processing to "1" for executing the origin return processing of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17).

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories are started. Therefore, it is not necessary to be conscious of whether the control state of the game is initialized or whether the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the return operation of various accessories after the start of power supply and the initial operation.

Further, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99, when a power-on command (power-on specifying command, power recovery specifying command) is received after a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, the return operation and initial operation of various accessories are performed again. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the main control board 110 has not started normally and the power-on command has been transmitted later than usual (an abnormality has occurred in the power supply line from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110).

When a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received, regardless of the elapsed time after power supply to the game machine 1 is started, the return operation and initial operation of various characters may be performed. In this way, the player does not have to be conscious of the elapsed time since the power supply to the game machine 1 was started, and it is possible to simplify the processing when the power ON command is received.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no recovery error in various roles (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, assuming the modification of the role initial processing shown in FIG.

Power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process being performed. Here, a case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Further, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are changed to alternately light red and white, and the light emission mode of the performance button LED is changed to light in the order of red→green→blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``135'', which is an initial pattern when the power is turned on, and a first standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying ``RAM clear''.

Furthermore, when a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) is received as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F are displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting). At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T8, when the first special figure reserved number designation command (first special figure reserved number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the first reserved number of the first special figure reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the variation production (variation display of the production design 70a and the special design TZ, movement of the reservation icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c, assuming the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return-to-origin process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. In addition, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of recovery abnormality.

Further, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light up in red and white, and the performance button LED lights up in order of red→green→blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``135'', which is an initial pattern when the power is turned on, and a first standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying ``RAM clear''.

Furthermore, when a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) is received as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F are displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial motion of the performance button 17 is completed at the timing of T4 and the initial motion of the first movable member 73 is completed at the timing of T5, the initial motion processing is completed without executing the initial motion of the second movable member 74.例文帳に追加

At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reserved number designation command (first special figure reserved number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the first reserved number of the first special figure reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the variation production (variation display of the production design 70a and the special design TZ, movement of the reservation icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED turn on during variation, and the first sub-suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c, assuming the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is finished with the return abnormality occurring in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Further, when a performance control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a command at power-on transmitted from a main control board 110, the light emission mode of the second movable member LED is changed to alternately light up in red and white, and the light emission mode of the performance button LED is changed to light up in order of red→green→blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``135'', which is an initial pattern when the power is turned on, and a first standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying ``RAM clear''.

Furthermore, when a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) is received as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F are displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial motion of the performance button 17 is completed at the timing of T4 and the initial motion of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T5, the initial motion processing is completed without executing the initial motion of the first movable member 73.例文帳に追加

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reserved number designation command (first special figure reserved number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the first reserved number of the first special figure reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the variation production (variation display of the production design 70a and the special design TZ, movement of the reservation icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first fluctuation display 81 starts the fluctuation display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the production button after turning on the power)
FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery error in the effect button 17 after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c, assuming the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the restoration operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where the production button 17 has a return abnormality, the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the presentation button 17 is not started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change to alternately turn on red and white.

At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``135'', which is an initial pattern when the power is turned on, and a first standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying ``RAM clear''.

Furthermore, when a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) is received as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F are displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At timing T4, when the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting). At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reserved number designation command (first special figure reserved number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the first reserved number of the first special figure reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the variation production (variation display of the production design 70a and the special design TZ, movement of the reservation icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED is terminated, and the sub-first variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 103, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process has been described, but in the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change is performed, the setting change-in-progress screen is displayed by the effect control board 130 receiving the setting change designation command after the dark screen (initial screen) is displayed, and then the power-on designation command is received by the effect control board 130. The first standby screen is displayed, and the return action and initial action of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are started. Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a specific example in which there is no return abnormality in various roles (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c, assuming the modified example of the role initial processing shown in FIG.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Further, when the performance control board 130 receives a first power supply restoration designation command as a power ON time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light blue and white, and the light emission modes of the second movable member LED and the performance button LED change and light blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) is received as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F are displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reserved number designation command (first special figure reserved number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the first reserved number of the first special figure reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the variation production (variation display of the production design 70a and the special design TZ, movement of the reservation icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c, assuming the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return-to-origin process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Further, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration specifying command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED is changed to alternately light blue and white, and the light emission mode of the performance button LED is changed to light blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) is received as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F are displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, and the first movable member LED and the performance button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when the first special figure reserved number designation command (first special figure reserved number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the first reserved number of the first special figure reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong" is output from the voice output device 9.

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the variation production (variation display of the production design 70a and the special design TZ, movement of the reservation icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED turn on during variation, and the first sub-suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c, assuming the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.
Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is finished with the return abnormality occurring in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the second movable member LED and the effect button LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the second movable member LED and the production button LED change and light up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) is received as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F are displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed at the timing of T4, and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T5, the initial operation processing is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, and the first movable member LED and the production button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when the first special figure reserved number designation command (first special figure reserved number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the first reserved number of the first special figure reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong" is output from the voice output device 9.

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the variation production (variation display of the production design 70a and the special design TZ, movement of the reservation icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first fluctuation display 81 starts the fluctuation display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the production button after the power is restored)
FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c, assuming the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the restoration operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where the production button 17 has a return abnormality, the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the presentation button 17 is not started.

Further, when a performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from a main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED is changed to alternately light in blue and white, and the light emission mode of the second movable member LED is changed to light in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) is received as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F are displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At timing T4, when the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when the first special figure reserved number designation command (first special figure reserved number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the first reserved number of the first special figure reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong" is output from the voice output device 9.

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the variation production (variation display of the production design 70a and the special design TZ, movement of the reservation icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED is terminated, and the sub-first variation display 81 starts the variable display, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved memory)
FIG. 108 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and with reserved storage, on the premise of the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on and power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. Also, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Further, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light blue and white, and the light emission modes of the second movable member LED and the performance button LED change and light blue. At this time, the image display device displays a screen during recovery including characters of "Please restart the game", and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 3, second reservation number = 0) is received as a command at power ON, a screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device, so a state is maintained in which the second reservation number is not displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E or the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the first sub-reservation display 83 becomes a display mode showing "3", and the second sub-reservation display 84 and the sub-normal drawing reservation display 86 become a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial motion processing ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off.

At the timing of T7, when a special symbol stop designation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays a stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and a stop sound is output from the voice output device 9.

At this time, three first reserved icons are displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in such a state that a performance image such as a background image can be displayed (a pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "2", and the variation production (variation display of the production design 70a and the special design TZ, movement of the reservation icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the variable, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "2".

(Concrete example when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, assuming the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG.

When the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power supply line is disconnected to the main control board 110, or power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the disconnection state (including half-inserted state) of the connector of the power line. Second case, the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected. Although there are the third case and the like, the first case will be explained here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power is not supplied to the main control board 110, but when the power supply is started, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, the sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 are in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At timing T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 ends, the return-to-origin processing ends, the initial motion processing starts, and the initial motion of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 starts. At the time T4, the initial motion of the effect button 17 ends. The processing ends, and the effect control board 130 enters a control state in which it is possible to execute the effect according to the command.

At the timing of T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for initializing the control state of the game is performed and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return processing is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 to the origin position is started in spite of being in a control state capable of executing the performance corresponding to the command.

At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``135'', which is an initial pattern when the power is turned on, and a first standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying ``RAM clear''.

After that, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in red and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED light up in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T9, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T10, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed. After that, when the initialization notification sound output period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the initialization notification sound output is stopped and the state becomes silent.

Although the first standby screen is displayed when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the first standby screen may be displayed after displaying a dark display screen as a kind of initial screen for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately. In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the first standby screen.

(Concrete example when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, assuming the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG.

The case where the power restoration designation command cannot be received normally is the first case where power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the main control board 110 is not supplied with power (only the main power supply) due to the power line being disconnected (including the half-inserted state), the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, and the third case where the command communication line connector is in the disconnected state (including the half-inserted state). However, the first case will be explained here.

Note that the timing from T1 to T7 is the same as the timing from T1 to T7 in FIG. 109, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T7 will be described.

At the timing of T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed and a power restoration designation command is transmitted. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command, the origin return processing is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 to the origin position is started in spite of being in a control state capable of executing the performance corresponding to the command.

At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``753'', which is an initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and a second standby screen in a state in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 maintains a silent state.

After that, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED and effect button LED are lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T9, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T10, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

Although the second standby screen is displayed when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command, the second standby screen may be displayed after displaying a dark display screen as a kind of initial screen for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately.

In addition, although the voice output device 9 is set to be in a silent state when the power supply restoration designation command is received, a notification sound (such as an alarm) indicating that the power has been turned on (to be comprehensible) may be output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). In this case, the same alarm as when the power-on designation command is received may be issued, or a different alarm may be issued.

In FIGS. 109 to 110, when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is received, various roles (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the effect button 17) are restored, but the initial actions of the various roles may be performed without performing the restoration.

(Concrete example when the command at power-on cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a specific example when power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, assuming the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG.

Cases in which the power restoration designation command cannot be normally received include a case in which power is not supplied to the main control board 110, a case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 is broken, and a case in which the connector of the command communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state).

Note that the timing from T1 to T5 is the same as the timing from T1 to T5 in FIG. 109, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T5 will be described.

At the timing of T5, when the effect control board 130 does not receive the first power supply restoration designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number=0) is received, the image display device maintains the state where the initial screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the display modes of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changed and turned off.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reserved number designation command (first special figure reserved number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device, but the sub first reservation display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the sound output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong ♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). output) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Concrete example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process have been completed, assuming the modification of the accessory initial process shown in FIG.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped includes a case where the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 contacts due to an external factor after disconnection, and a case where the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 becomes disconnected (including half-inserted state) and then becomes connected.

Here, a case will be described where power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted after power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during a customer waiting state (including execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance) which is one of control states in which the production control board 130 can execute productions according to commands.

At the timing of T1, the returning operation of various roles and the customer waiting state after the initial operation are already completed, the image display device displays a second standby screen or a customer waiting demo effect screen in which the initial symbol 70a of ``753'' and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during customer waiting.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure holding display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, sub normal pattern reservation display 86) also maintains the display content.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lightly turned into red and white as the initial light, and the production button LED is lit in white as an initial light, and the image display device shows the production pattern 70a, and the special pattern TZ stopped (and the special pattern TZ. The first standing screen in the static display is displayed, and an initialization news sound consisting of an alarm and "RAM clear" is output from the audio output device 9.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

When the returning motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T6, the origin return processing is completed, the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the waiting-for-customer lighting (white lighting) occurs.

Even if only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during a control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the execution of the variable effect (loss change effect) or during the execution of the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) after the return action, the initial action, and the output of the initialization notification sound have already been completed, the screen displayed on the image display device will not be displayed until the power-on designation command is received at the timing of T4. Except that it is a variable performance screen (losing variable performance screen, jackpot variable performance screen) or a big win performance screen (opening performance screen, round game performance screen, ending performance screen), it is the same as when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the customer waiting state, and the return operation and initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) are performed, and an initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9. It will be.

In addition, when there is an abnormality in various roles, in the same way as the specific examples shown in FIGS. 101, 102, and 103, the initial operation of various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode will be performed.

(Concrete example 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process have been completed, assuming the modified example of the accessory initial process shown in FIG.

Here, a case will be described where the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is resumed while the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is continued during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance) which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command.

At the timing of T1, if the return operation of various actors, initial operation, and the output of the initialization newsletter are already waiting after the output of the initialization news, the production pattern of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power recovery, is suspended (indicated). The 2nd waiting screen or the customer waiting demo production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED are on the waiting button LED.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance executed after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device displays the standby screen in which the performance symbol 70a indicating the failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first suspension display 83, the sub second suspension display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub general figure suspension display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the first sub variable display 81, the second sub variable display 82, the first sub reservation display 83, the second sub display 84, the sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, the sub normal pattern reservation display 86) also maintains the display contents.

Even if the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, when the demonstration standby time elapses during the display of the standby screen (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether or not the variable performance is finished, or after the previous customer waiting demonstration performance is finished), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command as a power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, the performance button LED lights up in white as initial light emission, and the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the initial pattern 753 at the time of power restoration and the special pattern TZ are stopped (statically displayed) instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration performance screen.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F of the image display device. "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At timing T5, when the return motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return processing is completed, the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation and initial light emission of various roles are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

(Concrete example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the variable effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process are already completed (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130), on the premise of the modification of the accessory initial process shown in FIG.

Here, a case will be described where the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is resumed while the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is continued during the execution of the variable performance which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance corresponding to the command.

At timing T1, the variable effect is being executed, the image display device displays the variable effect screen, and the audio output device 9 outputs variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during variation. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 is performing variable display, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is displaying the pending number "1".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first variable display 81, the sub second variable display 82, the sub first holding display 83, the sub second holding display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub normal figure holding display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the fluctuation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to the origin position.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as an initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights in blue as an initial light emission, the effect button LED lights in white as an initial light emission, and the image display device displays a recovery screen including characters "Please restart the game." Display device 84, sub-normal pattern fluctuation display device 85, sub-normal pattern holding display device 86) maintains the display contents.

When the returning motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T6, the origin return processing is completed, the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is performed in the loss of the variable effect. At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a of ``753'', which is an initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and a stop screen in a state in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and a stop sound is output from the voice output device 9. - 特許庁In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, the first sub-variation display 81 is in a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that there is a loss.

In addition, when the result of this time's variable performance becomes a big hit, when the performance control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command, the determination display of the big hit of the variable performance is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a performance pattern 70a such as ``777'' which is a jackpot performance pattern, and a stop screen in a state where the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the sub-first variation display 81 changes to a jackpot display mode indicating a jackpot, and the audio output device 9 outputs a stop sound.

At the timing of T11, when the variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first reservation number of the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the variation performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the reservation icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED become the initial light emission mode at the time of power restoration, but it may be set to a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode at the time of extinguishing or power restoration, so that it is possible to grasp that the power restoration designation command has been received during the fluctuation effect.

Also, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

Further, even when the execution time of the variable performance recognized by the performance control board 130 has passed before receiving the special figure stop designation command, the temporary stop display and stop display of the performance pattern 70a are not performed, and the variable display on the sub-first variable display device and the sub-second variable display device is not ended.

(Concrete example 4 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted while the jackpot effect is being executed after the origin return process and the initial operation process are already completed (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130), on the premise of the modification of the accessory initial process shown in FIG.

Here, a case will be described where the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is resumed while the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of the backup power supply is continued during the execution of the jackpot performance which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance corresponding to the command.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot performance (here, the first round performance) is being executed, the big win performance (round performance) screen is displayed on the image display device, and the jackpot special pattern TZ ("777") is stopped (still displayed). In addition, "1" is displayed as the reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variation display 81 displays the big win (lights up).

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first reservation display 83, the sub second reservation display 84, the sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub normal figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the first sub variable display 81, the second sub variable display 82, the first sub reserve display 83, the second sub reserve display 84, the sub normal pattern fluctuation display 85, the sub normal pattern reserve display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for mid-jackets transmitted from the main control board 110, origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are started to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, the performance button LED is lighted in white as initial light emission, the image display device displays the screen during return for the middle of jackpot including characters ``Please restart the game (during jackpot)'', and the voice output device 9 is silent. In addition, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation display 86) maintains the display contents.

Instead of displaying the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot, the same during-return screen as when the power supply (only the main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the variation performance shown in FIG. 114 may be displayed.

When the returning motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T6, the origin return processing is completed, the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motion of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the big hit effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot performance (round performance) screen instead of a normal jackpot performance screen, and the jackpot special pattern TZ ("777") is not displayed.

In addition, "1" is displayed as the reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F. Furthermore, the sound output device 9 outputs a big hit effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during the big win.

After that, when the performance control board 130 receives a command for designating the number of rounds for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, a normal big win performance (round performance) screen is displayed on the image display device instead of the special big win performance (round performance) screen.

Note that when the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command, not when the performance control board 130 receives the round number designation command while the special jackpot performance screen is being displayed, the normal ending performance screen is displayed.

In addition, instead of switching to the normal jackpot performance screen when a round number designation command is received while the special jackpot performance screen is displayed, the special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command, or the special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives the customer waiting state designation command or the variation start command after the big win game is finished.

Also, at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are in the initial light emission mode at the time of power restoration, but by turning off the light or in a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode at the time of power restoration, it may be made possible to grasp that the power restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

Also, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

In FIGS. 112 to 115, when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is received, various roles (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) are restored, but the initial actions of the various roles may be performed without performing the restoration.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when the control state of the game is initialized, the first initial effect pattern ("135") in which the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of effect patterns 70a are in the first combination is displayed, and when the control state of the game is restored, the second initial effect pattern ("753") in which the identification characters in the plurality of effect patterns 70a are in the second combination is displayed. . Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to perform a specific display suggesting the resumption of the power supply before displaying the production pattern 70a on the image display device, and the display mode of the specific display to be displayed on the image display device when recovering to the customer waiting state (display of the initial screen only), and the display mode of the specific display to be displayed on the image display device during the variable display of the special symbols and after recovery to no/with hold memory (initial screen). + display of screen during recovery). Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the pending icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, second pending icon display area 70D) and the sub pending display device (sub first pending display device 83, sub second pending display device 84) can perform a pending display indicating the number of pending memories, and when the power supply stopped in a state where there is a pending memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the image display device suggests resuming the power supply. While the display (display of the screen during recovery) is being performed, the suspension display is not performed in the suspension icon display area, but the suspension display can be performed in the sub-suspension display. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of reserved memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to suppress the decline of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is not displayed again, but the second standby screen in which the initial symbol "753" at the time of power restoration is stopped (still displayed) is displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to be conscious of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration performance, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control when the game control state is restored after the power supply is restarted.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, with respect to the sub-variation display device (the first sub-variation display device 81 and the second sub-variation display device 82), when the power supply stopped during the variation performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the variation display (blinking display) is not performed during the variation display of the special symbol even if the variation display of the special symbol is being executed (the screen during recovery is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after restarting the power supply.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (the screen during recovery is displayed) when the control state of the game is restored, the variable display (blinking display) may be performed by the sub-variation display device (the first sub-variation display device 81 and the second sub-variation display device 82). In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) is returned to the image display device. When the screen is displayed, it is designed to be a display mode showing the number of holds from (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variable display and when the special figure hold number designation command is received). Therefore, the player can grasp the number of pending games immediately after the game control state is restored, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when performing variable display (blinking display) on the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82) while the returning screen is being displayed on the image display device, the sub suspension display (sub first suspension display 83, sub second suspension display 84) may display the number of suspensions in accordance with the start of this variable display. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed when the control state of the game is restored, and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the return operation of various characters is performed at the same timing as when the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (the timing when the initial screen is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the returning operation of various characters, and to reduce the processing load of the returning operation of various characters.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the light-emitting portions (the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, the presentation button LED) of the various roles are turned off during the return operation of the various roles (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the production button 17). Therefore, it can be distinguished from the initial motion of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the return motion is in progress.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when there is a recovery abnormality in any of the various accessories, the abnormality notification is performed by flashing the light emitting part of the accessory with the recovery abnormality in red (abnormality notification mode). Therefore, it is possible to grasp the accessory having the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when an abnormality is notified by flashing red the light-emitting part of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification continues until the next variable effect is started. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the role, a return operation may be performed for returning the role having the return abnormality to the origin position at the timing when the next variable effect is started. Further, in the case where the abnormality notification is performed by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, the initial operation of various characters is performed at the same timing as when power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing when the initial screen is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the initial motions of various roles, and to reduce the processing load of the initial motions of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, regarding the board function (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, the initial operation is performed before the sub-suspension display (first sub-suspension display 83, second sub-suspension display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of suspensions (returning screen is displayed on the image display device). has become Therefore, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the presentation is hindered by the initial motion of the board accessory. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, regarding the frame role (production button 17), in the case of power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c, the initial operation is performed before the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of holds (returning screen is displayed on the image display device). Therefore, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the performance is hindered by the initial motion of the frame role. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even when the stop screen is displayed after the screen during recovery is displayed, the stop sound of the production pattern 70a is output. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the return operation, initial operation, and initial light emission of various roles are executed, and the initial screen is continued to be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that an abnormality has occurred in which the power ON command cannot be received.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even if the display of the initial screen is continued due to the inability to receive the command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) at the time of power ON, the effect control board 130 receives a special figure reservation number designation command based on the winning of the game ball from the main control board 110 to the starting port when the control state is such that the effect corresponding to the command can be executed, the winning sound is output. Therefore, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has entered the starting hole.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, when the variation start command is received from the main control board 110 after the performance control board 130 enters a control state in which the performance corresponding to the command can be executed, the variable performance is executed without displaying the standby screen. Therefore, the start of the variable performance is executed without delay, and the variable performance can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbols.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even in a control state in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, such as the return operation of various characters and the customer waiting state after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, the power supply to the main control board 110 only stops and then resumes. (initial light emission) is executed. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the return operation of various characters and during the variable effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed. initial light emission) is executed. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even in a control state in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command, such as during the jackpot game after the completion of the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission), when the power supply designation command and the power restoration designation command are received again from the main control board 110, the return operation of the various roles and the initial operation are performed again. Actions (including initial light emission) are executed. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute an effect according to the command, such as in a customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already been completed, the power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then restarted, and when a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and when a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended, the initialization notification sound is output again when the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound may be output from the audio output device 9 instead of executing the return operation, initial operation, and initial light emission of various characters.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even in a control state in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to the command, such as a returning operation of various characters and a customer waiting state after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. When the power restoration designation command is received from the control board 110 again, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Even in a control state in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, such as during the return operation of various roles and during the initial operation (including the initial light emission), during the variable performance or during the jackpot performance, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen when the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even when the effect control board 130 is in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the return operation of various characters and during the variable effect after the completion of the initial operation (including initial light emission), only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. has become Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even if the effect control board 130 is in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the return operation of various characters and during the jackpot effect after the completion of the initial operation (including initial light emission), when the power supply restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed, and the initial screen is not displayed, and the power supply (main power supply) is restarted after being stopped. It is designed to display the middle screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended or during the jackpot game, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and the main control board 1 is displayed. 10, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the progress of control of the main control board 110 and the progress of control of the performance control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the production control board 130 is continued in the control state (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, in the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command, even if the power supply to the performance control board 130 is continued and the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then the power supply is resumed, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

The control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command are the customer waiting state, the variable performance, and the big win performance.

(Concrete example when the connection state of various detection means changes)
FIGS. 116(a) and 116(b) are diagrams showing specific examples when the connection state of various detection means changes during the customer waiting state.

Here, it is assumed that wires from the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are combined into one connector, and this connector is connected to the connector of the main control board 110.

First, FIG. 116(a) will be described.
FIG. 116(a) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first starting port detection switch 45a changes during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at the timing of T1. At this time, the image display device displays the effect pattern 70a of "753" which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed).

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is half-inserted and only the first start opening detection switch 45a is unconnected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of the connection error, and the performance control board 130 executes the connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays an error notification image EG including characters of ``connection error detection'' indicating that a connection error has occurred, and a voice output device 9 outputs a connection error notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying ``connection error''.

At the timing of T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the first start port detection switch 45a returns to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the connection error has been released, but the connection error notification continues until the power of the game machine 1 is turned off.

Next, FIG. 116(b) will be described.
FIG. 116(b) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection states of the first starting door detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at the timing of T1. At this time, the image display device displays the effect pattern 70a of "753" which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped (still displayed).

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 becomes half-inserted and the first start opening detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a become unconnected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error, and the effect control board 130 executes magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays an error annunciation image EG containing the characters "magnetic error detected" indicating the occurrence of a magnetic error, the characters "radio error detected" indicating the occurrence of a radio wave error, and the characters "connection error detected" indicating the occurrence of a connection error.

At the timing of T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and the first start port detection switch 45a return to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the magnetic error, the radio wave error, and the connection error have been released, but various error notifications continue until the game machine 1 is powered off.

In addition, when the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, the occurrence of the connection error is not detected by the main control board 110, and the error notification is not executed.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 116, when specific detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetism detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) connected to the main control board 110 changes from the connected state to the disconnected state, an error is notified. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality (connector half-insertion, disconnection, fraudulent act), and to take prompt action.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 116, even when specific detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetism detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) returns from the disconnected state to the connected state, the error notification of the magnetic error or radio wave error continues until the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts with respect to the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 116, even if the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, the error notification is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where the possibility of cheating is low, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, regarding the specific means of detection method (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) connected to the main control board 110, the power supply to the play machine 1 is started while the non -connected state is started, and after the initial screen is displayed or after the end of the initial screen (the first screen and the second waiting screen, the table on the 2nd waiting screen. From the start of the show, various errors may be performed in various error reports (connected error warning, magnetic error warning, and radio error warning) with the same news as the same as FIG. 116.

In this case, even if the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from the disconnected state to the connected state, the error notification (magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) continues, but the connection error notification may be canceled when the first starting port detection switch 45a changes from the disconnected state to the connected state. By doing so, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where the possibility of fraudulent conduct is low, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the radio error notification sound associated with a radio wave error having a lower priority (importance) than a magnetic error and the connection error notification sound associated with a connection error having a lower priority (importance) than a radio error are not output if they occur simultaneously with a magnetic error, but the notification sounds associated with the errors that have occurred may be output in order.

Further, in the magnetic error notification, the radio wave error notification, and the connection error notification, the error notification sound may be output without displaying the error notification image EG, or the error notification image EG may be displayed and the error notification sound may not be output.

In addition, when the first start opening detection switch 45a changes from the unconnected state to the connected state, the special figure determination information is acquired assuming that the start winning has occurred, and the first special figure reservation number (U1) is increased, so that the variable display of the special symbol and the variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol) may be performed.

(Concrete example when operating the operation unit while waiting for customers)
With reference to FIG. 117, a specific example of operating the operation unit (effect button 17, cross key 18) during the customer waiting state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 117(a), when shifting to the customer waiting state in which the variable performance and the jackpot performance are not executed, the effective suggesting performance (introductory performance) suggesting that the valid period may occur is not executed, and the customer waiting valid period (because the customer waiting valid period is maintained until the variable performance is started, it can occur over a period longer than various valid periods occurring during the variable performance) is started.

At this time, in the lower right portion of the first image display device 70, a guide image AG (operation promotion image) is displayed to guide the game assistance function started by operating the effect button 17 and the cross key 18. FIG. Specifically, a first image (an image imitating the effect button 17) suggesting that the menu display is performed by operating the effect button 17, a second image (an image imitating the cross key 18 whose up and down buttons are bright colors) suggesting that the volume can be adjusted by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key 18, and a third image (an image imitating the cross key 18 whose right and left buttons are bright colors) suggesting that the light amount can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 18 are displayed.

When the performance button 17 is operated in this state, as shown in FIG. 117(b), the menu image MG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the performance pattern 70a without vibrating the performance button 17, and the display sound of the menu image MG is output.

The menu image MG includes an "end" item for ending the menu display, a "model description" item for explaining the model, an "effect customization" item for setting the appearance rate of a predetermined effect (for example, a fixed effect, etc.), and a "pachi log" item for managing the game history in cooperation with a mobile terminal (smartphone, etc.).

When the effect button 17 is operated with the "end" item selected, the menu image MG is erased without vibrating the effect button 17, as shown in FIG. 117(c). Also, the sound for erasing the menu image MG is output, and the guide image AG is displayed again.

When the upper button of the cross key 18 is operated in this state, as shown in FIG. 117(d), the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value is displayed without vibrating the performance button 17 and the cross key 18, and the confirmation sound is output at the volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 18 is operated while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value of the effect sound is updated by +1 without vibrating the effect button 17 or the cross key 18.例文帳に追加Then, the volume value image OG is updated to the volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and the confirmation sound is output with the volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses without the cross key 18 being operated in this state, the volume value image OG is erased and the guidance image AG is displayed again, as shown in FIG. 117(f).

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 117, even if the effect button 17 or the cross key 18 is operated during the customer waiting effective period, which can occur over a period longer than the effective period of the effect button 17 related to various advance notice effects (dialogue notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) that occur during the variable effect, the vibration effect for vibrating the effect button 17 (including the indirect vibration of the cross key 18 transmitted by vibrating the effect button 17) is not executed. has become Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised when the performance button 17 or the cross key 18 is operated during the customer waiting state, and to avoid the inconvenience of giving the player an unpleasant feeling.

The effective period of the cross key 18 related to the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that occurs during the variable performance (variation display of special symbols) and the jackpot performance (jackpot game) can also occur over a longer period than the valid period related to various advance notice performances (dialogue notice performance, pseudo-continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, final performance, etc.) that occur during the variable performance. 7 (including indirect vibration of the cross key 18 transmitted by vibrating the effect button 17) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised during the variable performance or the big winning performance, and to avoid the inconvenience of making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 117, regarding the valid period while waiting for a customer, an effective suggesting effect (introductory effect) suggesting that the valid period may occur before the valid period occurs is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from taking a stand even though the information beneficial to the player (the performance to expect the execution of the jackpot game) is not executed, thereby avoiding the inconvenience of giving the player a feeling of displeasure.

In addition, effective suggesting performance (introduction performance) is not executed before the valid period of the cross key 18 related to sound volume adjustment and light amount adjustment generated during variable performance (variation display of special symbols) or big winning performance (big winning game). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from taking a stand even though the information beneficial to the player (the performance to expect the execution of the jackpot game) is not executed, thereby avoiding the inconvenience of giving the player a feeling of displeasure.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 117, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period (display of the operation prompting image) of the effect button 17 related to various advance notice effects (dialogue notice effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) occurring during the variable effect, rather than the effect button 17 being operated during the customer waiting effective period that can occur over a period longer than the effective period of the effect button 17 (display period of the operation promoting image) occurring during the variable effect. Vibration production that vibrates the is easy to be executed. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 117, the effective period of the effect button 17 related to various advance notice effects that occur during the variable effect includes a relatively short first effective period (effective period accompanied by the display of the operation prompting image related to the dialogue advance notice effect, etc.) and a relatively long second effective period (effective period accompanied by the display of the operation promotion image related to the decision effect, etc.). Also, when the effect button 17 is operated during the second effective period, the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

When the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period of waiting for customers, the vibration performance of vibrating the performance button 17 at a predetermined rate may be executed, but even in this case, the vibration performance should be executed at a lower rate than when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period of the performance button 17 related to various advance notice performances (dialogue notice performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, final performance, etc.) occurring during the variable performance.

(Concrete example of performing production customization while waiting for customers)
With reference to FIG. 118, a specific example of performing customization of effects (setting to normal setting or simple setting) by operating the operation unit (effect button 17, cross key 18) during the customer waiting state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 118(a), when the production button 17 is operated in the customer waiting state, the menu image MG is displayed on the first image display device 70 so as to be superimposed in front of the production pattern 70a. In the menu image MG, the above-described ``End'', ``Model explanation'', ``Performance customization'', and ``Pachi log'' are set as the menu items, the currently selected item is displayed in bright color, the currently unselected item is displayed in dark color, and the item can be selected by the cross key 19.例文帳に追加

After that, when the lower button of the cross key 19 is operated twice, the item "customization of effect" is selected as shown in FIG. Items of ``normal setting'' in which the frequency of appearance of various presentations (continuous advance notice presentation, icon change presentation, timer presentation, notice of role items at the start of fluctuation, etc.) are normal and "simple setting" in which the appearance frequency of various presentations is low are set in the presentation customized image KG, and items that are currently selected are displayed in bright color and items that are not currently selected are displayed in dark color, and the items can be selected by a cross key 19.例文帳に追加

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated with the item "normal setting" selected, confirmation characters "normal setting (normal mode) is set" are displayed as shown in FIG. 118(d). Thereafter, after a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds) has elapsed, the menu image MG is redisplayed as shown in FIG. 118(e).

In this way, it is possible to set the frequency of appearance of various performances (continuous announcement performance, icon change performance, timer performance, variable start announcement of accessories, etc.) by operating the performance button 17 and the cross key 19 during the customer waiting state (the performance can be customized). As a result, the player can set his/her preference, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Concrete example when the variable production is started from the customer waiting state)
119 to 121, a specific example when the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described. FIG. 119 is a timing chart for starting the variable effect from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 120(a) to (f) and FIGS.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 0th frame after the start of the customer waiting state. At this timing, subtraction of the standby time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the reservation icon and the icon TI are not displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing (fourth frame from the start of the customer waiting state) when the first special figure pending number (U1) increases from "0" to "1". At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special pending number and the non-animated increase display of the first pending icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1", and the first reservation icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in the normal size on the first display unit 70B1. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs the first generated notification sound (beep).

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 5th frame from the start of the customer waiting state) at which the first special symbol reservation number (U1) decreases from '1' to '0' and the variation performance (variation display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the decreasing display by non-animation of the first special symbol pending number, and the changing display (decreasing display) by the animation of the first pending icon to the icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", and the first reservation icon (white icon) H11 displayed in the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the reduced display (preparation operation) is started in a state where the effect pattern 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the output of the first generated notification sound (the 14th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first pending icon (white icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C continues, and the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the 20th frame timing (the 25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state) after the change display (decrease display) of the first pending icon starts. At this timing, the changing display of the first pending icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(e), in the first image display device 70, the first suspended icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon TI, and the reduction display (preparation operation) of the effect pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 40th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 45th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area is started.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 55th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect symbols 70a in the central variable display area, the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect symbols 70a in the right variable display area is started, and the effect symbols 70a are scrolled in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 225th frame after the start of the variable effect (230th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(h), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "3" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swinging state) in the left variable display area, and the effect symbol 70a continues to be scrolled in the center and right variable display areas.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 255th frame after the start of the variable effect (260th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(i), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swinging state) in the right variable display area, and the effect symbol 70a continues to be scrolled in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 285th frame after the start of the variable effect (290th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(j), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped (swayed) in the center variable display area, and the combination of the performance symbols 70a indicating that it is lost is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 305th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(k), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination as the performance symbol 70a "365". Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the number of reserved special symbols increases (changes from "0" to "1") during the customer waiting state, the increasing display of the reserved number and the reserved icon by non-animation ends in the shortest period (time) of one frame.

In addition, the notification sound output in synchronism with the start of the increasing display of the reserved number and the reserved icon continues until the (frame update) timing after the end of the increased display of the reserved number and the reserved icon (frame update), so that the player can surely recognize that the special figure reserved number has increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols is reduced (changed from '1' to '0'), decreasing display of the reserved number by non-animation and change display of the reserved icon to the icon by animation are performed, so that the player can surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols is reduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, since the timing at which the decrease display of the reserved number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the change display of the reserved icon to the icon concerned is completed (frame update), the change of the reserved number of special figures is produced, and the player can easily grasp that the number of reserved special figures is reduced by the reserved number, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the performance pattern is not scrolled (not updated to the next performance pattern) until the change display of the reserved icon to the icon is completed, and the scrolling of the performance pattern (update to the next performance pattern) is started at the timing when the change display of the reserved icon is completed (frame update).

When the number of reserved special figures increases (changes from '0' to '1') during the customer waiting state, instead of executing the increasing display of the reserved icon in non-animation, animation over a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) may be executed so as to continue longer than the increased display of the reserved number. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of reserved special figures, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, instead of starting the decreasing display of the pending number and the changing display (decreasing display) of the pending icon to the corresponding icon at the same (frame update) timing, if the timing of completing the decreasing display of the pending number (frame update) is earlier, either may be started first. By doing so, while improving the degree of freedom of display control, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special figures has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Instead of starting the scrolling of the performance pattern (updating to the next performance pattern) at the timing when the changing display of the pending icon is completed (the start is delayed than usual), the scrolling of the performance pattern (updating to the next performance pattern) may be started at the timing (frame update) slightly before the completion of the changing display of the pending icon.

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during variable production)
122 and 123, a specific example when the number of holdings increases during the variable effect will be described. FIG. 122 is a timing chart showing an increase in the number of holdings during variable effects, and FIGS. 123(a) to (c) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (c) of FIG.

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect by the normal variation pattern. At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). In addition, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the icon (white icon) TI is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 60th frame from the start of the variable production) when the number of first special figure reservations (U1) increases from "0" to "1". At this timing, the non-animated display of the first special pending number and the increased display of the first pending icon by animation are started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1", and the first reservation icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in a very small size on the first display unit 70B1 to start enlarged display. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs the first generated notification sound (beep).

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the increasing display of the first pending icon (the 70th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon ends, and the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123(c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the first display portion 70B1 ends and is displayed in the normal size.

Thus, when the number of reserved special symbols is increased, the increased display of the reserved numbers by non-animation and the increased display of the reserved icon by animation are performed, so that the player can surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols is increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, since the timing at which the increase display of the reserved number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the increased display of the reserved icon is completed (frame update), the change of the reserved number of special figures is produced, and the player can easily grasp that the number of reserved special figures has increased due to the reserved number, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of the variable performance, the increase display of the reserved icon is executed over a longer period than when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the customer waiting state, so that the player can surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, since the notification sound output in synchronism with the start of the increasing display of the pending number and the pending icon ends in synchronism with the end of the increasing display of the pending icon (frame update), it is possible to effectively produce the fact that the number of reserved special figures has increased, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, since the period (10 frames) associated with the increased display of the reserved icon is shorter than the period (20 frames) associated with the change display of the reserved icon to the corresponding icon, it is possible to emphasize the start of the variable presentation and improve the amusement of the game.

Note that the increasing display of the pending number and the increasing display of the pending icon are not started at the same (frame update) timing, but if the timing of completing the increased display of the pending number (frame update) is earlier, either may be started first. By doing so, while improving the degree of freedom of display control, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of special figure pending has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of shortening the period of increasing display of the pending icon, the period of increasing display of the pending icon may be longer than the period of changing display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of reserved special figures has increased, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, instead of shortening the period for increasing display of the pending icon than the period for displaying the change of the pending icon to the icon, both periods may be the same length.

(Concrete example when the number of pending items increases immediately after decreasing)
A specific example when the pending number increases immediately after decreasing will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. FIG. FIG. 124 is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing, and FIGS. 125(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in FIG.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 5th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(a), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbols 70a of "4", "6", and "8", which indicate a loss, and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "2" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, a first pending icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and a first pending icon (white icon) H12 is displayed on the second display portion 70B2, and the icon TI is not displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing (the 20th frame after the stop display of the effect symbol 70a) at which the variable effect (variable display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started. At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, the non-animated decreasing display of the first special pending number, the changing display of the first pending icon to the icon by animation, and the decreasing display of the first pending icon by animation are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". Further, the first pending icon (white icon) H11 displayed on the first display portion 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and the first pending icon (white icon) H12 displayed on the second display portion 70B2 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display portion 70B1. Furthermore, the reduction display (preparation operation) is started in a state where the effect pattern 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 30th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, increasing display of the first special figure pending number by non-animation is started, but since the changing display and decreasing display of the first pending icon are being executed, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, are put on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2", and the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the first pending icon (the 40th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the changing display and decreasing display of the first pending icon are ended. In addition, the animation display of the waiting first hold icon is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(d), in the first image display device 70, the first suspended icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon TI, the first suspended icon H12 moved from the second display portion 70B2 is positioned at the center of the first display portion 70B1, and the reduction display (preparation operation) of the effect pattern 70a stops. In addition, the first pending icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a very small size on the second display portion 70B2 to start enlarged display, and the audio output device 9 starts outputting the first generated notification sound (blink).

The timing of T4 is the timing of the fifth frame after the start of the increasing display of the first pending icon (the 45th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the output of the first generated notification sound are continued.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display portion 70B2 and continues to be enlarged, and the output of the first generated notification sound (beep) from the audio output device 9 continues. Further, the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the left variable display area is started.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 10th frame after the increase display of the first pending icon is started (the 50th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon ends, and the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the first display portion 70B1 is terminated and the icon is displayed in the normal size. Further, the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, when the number of reserved special figures increases during the execution of the change display of the reserved icon to the relevant icon and the reduced display of the reserved icon, even before the timing (frame update) at which the change display and the reduced display are completed, the increasing display of the reserved number is started.

In addition, when the number of special pending icons increases during the execution of the change display of the pending icon to the icon and the decreasing display of the pending icon, the increase display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound are waited (restricted), and at the timing when the change display and decrease display of the pending icon are completed (frame update), the increase display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound are started.

The notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increasing display of the holding number instead of outputting the generating notification sound in synchronization with the increasing display of the holding icon executed after the increasing display of the holding number.

In addition, instead of starting the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound (starting later than usual) at the timing when the changing display and the decreasing display of the pending icon are completed (frame update), the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound may be started at the timing (frame update) slightly before the completion of the changing display and the decreased display of the pending icon. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difficulty of grasping the transition of the special figure pending number, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, even if the number of special pending icons increases during the increasing display of the pending icon, the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound are on standby (restricted) in the same way as during the change display or decrease display of the pending icon. On the other hand, the increase display of the pending number is started, and at the timing when the increase display of the pending icon is completed (frame update), the increase display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound may be started.

(Specific example when the number of pending increases during specific reach production)
A specific example when the number of pending games increases during the specific ready-to-win effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 126 is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the specific ready-to-win effect, and FIGS. 127(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to FIGS.

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the SP reach variation pattern. At this timing, the normal ready-to-win effect executed before the SP ready-to-win effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are continued.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, respectively, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is continued in the central variable display area. In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, a first pending icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the icon (white icon) TI is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 90th frame from the start of the normal ready-to-win effect (the 430th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect pattern 70a scrolling in the central variable display area start to move to the upper left of the screen and are displayed in reduced size, and the effect pattern 70a changes to a simple display mode in which only the numbers are enlarged.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 15th frame after the development effect is started (the 445th frame after the change effect is started). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP reach effect continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(b), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect symbol 70a scrolling in the center variable display area are displayed at a position near the upper left of the screen and displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 30th frame after the development effect is started (the 460th frame after the change effect is started). At this timing, while the development effect is finished, the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(c), in the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and a confrontation production is started in which the friend character C2 and the enemy character C3 face each other in the center of the screen. In addition, while leaving the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C, the suspended icon (here, only the first suspended icon) displayed in the suspended icon display area (the first suspended icon display area 70B, the second suspended icon display area 70D) is hidden together with the suspended icon display area.

The timing of T5 is the timing when the number of first special figure reservations (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 820th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, increasing display of the first special figure pending number by non-animation is started, but since the SP ready-to-win performance (confrontation performance) is being executed, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the output of the notification sound which is the notification sound when the icon is generated are not performed at this timing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(d), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2", and the final production of the confrontation production (decision production for informing whether or not it is a big hit) is executed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 420th frame after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect (confrontation effect) (the 880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final effect (decision effect) of the confrontation effect is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(e), in the first image display device 70, an effect is performed in which the friendly character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, and the effect symbol 70a displayed in reduced size at the upper left of the screen temporarily stops (is in a swaying state) at a combination ("555") indicating a big win.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 450th frame after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect (showdown effect) (910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP ready-to-win effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the non-animated return display and increase display of the first pending icon are performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that has been displayed in a reduced size on the upper left of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state). Also, the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the first pending icon (white icon) H12 is displayed in the normal size on the second display portion 70B2.

Then, the performance pattern 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle and right variable display areas is restored to a display mode composed of characters and numbers, and finally, the performance pattern 70a is stop-displayed and the special pattern TZ is stop-displayed in the same combination ``555'' as the performance pattern 70a. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during execution of a specific performance (SP ready-to-win performance), even before the end of the specific performance (frame update), the increasing display of the reserved number is started, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during execution of a specific performance (SP ready-to-win performance), the execution of the increased display of the reserved icons is put on standby (restricted), and the increased display of the reserved icons is started at the timing (frame update) when the specific performance is completed (the lost performance pattern or the jackpot performance pattern displayed in reduced size is enlarged), so that it is possible to prevent the transition of the number of reserved special symbols from becoming difficult to grasp, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the increased display of the reserved icons is started at the timing when the specific performance (SP ready-to-win performance) is finished, the increased display of the reserved icons is performed by non-animation completed in one frame, so that even if there is an extreme lag between the timing when the special figure reserved number increases and the timing when the increased display of the reserved icons is performed, the sense of discomfort of the player can be reduced and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the increase display of the pending icon is started at the timing when the specific performance (SP ready-to-win performance) ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so that the generated notification sound makes it difficult for the player to misunderstand that the number of reserved special symbols has increased at the timing when the specific performance ends, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Even when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of a specific performance (SP ready-to-win performance), it is preferable that the increased display of the reserved numbers is executed while the execution of the increased display of the reserved icons is waited (restricted), and the increased display of the reserved icons corresponding to the increase is collectively executed in one frame at the timing when the specific performance is finished (frame update).

In addition, when the number of reserved special figures increases during the execution of a specific performance (SP ready-to-win performance), the generated notification sound may be output in synchronism with the increasing display of the reserved number instead of not outputting the generated notification sound.

Moreover, although the SP ready-to-reach effect was exemplified as the specific effect, the specific effect may include the SPSP ready-to-win effect, or may include the full rotation ready-to-reach effect.

(Concrete example when the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state)
With reference to FIGS. 128 to 130, a specific example when the number of pending games increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state will be described. FIG. 128 is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state, and FIGS. 129 (a) to (f) and FIGS.

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the last (100th) variable effect in the specific game state. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(a), "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. In addition, the first pending icon display area 70B is deleted, and the second pending icons (white icons) H21 to H24 are displayed in the first display portion 70D1 to the fourth display portion 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D, respectively, and the icon TI is displayed. Further, the upper part of the screen displays the number of variable performances executable in the specific game state (here, ``remaining 0 times''), and the upper right part of the screen displays a right-handed image MU for prompting the shooting of the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 415th frame after the start of the variable production) when the number of first special figure reservations (U1) increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, increasing display of the first special figure pending number by non-animation is started, but since the first pending icon display area 70B is erased, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, are not performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2", and the scrolling of the effect design 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 430th frame after the variable effect is started. At this timing, the performance symbols 70a that have been variably displayed in the left, middle, and right variability display areas are temporarily stopped at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(c), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (swayed) in the left, middle, and right variable display areas, and the combination of the effect patterns 70a indicating that it is lost is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 15th frame after the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a (the 445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, a result display showing the result of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue) is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG is darkened, and the characters "Special Time End" indicating the end of the specific game state and the number of times of the jackpot games executed during the predetermined advantageous period "jackpot x 1" are displayed. Also, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the result display (the 460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(e), the first image display device 70 additionally displays the characters "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the result display (the 475th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen is moved to the center of the screen and stopped and displayed, and the special pattern TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination "285" as the effect pattern 70a. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

The timing of T7 is the timing (the 490th frame from the start of the variable performance) at which the last (100th) variable performance in the specific game state ends and the first variable performance in the normal game state is started. At this timing, variable display of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, non-animated decreasing display of the second reserved number, non-animated return display of the first reserved icon, and non-animated increased display of the first reserved icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130(g), in the first image display device 70, the second reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3", the second reserved icon display area 70D is hidden together with the reserved icon, and the first reserved icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the reserved icon.

Furthermore, the reduction display (preparation operation) is started in a state where the effect pattern 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling. In addition, a left-hand shot image HU is displayed on the upper left of the screen to prompt the shooting of the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T8 is the 20th frame timing (the 510th frame from the start of the previous variable effect) after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon. At this timing, as shown in FIG. 130(h), in the first image display device 70, the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a is stopped.

The timing of T9 is the 10th frame timing (the 520th frame from the start of the previous variable effect) after the end of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon. At this timing, the effect pattern 70a continues to scroll (downward movement).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130(i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the performance symbols 70a in the left variable display region, the scrolling (downward movement) of the performance symbols 70a in the center variable display region is started.

Thus, when the first special figure reserved number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increased display of the first reserved icon is put on standby (restricted), and the increased display of the first special figure reserved number is started, so that the player can be made to recognize that the special figure reserved number has increased even during execution of the specific performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the first special figure pending number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increased display of the first reserved icon is started at the timing when (the last variable performance in) the specified game state ends (frame update). Therefore, even if the increased display of the first special figure reserved number executed before that is overlooked, the increase in the first special figure reserved number can be recognized, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the increasing display of the first reserved icon is started at the timing when (the last variable performance in) the specific game state ends, the increased display of the reserved icon is performed by non-animation completed in one frame, so that even if there is an extreme lag between the timing when the number of reserved special figures is increased and the timing when the increased display of the reserved icon is performed, the sense of discomfort of the player can be reduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the increase display of the pending icon is started at the timing when (the last variable performance in) the specific game state ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so that the generated notification sound makes it difficult for the player to misunderstand that the number of reserved special symbols has increased at the timing when the specific game state ends, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, the performance pattern is not scrolled (not updated to the next performance pattern) until the change display of the reserved icon to the icon is completed, and the scrolling of the performance pattern (update to the next performance pattern) is started at the timing when the change display of the reserved icon is completed (frame update), so that the progress of the performance during the variable performance can be easily grasped, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Even when the number of the first special figure pending increases during the specific game state, the increasing display of the pending numbers is executed, while the execution of the increasing display of the pending icons is put on standby (restricted), and the increased display of the pending icons corresponding to the increase is collectively executed in one frame at the timing when (the last variation performance in) the specific game state ends (frame update).

In addition, when the number of the first special figure reservation increases during the specific game state, instead of not outputting the generated notification sound, the generated notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increase display of the reserved number.

In the present embodiment, the first reserved icon display area 70B is set (displayed) in the normal game state, while the second reserved icon display area 70D is not set (displayed), and the first reserved icon display area 70B is not set (displayed) in the specific game state, while the second reserved icon display area 70B is set (displayed). The icon display area 70B may be set (displayed).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not the specific effects (SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect, full rotation ready-to-win effect) are being executed during the variable effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F were set (displayed) in the first image display device 70, but the second image It may be set (displayed) in the display device 71, or may be set (displayed) in a dedicated display device different from the image display device (for example, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a dedicated LED, etc.). And, when setting to a dedicated LED, it is preferable to display the number of special figures pending according to the lighting color and lighting / blinking mode of the LED.

(Example of effect when the player changes the effect element during the first variable effect in the specific game state)
With reference to FIG. 131, an example of effect when the player changes the effect element (here, volume value) during the first variable effect in the specific game state will be described.
It should be noted that here shows an example that has become a probability variable gaming state as a specific gaming state, but basically the same when it is a time-saving gaming state (ordinary time-saving gaming state, special time-saving gaming state).

First, as shown in FIG. 131(a), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a of "285" indicating the failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In this state, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the first special figure reservation number (U1) becomes "1" and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1". However, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not set (displayed) in the specific game state, the first pending icon is not displayed, and any generated notification sound (winning sound) is not output from the voice output device 9.

From this state, when the first variable effect is started with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 131(b), the first special symbol pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", but the shift display (decrease display) of the pending icon is not performed, and the effect symbol 70a starts reduced display (preparation operation), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling. GM is output.

Further, left-handed error notification based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 45 in the specific game state is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed error image HUE suggesting that a game ball is shot toward the right side area of the game area 5a is displayed at a position near the center of the screen in a size larger than the right-handed image MU, and a left-handed error sound of ``Please hit right'' is output from the voice output device 9. - 特許庁

Instead of performing left-handed error notification when one game ball enters the first start port 45 in a specific game state, left-handed error notification may be performed when a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls enter the first start port 45.例文帳に追加

Further, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47, the second special figure reservation number (U2) becomes ``1'', the generated notification sound (winning sound) is output from the voice output device 9, and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F becomes ``1''. Also, a pending icon H21 (white icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70D1 of the second pending icon display area 70B.

The left-handed error notification may be ended at the timing when the game ball wins the second start hole 47, and in this case, the left-handed error image HUE may be deleted before the left-handed error sound, or the left-handed error sound may be deleted before the left-handed error image HUE.

After that, when the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated, as shown in FIG. 131(c), the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value "4" is displayed without vibrating the effect button 17 or the cross key 19, and the confirmation sound is output at the volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value of the effect sound is updated by +1 without vibrating the effect button 17 or the cross key 19, and the BGM currently being output is output with the volume corresponding to the volume value "5" after the update, as shown in FIG. 131(d). Then, the volume value image OG is updated to the volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and the confirmation sound is output with the volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

In this state, when the variation time of the first special pattern is passed and stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. Also, the sound volume value image OG is erased according to the stop display of the production pattern 70a.

After that, when the stop time of the first special symbol has passed and the first variation effect is completed, and the second variation effect is started along with the start of the variable display of the next second special symbol, as shown in FIG. Start moving (shifting) toward it. In addition, the performance pattern 70a starts reduced display (preparation operation), the special pattern TZ starts scrolling, and the output of the BGM at the volume (performance element) corresponding to the volume value "5" adjusted (changed) during the previous first variation performance is continued.

Here, an example is shown in which the up button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase the volume value during the first variable presentation in the specific game state, but basically the same applies when the down button of the cross key 19 is operated to decrease the volume value.

Also, when the left button or right button of the cross key 19 is operated during the first variable effect in the specific game state to increase or decrease the light amount value, the operation of the cross key 19 is basically the same except that the light amount value image is displayed instead of the volume value image OG, and the light amount of various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76, the image display device, etc.) changes according to the increase or decrease in the light amount value.

Further, when the second variable performance is executed after the first variable performance in the specific game state and the performance mode is changed by operating the performance button 17 during the first variable performance, the background image is changed to the background image corresponding to the performance mode after change and the BGM is changed to BGM according to the performance mode after change. In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the first variable performance, the background image and BGM may be changed in the performance mode after the change from the start of the next second variable performance. Also, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. In addition, even if the production mode is changed in the specific game state, the display mode of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ is not changed, but the display form of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ may not be changed.

Also, when the second variable performance is executed after the first variable performance in the normal game state and the performance mode is changed by operating the performance button 17 during the first variable performance, the background image is changed to the background image corresponding to the performance mode after the change and the BGM is changed to the BGM according to the performance mode after the change. In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the first variable performance, the background image and BGM may be changed in the performance mode after the change from the start of the next second variable performance. Also, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Also, in the normal game state, when the production mode is changed, the display mode of the production pattern 70a is changed, but the display form of the special pattern TZ is not changed.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIG. 131, by operating various operation units (production button 17, cross key 19) during execution of the first variable production in the specific game state, production elements (volume value, light amount value, production mode, etc.) used for the second variable production to be executed next can be changed. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 131, even if the game ball wins the first starting hole 45 during the specific game state in which the first pending icon is not displayed, the generated notification sound (winning sound) is not output. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is puzzled by outputting only the generated notification sound even though the first pending icon is not displayed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 131, even if a game ball wins in the second starting port 47 in the specific game state, when the normal icon (white icon) is displayed, the generated notification sound (winning sound) is not output, and when the special icon is displayed, the generated notification sound corresponding to the type of the special icon is output. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is fed up with the generated notification sound in the specific game state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second start hole 47, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Although the shift display of the pending icon is not performed and the icon is not displayed at the start of the first variable performance, the icon may be displayed without the shift display of the pending icon.

(Example of effect when the player changes the effect element during the second variable effect in the specific game state)
With reference to FIG. 132, an example of effect when the player changes the effect element during the second variable effect in the specific game state will be described.
It should be noted that, here shows an example that has become a probability variable gaming state as a specific gaming state, basically the same when it is a time-saving gaming state.

First, as shown in FIG. 132(a), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a of "285" indicating a failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. When the game ball wins the second starting port 47 in this state, the second special figure reservation number (U2) becomes "1", the second special figure reservation number display area 70F becomes "1", and the reservation icon H21 (white icon) is displayed in the first display part 70D1 of the second reservation icon display area 70B. Since the white icon is displayed even if the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 during the specific game state, no generated notification sound (winning sound) is output from the voice output device 9 (when the special icon is displayed, the generated notification sound corresponding to the type of the special icon is output).

From this state, when the second variation effect is started with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. In addition, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), the special pattern TZ starts scrolling, and BGM is output from the audio output device 9 with a volume corresponding to the current volume value "4".

Furthermore, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the first special figure reservation number (U1) becomes "1" and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1". However, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not set (displayed) in the specific game state, the first pending icon is not displayed, and any generated notification sound (winning sound) is not output from the voice output device 9.

Further, left-handed error notification based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 45 in the specific game state is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed error image HUE suggesting that a game ball is shot toward the right side area of the game area 5a is displayed at a position near the center of the screen in a size larger than the right-handed image MU, and a left-handed error sound of ``Please hit right'' is output from the voice output device 9. - 特許庁

Instead of performing left-handed error notification when one game ball enters the first start port 45 in a specific game state, left-handed error notification may be performed when a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls enter the first start port 45.例文帳に追加In addition, the left-handed error notification may be ended at the timing when the game ball wins the second starting hole 47, and in this case, the left-handed error image HUE may be deleted before the left-handed error sound, or the left-handed error sound may be deleted before the left-handed error image HUE.

After that, when the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated, as shown in FIG. 132(c), the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value "4" is displayed without vibrating the effect button 17 or the cross key 19, and the confirmation sound is output at the volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value of the effect sound is updated by +1 without vibrating the effect button 17 or the cross key 19, and the BGM currently being output is output with the volume corresponding to the volume value "5" after the update, as shown in FIG. 132(d). Then, the volume value image OG is updated to the volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and the confirmation sound is output with the volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

In this state, when the variation time of the second special pattern is passed and stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. 132(e), the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a is stop-displayed with the loss of ``379'', and the special pattern TZ is stopped and displayed with the loss of ``379''. Also, the sound volume value image OG is erased according to the stop display of the production pattern 70a.

After that, when the stop time of the second special symbol has passed and the second variable effect is completed, and the first variable effect is started with the start of the variable display of the next first special symbol, as shown in FIG. , the output of the BGM at the volume (effect element) corresponding to the volume value "5" adjusted (changed) during the previous second variable effect is continued.

Here, an example is shown in which the up button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase the volume value during the first variable presentation in the specific game state, but basically the same applies when the down button of the cross key 19 is operated to decrease the volume value.

Also, when the left button or right button of the cross key 19 is operated during the first variable effect in the specific game state to increase or decrease the light amount value, the operation of the cross key 19 is basically the same except that the light amount value image is displayed instead of the volume value image OG, and the light amount of various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76, the image display device, etc.) changes according to the increase or decrease in the light amount value.

When the first variation performance is executed after the second variation performance in the specific game state and the performance mode is changed by operating the performance button 17 during the second variation performance, the background image is changed to the background image corresponding to the performance mode after the change and the BGM is changed to the BGM corresponding to the performance mode after the change. However, the period during which the performance mode can be changed during the second fluctuation performance (only during the pre-reach performance) is shorter than the period during which the sound volume value and the light amount value can be changed (other than when the fluctuation starts and when the fluctuation stops).

In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the second variation performance, the background image and BGM may be changed in the performance mode after the change from the start of the next first variation performance. Also, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. In addition, even if the production mode is changed in the specific game state, the display mode of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ is not changed, but the display form of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ may not be changed.

Also, when the first variable performance is executed after the second variable performance in the normal game state and the performance mode is changed by operating the performance button 17 during the second variable performance, the background image is changed to the background image corresponding to the performance mode after the change and the BGM is changed to the BGM according to the performance mode after the change. However, the period during which the performance mode can be changed during the second fluctuation performance (only during the pre-reach performance) is shorter than the period during which the sound volume value and the light amount value can be changed (other than when the fluctuation starts and when the fluctuation stops).

In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the second variation performance, the background image and BGM may be changed in the performance mode after the change from the start of the next first variation performance. Also, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Also, in the normal game state, when the production mode is changed, the display mode of the production pattern 70a is changed, but the display form of the special pattern TZ is not changed.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIG. 132, by operating various operation units (production button 17, cross key 19) during execution of the second variable production in the specific game state, production elements (volume value, light amount value, production mode, etc.) used for the first variable production to be executed next can be changed. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 132, even if the game ball wins the first start hole 45 during the specific game state in which the first pending icon is not displayed, the generated notification sound (winning sound) is not output. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is puzzled by outputting only the generated notification sound even though the first pending icon is not displayed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 132, even if a game ball wins in the second starting port 47 in the specific game state, when the normal icon (white icon) is displayed, the generated notification sound (winning sound) is not output, and when the special icon is displayed, the generated notification sound corresponding to the type of the special icon is output. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is fed up with the generated notification sound in the specific game state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second start hole 47, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Although the shift display of the pending icon is not performed and the icon is not displayed at the start of the first variable performance, the icon may be displayed without the shift display of the pending icon.

(Example of effect when look-ahead motion effect and step-up notice effect are executed)
133 and 134, an example of effect when the look-ahead motion effect and the step-up notice effect are executed will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 133(a), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a of "468" indicating a failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

When the variable effect (corresponding to the prior variation) is started from this state, as shown in FIG. 133(b), the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2", and the three pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the first effect of the look-ahead action effect over three times of variable effects is started. Specifically, as a weak advance notice of the look-ahead motion presentation, the second movable member 74 emits light in blue, performs a weak motion toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak motion effect sound.

After that, immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, when the hold icon (the left end in the figure) to be the notice target of the look-ahead action effect changes to a blue icon, as shown in FIG. Also, the winning entrance lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and the lamp changing effect is started.

Then, when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 133(d), the performance symbol 70a is stop-displayed with a losing number of "365", and the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a losing number of "365".

Furthermore, when the stop time of the performance pattern has passed and the next variable performance (corresponding to the preliminary variation) is started, as shown in FIG. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the second effect of the look-ahead motion effect is started. Specifically, as a weak advance notice of the look-ahead motion presentation, the second movable member 74 emits light in blue, performs a weak motion toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak motion effect sound.

After that, immediately after the movement of the holding icon HI is completed, when the holding icon to be notified of the look-ahead action effect changes to a red icon, as shown in FIG. Also, the prize winning entrance lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp changing effect is continued.

Then, when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 134(g), the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed with a losing number of "635", and the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a losing number of "635".

Further, when the stop time of the performance pattern has passed and the variable performance (corresponding to the variation) to be the announcement target of the look-ahead operation performance is started, as shown in FIG. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the third effect of the look-ahead motion effect is started. Specifically, as a strong advance notice of the look-ahead motion presentation, the second movable member 74 emits red light, performs a strong motion toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a strong motion effect sound.

After that, when the movement of the holding icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 134(i), the reduction display (preparation operation) of the performance pattern 70a is completed and the normal size scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started, after which the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position and the third performance of the look-ahead operation performance is completed.

Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect pattern 70a is started, as shown in FIG. 134(j), the first step effect of the step-up notice effect is started. Specifically, the first step image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the first step sound effect is output. After that, the second to fourth step effects are sequentially executed.

Further, when the fourth step effect is completed, the fifth step effect is started as shown in FIG. 134(k), the fifth step image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the fifth step effect sound is output. In addition, while the production button 17 is turned off, a weak vibration production is started in which the production button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration effect does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect sound (sound effect) when operating the effect button 17 during the effective period are not output, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) and the lamp change effect by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are continued.

After 1 second has passed, as shown in FIG. 134(l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends, and 2 seconds later, the fifth step effect ends. Thereafter, SP ready-to-win performance is executed after normal ready-to-win performance is executed according to the variable performance pattern, or SPSP ready-to-win performance is to be executed after normal ready-to-win performance is executed.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, after the number of reservations displayed in the special figure reservation number display area decreases with the start of the variable production (the production design 70a starts the preparation operation) and before the production design 70a scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started, the look-ahead operation production (light emission of the second movable member 74, operation) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the look-ahead action performance is being executed while notifying the player of the start of the variable performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

133 and 134, the look-ahead action effect (light emission and movement of the second movable member 74) is started after the movement (shift) of the pending icon is started with the start of the variable effect and before the movement of the pending icon is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the look-ahead action performance is being executed while notifying the player of the start of the variable performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, according to the performance examples shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, the vibration performance is not executed during the 1st to 4th step performances of the step-up notice performance, and the vibration performance is executed during the 5th step performance with the highest degree of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the example of performance shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration performance executed during the 5th step performance is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the 5th step performance of the step-up notice performance. Therefore, the appearance of the fifth step presentation is not overwhelmed by the vibration presentation, and the presentation effect of the step-up notice presentation can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

133 and 134, the vibration effect executed during the fifth step effect does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promoting image), so that the effect sound when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the effect sound (operation effect sound, movable member operating effect sound, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are not output. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused during the vibration performance that does not involve the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, even during the vibration production of the production button 17, the production light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change production are continued. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the performance light emission or the lamp change performance by the vibration performance accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The production button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration production performed during the fifth step production in the step-up notice production, but the production button 17 may be made to emit light in a predetermined mode (a color other than the rainbow color which is the emission color for confirming the big win and a different emission mode from the emission mode during the effective period of the production button 17, such as white flashing or yellow flashing, etc.) throughout the execution period of the vibration production. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp that the vibration effect is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, during the vibrating performance not accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, performance light emission to attract attention to the performance button 17 may be performed by a light emission mode of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (for example, moving light emission toward the performance button 17).

(Production example when anticipation vibration production and dialog announcement production are executed)
135 and 136, a description will be given of an effect example when the look-ahead vibration effect and the speech announcement effect are executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 135(a), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a of "468" indicating a failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

When the variable effect (corresponding to the prior variation) is started from this state, as shown in FIG. 135(b), the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2", and the three pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the first performance of the look-ahead vibration performance over the three fluctuation performances is started. Specifically, as a weak notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 weakly vibrates for one second and the effect button 17 blinks white for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration is not accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque production button image, gauge image) and the production sound (sound effect) when operating the production button 17 during the effective period are not output, but the production light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs is continued.

After that, immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, when the hold icon (left end in the figure) to be the notice target of the look-ahead vibration effect changes to a blue icon, as shown in FIG. Also, the winning entrance lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and the lamp changing effect is started.

Then, when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 135(d), the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed with a losing number of "365", and the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a losing number of "365".

Furthermore, when the stop time of the performance pattern has passed and the next variable performance (corresponding to the preliminary variation) is started, as shown in FIG. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the second look-ahead vibration effect is started. Specifically, as a weak notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 weakly vibrates for one second and the effect button 17 blinks white for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration does not accompany the effective period of the production button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promoting image (opaque production button image, gauge image) and the production sound (sound effect) when operating the production button 17 during the effective period are not output, but the production light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change production are continued.

After that, immediately after the movement of the holding icon HI is completed, when the holding icon to be notified of the look-ahead vibration effect changes to a red icon, as shown in FIG. Also, the prize winning entrance lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp changing effect is continued.

Then, when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 136(g), the performance symbol 70a is stop-displayed with a losing number of "635", and the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a losing number of "635".

Furthermore, when the stop time of the performance pattern elapses and the variable performance (corresponding to the variation) to be the notice target of the look-ahead vibration performance is started, as shown in FIG. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the third production of the look-ahead vibration production is started. Specifically, as a strong notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds, and the effect button 17 flashes red for 3 seconds. However, since the execution of this strong vibration does not accompany the effective period of the production button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promoting image (opaque production button image, gauge image) and the production sound (sound effect) when operating the production button 17 during the effective period are not output, but the production light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change production are continued.

After that, when the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 136(i), the reduction display (preparation operation) of the effect pattern 70a is finished and the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started, but the strong notice of the anticipatory vibration effect is continued. After that, the strong vibration and white flashing of the effect button 17 are stopped, and the third effect of the look-ahead vibration effect is completed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the completion of the third performance of the look-ahead vibration performance, as shown in FIG. Specifically, an opaque performance button image simulating the performance button 17 and an operation prompting image SG composed of a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period are displayed in the dialog window image SW, and the display effect sound of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the performance button 17 emits white light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 136(k), the hot line "What is this!? It's hot!!" In addition, while the performance button 17 is turned off, a weak vibration performance is started in which the performance button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second, but the performance light emission (light emission mode other than the rainbow light emission) by a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change performance are continued.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 136(l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. After that, a pseudo continuous performance is executed according to the variable performance pattern, a normal ready-to-win performance is executed, an SP ready-to-win performance is executed after the normal ready-to-win performance is executed, and an SPSP ready-to-win performance is executed after the normal ready-to-win performance is executed.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, after the number of reservations displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area decreases with the start of the variable production (the production pattern 70a starts the preparation operation) and before the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) starts, the look-ahead vibration production (vibration of the production button 17, white blinking) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the read-ahead vibration performance is being executed while notifying the player of the start of the variable performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

135 and 136, the look-ahead vibration effect (vibration of the effect button 17, blinking white) is started after the movement (shift) of the pending icon is started with the start of the variable effect and before the movement of the pending icon is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the read-ahead vibration performance is being executed while notifying the player of the start of the variable performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

135 and 136, when the look-ahead vibration effect is executed, the effect button 17 is flashed in white although the effective period of the effect button 17 is not accompanied. Therefore, even when the performance button 17 is not operated, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the read-ahead vibration performance is being executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

135 and 136, the light emission mode of the effect button 17 in the anticipatory vibration effect is different from the light emission mode of the effect button 17 during the effective period in the advance notice effect (dialogue notice effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) accompanied by the occurrence of the effective period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as misunderstanding that the effective period of the effect button 17 has occurred in the look-ahead vibration effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the example of the effects shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the pre-reach forewarning effects (words forewarning effect, step-up forewarning effect) are not executed until the look-ahead vibration effect is completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it is difficult to notice that the read-ahead vibration performance, which is difficult to judge visually, is being executed due to the pre-reach announcement performance, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the pseudo-continuous production is not executed until the look-ahead vibration production ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it is difficult to notice that the look-ahead vibration effect which is difficult to judge visually is being executed due to the pseudo-continuous effect, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production executed during the dialogue advance notice production is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the dialogue advance notice production. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the dialogue foretelling effect without vibrating the appearance of the dialogue foretelling effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

135 and 136, the vibration effect executed during the anticipatory vibration effect does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promoting image), so that the display effect sound when displaying the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect sound (operation effect sound, movable member operating effect sound, etc.) when operating the effect button 17 during the effective period are not output. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused during the vibration performance that does not involve the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

135 and 136, the vibration effect executed during the dialog preview effect is accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promoting image), so that the display effect sound when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the effect sound (operation effect sound, dialogue voice, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the speech announcement production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the speech announcement production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on whether or not the performance button 17 is operated and the operation timing, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, even during the vibration production accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17, the production light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change production are continued. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the performance light emission or the lamp change performance by the vibration performance accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Although the performance button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration performance executed at the time of the speech advance notice performance, the performance button 17 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner (a color other than the rainbow color which is the luminescence color for finalizing the big win and a light emission mode different from the light emission mode during the effective period of the performance button 17, such as white blinking or yellow blinking, etc.) over the execution period of the vibration performance.

Further, the vibration performance to be executed during the speech announcement performance may be executed until the same timing (for example, 0.5 seconds after the expiration of the effective period when the performance button 17 is not operated) regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (the execution period of the vibration performance is variable).

Further, during the vibrating performance not accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, performance light emission to attract attention to the performance button 17 may be performed by a light emission mode of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (for example, moving light emission toward the performance button 17).

(Production example when pseudo-continuous production is executed before reach production)
With reference to FIG. 137, a description will be given of an effect example in which a pseudo-continuous effect (a staged effect associated with the pseudo-continuous effect without straddling the ready-to-win effect) is executed before the ready-to-win effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 137(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped in the left area, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the right area, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is continued in the middle area. At this time, the effective period of the effect button 17 does not occur, and the pseudo continuous success effect is started. More specifically, an inciting effect is executed to incite whether or not the pseudo symbols suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous effect are temporarily stopped in the middle area. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

After that, when the fanning production ends, the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle region, and a success effect sound is output, as shown in FIG. 137(b). Further, as shown in FIG. 137(c), the second movable member 74 emits blue light, performs a weak movement toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the production pattern 70a fluctuates again, and "x2" indicating the number of times of pseudo-variation (that the stage of production has progressed) is displayed in blue. In addition, the first stage effect (movie of the first episode of the story) among the stage effects executed along with the pseudo-continuous effect is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).

After that, as shown in FIG. 137(d), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped in the left area, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the right area, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues in the middle area, and the pseudo-influence effect is executed in the middle area to incite whether or not the pseudo-symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo-run will be temporarily stopped. At this time, an effective period of the performance button 17 occurs, an opaque performance button image simulating the performance button 17 emitting white light and an operation promoting image SG composed of a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period are displayed, a display effect sound of the operation promoting image SG is output, and the performance button 17 emits white light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 137(e), the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle region as a pseudo consecutive success effect, and a success effect sound is output. In addition, the performance button 17 is extinguished to start a weak vibration performance in which the performance button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second, but the performance light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by a plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 137(f), the weak vibration of the production button 17 stops and the weak vibration production ends. In addition, the second movable member 74 emits light in red, performs a strong action to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, the performance pattern 70a fluctuates again, and "x 3" indicating the number of times of pseudo-variation (that the stage of performance progresses) is displayed in red. In addition, the second stage effect (movie of the second episode of the story) among the stage effects executed along with the pseudo-continuous effect is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).

After that, when the strong action time (1 second) of the second movable member 74 elapses, the simulated continuous success performance ends, and as shown in FIG.

(Production example when pseudo-continuous production is executed after reach production)
With reference to FIG. 138, an example of an effect when a pseudo-continuous effect (a staged effect associated with the pseudo-continuous effect straddling the ready-to-win effect) is executed after the ready-to-win effect will be described. Note that FIGS. 138(a) to (c) are the same as FIGS. 137(a) to (c), so description thereof will be omitted here.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the state of FIG. 138(c), as shown in FIG. 138(d), the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal ready-to-win effect is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 138(e), when the pseudo-continuation effect is started, a pseudo-influence effect is executed to prompt whether or not the pseudo-symbol suggesting execution of the pseudo-continuation is temporarily stopped in the middle area. At this time, an effective period of the performance button 17 occurs, an opaque performance button image imitating the performance button 17 emitting white light and an operation promotion image SG composed of a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period are displayed, and the performance button 17 emits white light. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 138(f), the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle area as a pseudo consecutive success effect, and a success effect sound is output. In addition, the performance button 17 is extinguished to start a weak vibration performance in which the performance button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second, but the performance light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by a plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues.

When one second has passed since then, as shown in FIG. 138(g), the weak vibration of the production button 17 stops and the weak vibration production ends. In addition, the second movable member 74 emits light in red, performs a strong action to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, the performance pattern 70a fluctuates again, and "x 3" indicating the number of times of pseudo-variation (that the stage of performance progresses) is displayed in red. In addition, the second stage effect (movie of the second episode of the story) among the stage effects executed along with the pseudo-continuous effect is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).

After that, when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 138(h), the effect pattern 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. After that, after the normal ready-to-win effect is executed according to the variable effect pattern, the SP ready-to-win effect is executed, or after the normal ready-to-win effect is executed, the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed.

137 and 138, it is possible to execute the vibration effect when executing the pseudo continuous effect accompanied by the occurrence of the effective period of the effect button 17 in the pseudo continuous effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and to improve the interest in the game.

137 and 138, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the pseudo consecutive success effect is shorter than the execution period (2 seconds) of the pseudo consecutive success effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the pseudo consecutive success presentation without the vibrating presentation being superior to the appearance of the pseudo consecutive success presentation. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

137 and 138, the vibration effect executed during the pseudo-continuous effect is accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promoting image), so that the display effect sound when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the effect sound (operation effect sound, success effect sound, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the pseudo-continuous performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, the execution period of the vibration production executed in the pseudo-continuous production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on whether or not the performance button 17 is operated and the operation timing, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

137 and 138, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed after the ready-to-win effect, the type of the effect symbol that forms the ready-to-win state after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is downgraded from the type of the effect symbol that formed the ready-to-win state before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect (downgrading from the ready-to-win with odd-numbered symbols to the ready-to-win with even-numbered symbols, and from the ready-to-win with the "7" symbol to the even-numbered or odd-numbered symbols other than "7". downgrade to Chi). Therefore, the player will not be dissatisfied with the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the interest in the game will not be improved.

137 and 138, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporary stop of the performance light emission by the vibration performance accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, in the variable production in which the pseudo-continuous production is executed, it is possible to execute the step-by-step production (playback of the first episode to third story movie) in which the production can progress step by step with the pseudo-continuation (temporary stop and re-fluctuation of the production pattern 70a). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect when the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, there are cases where the step production is started before the pseudo-continuation is performed, and there are cases where the step production is started after the pseudo-continuation is performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the fact that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed after the staged effect has been started, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Although the production button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration production executed during the simulated continuous production, the production button 17 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner (a color other than the rainbow color which is the emission color for confirming the big win, and a lighting manner different from the lighting manner during the effective period of the production button 17, such as white blinking or yellow blinking, etc.) over the execution period of the vibration performance.

Further, the vibration performance executed during the pseudo continuous performance may be executed until the same timing (for example, 0.5 seconds after the timing when the performance button 17 is not operated and the valid period passes) regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (the execution period of the vibration performance is variable).

In addition, the effective period of the performance button 17 is generated and the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed during the pseudo continuous performance, but the vibration performance may be executed without generating the effective period of the performance button 17 during the pseudo continuous performance, or the effective period of the performance button 17 may be generated but the vibration performance may not be executed.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SP reach production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 139, a description will be given of an effect example when the development effect is executed and the SP ready-to-win effect is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 139(a), the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 139(b), when the SP development effect is started, a roulette effect is performed in which a plurality of special effect symbols such as an SP SP development pattern suggesting development to an SP SP ready-to-win effect, an SP development pattern to suggest development to an SP ready-to-win effect, a pseudo pattern suggesting execution of a pseudo continuous effect, and a scrap pattern suggesting that the effect does not develop (lost) are variably displayed in a diagonal direction at a low speed. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

After that, as shown in FIG. 139(c), an effect is performed in which SPSP development symbols, SP development symbols, pseudo symbols, and scrap symbols are variably displayed at high speed. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 139(d), it is notified that the SP developing pattern is temporarily stopped in the middle area and the SP ready-to-win effect is developed. In addition, in the roulette production, the type of the special production pattern that is variably displayed changes depending on the fluctuation production pattern, so depending on the type of the special production pattern that is variably displayed (the special production pattern that is not temporarily stopped at the end and the special production pattern that is temporarily stopped), it suggests whether or not the production will develop into a production with a high degree of expectation for a big win (expectation for a big win).

After that, the screen is whited out and the development effect is finished, and as shown in FIG. 139(e), the effect pattern 70a of the middle area is changed again, and the effect pattern 70a of the left region and the right region is reduced and displayed at the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen, and the SP ready-to-win effect is started. Note that the icon is hidden with the start of the SP ready-to-win effect.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SPSP ready-to-win production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 140, a description will be given of an effect example when the development effect is executed and the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 140(a), the normal ready-to-win effect is executed with the effect symbol 70a of "5" temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area. After that, as shown in FIG. 139(b), when the SPSP development effect is started, a roulette effect is performed in which a plurality of special effect patterns such as an SP development pattern suggesting development to an SP ready-to-win effect, an SPSP development pattern to suggest development to an SPSP ready-to-win effect, and a full rotation pattern to suggest development to a full-rotation ready-to-win effect are variably displayed in an oblique direction at a low speed. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140(c), an effect is performed in which the SP development pattern, the SPSP development pattern, and all the rotating patterns are variably displayed at high speed, and an effective suggesting effect is started to suggest that there is a possibility that the operation of the effect button 17 will be effective. Specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are moved and displayed, and an effect is performed in which the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position at the lower right of the screen.

Then, when the translucent effect button images gather at a specific position at the lower right of the screen, the effect button 17 has an effective period (long press for 4 seconds) as shown in FIG. 140(d), an opaque effect button image simulating the effect button 17 emitting red light and an operation prompting image SG composed of a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period are displayed at a specific position at the lower right of the screen, and the display effect sound of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It should be noted that the characters "long press" are displayed in the opaque effect button image.

After that, when the effect button 17 is long pressed, the speed of the variable display of various development patterns is slowed down step by step, and when the time of the long press reaches a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. In addition, the performance button 17 is extinguished to start a weak vibration performance in which the performance button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second, but the performance light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by a plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues.

After one second has passed, the weak vibration of the performance button 17 stops and the weak vibration performance ends. After that, the screen is whited out and the development performance is finished, and as shown in FIG. 140(f), the performance pattern 70a in the middle region is changed again, and the three performance patterns 70a are reduced and displayed in the upper left part of the screen to start the SPSP ready-to-win performance. Note that the pending icon and the corresponding icon are hidden with the start of the SPSP ready-to-win effect.

139 and 140, depending on the type of special effect symbols that are variably displayed in the roulette effect (special effect symbols that are not temporarily stopped at the end, special effect symbols that are temporarily stopped), it is suggested whether or not the effect develops into a high expectation for a big win (expectation for a big win). Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's expectations for the types of special effect symbols that are variably displayed in the roulette effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

139 and 140, the effective suggestion performance may be executed in the development performance, so that the player's expectation for the development to the ready-to-win performance with high expectation for big win can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the example of the effects shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the development effect is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the development effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the development presentation without vibrating presentation superior to the appearance of the development presentation. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

139 and 140, the vibration effect executed during the development effect is accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation prompting image), so that the display effect sound when displaying the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect sound (operation effect sound, temporary stop effect sound, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, the production effect of the development production can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the development production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

139 and 140, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporary stop of the performance light emission by the vibration performance accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Although the performance button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration performance executed during the development performance, the performance button 17 may be made to emit light in a predetermined mode (a color other than the rainbow color which is the emission color for determining the big win and a light emission mode different from the light emission mode during the effective period of the performance button 17, such as white blinking or yellow blinking, etc.) over the execution period of the vibration performance.

Further, the vibration performance executed during the development performance may be executed until the same timing (for example, 0.5 seconds after the expiration of the effective period when the performance button 17 is not operated) regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (the execution period of the vibration performance is variable).

In addition, the effective period of the performance button 17 is generated and the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed during the development performance, but the vibration performance may be executed without generating the effective period of the performance button 17 during the development performance, or the effective period of the performance button 17 may be generated but the vibration performance may not be executed.

(Example of production when a cut-in production is executed during SP reach production and a big win is achieved)
141 and 142, a description will be given of an effect example in which a cut-in effect is executed during the SP ready-to-win effect in the variable effect pattern 13 to result in a big win.

First, as shown in FIG. 141(a), the effect pattern 70a of the left area and the right area is reduced and displayed in the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen, and the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

From this state, when the SP ready-to-win effect reaches the final stage, as shown in FIG. 141(b), an effective suggestion effect is started to suggest that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective for the cut-in effect. Specifically, an effect is performed in which two semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are gathered from the left and right lower portions of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the translucent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 141(c), the effect button 17 has an effective period (four seconds by a single hit), and an opaque effect button image simulating the effect button 17 that projects in a specific position in the center of the screen and emits red light, and an operation prompting image SG composed of a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period are displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the effect button 17 projects and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, the red cut-in effect is started as shown in FIG. 141(d). Specifically, a cut-in image with a red frame is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a third cut-in sound effect is output. In addition, the performance button 17 is extinguished to start the weak vibration performance in which the performance button 17 is weakly vibrated for 3 seconds, but the performance light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by a plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues.

After that, when 1 second has passed since the output of the third cut-in effect sound is completed, the cut-in performance and the weak vibration performance are completed, and as shown in FIG.

When a predetermined time elapses from there, as shown in FIG. 141(f), the machine is temporarily stopped in a state where three production patterns 70a of "5" are arranged (pattern alignment), and a strong vibration production (big hit determination vibration production) is started in which the production button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the production button 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration performance is not accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promoting image (opaque performance button image, gauge image) and the performance sound (sound effect) when the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period are not output.

When 4 seconds have passed since then, as shown in FIG. 142(g), the strong vibration effect ends, but the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 continue to emit rainbow colors. When one second elapses from there, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resumes the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is extinguished.

After that, as shown in FIG. 142(h), a re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, three performance patterns 70a of ``5'' are aligned (patterns are aligned) and are moved in the depth direction and displayed in a reduced size, an effective period of the performance button 17 (three seconds for a single hit) occurs, and an opaque performance button image simulating the performance button 17 emitting white light and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period are displayed at a specific position in the center of the screen, and an operation prompting image SG composed of a display effect sound of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the performance button 17 emits white light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 142(i), promotion failure effect is started. Specifically, three performance patterns 70a of ``5'' that have been displayed in reduced size are aligned (symbols are aligned), are moved to the front side of the screen, are enlarged and displayed, and a non-elevated effect sound is output, but the performance light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by a plurality of game board decoration LEDs is continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 142(j), the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped at the normal size, and the promotion failure performance ends. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 142(k), an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three production patterns 70a.

After that, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching performance is completed, the performance pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the characters as shown in FIG. In addition, a strong vibration performance (big win confirming vibration performance) is started in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the performance button 17, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration performance is not accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promoting image (opaque performance button image, gauge image) and the performance sound (sound effect) when the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period are not output.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 142(m), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, and the effect pattern 70a is finally stopped at "555", and the special pattern TZ is also finally stopped at "555".

When the stop time (0.5 seconds) elapses thereafter, as shown in FIG. 142(n), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the effect light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are started, and a right-handed shot image MU suggesting a right-handed shot is displayed on the upper right of the screen. Further, a strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) is started in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the performance button 17, and the performance button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration performance is not accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promoting image (opaque performance button image, gauge image) and the performance sound (sound effect) when the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period are not output. After that, when one second elapses, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the jackpot game is finished, and the round game is started.

In addition, in the case of the variable effect pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not executed, the process shifts to FIG. 142(k) after FIG. 142(g) and the eye-catching effect is executed.

141 and 142, the effectiveness suggestion performance may be executed in the cut-in performance, so that the valid period is generated and the player can be suggested that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, the execution period (3 seconds) of the cut-in production and the execution period (3 seconds) of the vibration production executed during the cut-in production are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the cut-in production. In addition, the vibrating presentation can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

141 and 142, the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect is accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation prompting image), so that the display effect sound when the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the effect sound (operation effect sound, cut-in effect sound, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the cut-in production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

141 and 142, when the game is temporarily stopped in a state in which three performance patterns 70a in a display mode not including characters are aligned (symbols are aligned), the strong vibration performance (big hit determination vibration performance) is executed for a longer period than the vibration performance during the cut-in performance, so that the player can be effectively notified of the big win, and the interest in the game can be improved.

141 and 142, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is executed when the game is temporarily stopped in a state where three effect patterns 70a in the display mode including characters are aligned (C pattern alignment). Therefore, it is possible to make the player reconfirm that the jackpot has been won, and to improve the amusement of the game.

141 and 142, the strong vibration effects (big hit confirmation vibration effect, big win confirmation vibration effect, opening vibration effect) executed at the time of temporary stop with three effect patterns 70a aligned or at the opening of the jackpot game are not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the display effect sound when the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the effect sound when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period (Operation sound effects, other sound effects, etc.) are not output. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused during the vibration performance that does not involve the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

141 and 142, the execution period of the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the performance examples shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, when the SP ready-to-win performance is executed to result in a big hit, the vibration performance is executed during the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a for the big win, while the vibration performance is not executed during the final stop. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the fluctuation performance is still continuing due to the vibration performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

141 and 142, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporary stop of the performance light emission by the vibration performance accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Although the performance button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration performance executed at the time of cut-in performance, the performance button 17 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner (a color other than the rainbow color which is the luminous color for confirming the big win and a light emission manner different from the light emission manner during the effective period of the performance button 17, such as white blinking or yellow blinking, etc.) over the execution period of the vibration performance.

In addition, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continue to emit the effect light during the occurrence of the effective period related to the cut-in effect, but the plurality of board decoration LEDs may be partially or entirely extinguished immediately before the effective period occurs or from the start of generation until the effect button 17 is operated or until the effective time elapses, and then the effect light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be resumed. In this way, the operation prompting image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 can be made conspicuous, and the player can be informed of the tense scene, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the promotion success performance is executed, the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 is started at the same time, but the rainbow light emission of the performance button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the performance button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

Further, when the SP reach performance is executed, the performance pattern 70a is permanently stopped after executing the performance of returning the eye-catching performance and the performance pattern 70a to the display mode including the character, but when the result of the SP reach performance is a loss, the performance pattern 70a is fully stopped after executing the performance of returning the eye-catching performance and the performance pattern 70a to the display mode including the character, and when the big win is achieved, the eye-catching performance and the performance pattern 70a are returned to the display mode including the character. Instead of executing the effect of returning to the display mode including characters, the effect pattern 70a may be permanently stopped in the display mode of only numbers.

Further, the vibration performance executed during the cut-in performance may be executed until the same timing (for example, two seconds after the expiration of the effective period when the performance button 17 is not operated) regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (the execution period of the vibration performance is variable).

The vibration performance is executed during the cut-in performance and the promotion success performance, but while the vibration performance is executed during the cut-in performance, the vibration performance may not be executed during the promotion success performance, or vice versa, or the vibration performance may not be executed during the cut-in performance and the promotion success performance.

In addition, the vibration performance is executed when the big win is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a including the characters only, or when the big winning is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a including the character, but the vibration performance may be executed when the big winning is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a including the character, or the vibration performance may not be executed when the big win is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a including the character, or vice versa. Vibration performance may not be executed at the time of the temporary stop of the big hit by the performance pattern 70a including the character.

In addition, when the lamp change performance is executed, the lamp change performance continues until the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed (even during the cut-in performance, the winning entrance lamp NR emits light in a color corresponding to the display mode of the icon), but it may be lighted and extinguished in conjunction with the light emission mode of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs.

(Production example 1 when the decision production is executed during the SPSP reach production and the jackpot is achieved)
Using FIGS. 143 and 144, an effect example 1 in the case where a big win is achieved by executing a determined effect during the SPSP ready-to-win effect in the variable effect pattern 20 will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 143(a), three performance symbols 70a form a ready-to-win state and are displayed in reduced size in the upper left part of the screen to execute the SPSP ready-to-win effect. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

When the SPSP ready-to-win performance reaches the final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. 143(b), an effective suggestion performance is started to suggest that the operation of the performance button 17 may be effective for the final performance. Specifically, an effect is performed in which four translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are assembled from four corners of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the translucent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 143(c), the effect button 17 has an effective period (single hit five seconds), an opaque effect button image simulating the effect button 17 projecting in a specific position in the center of the screen and emitting red light, and an operation prompting image SG composed of a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period are displayed, and a display effect sound of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the effect button 17 is in a projecting state and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 143(d), the decided success effect is started. Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state of emitting rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the success effect sound is output. A strong vibration performance (determined success vibration performance) is started in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds and then strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second, and is temporarily stopped in a state in which three performance patterns 70a of "5" are arranged at the upper left part of the screen. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and production buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the success performance and the strong vibration performance are completed, as shown in FIG. Then, when the blessing effect is completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs restart the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 143(f), the machine is temporarily stopped in a state where three production patterns 70a of "5" are arranged (patterns are arranged), and a strong vibration production (big hit determination vibration production) is started in which the production button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the production button 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration performance is not accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promoting image (opaque performance button image, gauge image) and the performance sound (sound effect) when the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period are not output.

After 4 seconds have passed, the strong vibration effect ends, but the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 continue to emit rainbow colors. When one second elapses from there, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resumes the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is extinguished.

After that, as shown in FIG. 144(g), a re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, three performance patterns 70a of ``5'' are moved in the back direction and displayed in a reduced size (symbols are aligned), and an effective period (single hit 3 seconds) of the performance button 17 occurs, and an opaque performance button image simulating the performance button 17 emitting red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period are displayed at a specific position in the center of the screen, and the display effect sound of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the performance button emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 144(h), promotion success effect is started. Specifically, three performance patterns 70a of ``7'' switched from the performance pattern 70a of ``5'' displayed in reduced size are moved to the front side of the screen in a state (patterns are aligned) to be enlarged and displayed, and a promotion effect sound is output. In addition, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors, and a strong vibration effect (elevated vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 3 seconds.

When a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the strong vibration performance is finished after the performance pattern 70a is in a normal size and temporarily stopped, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resumes performance light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission), and the performance button 17 is turned off.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 144(j), an eye-catching effect suggesting stop display of the effect symbol 70a is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three production patterns 70a.

After that, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching performance is completed, the performance pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character as shown in FIG. In addition, a strong vibration performance (big win confirming vibration performance) is started in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the performance button 17, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration performance is not accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promoting image (opaque performance button image, gauge image) and the performance sound (sound effect) when the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period are not output.

When 1 second has passed after that, as shown in FIG. 144(l), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at "777", and the special symbol TZ is also finally stopped at "777".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 144(m), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the effect light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are started, and the strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second is started without accompanying the effect period of the effect button 17, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration performance is not accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promoting image (opaque performance button image, gauge image) and the performance sound (sound effect) when the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period are not output. After that, when one second elapses, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the jackpot game is finished, and the first round game is started.

(Production example 2 when the decision production is executed during the SPSP reach production and the jackpot is achieved)
Using FIGS. 145 and 146, an effect example 2 in the case where a big win is achieved by executing a determined effect during the SPSP ready-to-win effect in the variable effect pattern 16 will be described. Note that FIGS. 145(a) to (c) are the same as FIGS. 143(a) to (c), so descriptions thereof are omitted here.

When the effect button 17 is operated from the state of FIG. 145(c) or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 145(d), a temporary stop effect is performed in a state in which three "5" effect patterns 70a are aligned (symbols are aligned), and a big hit is notified by the effect pattern 70a, but strong vibration effect is not performed at this point. At this time, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) continues.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state of emitting rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the success effect sound is output. A strong vibration performance (determined success vibration performance) is started in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds and then strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second, and is temporarily stopped in a state where three performance patterns 70a of "5" are arranged in the upper left part of the screen. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and production buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the successful performance and the strong vibration performance are completed, as shown in FIG. Then, when the blessing effect is completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs restart the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is turned off.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 146(g), an eye-catching effect suggesting stop display of the effect symbol 70a is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three production patterns 70a.

Then, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching performance is completed, as shown in FIG. 146(h), the performance pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the characters and is temporarily stopped, and the icon is re-displayed, and if there is a first special figure pending number, the pending icon is re-displayed. In addition, a strong vibration performance (big win confirming vibration performance) is started in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the performance button 17, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration performance is not accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promoting image (opaque performance button image, gauge image) and the performance sound (sound effect) when the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period are not output.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 146(i), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at "555", and the special symbol TZ is also finally stopped at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 146(j), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the effect light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are started, and the strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second is started without accompanying the effective period of the effect button 17, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration performance is not accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promoting image (opaque performance button image, gauge image) and the performance sound (sound effect) when the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period are not output. After that, when one second elapses, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the jackpot game is finished, and the round game is started.

When the performance button 17 is operated during the validity period of the decision performance or when the validity period passes and the decision failure performance is executed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, and the failure effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the failure effect sound is output. Further, part or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are extinguished, and after that, the three effect symbols are temporarily stopped by the reach-losing result (for example, "565"). When a predetermined period elapses after that, an eye-catching performance suggesting stop display of the performance pattern 70a is executed, and when the eye-catching performance is completed, the performance pattern 70a returns to a display mode including a character to be temporarily stopped, the icon is re-displayed, and the reserved icon is re-displayed when there is a first special symbol reserved number. After one second has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a is officially stopped with a reach-losing result, and the special symbol TZ is also fully-stopped with a reach-losing result.

Thus, according to the performance examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, the effect suggesting performance may be executed in the determined performance, so that the effective period is generated and the player can be suggested that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the performance examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, there is a determined success performance in which the first movable member 73 operates before pattern alignment and a determined success performance in which the first movable member 73 operates after pattern alignment, so that the performance effect of the determination performance can be effectively improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the performance examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, the determination success performance in which the first movable member 73 operates before pattern matching and the determination success performance in which the first movable member 73 operates after pattern matching have different periods from the operation of the performance button 17 to the execution of the vibration performance (decision success vibration performance) during the valid period. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration from the beginning, or to give an exhilaration after stirring up the player's anxiety, and the contrast effect can effectively improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, the operation period (10 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the decision success production and the execution period (10 seconds) of the vibration production executed in the decision success production are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the determined success production. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game is a big win by means of the vibration effect, thereby making it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

143 to 146, the vibration effect executed during the decision effect (decision success vibration effect) is accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promoting image), so that the display effect sound when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the effect sound (operation effect sound, success effect sound, movable member operating effect sound, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the decided success production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

143 to 146, when three performance patterns 70a in a display mode not including a character are aligned (symbol alignment), a strong vibration performance (big hit determination vibration performance) is executed when the game is temporarily stopped. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player of the big win and improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, a strong vibration production (big hit confirmation vibration production) is executed when the game is temporarily stopped in a state where three production patterns 70a in the display mode including characters are aligned (C pattern alignment). Therefore, it is possible to make the player reconfirm that the jackpot has been won, and to improve the amusement of the game.

143 to 146, the vibration effect (opening vibration effect) executed at the time of temporary stop or the opening of the jackpot game with three effect patterns 70a aligned does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the display effect sound when the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the effect sound (operation effect sound, other effect sound, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are output. It is designed not to be As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused during the vibration performance that does not involve the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, the execution period of the vibration production executed at the successful decision production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continue to emit the effect light during the occurrence of the effective period related to the determined effect, but the plurality of board decoration LEDs may be partially or entirely extinguished immediately before the effective period occurs or from the start of generation until the effect button 17 is operated or the effective time elapses, and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may emit rainbow light when the successful effect determined by the operation of the effect button 17 or the elapse of the effective time is executed. In this way, the operation prompting image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 can be made conspicuous, and the player can be informed of the tense scene, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the production button 17 are designed to emit rainbow light at the time of the decided success performance, but while the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 emit rainbow light, part or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be turned off, or while the first movable member 73 emits rainbow light, part or all of the production button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be turned off.

In addition, when the determined success effect is executed, the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 is started at the same time. may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

After the end of the blessing performance, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume the performance light emission and the performance button 17 is turned off, but the rainbow light emission of the game board decoration LEDs may be continued even after the blessing performance is completed, and the performance light emission may be resumed before the re-lottery performance is started, the performance light emission may be resumed before the eye-catching performance is started, or the rainbow light emission may be continued until the performance pattern 70a is actually stopped.

In addition, when the promotion success performance is executed, the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 is started at the same time, but the rainbow light emission of the performance button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the performance button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

When the SPSP ready-to-win performance is executed, the eye-catching performance and the performance pattern 70a are returned to the display mode including the character, and then the performance pattern 70a is actually stopped. However, when the result of the SPSP ready-to-win performance is a loss, the performance to return the eye-catching performance and the performance pattern 70a to the display mode including the character is performed before the performance pattern 70a is finally stopped, and when the big win is achieved, the eye-catching performance and the performance pattern 70a are stopped. , the production design 70a may be permanently stopped in the display mode of only numbers without executing the production of returning to the display mode including characters.

In addition, the vibration performance to be executed at the time of determined success performance may be executed until the same timing (for example, 3 seconds after the timing when the performance button 17 is not operated) regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated and the operation timing during the effective period (the execution period of the vibration performance is variable).

In addition, although the vibration performance is executed at the time of the decision success performance and the promotion success performance, the vibration performance may be executed at the time of the decision success performance, while the vibration performance may not be executed at the promotion success performance, or vice versa, or the vibration performance may not be executed at the time of the decision success performance and the promotion success performance.

In addition, the vibration performance is executed when the big winning eye is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a including only the numbers after the blessing performance or when the big winning eye is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a including the character after the eye-catching performance. Vibration performance may not be executed at the time of temporary stop of the big winning number by the only production pattern 70a and the temporary stop of the big winning number by the production pattern 70a including the character after the eye-catching production.

In addition, when the lamp change performance is executed, the lamp change performance continues until the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed (Even during the final performance, it emits light in a color corresponding to the display mode of the icon before the winning entrance lamp NR is hidden), but it may be lighted and extinguished in conjunction with the light emission mode of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs.

(Timer production and execution time)
Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the execution timing of the timer effect for each variable effect pattern will be described.

As event timer effects, there are a "pseudo-continuous timer effect" that suggests the occurrence of a pseudo-continuation, a "normal reach timer effect" that suggests the start of the normal reach effect, an "SP reach timer effect" that suggests the start of the SP reach effect, an "SPSP reach timer effect" that suggests the start of the SPSP reach effect, a "full-rotation ready-to-reach effect" that suggests the start of the full-rotation ready-to-win effect, and a large "effective period timer effect" that suggests the occurrence of the effective period of the effect button 17. There is a "jackpot pattern stop timer effect" that suggests that the winning pattern is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 147(a), in the case of variable effect patterns 7, 15, and 20, there is a possibility that three of the simulated continuous timer effect, normal reach timer effect, and SP reach timer effect will be executed.

In this case, the pseudo continuous timer effect is started between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Also, the normal reach generation timer effect is started between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. Also, the SP reach generation timer effect is started between T5 and T6 and ends at T6.

As shown in FIG. 147(b), in the case of variable performance patterns 8, 16, and 21, there is a possibility that four normal reach generation timer performances, SP reach generation timer performances, SPSP reach generation timer performances, and effective period generation timer performances are executed.

In this case, the normal reach generation timer effect is started between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Also, the SP reach generation timer effect is started between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. Also, the SPSP reach generation timer effect is started between T5 and T6 and ends at T6. Also, the effective period occurrence timer effect is started between T5 and T7 and ends at T7.

As shown in FIG. 147(c), in the case of the variable performance patterns 11 and 22, there is a possibility that four of a pseudo continuous timer effect, a normal ready-to-win timer effect, an SPSP ready-to-win timer effect, and a valid period timer effect will be executed.

In this case, the pseudo continuous timer effect is started between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Also, the normal reach generation timer effect is started between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. Also, the SPSP ready-to-win timer effect is started between T5 and T8 and ends at T8. Also, the valid period occurrence timer effect is started between T7 and T9 and ends at T9.

(Example of timer effect)
Next, with reference to FIG. 148, an effect example in which two timer effects are executed during the variable effect will be described. Here, it is assumed that execution of the variation effect pattern 22, the pseudo-continuous timer effect (normal pattern 7), and the effective period generation timer effect (normal pattern 21) is determined in the normal game state.

First, as shown in FIG. 148(a), when the white character timer STW is displayed and the timer effect is executed (the timer time is subtracted), the same "7" as the left and right effect symbols temporarily stops to form the ready-to-win state, and the normal ready-to-win effect is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(b), after the white character timer STW reaches "0 seconds remaining", the pseudo pattern temporarily stops in the middle area as a pseudo consecutive success effect, a success effect sound is output, and the pseudo 2 fluctuation period ends (the red flame effect associated with the pseudo consecutive effect is omitted in the figure).

Then, as shown in FIG. 148(c), the effect symbol 70a changes again, and "x3" indicating the number of pseudo-variations (that the stage of the effect progresses) is displayed in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 148(d), the SPSP development pattern is temporarily stopped in the middle area, a temporary stop effect sound is output, and a strong action effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 emits blue light and operates. At this time, when the effective period occurrence timer effect is started, the image display device 70 displays a white character timer YTW of "35 seconds left" which is a normal display, and subtraction of the timer time is started.

After that, the screen is whited out to end the development performance, and as shown in FIG. 148(e), the performance pattern 70a in the middle area is changed again, and three performance patterns 70a are reduced and displayed in the upper left part of the screen to start the SPSP ready-to-win performance. Note that the pending icon and the corresponding icon are hidden with the start of the SPSP ready-to-win effect. At this time, the white character timer YTW becomes "33 seconds remaining", which is the timer time during subtraction.

Then, when the SPSP ready-to-win effect reaches the final phase, as shown in FIG. 148(f), an effective suggestive effect is started to suggest that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective for the final effect. Specifically, an effect is performed in which four translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are assembled from four corners of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen. At this time, the white-character timer YTW becomes "two seconds left", which is the timer time during subtraction.

Then, after the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen and the white character timer YTW reaches "0 seconds remaining", the effect button 17's effective period (single hit 5 seconds) occurs as shown in FIG. 17 is in a projected state and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 148(h), the decided success effect is started. Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state of emitting rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the success effect sound is output. A strong vibration performance (determined success vibration performance) is started in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds and then strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second, and is temporarily stopped in a state in which three performance patterns 70a of "7" are arranged in the upper left part of the screen. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and production buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

(Production example when a special SP reach production is executed in the second variation production in production mode A (normal game state) and becomes a big hit)
With reference to FIG. 149, a description will be given of an effect example in which a special SP ready-to-win effect is executed in the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) in the effect mode A (normal game state) to result in a big hit.

First, as shown in FIG. 149(a), the image display device 70 is in a state in which the performance symbol 70a of "635" indicating a failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "2" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. At this time, since the effect mode is A (normal game state), the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed.

When the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is started from this state, as shown in FIG. 149(b), the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F changes from "2" to "1". Although the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, the icon may be displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149(c), a development effect suggesting development to a special SP ready-to-win effect is executed, and a special SP ready-to-win effect is executed.

Then, when the special SP ready-to-win effect ends, as shown in FIG. 149(d), the effect symbol 70a is officially stopped at "555", and the special symbol TZ is also officially stopped at "555", thus ending the second variable effect.

In addition, when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the right hitting error notification based on the right hitting in the normal game state is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a right-handed error image MUE suggesting that the game ball is shot toward the left side area of the game area 5a is displayed at a position near the center of the screen, and a right-handed error sound of ``Please hit left'' is output from the voice output device 9. - 特許庁

After the end of the second variable performance, as shown in FIG. 149(e), the opening performance of the jackpot game is started during the execution period of the right-hand hitting error notification, and the right-hand hitting image MU suggesting the right-hand hitting is displayed on the upper right of the screen to perform the right-hand hitting notification, and the big winning performance 1 is executed. At this time, the right hitting error image MUE is erased by the start of the right hitting notification, but the output of the right hitting error sound continues, and the output ends when a period shorter than the normal output period elapses. Incidentally, when the second jackpot game is executed as a result of the first variation effect, the jackpot effect 2 is executed.

(Production example when a chance production is executed in the first variation production in the production mode G (specific game state) and becomes a jackpot)
With reference to FIG. 150, a description will be given of an effect example in the case where the chance effect is executed in the first variation effect in the effect mode G (specific game state) to result in a big win.

First, as shown in FIG. 150(a), the image display device 70 is in a state in which the performance symbol 70a of "285" indicating a failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "2" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E. At this time, since it is the production mode G (specific game state), the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed.

When the first variation effect is started from this state, as shown in FIG. 150(b), the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". Although the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, the icon may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 150(c), a character image of "Chance is approaching" is displayed, and a performance symbol 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left corner of the screen, and a chance performance is executed to suggest that there is a chance for a big winning game to be executed.

Also, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the chance production was started, the big winning production is started as shown in FIG. 150(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state of emitting rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the success effect sound is output. Moreover, some or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs emit rainbow light.

Then, when the big winning performance is completed and the first movable member 73 is returned to the initial position, the performance pattern 70a is permanently stopped at ``555'' and the special pattern TZ is also fully stopped at ``555'' as shown in FIG.

After the end of the first variation effect, as shown in FIG. 150(f), the opening effect of the big win game is started, and the big win effect 1 is executed. Incidentally, when the second jackpot game is executed as a result of the first variation effect, the jackpot effect 2 is executed.

Thus, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, in the specific game state, when the first variable production (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed and when the second variable production (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the production is executed in a different manner (whether or not the look-ahead production is executed, whether or not various advance notice production is executed, whether or not a specific ready-to-win production is executed, whether or not the icon is displayed, the type of background image, the type of BGM, etc.). The jackpot performance after the first variation performance in the game state and the jackpot performance after the second variation performance in the specific game state can be performed in a common mode (background image, BGM, round performance image, etc.). Therefore, since the player does not have to be conscious of whether the first variation performance is the trigger or the second variation performance is the trigger during the big win performance, the player can enjoy the big win performance without bringing in extra thoughts, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

149 and 150, when a right-handed ball is hit during a normal game state, a right-handed error notification (display of a right-handed error image HUE suggesting left-handed hitting, and output of a left-handed error sound indicating "Please hit left") is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that hitting to the right during the normal game state is disadvantageous to the player, and to inform the player of hitting to the right so as not to cause a loss to the player due to the start of the jackpot game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

149 and 150, when a jackpot game is started during the execution of the right-handed error notification, the display of the right-handed error image HUE is ended, but the left-handed error sound "Please hit left" is continued. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game without extremely obstructing the notification of hitting to the right.

149 and 150, when a jackpot game is started during execution of the right-handed error notification which is executed for a predetermined period, the output of the left-handed error sound "Please hit left" continues, but it is finished in a shorter time than usual (before the predetermined period elapses). Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game without extremely obstructing the notification of hitting to the right.

In addition, in the normal game state, when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed and when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the effect can be executed in different aspects (whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed, whether or not various advance notice effects are executed, whether or not there is a specific ready-to-win effect, whether or not the icon is displayed, the type of background image, the type of BGM, etc.). The jackpot effect after the second variation effect may be executed in a common mode (background image, BGM, round effect image, etc.). In this way, since the player does not have to be conscious of whether the first variation performance is the trigger or the second variation performance is the trigger during the big win performance, the player can enjoy the big win performance without bringing in extra thoughts, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Production example when the variable mission production is executed during the jackpot)
With reference to FIG. 151, an example of an effect when a variable probability mission effect is executed to determine whether the variable probability game state is entered during the jackpot (round game) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 151(a), when the opening performance of the jackpot game is started, a strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) is started in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the performance button 17, and the performance button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. After that, when one second elapses, the strong vibration performance ends, the opening performance of the jackpot game ends, and the first round game starts.

Thereafter, when the interval period after the first round game is over and the second round game is started, as shown in FIG.

Then, when the interval period after the second round game ends and the third round game is started, as shown in FIG. Specifically, the characters "destroy" are displayed, an opaque performance button image simulating the performance button 17 and an operation prompting image SG composed of a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period are displayed, the display effect sound of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the performance button 17 emits white light. At this time, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) continues.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, a mission success effect is started as shown in FIG. 151(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state of emitting rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the success effect sound is output. In addition, a strong vibration effect (elevated vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds, and part or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs emit rainbow light.

After that, when the mission success performance ends, the character "destroy" indicating that the mission is successful is displayed as shown in FIG. 151(e), the rainbow light emission of the performance button 17 is terminated, and the multiple game board decoration LEDs resume the performance light emission, and when the third round game is completed, the character "destroy" is erased and the round performance is restarted.

Then, when the ninth round game is started, as shown in FIG. 151(f), the effective period of the effect button 17 and the cross key 18 (here, at least 11 seconds from the start of the ninth round game until 5 seconds have passed since the start of the tenth round game) occurs, and the mode selection effect for selecting the effect mode during the variable probability game state is started. Specifically, a choice image of a performance mode D and a choice image of a performance mode E are displayed, and an opaque performance button image simulating a performance button 17 that emits white light is displayed as an operation prompting image, ``Please select a mode during probability change with a cross key and decide with a button!''.

Thereafter, when the right button of the cross key 18 is operated, as shown in FIG. 151(g), the state in which the option image of the effect mode D is selected (the state in which the option image in the effect mode E is displayed in a dark color) is changed to the state in which the option image in the effect mode E is selected (the state in which the option image in the effect mode D is displayed in a dark color).

Then, when the performance button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, the option image of the performance mode E is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. After that, when the 10th round game ends, the ending effect is executed, and when the ending effect ends, the variable probability game state is started.

Further, when the game ball enters the first starting port 45, left-handed error notification based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 45 during the jackpot game is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed error image HUE suggesting that a game ball is shot toward the right side area of the game area 5a is displayed at a position near the center of the screen in a size larger than the right-handed image MU, and a left-handed error sound of ``Please hit right'' is output from the voice output device 9. - 特許庁

When the mission failure effect is executed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, and the failure effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the failure effect sound is output. Furthermore, the mode selection effect is not executed, and the ending effect is entered.

Thus, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 151, the operation period (5 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the mission success effect and the execution period (5 seconds) of the vibration effect (elevation vibration effect) executed during the mission success effect are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the mission success production. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that the vibration effect is advantageous to the player, that is, that a variable probability state will occur, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 151, since the vibration production (elevation vibration production) executed at the time of the mission success production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17, the display effect sound when displaying the operation prompting image (opaque production button image, gauge image) and the production sound (success sound effect) when the production button 17 is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the decided success production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 151, the execution period of the vibration production (elevation vibration production) executed at the time of the mission success production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 151, even if the effect button 17 or the cross key 18 is operated during the mode selection effect, the vibration effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player misunderstand that the selected performance mode is higher in the degree of expectation for big win than the non-selected performance mode, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised, and to avoid the inconvenience of giving the player an unpleasant feeling.

151, it is possible to execute right-handed hitting notification (display of right-handed hitting image MU) suggesting right-handed hitting during the jackpot game, but when the game ball is hit left-handed during the jackpot game and the game ball wins the first start hole 45, right-handed hitting notification (right-handed hitting image MU display) is continued and left-handed hitting error notification (left-handed hitting error image HUE indicating right-handing hitting, output of left-handed hitting error sound “please hit right”) is predetermined. It is designed to run for a period of time (eg 4 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by urging the player who has hit the ball to the left despite the notification of the ball to the right to hit the ball to the right, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 151, the right hitting image MU displayed during the jackpot game and the left hitting error image HUE (right hitting notification image) are displayed so as not to overlap each other. As a result, the player can be urged to hit the ball to the right, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The plurality of game board decoration LEDs are arranged to continue the effect light emission during the occurrence of the valid period related to the variable probability mission effect, but the plurality of board decoration LEDs may be made to emit rainbow light when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective time elapses by extinguishing a part or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs immediately before the effect period occurs or during the period from the start of generation until the effect button 17 is operated or the effective time elapses. In this way, the operation prompting image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 can be made conspicuous, and the player can be informed of the tense scene, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 emit rainbow light during the mission success effect, but while the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 emit rainbow light, part or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be turned off, or while the first movable member 73 emits rainbow light, part or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be turned off.

Also, when the mission success effect is executed, the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 is started at the same time. may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

Further, the vibration performance executed at the time of the mission success performance may be executed until the same timing (for example, 3 seconds after the timing when the performance button 17 is not operated and the effective period passes) regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (the execution period of the vibration performance is variable).

Moreover, although the vibration presentation is executed at the time of the mission success presentation, the vibration presentation may not be performed at the time of the mission success presentation.

Further, the right-handed image MU and the left-handed error image (right-handed notification image) are not dynamically displayed, but may be dynamically displayed such that they oscillate left and right at a predetermined cycle, for example. In this case, it is preferable not to synchronize the periods of dynamic display of the right-hand shot image MU and the left-hand shot error image (right-hand shot notification image).

(Example of opening effect and ending effect of jackpot game for each game state)
Using FIG. 152, an example of the opening effect and the ending effect of the jackpot game for each game state will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 152(a), in the production mode A (normal game state), the variable display (first variable production) of the first special symbol is executed, and in the first image display device 70, the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the first reservation icon (white icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of the first reservation icon display area 70B, and the icon (white icon) TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, when the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are finally stopped at the big win "444" and the stop time elapses, as shown in FIG.

After that, when the first half of the opening performance is finished and the second half of the performance is started, as shown in FIG. Specifically, an image simulating the upper part of the game board surface (game area 5a) is displayed, an arrow suggesting hitting to the right is displayed, and a text image saying "Aim right" is displayed.

Then, when the round game of the jackpot game (so-called first win) from the normal game state is completed and the ending effect is started, as shown in FIG. More specifically, a first warning image KG1 containing the words "Please be careful not to forget to take out the card" to warn the player against forgetting to remove the card (storage medium) inserted in the game medium lending machine attached to the game machine 1, and a second warning image KG2 containing the words "Please be careful not to become addicted to the game" to warn the player against excessive immersion in the game are displayed.

After that, when the ending performance is finished and the jackpot game is finished, the game is controlled to the normal time-saving game state to enter the performance mode F, and in the first image display device 70, the icon display region 70C and the second reserved icon display region 70D are set without setting the first reserved icon display region 70B, but the variable display (variable performance) of the special pattern is newly started while the display of the right-handed image MU is continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 152(e), in the production mode G (normal time-saving game state), when the variable display (variation production) of the second special symbol with the remaining time-saving number of times (J2) being the 49th is started, the first image display device 70 scrolls the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ (downward movement).

After that, when the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are finally stopped at the big winning number ``444'' and the stop time elapses, as shown in FIG.

After that, when the first half of the opening performance is finished and the second half of the performance is started, as shown in FIG. Specifically, an image simulating the upper part of the game board surface (game area 5a) is displayed, an arrow suggesting hitting to the right is displayed, and a text image saying "Aim right" is displayed.

Then, when the round game of the jackpot game (so-called consecutive win) from the normal time-saving game state is completed and the ending effect is started, as shown in FIG.

After that, when the ending performance is finished and the jackpot game is finished, the game is controlled to the normal time-saving game state to enter the performance mode F, and in the first image display device 70, the icon display region 70C and the second reserved icon display region 70D are set without setting the first reserved icon display region 70B, but the variable display (variable performance) of the special pattern is newly started while the display of the right-handed image MU is continued.

(Example of opening production and ending production of jackpot game during special time-saving game state)
Using FIG. 153, an example of the effect of the opening effect and the ending effect of the jackpot game during the special time-saving game state will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 153 (a), in the production mode H (special time-saving game state), the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable production) is executed, and the first image display device 70 scrolls (moves downward) the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, "1" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and four second reservation icons (white icons) are displayed in the second reservation icon display area 70B, and the icons (white icons) are displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, when the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are finally stopped at the big hit "444" and the stop time elapses, as shown in FIG.

After that, when the first half of the opening effect is completed and the second half of the effect is started, as shown in FIG. 153(c), a right-handed large image MUD is displayed, and a right-handed voice saying "Aim right" is output to execute the second right-handed notification. Specifically, an image simulating the upper part of the game board surface (game area 5a) is displayed, an arrow suggesting hitting to the right is displayed, and a text image saying "Aim right" is displayed.

Then, when the round game of the jackpot game (so-called first hit) from the special time-saving game state is completed and the ending effect is started, as shown in FIG. More specifically, a first warning image KG1 containing the words "Please be careful not to forget to take out the card" to warn the player against forgetting to remove the card (storage medium) inserted in the game medium lending machine attached to the game machine 1, and a second warning image KG2 containing the words "Please be careful not to become addicted to the game" to warn the player against excessive immersion in the game are displayed.

At this time, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, left-handed error notification based on the game ball winning in the first starting port 45 in the specific game state is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed error image HUE suggesting that a game ball is shot toward the right side area of the game area 5a is displayed at a position near the center of the screen in a size larger than the right-handed image MU, and a left-handed error sound of ``Please hit right'' is output from the voice output device 9. - 特許庁

On the other hand, when it is preliminarily determined that there is a jackpot game to be executed in the second reservation memory, and the execution condition of the look-ahead suspension continuous performance for notifying the fact is established, the look-ahead suspension continuous performance is executed as shown in FIG. 153(e). Concretely, in parallel with the alerting notification, the renso character RC is displayed on the first image display device 70, and it is notified that there is one in the second reservation memory for which the jackpot game is to be executed.

Thus, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, when a jackpot game (so-called first hit) is executed during the normal game state, it is possible to execute specific notification (attention notification) related to the game in connection with the end of the jackpot game, and when a jackpot game (so-called consecutive win) is executed during the normal time-saving game state, execution of specific notification (attention notification) related to the game in connection with the end of the jackpot game. is restricted (not executed), and when a big win game (so-called first win) is executed during a special time-saving game state executed without going through the big win game, it is possible to execute specific notification (notice calling) related to the game in relation to the end of the big win game. As a result, it is possible to execute a game-related alerting notification to the player to a necessary and sufficient degree, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 152 to 153, it is possible to execute a variable probability mission production (a variable probability promotion production in which a movable member operates according to the operation of the production button 17 during the valid period while generating an effective period) of whether or not to enter the variable probability gaming state during the jackpot game. However, the execution of the variable probability mission production (variable probability promotion production) is limited (not executed) during the execution of the alert notification. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the attention of the player and improve the interest of the game.

152 and 153, it is possible to execute the alerting notification related to the game in relation to the end of the jackpot game, but it is possible to execute the look-ahead suspension continuous rendering for informing (suggesting) that the pending memory includes the jackpot even during the execution of the alerting notification. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player calm and have a sense of anticipation by alerting the player, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

152 and 153, it is possible to execute the alerting notification related to the game in relation to the end of the jackpot game, but even during the execution of the alerting notification, if the player hits to the left which is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to execute the error notification to the left suggesting the hitting to the right. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering unnecessary losses, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when a jackpot game is executed during a normal game state or a special time-saving game state, the attention-calling notification is executed, but when a jackpot game capable of winning a prescribed amount (for example, 300 balls) or more is executed, the attention-calling notification may be executed, and when a jackpot game in which the prize ball of the prescribed amount or more is not executed, the attention-calling notification may not be executed.

(Example of production when special time-saving gaming state occurs)
With reference to FIG. 154, an example of production when a special time-saving gaming state occurs will be described.

Here, it is assumed that the activation counter indicating the generation time of the special time-saving game state is performed from the point of time when the number of times of the loss variation display of the special symbol executed from the establishment of the predetermined condition (executing RWM clearing, 0 clearing of the number of times of variation based on the end of the jackpot game) reaches 800 times (the remaining number of times of variation until the occurrence of the special time-saving game state is 100 times). Specifically, the notification logo LG including characters of "help time", which means a special time-saving gaming state, and a character image of "remaining ○○" indicating the number of remaining fluctuations are displayed.

In addition, it is assumed that a countdown effect suggesting that the special time-saving game state will occur from the time when the number of remaining fluctuations until the occurrence of the special time-saving game state reaches three times is performed. Specifically, a character image indicating the remaining number of times is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) each time the variable effect is started.

As shown in FIG. 154 (a), when the variable display of the first special symbol that the number of remaining variations until the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state is 1 (first variable effect) is started, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, the number of the first pending number display area 70E is reduced from "3" to "2", and the three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C. One of them is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, a character image of "1" is displayed as a countdown effect.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special pattern has passed and the special pattern is stopped and displayed as a lost special pattern, as shown in FIG.

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol with the number of remaining variations until the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state is 1 (first variable performance) is started, as shown in FIG. , and one of them is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, a character image of "0" is displayed as a countdown effect.

Next, when the variation time of the first special symbol passes and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed as a lost special symbol, as shown in FIG.

When the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44 at this timing, the right hitting error notification based on the fact that the right hitting is performed in the normal game state is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a right-handed error image MUE suggesting that the game ball is shot toward the left side area of the game area 5a is displayed at a position near the center of the screen, and a right-handed error sound of ``Please hit left'' is output from the voice output device 9. - 特許庁

After that, when a special time-saving game state occurs and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. At this time, the right hitting error image MUE is erased by the start of the right hitting notification, but the output of the right hitting error sound continues, and the output ends when a period shorter than the normal output period elapses.

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 154 (f), a character image of "help time rush" suggesting entering a special time-saving game state is displayed, and a rush effect (long rush effect or short rush effect) is executed. In addition, a right-hand shot image MU2 suggesting right-hand shot is displayed, and a right-hand shot is announced by outputting a voice saying "right shot."

Further, when the execution time of the rush effect has passed, the character image of "help time rush" is erased, and the background image of the effect mode H becomes visible. In addition, a band image of "help time" is displayed on the upper left of the screen, and a remaining number of times of reduction of time KG indicating the remaining number of times of the second number of times of reduction of time (J2) is displayed on the lower left of the screen as "799 remaining times".

Next, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has passed and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG.

After that, when the game ball wins in the first starting hole 45, left-handed error notification based on left-handed hitting in the specific game state is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed error image HUE suggesting that the game ball is shot toward the right side of the game area 5a is displayed at a position near the center of the screen, and a right-handed error sound of ``please hit right'' is output from the voice output device 9. - 特許庁

Instead of performing left-handed error notification when one game ball enters the first start port 45 in a specific game state, left-handed error notification may be performed when a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls enter the first start port 45.例文帳に追加In addition, the left-handed error notification may be ended at the timing when the game ball wins the second starting hole 47, and in this case, the left-handed error image HUE may be deleted before the left-handed error sound, or the left-handed error sound may be deleted before the left-handed error image HUE.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, the activation counter display is started when the number of fluctuations remaining until the special time-saving gaming state occurs reaches a predetermined number (here, 100 times). Therefore, the player can grasp the number of times of variable display (variable performance) of the special symbols until the transition to the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 154, the character image indicating the number of remaining fluctuations as the activation counter display is made up of numbers only and does not include unit display such as times or times. Therefore, the possibility that the player will find out what the numbers mean is increased, and by increasing the opportunity to see the model information, the degree of understanding of the game machine can be deepened, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the performance example shown in FIG. 154, the character image indicating the number of remaining fluctuations as the activation counter display is updated not at the start of the variable performance at which the big win notice performance and the look-ahead performance are likely to be executed (started), but at the stop display of the performance pattern in which the big hit notice performance and the look-ahead performance are less likely to be executed (started) than at the time of the fluctuation start. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the subtraction of the activation counter, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, a countdown production suggesting a transition to the special time-saving gaming state from the special symbol fluctuation display (variation production) a predetermined number of times (here, three times) before shifting to the special time-saving gaming state is executed. Therefore, the timing of occurrence of the special time-saving game state can be clearly grasped, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the special time-saving game state can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, it is possible to execute a rush production (long rush production or short rush production) when shifting to a special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to accurately recognize that the special time-saving game state has been entered, and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, the right-handed notification is performed along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, even a player who does not have knowledge about the special time-saving game state can understand that he will hit to the right, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, the rush production of the special time-saving game state is executed in a different production mode from the case of shifting to the normal time-saving game state. Therefore, the player can be notified of the occurrence of the time-saving game state different from the normal time-saving game state, and the occurrence of the special time-saving game state can be notified to the player in a novel manner, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, when the player hits right during the normal game state, a right-handed error notification (display of a right-handed error image MUE suggesting left-handed hitting, and output of a left-handed error sound saying "Please hit left") is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that hitting to the right in the normal game state is disadvantageous to the player, and to inform the player of hitting to the right so as not to cause a loss to the player due to the start of the special time-saving game state, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, when the special time-saving game state is started during the execution of the right-handed error notification, the display of the right-handed error image MUE is ended, but the left-handed error sound "please hit left" continues. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game without extremely obstructing the notification of hitting to the right.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 154, the number of images suggesting hitting to the right (throwing to the right image MU, hitting to the right image MU2) is greater than the number of images suggesting hitting to the left (throwing to the right error image MUE). Therefore, the player can be made to hit the ball to the right appropriately, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 154, when the special time-saving game state is started during execution of the right hitting error notification, the right hitting image MU2 is displayed after the right hitting error image MUE ends. Therefore, the player can be made to hit the ball to the right appropriately, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, it is possible to execute right-handed notification (display of right-handed image MU) that suggests right-handed during the special time-saving gaming state, but when the game ball is hit to the left during the special time-saving gaming state and the game ball wins in the first start hole 45, left-handed error notification (left-handed error image HUE indicating right-handed) is displayed while right-handed notification (right-handed image MU is displayed). output) is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by urging the player who has hit the ball to the left despite the notification of the ball to the right to hit the ball to the right, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, the right-handed shot image MU displayed during the special time-saving game state and the left-handed shot error image HUE (right-handed notification image) are displayed so as not to overlap. As a result, the player can be urged to hit the ball to the right, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the special time-saving game state is generated in the same performance mode regardless of the presence or absence of the big win history, but when the special time-saving game state is generated in the state with the big win history, the performance mode may be shifted to the countdown mode from a predetermined period before the special time-saving game state is generated (for example, when the variable display is executed 800 times after the establishment of the predetermined condition). By doing so, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As for the countdown mode, while it is possible to shift in the normal game state before the special time-saving game state occurs between the big win games, it is preferable not to shift in the normal game state after the special time-saving game state occurs. If it does in this way, it can be grasped|ascertained before generation|occurence|production or after generation|occurrence|production of a special time-saving game state by whether countdown mode generate|occur|produces, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.

Further, when the countdown mode can be generated, the change rate of the performance mode can be made different between the normal game state before the special time-saving game state occurs and the normal game state after the special time-saving game state occurs (making it easier for the change of the performance mode to occur in the normal game state before the special time-saving game state occurs), and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Example of production when a special time-saving game state that occurred without a jackpot history ends)
With reference to FIG. 155, an example of the production when the special time-saving gaming state generated in the absence of the jackpot history is terminated will be described.

Here, it is assumed that the variable display of the second special pattern is performed such that the remaining second number of times of time saving (J2) in the special time saving game state is '1', and the remaining number of times of time saving KG displayed on the lower left of the screen is displayed as 'one remaining time'.

After that, when the change time of the second special symbol passes and the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 155(a), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed with the losing result "416", and the icon disappears and is displayed.

Then, when the variable display (second variable effect) of the second special symbol that ends the special time-saving gaming state is started, as shown in FIG. is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, a character image of ``LAST'' is displayed as a countdown performance started from the second variable performance 5 times before the end of the special time-saving game state, and the remaining time-saving number image KG becomes ``remaining 0 times''.

Next, when the change time of the second special symbol has passed and the special symbol that is lost is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG.

When the game ball wins in the first starting port 45 at this timing, left-handed error notification based on left-handed hitting in the specific game state is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed error image HUE suggesting that the game ball is shot toward the right area of the game area 5a is displayed at a position near the center of the screen, and a left-handed error sound of ``please hit right'' is output from the voice output device 9. - 特許庁

After that, when the special time-saving game state ends, as shown in FIG. 155(d), the display of the right-handed image MU ends and the left-handed notification (display of the left-handed image HU and output of the sound of "Please hit left") is started. Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, the effect image corresponding to the effect mode H (the background image, the effect symbol 70a, the icon display area 70C, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second reserved icon, etc.) is displayed, and the shielding image SY for shielding the effect image is displayed. At this time, the left-handed error image HUE is erased due to the start of the left-handed notification, but the output of the left-handed error sound continues, and the output ends after a period shorter than the normal output period.

Then, after a predetermined time has passed, as shown in FIG. 155(e), the shielding image SY is completely retracted to the left side of the screen, the effect image corresponding to the effect mode A (background image, effect pattern 70a, first reserved icon display area 70B, first reserved icon, etc.) becomes completely visible, the reduced display (preparatory action) of the effect pattern 70a becomes visible, and the notification logo LG including the characters “help time”, which means a special time-saving game state, and the remaining variation. A character image of "remaining ???" indicating that the number of times is unknown becomes visible.

After that, when the reduction display (preparation operation) of the effect pattern 70a is completed, the scroll display of the effect pattern 70a is started as shown in FIG. 155(f). Further, when a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses, the left-hand hitting notification ends.

It should be noted that the normal game state before the special time-saving game state and the normal game state after the special time-saving game state are different (remaining fluctuation number "○○" and remaining fluctuation number "???") can be executed, but the change ratio of the production mode according to the progress of the game is the same.

In this way, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, a countdown production suggesting a transition to the normal game state from the variable display (variation production) of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (here, five times) before the end of the special time-saving game state is executed. Therefore, the end time of the special time-saving game state can be clearly grasped, and the player's frustration for the end of the special time-saving game state can be aroused, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, when left-handed during a special time-saving game state, left-handed error notification (display of left-handed error image HUE suggesting right-handed, output of left-handed error sound of "please hit right") is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds), but when the normal game state is started during execution of left-handed error notification, left-handed error notification is performed while left-handed error notification is continued. Therefore, while the player recognizes that the left-handed hit in the special time-saving game state is disadvantageous to the player, the left-handed hit can be notified so as not to give the player a loss due to the start of the normal game state, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 155, when the normal game state is started during the execution of the left-handed error notification, the display of the left-handed error image HUE is ended, but the right-handed error sound "Please hit right" is continued. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without extremely hindering the information of hitting to the left.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 155, when the normal game state is started during execution of the left-handed error notification, the display of the left-handed shot image HU is finished after the display of the left-handed shot error image HUE is finished. Therefore, the player can be made to hit left-handed properly, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, when the special time-saving game state ends and shifts to the normal game state, the notification logo LG including the characters “help time” that means the special time-saving game state and the character image “Remaining ???” indicating that the number of remaining fluctuations is unknown becomes visible, suggesting that the special time-saving game state has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to suggest useful information to the player, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, when the special time-saving gaming state that occurred in the absence of a jackpot history ends, the end notification production (display of a character image of “help time end” described later) is not executed, and when the game shifts to the normal game state, the production (display of the background image of production mode A, etc.) that suggests the normal gaming state is executed. Therefore, the special time-saving game state can be enjoyed to the end, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Example of production when a special time-saving game state that occurred with a jackpot history ends)
With reference to FIG. 156, an example of the effect when the special time-saving game state generated in the absence of the jackpot history is terminated will be described.

Here, it is assumed that the variable display of the second special pattern is performed such that the remaining second number of times of time saving (J2) in the special time saving game state is '1', and the remaining number of times of time saving KG displayed on the lower left of the screen is displayed as 'one remaining time'.

After that, when the change time of the second special symbol passes and the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG.

Then, when the variable display (second variable performance) of the second special symbol that ends the special time-saving gaming state is started, as shown in FIG. is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, a character image of ``LAST'' is displayed as a countdown performance started from the second variable performance 5 times before the end of the special time-saving game state, and the remaining time-saving number image KG becomes ``remaining 0 times''. In addition, an end notification effect for notifying that the special time-saving gaming state is terminated is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed to close the door image TB that shields the background image, the effect pattern 70a, etc., and a text image of "help time is over" is displayed in front of the door image TB.

Next, when the change time of the second special symbol passes and the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG.

After that, when the special time-saving game state ends, as shown in FIG. 156(d), the display of the hitting to the right image MU ends while the end notification effect continues, and the hitting to the left notification (display of the hitting to the left image HU) is started. Further, when the variable display of the second special pattern is started, the second special symbol reservation number display area is changed from ``3'' to ``2'', and the variable performance is started in which only the variable display of the special pattern TZ is performed while the door image TB is closed.

Then, when the change time of the second special symbol passes and the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. After that, a variable performance is executed in which only the variable display of the special symbol TZ is performed while the end notification performance is continued until the second suspension disappears.

Next, when the change time of the second special pattern based on the last second hold has passed and the stop display is made with the losing special pattern, as shown in FIG.

After that, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 156(g), the door image TB opens and the end notification effect is finished, and the effect image (background image, effect pattern image, etc.) corresponding to the effect mode A becomes visible. In addition, reduced display (preparation operation) of the performance pattern 70a is started, and variable display of the special pattern TZ is started, two reserved icons displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon.

In addition, when there is a jackpot among the remaining second reservations when the special time-saving game state is terminated, the revival performance is executed during the continuation of the end notification performance to inform that the jackpot will be won.

In this way, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, when the special time-saving game state that occurred in the absence of a big hit history ends, and when the special time-saving game state that occurred in the presence of a big win history ends, the production mode (start timing, end timing of end notification effect, content of end notification effect, etc.) when the special time-saving game state ends is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect when the special time-saving game state ends depending on the presence or absence of the history of big wins, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the presence or absence of a big hit history (whether or not RWM is cleared) can be inferred from the performance mode when the special time-saving game state ends, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 156, when the special time-saving game state ends while continuing the end notification production, the variation production (variation display of the special symbol TZ) corresponding to the remaining second suspension is executed inconspicuously. Therefore, when the end notification performance is finished, the variable display of the first special pattern (first variable performance) is started, and the game can be played with a new feeling, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the performance example shown in FIG. 156, when there is a jackpot in the remaining second holding when the special time-saving game state is terminated, it is notified that the big win will be achieved as a resurrection performance while the end notification performance continues. Therefore, it is possible to make it look as if a jackpot has been won during the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

When the special time-saving game state ends, the left-handed hitting notification (left-handed hitting image HU) is immediately started regardless of the presence or absence of the second reservation, but instead of immediately starting the left-handed hitting notification regardless of the presence or absence of the second reservation, when the special time-saving game state ends, if there is no second reservation, the left-handed hitting information is started immediately, and if there is the second reservation, the left-handed hitting information may be started after the variable performance corresponding to the second reservation is completed.

(Example of effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect)
157 and 158, a description will be given of an effect example when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 157(a), when the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B, it is assumed that the losing effect pattern 70a of "728" is stopped and displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. 157(b), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (white icon) displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

Here, the icon change performance is started by changing the display mode of the icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C to a red icon, and the lamp change performance is started by changing the winning hole lamp NR from the extinguished state to the red flashing state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 157(c), the production pattern 70a of "3" is stop-displayed (temporary stop display) in the left and right fluctuation display areas of the production pattern 70a which has been variably displayed, and the ready-to-win production (normal reach) is executed in which the production pattern 70a is variably displayed in the central fluctuation display area.

Then, when it develops into SP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 157(d), the SP ready-to-win effect is started, the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D are erased together with the pending icon.

After that, when it develops into SPSP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 157(e), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, and the icon display area 70C displaying the icon is erased together with the icon. At this time, the prize-winning lamp NR is not turned off as the icon is erased, and the lamp change effect of the prize-winning lamp NR continues.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device becomes non-display and the prize winning opening lamp NR is extinguished as shown in FIG. 157(f).

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 158(g), the image display device displays the initial screen including the characters "reading", but the winning hole lamp NR remains turned off.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. 158(h), the image display device displays a return screen including the characters "Please restart the game" during the execution period of the SPSP reach effect (including the execution period of the re-lottery effect for whether or not the temporarily stopped jackpot effect pattern is promoted to a higher value jackpot effect pattern for the player). remains off.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win production that becomes a failure ends (the production control board 130 receives a special symbol stop designation command indicating a failure), as shown in FIG. To end a variable performance without restarting the performance.

At this time, the same white icon as before the power supply is stopped is displayed in the first display part 70B1 of the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but the rectangular area image is displayed, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which the effect image such as the background image can be displayed.

After that, when the next variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 158(j), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (white icon) displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win production that becomes a big hit ends (the production control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a big win), as shown in FIG. A combination of performance patterns different from the ready-to-win combination by the performance patterns of ) and a stop screen in which the special pattern TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed) are displayed, and the variable performance is completed without resuming the lamp change performance at the winning opening lamp NR.

In addition to the variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, other variable performances (variation performance in which the normal variation is performed, variation performance in which the shortened variation is performed, variation performance in which the normal reach performance is performed, and variable performance in which the SP reach performance is performed) are also performed. A combination of the same performance pattern or a combination of different performance patterns as the ready-to-win combination of the performance patterns forming the ready-to-win state is stop-displayed (statically displayed).

As for the special pattern TZ, regardless of whether the control state of the game is initialized or restored, whether the subsequent state is the normal game state or the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state), the special pattern TZ is stopped and displayed (statically displayed) with the same display mode (shape, design) and the same combination as the performance pattern 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 158(l), an opening effect including information indicating the type of the jackpot game (“MAX jackpot” indicating that it is the first jackpot game) is started on the image display device, and the first reserved icon display area 70B, the second reserved icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

While the winning opening lamp NR remains extinguished during the display of the initial screen and/or the returning screen, the winning opening lamp NR may be lit in a lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change performance (does not suggest the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot).

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 157 to 158, after the production design 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking fluctuation), the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable production that is stopped and displayed is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, After the special design fluctuation time has passed and the special design stop designation command (in the case of shifting to the customer waiting state after that, the special design stop designation command) is received, the temporary performance design 70a. The effect pattern 70a is stopped (stationary display) without being stopped (shaking fluctuation/swinging display). Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, when the production pattern 70a is stop-displayed (statically displayed) after the power supply stopped during the execution of the loss variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the combination of the production patterns, which are the initial patterns at the time of power restoration, is stop-displayed (statically displayed) instead of the normal loss production pattern. Therefore, it is possible to dispense with complicated processing such as determining a performance pattern to be stop-displayed (statically displayed) by lottery, and to comprehend that the power supply restores the control state of the game and that the variable performance executed when the power supply is stopped is completed.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, after the power supply stopped during the execution of the big hit variation production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the production patterns are stopped and displayed (still displayed), the combinations of the big hit production patterns are stopped and displayed (still displayed). Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the control state of the game is the restoration of the power supply, and that the variation performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped was the jackpot variation performance.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, when the combination of the jackpot production patterns is stopped (statically displayed) after the game control state is restored, the ready-to-win state is formed before the power supply is stopped. Therefore, there is no need to be conscious of the jackpot performance symbols that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed before the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

Further, according to the performance examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, when the execution period of the promotion performance described above is included in the variable performance executed when the power supply is stopped, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the promotion performance is not executed and the jackpot performance pattern is stopped (still displayed). Therefore, no useless performance is performed until the performance pattern is stopped (still displayed), so that the player can immediately grasp that the variable performance being executed when the power supply is stopped was the big hit variable performance.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the display mode (type of display screen, display order of the display screens) of the image display device after resuming the power supply is the same in the case where the power supply stopped during execution of the losing variation production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and the case where the power supply stopped during execution of the big hit fluctuation production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, it is possible to perform simple display control without paying attention to whether the losing variation performance is being executed or the big win variation performance is being executed, and the processing load related to the display control after restarting the power supply can be reduced.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 157 to 158, the special symbol TZ is displayed in the same display mode as before the power supply is stopped after the power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored, and is stop-displayed (statically displayed) with a number that is the same combination as the effect symbol 70a. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped has ended.

157 and 158, when the power supply stopped during the display of the icon is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, a square area image is displayed in the icon display area 70C until the next variable effect (scrolling of the effect pattern 70a) is started after the display of the returning screen is finished, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which effect images such as a background image can be displayed, but the icon is not displayed. . Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

157 and 158, when the control state of the game is restored by resuming the power supply that was stopped during the display of the pending icon, a square area image is displayed in the pending icon display area until the next variable effect is started, so that the pending icon is displayed in a state where the effect image such as the background image can be displayed, and the pending icon is displayed. Therefore, even when the power supply is stopped, it is possible to grasp that the suspended variable performance is not extinguished, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

157 and 158, when the control state of the game is restored by restarting the stopped power supply during the variation effect corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change effect (storage of the special figure determination information that changes the lighting color (blue, red, rainbow) of the prize winning entrance lamp NR to the lighting color (blue, red, rainbow) with high expectation of winning the jackpot), the lamp change effect is not restarted, and the winning entrance lamp NR is set to the notification mode (lights out or white) that does not suggest the expectation of winning the big win. It's like Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the ramp change effect is restarted even though the change effect is not executed.

After the end of the execution period of the big hit variation performance, the stop screen in which the big win performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed is displayed.

Also, after the execution period of the big win variable performance is over, the stop screen in which the big win performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stop-displayed is displayed, but the stop screen may not be displayed and the opening performance of the big win game in which the big win performance pattern 70a is not displayed may be started. In addition, information indicating the type of the jackpot game may be displayed in the opening performance, the jackpot special pattern TZ of '777' may be displayed, or the special pattern TZ of '753' which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration may be displayed.

In addition, after the execution period of the losing variation performance ends, the performance pattern 70a, which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are displayed, and after the execution period of the big win variation performance ends, the opening performance of the big win game may be started without displaying the stop screen in which the big win performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stop-displayed.

In addition, when it is made possible to execute a specific performance that arouses whether or not a big win game is executed without displaying the ready-to-win performance pattern 70a in the variable performance (makes people expect that the big win game will be executed), after the power supply stopped during the execution of the specific performance is resumed and the control state is restored, the performance pattern 70a, which is the initial pattern at the time of power recovery, is stopped (statically displayed) if it is a loss, and the big winning performance pattern 70a is stopped (statically displayed) if it is a big win. can be

In addition, when the combination of the big winning performance symbols is displayed (still displayed) after the control state of the game is restored, one of the combinations of a plurality of big winning performance symbols corresponding to the kind of the big winning game to be executed thereafter may be stopped and displayed.

In this case, for example, the combination of jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the first jackpot game is ``333'' and ``777'', the combination of jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the second jackpot game is ``222'', ``444'', ``666'' and ``888'', and the combination of jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the third jackpot game is ``111'', ``555'' and ``999''. .

Then, when the ready-to-win combination before stopping the power supply is ``1↓1'' constituting a part of the combination of the big-win performance symbols suggesting the execution of the third big winning game, when the big-winning game to be executed after that is the first big winning game, one of ``333'' and ``777'' (a combination of big winning performance symbols different from the ready-to-win combination by the performance symbols forming the ready-to-win state) is stopped and displayed, and the big winning game to be executed after that is the third big winning. In the case of a game, any one of ``111'', ``555'' and ``999'' (combination of jackpot performance symbols which are the same as or different from the ready-to-win combinations of performance symbols forming the ready-to-win state) should be stopped and displayed.

In addition, the special pattern TZ may be stop-displayed (statically displayed) with a number different from the performance pattern 70a after the power supply is restarted and the control state is restored, instead of being stop-displayed (statically-displayed) with the same combination of numbers as the performance pattern 70a.

In addition, when the normal game state and customer waiting state are after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed (static display). You may make it

(An example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect)
FIG. 159 and FIG. 160 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 159 (a), when the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1, the second display portion 70B2, and the third display portion 70B3 of the first pending icon display area 70B, it is assumed that the losing effect symbol 70a of “728” is stopped and displayed.

After that, when the variable effect that is the preliminary change is started, as shown in FIG. 159B, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (white icon) displayed in the first display portion 70B1, the second display portion 70B2, and the third display portion 70B3 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, the first display portion 70B1, and the second display portion 70B2, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the performance pattern 70a for starting the variable display to start the first performance of the look-ahead effect performance, and the display mode of the first pending icon (icon final display mode=red icon) shift-displayed on the second display part 70B2 is changed to a blue icon to start the pending icon change performance, and accordingly, the lamp change performance is started by changing the winning hole lamp NR from the extinguished state to the blue flashing state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 159(c), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 159(d), after the performance symbol 70a indicating the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the failure performance symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stop-displayed.

After that, when the variable effect that is the preliminary change is started, as shown in FIG. 159(e), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the performance pattern 70a for starting the variable display, so that the second performance of the look-ahead effect performance is started, and the pending icon change performance and the lamp change performance are continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 159(f), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device becomes non-display and the prize winning opening lamp NR is extinguished as shown in FIG. 159(g).

After that, when the power supply to the game machine 1 is restarted, as shown in FIG. 159(h), the image display device displays an initial screen including characters of "reading", but the winning entrance lamp NR is kept turned off without restarting the lamp change performance.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. 160 (i), the image display device displays a screen during recovery including the characters "Please restart the game" over the execution period of the advance variation, but the winning hole lamp NR is kept turned off.

After that, when the execution period of the preliminary variation ends (the performance control board 130 receives a special symbol stop designation command indicating a failure), as shown in FIG.

At this time, a white icon, which is not the blue icon before the power supply is stopped, is displayed in the first display part 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but a rectangular area image is displayed, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed.

After that, when the variable performance for executing the SPSP ready-to-win performance is started, as shown in FIG. 160(k), the variable display of the performance pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (white icon) displayed in the first display part 70B1 is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 160(l), the words uttered by the ally A are displayed in the words window displayed on the image display device, and the voice corresponding to the words ``Chance is coming!''

Then, as shown in FIG. 160(m), a ready-to-win performance (normal reach) is executed to variably display the performance pattern 70a in the center variable display region while stop-displaying the performance pattern 70a of "3" in the left and right variable display regions of the performance pattern 70a which has been variably displayed (temporary stop display).

After that, when it develops into SP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 160(n), the SP ready-to-win effect is started, the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D are erased.

Then, when it develops into SPSP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 160(o), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win production that becomes a big hit ends (the production control board 130 receives a special symbol stop designation command indicating a big win), as shown in FIG.

While the winning opening lamp NR remains extinguished during the display of the initial screen and/or the returning screen, the winning opening lamp NR may be lit in a lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change performance (does not suggest the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot).

In addition, when the special figure stop designating command cannot be received during the fluctuation performance (temporary stop display (shake fluctuation) of the performance pattern 70a), the temporary stop display (shake fluctuation) is continued without the stop display of the performance pattern 70a which is temporarily stopped (shake fluctuation).

In addition, as for an icon newly changed from a reserved icon after restarting power supply, lottery relating to icon change performance may be performed at the time of start of variation, and the display mode of the icon may be changed according to the result of winning, but the lottery relating to lamp change performance may not be newly executed, and lamp change performance may not be restarted by maintaining the state where the winning opening lamp NR is extinguished.

Thus, according to the performance example shown in FIGS. 159 to 160, when the power supply stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the continuous notice performance is not restarted in the variable performance corresponding to the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the continuous announcement effect from being restarted in an incomplete state due to the stoppage of the power supply, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that the same applies to the case where the power supply that was stopped during the execution of another continuous advance notice effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 159 to 160, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored while the suspended icon displayed as the special icon (including the case where it has not changed until the final display mode and the case where it has changed until the final display mode), the suspended icon that was displayed as the special icon is displayed as the normal icon. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after resuming the power supply without being conscious of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 159 to 160, even if the stopped power supply resumes during the variable production corresponding to the holding icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production (storage of the special figure determination information that changes the lighting color of the winning entrance lamp NR to a lighting color (blue, red, rainbow) with a high expectation of winning the jackpot (blue, red, rainbow)) and the control state of the game is restored, the lamp change production is not restarted, and the winning opening lamp NR does not indicate the expectation of winning the jackpot (turns off or lights up white). ). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the ramp change effect is restarted even though the change effect is not executed.

(Specific example 1 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 1 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. FIG. FIG. 161 is a timing chart 1 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, and FIGS. 162(a) to (j) are production examples corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 1 of FIG.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reserved number displayed in the sub first reserved display device 83 and the first special figure reserved number display area 70E while the changing BGM is output changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

The variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ is performed by blinking the LED of the sub-first variable display 81, but since blinking cannot be represented in the drawing, the variable display is represented by a double circle. Also, the LED of the first sub-hold display 83 is represented by a double circle to indicate that it is blinking.

Next, at the timing of T1, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation, and one pending icon HI is additionally displayed as 10 frames of animation in the first pending icon display area 70B (displayed so as to gradually increase from a very small size) (see FIG. 162 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of performing a rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 162(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is finally stopped in a losing mode (lights out) (see FIG. 162(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control part 110m decreases from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 162(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 162(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 162(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol LZ are extended, and accordingly the output of the BGM during variation is maintained (see FIG. 162(f)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "1" to "0". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from '1' to '0' and processing for starting the variation performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Also, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 162(g)).

Then, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 162(g)).

Then, at the timing of T9, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the scrolling of the background image is continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 162(h)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("962"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the icon TI continues rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 162(i)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol LZ are extended (see FIG. 162(i)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number memorized (understood) by the main control unit 110m is "0", so the state shifts to a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m performs processing for ending the variable production.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation. In addition, all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (the production pattern 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) are displayed (mainly stopped) at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is permanently stopped in a losing mode (lights out) (see FIG. 162 (j)).

At the timing of T7, the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. will take place.

Here, the specific example 1 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, but even if the game state is the specific game state (time-saving game state, probability variable game state), the basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display device 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, the first starting port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display device 84, the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, the second reservation icon The display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting opening 47 may be read as the replacement.

In the case of a predetermined detection sensor (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) connector disconnection, an abnormality notification (error notification) was immediately performed, but in the case of a command abnormality due to a command line connector disconnection for communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130, abnormality notification is not performed.

(Specific example 2 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 2 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 and 164. FIG. FIG. 163 is a timing chart 2 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, and FIGS. 164(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" by winning a game ball in the first starting port 45. When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation, and one pending icon HI is additionally displayed as 10 frames of animation in the first pending icon display area 70B (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) (see FIG. 164 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 164(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is finally stopped in a losing mode (lights off) (see FIG. 164(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control part 110m decreases from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 164(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icons is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the performance pattern 70a has started, so that the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating motion (a performance motion) (see FIG. 164(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (drawing motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 164(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the holding icon HI and the icon TI are continued, the periods of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. Also, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, and output of the zone BGM) is maintained and the look-ahead zone effect continues (see FIG. 164(g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "3" to "2". When the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the fluctuation performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 164(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 164(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first special symbol reservation number memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", and processing for starting the fluctuation performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, the surplus reserved icon HI displayed third in the first reserved icon display area 70B is erased in one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (the production pattern 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) ) is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 164(h)).

Then, the required two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a performs the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) and then starts scrolling (see FIG. 164(h)).

When the redundant reserved icons are erased and the required reserved icons are shifted and displayed, the redundant reserved icons may be left as they are and the required reserved icons may be shifted and displayed.

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 164(i)).

After that, when various commands from the main control part 110m can be normally received by the performance control part 130m, even in the variable performance executed during the variable display of the special pattern in which the number of the first special figure reservation is ``0'' (the target of the expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead zone performance), the normal zone performance (display of the look-ahead zone background, the display of the blue zone image, and the output of the zone BGM) is executed according to the announcement scenario, and the look-ahead zone performance is finished when the performance pattern 70a is finally stopped.

At the timing of T7 to T9, the production control unit 130m can normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. The same processing as when reception is not possible is performed.

Here, at the timing of T10, the case where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1" has been described, and when the first special figure reservation number changes from "4" to "2", and when the first special figure reservation number changes from "2" to "0", that is, if the divergence between the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations grasped by the production control unit 130m is "2", the basic flow. is the same as described above.

Also, here, the specific example 2 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, but even if the game state is the specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), the basic flow is the same as the above description.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display device 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, the first starting port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display device 84, the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, the second reservation icon The display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting opening 47 may be read as the replacement.

(Specific example 3 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 3 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 and 165. FIG. FIG. 163 is a timing chart 2 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, and FIGS.

164 and 165 differ in that the look-ahead effect presentation is executed instead of the look-ahead zone presentation as the continuous notice presentation and the icon change presentation is executed, so here the explanation of the common part is omitted and only the different part is explained.

At the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI (see FIG. 165 (d)).

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed behind the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 165(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect presentation is temporarily stopped, and the icon change presentation is started. Specifically, the third pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (see FIG. 165(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action (effect action) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 165(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the holding icon HI and the icon TI are continued, the periods of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. Also, the blue icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 165(g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "3" to "2". When the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the fluctuation performance is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 165(g) is maintained without execution of the look-ahead effect presentation (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound).

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 165(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first special symbol reservation number memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", and processing for starting the fluctuation performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from '3' to '1' with one frame of non-animation, and the surplus pending icon HI displayed second in the first pending icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation, and the thirdly displayed pending icon HI is secondly displayed with one frame of non-animation. Also, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (see FIG. 165(h)).

Then, the required two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and the look-ahead effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed behind the production design 70a and an effect sound is output in accordance with the advance notice scenario. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 165(h)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time elapses after completion of the shift display of the icon, the effect image EF is erased and the look-ahead effect performance is once stopped, and the icon change performance is executed, and the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed. Specifically, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a red icon according to the changing scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 165(i)).

After that, when the performance control part 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control part 110m, the look-ahead effect performance (display of the effect image EF, the output of the effect effect sound) and the icon change performance (the icon change performance) are executed even in the variable performance executed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the number of the first special figure reservation becomes "0" (the target of the expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead preview performance). Then, the look-ahead effect performance ends at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed, and the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

At the timing of T7 to T9, the production control unit 130m can normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. The same processing as when reception is not possible is performed.

Here, at the timing of T10, the case where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1" has been described, and when the first special figure reservation number changes from "4" to "2", and when the first special figure reservation number changes from "2" to "0", that is, if the divergence between the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations grasped by the production control unit 130m is "2", the basic flow. is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 3 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), the basic flow is the same as the above description.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display device 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, the first starting port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display device 84, the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, the second reservation icon The display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting opening 47 may be read as the replacement.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 163 to 165, in the reserved icon display area, during the display of a specific number (for example, three) of the reserved icons (first reserved information) that is two more than the predetermined number (for example, one), when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the special figure reserved number is a predetermined number, the surplus reserved icons (for example, the third reserved icon) out of the specific number of reserved icons are not shift-displayed, and the necessary reserved icons (for example, the first to second (hold icon) is displayed in shift. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 163 to 165, in the reserved icon display area, a specific number (for example, 1) more than a specific number (for example, 1) of the reserved icon (first reserved information) is displayed. When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of special figures reserved is a predetermined number, a reserved icon of a number that is one less than the specific number is displayed, and then a predetermined number of reserved icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 163 to 165, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, a specific number (for example, 1) two more than the predetermined number (for example, 3) When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the special figure reservation number is a predetermined number, the reservation number is displayed without displaying the number of reservations that is one less than the specific number. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Specific example 4 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 4 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. FIG. FIG. 166 is a timing chart 3 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, and FIGS. 167(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 3 of FIG.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" by winning a game ball in the first starting port 45. When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation, and one pending icon HI is additionally displayed as 10 frames of animation in the first pending icon display area 70B (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) (see FIG. 167 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 167(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is finally stopped in a losing mode (lights out) (see FIG. 167(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control part 110m decreases from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 167(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icons is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the performance pattern 70a has started, so that the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating motion (a performance motion) (see FIG. 167(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 167(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the holding icon HI and the icon TI are continued, the periods of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. In addition, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained and the prefetch zone effect continues (see FIG. 167(g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "3" to "2". When the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the fluctuation performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 167(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 167(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first special symbol reservation number memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the fluctuation performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 167(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T11, when the variation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 167(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from ``1'' to ``0'', thereby starting the variable display of the first special symbol. When the performance control unit 130m receives a command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first special pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in one frame of non-animation, the second and third surplus pending icons HI in the first pending icon display area 70B are erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the performance designs 70a including the performance design 70a displaced from the stop position (the performance design that was scheduled to be stopped in the past variable performance) 70a) is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 167(h)).

Then, the required one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a performs the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) and then starts scrolling (see FIG. 167(h)).

After that, at the timing of T13, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 167(i)).

After that, when the production control section 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control section 110m, the look-ahead zone production ends when the production pattern 70a actually stops.

At the timing of T7 to T11, the production control unit 130m can normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. The same processing as in the case where it cannot be received at this time is performed.

Here, at the timing of T12, the case where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" was described, but when the first special figure reservation number becomes "4" to "1".

Also, here, the specific example 4 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, but even if the game state is the specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), the basic flow is the same as the above description.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display device 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, the first starting port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display device 84, the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, the second reservation icon The display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting opening 47 may be read as the replacement.

(Specific example 5 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 5 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 168. FIG. FIG. 166 is a timing chart 3 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, and FIGS. 168(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 3 of FIG.

167 and 168 are different in that a look-ahead effect presentation is executed instead of a look-ahead zone presentation as the continuous announcement presentation, and an icon change presentation is also performed, so here the explanation of the common parts will be omitted and only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI.

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed behind the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 168(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect presentation is temporarily stopped, and the icon change presentation is started. Specifically, the third pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so that the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (see FIG. 168(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 168(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the holding icon HI and the icon TI are continued, the periods of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. Also, the blue icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 168(g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "3" to "2". When the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the fluctuation performance is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 168(g) is maintained without execution of the look-ahead effect presentation (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound).

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 168(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first special symbol reservation number memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the fluctuation performance is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 168(g) is maintained without execution of the look-ahead effect presentation (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound).

After that, at the timing of T11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ, and variable display of the first lamp symbol LZ are extended (see FIG. 168(g)).

After that, at the timing of T12, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "1" to "0". When the performance control unit 130m receives a command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from '3' to '0' with one frame of non-animation, and the surplus reserved icons HI displayed first and second in the first reserved icon display area 70B are erased with one frame of non-animation, and the thirdly displayed reserved icon HI is first displayed with one frame of non-animation. Further, all the performance patterns 70a including the performance patterns 70a displaced from the stop position (the performance patterns 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display).

Then, the required one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and the look-ahead effect performance is executed. Specifically, a red effect image EF is displayed behind and below the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 168(h)).

After that, at the timing of T13, the icon change performance is executed at the same time as the icon shift display is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect performance is finished, and the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon according to the changing scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 168(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change production ends.

At the timing of T7 to T11, the production control unit 130m can normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. The same processing as in the case where it cannot be received at this time is performed.

Here, at the timing of T12, the case where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" was described, but when the first special figure reservation number becomes "4" to "1".

Also, here, the specific example 5 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, but even if the game state is the specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), the basic flow is the same as the above description.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display device 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, the first starting port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display device 84, the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, the second reservation icon The display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting opening 47 may be read as the replacement.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 166 to 168, in the reserved icon display area, a specific number (for example, 4) more than a predetermined number (for example, 1) of the reserved icons (first reserved information) When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of special figures reserved is a predetermined number, a predetermined number of reserved icons are displayed without displaying a number of reserved icons that are one less than the specific number. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 166 to 168, in the reserved icon display area, during the display of a specific number (for example, four) of the reserved icons (first reserved information) that is three more than the predetermined number (for example, one), when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the special figure reserved number is a predetermined number, the reserved icon of a number that is two less than the specific number is displayed without displaying the reserved icon of a number that is one less than the specific number, and then the reserved icon of a predetermined number is displayed. has become Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

According to the specific example shown in FIG. 166 to 168, in the sub 1st hold display indicator 83 and the first special map number of holding areas 70E, the number of suspensions of three specific numbers (eg, four) is displayed, and the command of the fluctuation display is 130m. When receiving, the number of holds of the president is displayed without displaying the number of holds of one and two small numbers than the specific number. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Specific example 6 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 6 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 170. FIG. FIG. 169 is a timing chart 4 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, and FIGS. 170(a) to (h) are production examples corresponding to (a) to (h) in the timing chart 4 of FIG.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" by winning a game ball in the first starting port 45. When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation, and one pending icon HI is additionally displayed as 10 frames of animation in the first pending icon display area 70B (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) (see FIG. 170 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Also, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of performing a rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 170(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is finally stopped in a losing mode (lights out) (see FIG. 170(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control part 110m decreases from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 170(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the icon shift display is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Also, the third pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so that the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 170(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 170(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the holding icon HI and the icon TI are continued, the periods of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. In addition, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained to continue the prefetch zone effect, and the blue icon is maintained to continue the icon change effect (see FIG. 170(g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "3" to "2". When the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the fluctuation performance is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first special symbol reservation number memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the fluctuation performance is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

After that, at the timing of T11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T12, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "1" to "0". When the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the performance control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the fluctuation performance is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T13, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

After that, at the timing of T14, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, the game enters a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the performance control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for setting a waiting timer until the first special figure reservation number stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" and the customer waiting demonstration performance is started is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in one frame of non-animation, and the first to third surplus pending icons HI in the first to third icon display areas 70B and the icons displayed in the icon display area 70C are erased in one frame of non-animation, and the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are completed. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display), the special symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp symbol LZ is permanently stopped in a losing mode (lights out) (see FIG. 170(h)).

At the timing of T7 to T13, the production control unit 130m can normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. The same processing as in the case where it cannot be received at this time is performed.

Here, at the timing of T14, the case where the customer waiting state designation command is received in the state where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is "3" has been described. However, even when the customer waiting state designation command is received in the state where the first special figure reservation number is "4", "2", or "1", the basic flow is the same as the above description.

Also, here, the specific example 6 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, but even if the game state is the specific game state (time reduction game state, probability variable game state), the basic flow is the same as the above description.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display device 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, the first starting port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display device 84, the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, the second reservation icon The display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting opening 47 may be read as the replacement.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 169 to 170, when the effect control unit 130m normally receives the customer waiting state designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, all the effect patterns 70a including the effect pattern 70a shifted from the predetermined stop position (the effect pattern 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) are displayed (finally stopped) at the stop position. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable effect has ended (transition to the customer waiting state), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Concrete example 7 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 7 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172. FIG. FIG. 171 is a timing chart 5 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. 172(a) to (h) are production examples corresponding to (a) to (h) in the timing chart 5 of FIG.

169 and 171 are different only in that the command received at the timing of T14 is the customer waiting designation command or the opening designation command, so the explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T14, when the stop time of the special symbols elapses, a jackpot game (special game) is started. When the performance control part 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control part 110m at this timing, the processing for starting the opening performance of the jackpot game is performed while the first special figure reservation number stored (understood) by the performance control part 130m remains ``3''.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is maintained as ``3'', the performance pattern 70a, the reservation icon HI displayed in the icon display area and the icon are erased, and the icon change performance and the look-ahead zone performance are completed. In addition, the special symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp symbol LZ is finally stopped in a losing mode (turned off), and an opening effect image is displayed (see FIG. 172(h)).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m can normally receive the first special figure reservation number designation command from the main control unit 110m during the jackpot game or after the jackpot game is finished (time saving game state, variable probability game state), the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is updated to the number corresponding to the command in one frame of non-animation.

At the timing of T7 to T13, the production control unit 130m can normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. The same processing as in the case where it cannot be received at this time is performed.

Here, at the timing of T14, the case where the opening designation command is received in the state where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is "3" has been described. Even when the opening designation command is received in any state where the first special figure reservation number is "4", "2", or "1", the basic flow is the same as the above description.

Also, here, although the specific example 7 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, even if the game state is a specific game state (shorter time game state, variable probability game state), the basic flow is the same as the above description.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display device 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, the first starting port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display device 84, the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, the second reservation icon The display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting opening 47 may be read as the replacement.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, when the effect control unit 130m normally receives the opening designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, all the effect patterns 70a including the effect pattern 70a shifted from the predetermined stop position (the effect pattern 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) are displayed at the stop position (actually stopped), and the opening effect image of the big hit game is displayed. has become Therefore, the opening effect is not hindered by the effect pattern, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Concrete example 8 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 8 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174. FIG. FIG. 173 is a timing chart 6 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 174(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the icon shift display is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Also, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so that the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (see FIG. 174(a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m does not perform processing for updating the first special figure reservation number stored (understood), and remains "1" (see FIG. 174 (b)).

After that, at the timing of T3, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 174(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the holding icon HI and the icon TI are continued, the periods of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. In addition, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained to continue the prefetch zone effect, and the blue icon is maintained to continue the icon change effect (see FIG. 174(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m normally receives the start command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is from "1" to "1", that is, the process for starting the fluctuation production without changing the first special figure reservation number is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from '1' to '1' in the non-animation for one frame, and the second pending icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in the non-animation for one frame (displayed in normal size from the beginning) in the first pending icon display area 70B. Also, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (see FIG. 174(e)).

Then, the required two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 174(e)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the suspended icon and the icon are rotating (drawing operation) (see FIG. 174(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable production (SP ready-to-win production ends), the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a temporarily stop in the ready-to-win losing mode ("878"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 174(g)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is finally stopped in a losing mode (lights out) (see FIG. 174(h)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "1" to "0". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from '1' to '0' and processing for starting the variation performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 174(i)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the performance pattern 70a has started, so the icon is in a state of performing a rotating motion (a performance motion) (see FIG. 174(j)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change production ends.

At the timing of T2 to T4, the production control unit 130m can normally receive the command (winning command, stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. The same processing as when normal reception is not possible is performed.

Here, at the timing of T5, the case where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1" has been described. If the stored (grasped) pending number is the same, the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 8 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), the basic flow is the same as the above description.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display device 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, the first starting port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display device 84, the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, the second reservation icon The display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting opening 47 may be read as the replacement.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 173 to 174, while a predetermined number (for example, one) of the reserved icons (first reserved information) are displayed in the reserved icon display area, the number of special figures reserved is a predetermined number. When the command at the start of the variable display is received, the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display, and then displays the reserved icons one more than the predetermined number (for example, two), and then shifts and displays the reserved icons to display the predetermined number of reserved icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 173 to 174, while displaying a predetermined number (for example, one) in the sub first reservation display 83 or the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, when the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display that the special figure reservation number becomes a predetermined number, the number of reservations that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, two) is not displayed, and the number of reservations is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 173 to 174, the pending icon (first pending information) is not displayed in the pending icon display area, but while the icon is being displayed, the number of special figures pending is "0" When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display, after displaying the pending icon one more than "0" (for example, one), the pending icon is displayed in a shift display so that the pending icon is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 173 to 174, while displaying the reservation number of "0" in the sub first reservation display 83 or the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the special figure reservation number becomes "0" When the command at the start of the variable display is received by the production control unit 130m, the reservation number of "0" is displayed (maintained) without displaying the number of reservations one more than "0" (for example, one). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Specific example 9 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 9 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 and 176. FIG. FIG. 175 is a timing chart 7 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, and FIGS. 176(a) to (f) are production examples corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the icon shift display is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Also, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so that the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (see FIG. 176(a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m does not perform processing for updating the first special figure reservation number stored (grasp), and remains "1" (see FIG. 176 (b)).

After that, at the timing of T3, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m does not perform processing for updating the first special figure reservation number stored (grasp), and remains "1" (see FIG. 176 (b)).

Next, at the timing of T4, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" by winning a game ball in the first starting port 45. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m does not perform processing for updating the first special figure reservation number stored (grasp), and remains "1" (see FIG. 176 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 176(c)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the holding icon HI and the icon TI are continued, the periods of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. Further, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained to continue the prefetch zone effect, and the blue icon is maintained to continue the icon change effect (see FIG. 176(d)).

After that, at the timing of T7, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the command at the start (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3" and processing for starting the variation performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the second to fourth pending icon HI (white icon) of the first pending icon display area 70B is additionally displayed in one frame of non-animation (displayed in normal size from the beginning). Also, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (see FIG. 176(e)).

Then, the required four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 176(e)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so that the suspended icon and the icon are rotating (effecting motion) (see FIG. 176(f)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change production ends.

At the timing of T2 to T6, the command (winning command, stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m can be normally received by the effect control unit 130m, but the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. The same processing as when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive normally is performed.

Here, at the timing of T7, the case where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3" has been described. is greater than the stored (kept) pending number, the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, the specific example 9 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, but even if the game state is the specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), the basic flow is the same as the above description.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display device 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, the first starting port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display device 84, the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, the second reservation icon The display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting opening 47 may be read as the replacement.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 175 to 176, while a predetermined number (for example, one) of reserved icons (first reserved information) are being displayed in the reserved icon display area, when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display that is a specific number (for example, two) that is larger than the predetermined number, the reserved icons that are one more than the specific number (for example, three) are displayed, and then the reserved icons are shifted to display the specific number of reserved icons. has become Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 175 to 176, while displaying a predetermined number (for example, one) in the sub first reservation display 83 or the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, when the special figure reservation number is a specific number larger than the predetermined number (for example, two) When the command at the start of the variable display is received, the production control unit 130m does not display the number of reservations that is one more than the specific number (for example, three), and the specific number of reservations is displayed. . Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 175 to 176, the reserved icon (first reserved information) is not displayed in the reserved icon display area, but the number of reserved special figures is a predetermined number (for example, 1). When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display, the reserved icon is displayed by one more than the predetermined number (for example, 2), and then the reserved icons are shifted to display a predetermined number of reserved icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 175 to 176, while displaying the reserved number of "0" in the sub first reserved display 83 or the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, the number of special figures reserved is a predetermined number (for example, when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display to be one), the number of reservations that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, two) is not displayed, and the number of reservations of a predetermined number is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Summary of specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176)
As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command during the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a, the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the fluctuation period of the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern LZ, and the output period of the BGM during fluctuation are extended (continued) from the normal period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period during which no effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the scrolling of the background image, the pending icon, and the rotation of the icon are continued. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the boring performance with extremely no movement during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, even during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the pre-reading notice effect (icon change effect, pre-reading zone effect) is continued (executed). Therefore, even when a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control part 130m cannot normally receive the command, the read-ahead foretelling performance is not terminated, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by avoiding the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, even if the look-ahead advance notice effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed) during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the show design 70a, the notice mode (icon type, zone show type) of the look-ahead notice show does not change during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the show design 70a. As a result, the advance of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not abnormal, and the game can be more interesting by avoiding inconveniences that cause dissatisfaction of the player.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the command at the start during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance design 70a, all the performance designs 70a including the performance design 70a shifted from the predetermined stop position (the performance design 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past fluctuation performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display), and then the variable display is started. Therefore, compared to the case where the variable display is started with the performance pattern 70a deviated from the stop position, the appearance at the start of the variable performance can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, when the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command at the start during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern LZ are not stopped and displayed and continue to be variablely displayed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load without performing complicated processing such as stopping and displaying the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ. Even if the performance pattern 70a is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display), the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern LZ can inform the player that the variable performance is being performed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, when the effect control unit 130m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the icon is erased in a shorter time (1 frame of non-animation) than the normal time (10 frames of animation when the stop command is received). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the change performance to be newly executed to be hindered by the erasure of the icon, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, when the effect control unit 130m normally receives the start time command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a in which the look-ahead preview effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed), the look-ahead preview effect can be executed even in the newly executed variable effect. Therefore, even when a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control part 130m cannot normally receive the command, the read-ahead foretelling performance is not terminated, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by avoiding the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a in which the look-ahead foretelling effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed), when the effect control unit 130m normally receives the start time command, it is possible to execute the effect of contents corresponding to the scenario of the look-ahead foretelling effect in the newly executed variable effect. Therefore, even when a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control part 130m cannot normally receive the command, the advance of the pre-reading announcement performance does not become abnormal, and the amusement of the game can be improved by avoiding the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied.

(Specific example 10 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 10 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 and 178. FIG. FIG. 177 is a timing chart 8 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 178(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 8 of FIG.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the shift display of icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. When the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for updating the first special figure reservation number stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m is not performed and remains "1".

At this time, since the winning command with the first special figure reservation number "2" has not been received, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E remains "1", and the second reservation icon HI corresponding to the first special figure reservation number "2" in the first reservation icon display area 70B will not be displayed (see FIG. 178 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T3, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first special pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the second pending icon HI corresponding to the first special pending number "2" that could not receive the winning command in the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, and the third one corresponding to the first special pending number "3" is additionally displayed as 10 frames of animation. (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) (see FIG. 178(b)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 178(c)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is finally stopped in a losing mode (lights out) (see FIG. 178(d)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "3" to "2". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "2", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first special pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation, and the second pending icon HI corresponding to the first special pending number "2" that could not receive the command at the time of winning in the first pending icon display area 70B is additionally displayed as one frame of non-animation (displayed in normal size from the beginning), and the displayed three pending icons HI are 20 frames of animation. are shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and the top one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 178(e)).

After that, at the timing of T7, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so that the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating action (drawing action) (see FIG. 178(f)).

Next, at the timing of T8, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("225"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action (effect action) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 178(g)).

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is finally stopped in a losing mode (lights out) (see FIG. 178(h)).

After that, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first special symbol reservation number memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 178(i)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so that the icon is in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (see FIG. 178(j)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change production ends.

Even when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the command (winning command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timing of T2, but the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing as when the command (winning command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m cannot be normally received by the effect control unit 130m is performed. will be

Here, at the timing of T3, when the first special figure reservation number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "1", the case where the command at the time of winning that the first special figure reservation number is "3" is received has been described. However, when the first special figure reservation number that is stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "1", the first special figure reservation number is "4". The basic flow is the same as the above-described explanation even when the command for winning when the number of reservations is '0' and the number of first special figure reservations is '2', '3', or '4' is received.

Also, here, the specific example 10 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, but even if the game state is a specific game state (time-saving game state, probability variable game state), the basic flow is the same as the above description.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display device 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, the first starting port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display device 84, the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, the second reservation icon The display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting opening 47 may be read as the replacement.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 177 to 178, when the reserved icon (first reserved information) is not displayed in the area (for example, second) corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, two) of the reserved icon display areas, when the production control unit 130m receives a winning command that is a specific number (for example, three) that is one more than the predetermined number, the reserved icon is not displayed in the area (for example, second) that corresponds to the predetermined number of the reserved icon display areas, and is reserved. A reserved icon is displayed in a specific number of icon display areas (for example, the third icon). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the wrong number of reservations, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 177 to 178, the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is one less than the predetermined number (for example, two) (for example, 1) When the production control unit 130m receives a winning command that becomes a specific number (for example, three) that is one more than the predetermined number, the specific number of reservations is displayed without displaying the predetermined number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, when the pending icon (first pending information) is not displayed in an area (for example, second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the pending icon display areas, when the effect control unit 130m receives a prize-time command with a specific number (for example, four) that is larger than the predetermined number, the area corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, second) of the pending icon display areas corresponds to a number that is one less than the specified number. Instead of displaying the pending icon in the area (for example, the third) to be displayed, the pending icon is displayed in an area (for example, the fourth) corresponding to a specific number of the pending icon display areas. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the wrong number of reservations, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 177 to 178, while displaying the number of reservations (for example, one) less than the predetermined number (for example, two) in the sub first reservation display 83 or the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, when the special figure reservation number is a specific number (for example, four) that is more than the predetermined number. is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 177 to 178, the reserved icon is not displayed in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, two) of the reserved icon display areas, and the reserved icon is not displayed in the area (for example, the third) corresponding to the specific number (for example, three) that is one more than the predetermined number. After displaying additional icons to display a specific number of reserved icons, the reserved icons are shifted to display a predetermined number of reserved icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the reserved icon is not displayed in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, two) of the reserved icon display areas and the area corresponding to the number (for example, 3) that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, three). When it is received, a specific number of reserved icons are additionally displayed in an area corresponding to a predetermined number (e.g., second) of the reserved icon display area and an area corresponding to a number (e.g., three) greater than the predetermined number by one to display a specific number of reserved icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, for the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the prize winning command, the icon change effect is not executed while the icon is displayed as the pending icon, but the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to the failure to normally receive the winning command, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Modification 1 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
163 and 179, a modification of the specific example 2 described in FIGS. 163 and 164 (modification 1 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 179(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG.

Since FIGS. 164 and 179 are the same up to the timings T0 to T9, explanations of common parts are omitted here, and only different parts are explained.

At the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control part 110m decreases from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", and processing for starting the fluctuation performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first special figure pending number notified from the main control unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m Due to the command abnormality (abnormal deviation of 2 or more where originally the deviation is 1) occurred, the look-ahead zone The performance ends.

Specifically, the look-ahead zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output (see FIG. 179(h)).

The surplus reserved icon HI displayed second in the first reserved icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and the thirdly displayed reserved icon HI is secondly displayed by one frame of non-animation. All the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (see FIG. 179(h)).

Then, the required two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 179(h)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 179(i)).

(Modified example 2 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
163 and 180, a modification of the specific example 3 described in FIGS. 163 and 165 (modification 2 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 180(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG.

Since FIGS. 165 and 180 are the same up to the timings T0 to T9, explanations of common parts are omitted here, and only different parts are explained.

At the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control part 110m decreases from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", and processing for starting the fluctuation performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first special figure pending number notified from the main control unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m Due to a command abnormality (abnormal deviation of 2 or more instead of 1 normally), icon change production. And the look-ahead effect rendering ends.

Specifically, the surplus reserved icon HI (blue icon) displayed third in the first reserved icon display area 70B is deleted by one frame of non-animation. Also, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (see FIG. 180(h)).

Then, the required two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 180(h)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the production pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 180(i)).

After that, when the performance control part 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control part 110m, the look-ahead effect performance and the icon change performance are not executed even in the variable performance executed for the variable display of the special pattern in which the number of the first special figure reservation is ``0'' (target of the expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead notice performance).

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 179 to 180, the first special figure pending number notified from the main control unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored by the effect control unit 130m are inconsistent due to the command abnormality (normally, the divergence of 1 in the direction of decrease, but the deviation of 2 or more in the direction of decrease), the look-ahead preview production (look-ahead zone production, icon change production, look-ahead effect production) is terminated. are Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as the execution of the read-ahead notice performance during the execution of the variable performance, which is normally not the object of execution of the read-ahead notice performance, and to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

(Modified example 3 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
173 and 181, a modified example of specific example 8 described with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174 (modified example 3 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 181(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG.

Since FIGS. 174 and 181 are the same up to the timings T0 to T4, the description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m normally receives the start command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is from "1" to "1", that is, the process for starting the fluctuation production without changing the first special figure reservation number is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first special figure pending number notified from the main control unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored by the effect control unit 130m are inconsistent due to the command abnormality (originally the difference is 1 in the decreasing direction, but the same number). The reading zone production ends.

Specifically, the pre-reading zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output. In addition, the first blue icon in the first reserved icon display area 70B returns to the white icon by one frame of non-animation, and the second reserved icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed by one frame of non-animation (displayed in normal size from the beginning). Also, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (see FIG. 181(e)).

Then, the required two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 181(e)).

After that, at the timing of T6, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the suspended icon and the icon are rotating (drawing operation) (see FIG. 181(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a reach-losing mode ("878"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action (effect action) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 181(g)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is finally stopped in a losing mode (lights out) (see FIG. 181(h)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from "1" to "0". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from '1' to '0' and processing for starting the variation performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 181(i)).

Next, at the timing of T10, the shift display of icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so the icon is in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (see FIG. 181(j)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 181, the first special figure pending number notified from the main control unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored by the effect control unit 130m are caused by the command abnormality. When inconsistency (abnormality that is the same number where it is originally a deviation of 1) occurs, the look-ahead preview effect (look-ahead zone effect, icon change effect, look-ahead effect effect) is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as the execution of the read-ahead notice performance during the execution of the variable performance, which is normally not the object of execution of the read-ahead notice performance, and to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

(Modification 4 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
175 and 182, a modification of the specific example 9 described in FIGS. 175 and 176 (modification 4 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 182(a) to (f) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG.

Since FIGS. 176 and 182 are the same up to the timings T0 to T6, explanations of common parts are omitted here, and only different parts are explained.

At the timing of T7, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control part 110m decreases from "4" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the command at the start (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3" and processing for starting the variation performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first special figure pending number notified from the main control unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m are inconsistent due to the command abnormality (originally the deviation is 1 in the decreasing direction, but the deviation is 1 or more in the increasing direction. ) occurs, the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect end.

Specifically, the pre-reading zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output. Also, the first blue icon in the first reserved icon display area 70B returns to the white icon with one frame of non-animation, and the second to fourth reserved icons HI (white icons) are additionally displayed (displayed in normal size from the beginning) with one frame of non-animation. Also, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (see FIG. 182(e)).

Then, the required four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 182(e)).

After that, at the timing of T8, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the suspended icon and the icon are rotating (drawing operation) (see FIG. 182(f)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 182, the command abnormality between the first special figure pending number notified from the main control unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored by the effect control unit 130m When an inconsistency (abnormality that is a deviation of 1 or more in the increasing direction where originally it is a deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction) occurs, the look-ahead preview effect (a look-ahead zone effect, an icon change effect, a look-ahead effect effect) is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as the execution of the read-ahead notice performance during the execution of the variable performance, which is normally not the object of execution of the read-ahead notice performance, and to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

(Modified example 5 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
177 and 183, a modification of the concrete example 10 described in FIGS. 177 and 178 (modification 5 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 183(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 8 of FIG.

178 and 183 have the same timing from T6 to T11, the description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and processing for starting the variable performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the shift display of icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m does not perform processing for updating the first special figure reservation number stored (grasp), and remains "1" (see FIG. 183 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T3, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the second one in the reserved icon display area 70B is displayed as one frame of non-animation, and the third one is additionally displayed as 10 frames of animation (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) (see FIG. 183 (b)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 183(c)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is finally stopped in a losing mode (lights out) (see FIG. 183(d)).

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 183, when the pending icon (first pending information) is not displayed in an area (eg, second) corresponding to a predetermined number (eg, two) of the pending icon display areas, the special figure pending number is one more than the specified number (eg, three). is additionally displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the wrong number of reservations, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 183, while displaying the number of reservations (for example, one) less than the predetermined number (for example, two) in the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, when the special figure reservation number is a specific number (for example, three) that is one more than the predetermined number. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 183, when the pending icon (first pending information) is not displayed in an area (eg, second) corresponding to a predetermined number (eg, two) of the pending icon display areas, the number of special pending icons is more than the specified number. It is designed to Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the wrong number of reservations, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 183, while displaying the number of reservations (for example, one) less than a predetermined number (for example, two) in the sub first reservation display 83 or the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, when the special figure reservation number is a specific number (for example, four) more than the predetermined number. are Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 183, for the icon corresponding to the first reserved memory for which the presentation control unit 130m has not been able to normally receive the winning command, the icon change presentation is not executed while being displayed as the reserved icon, but the icon changing presentation can be executed while being displayed as the icon. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to the failure to normally receive the winning command, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Specific example 9 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 13 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIG. The upper diagram in FIG. 184 is a timing chart 9 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state, and FIGS. 184(a) to (f) are the timing chart 9 in FIG.

First, at the timing of T0, the loss variation display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0", and processing for starting the first variation performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E while the changing BGM is being output is reduced from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shift-displayed (reduced display) as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation). Also, the icon TI is in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 for reasons such as the auxiliary game being executed by the player hitting to the right or the ball biting occurring in the second starting port 47 (movable member 48) part in the auxiliary game executed during the specific game state (time saving game state) before the normal game state is eliminated, the second special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m changes from "0" to "1". Increase. When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (a first special figure reservation number designation command as a winning signal, a look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special pending number displayed on the sub second pending display 84 and the second special pending number display area 70F is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in the specific update mode, but since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning to the second start port 47 during the normal game state means that the winning sound based on this winning is not output (see FIG. 184 (a)). ).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the first variable effect, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Further, the rotating motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 184(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop designation command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the processing for ending the first variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended, and accordingly the output of the changing BGM is maintained (see FIG. 184(c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the second special symbol reservation number memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from ``1'' to ``0'', and the second special symbol loss variation display is started. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the second special figure reservation number stored (grasp) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process of starting the second fluctuation production is not performed (see FIG. 184 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop time command (a special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the first variation performance started corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Further, the first lamp pattern LZ, which has been variably displayed on the sub-first variable display 81, is stopped (turned off) in a failing manner (see FIG. 184(e)). In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the first special symbols as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol reservation number and the second special symbol reservation number memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m are "0", so the state shifts to the customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub second reservation display device 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is reduced from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and waits until the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed or a new special symbol fluctuation display is started (see FIG. 184 (f)).

At the timing of T3 or T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, but the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command (command abnormality occurs). The same processing as when 0m cannot be received normally (command error occurs) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the processing for ending the first fluctuation production started in response to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol at this timing is performed, and the production control unit 130m stores (grasp). ), the number of the second special figure pending is changed from "1" to "0".

Although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. In addition, the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped at ``814'' which is the same as the performance pattern 70a, and the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is reduced from '1' to '0' in a specific update mode. In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the first special symbols as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

(Specific example 10 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 10 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIG. The upper diagram in FIG. 185 is a timing chart 10 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m in the normal game state, and FIGS. 185(a) to (f) are the timing chart 10 in FIG.

First, at the timing of T0, the loss variation display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0", and processing for starting the first variation performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E while the changing BGM is being output is reduced from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shift-displayed (reduced display) as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI is in the state of rotating operation (performance operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 for reasons such as the auxiliary game being executed by the player hitting to the right or the ball biting occurring in the second starting port 47 (movable member 48) part in the auxiliary game executed during the specific game state (time saving game state) before the normal game state is eliminated, the second special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m changes from "0" to "1". Increase. When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (a second special figure reservation number designation command as a winning signal, a look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure reservation number stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special pending number displayed in the sub second pending display 84 and the second special pending number display area 70F is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in the specific update mode, but since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning to the second start port 47 during the normal game state means that the winning sound based on this winning is not output (see FIG. 185 (a)). ).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the first variable effect, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Further, the rotating motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 185(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop designation command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the processing for ending the first variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended, and accordingly the output of the changing BGM is maintained (see FIG. 185(c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the second special symbol reserve number stored (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from ``1'' to ``0'', and the big hit variation display of the second special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (second special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process of starting the second fluctuation production is not performed (see FIG. 185 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a jackpot manner. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop time command (a special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the first variation performance started corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that has been variably displayed on the sub-first variation display 81 is stopped (turned off) in a losing mode, but the second lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is not stopped on the sub-second variation display 82 (see FIG. 185(e)). In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the first special symbols as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the opening period of the jackpot game is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m performs processing for starting the opening effect.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and characters of "big win" is displayed. In addition, the second special figure reservation number "1" displayed in the sub second reservation display device 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F normally receives the winning command (winning signal) based on the winning to the second start port 47, or the start command based on the start of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (second special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command as a start signal) The production control unit 130m receives. (See FIG. 185(f)).

In other words, even when the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (winning signal) based on the winning to the first start port 45 (winning signal) and the start command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special figure pending number specification command, special symbol specifying command, special figure fluctuation pattern specifying command as the starting signal), the second special figure pending number "1" displayed in the sub second pending display 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F is maintained. .

At the timing of T3 or T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, but the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command (command abnormality occurs). The same processing as when 0m cannot be received normally (command error occurs) is performed.

Further, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the processing of ending the first fluctuation production started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol at this timing and starting the opening production is performed.

Then, the opening image is displayed (the performances other than the opening performance are substantially completed) without stop-displaying the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a in the losing mode and the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and without erasing the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C as non-animation for one frame.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 184 to 185, in the normal game state, during the execution of the first variation performance started corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, when the stop command (stop signal) of the variation display of the second special symbol started after the end of the variation display of the first special symbol is received, the first variation performance is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the first variable performance ends at the timing of receiving the stop command, it is possible to end the first variable performance without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 184 to 185, in the normal game state, during the execution of the first variation performance started corresponding to the loss variation display of the first special symbol, when the stop command (stop signal) of the second special symbol jackpot variation display started after the end of the variation display of the first special symbol is received, the first variation performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a, variation display of the special symbol TZ) is terminated in a losing mode. has become Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to perform processing such as switching the performance pattern from the losing mode to the big hit mode, and to end the first variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 184 to 185, in the normal game state, during the variable display of the first lamp symbol LZ started corresponding to the loss variable display of the first special symbol, when the stop command (stop signal) of the second special symbol jackpot variation display started after the end of the first special symbol variation display is received, the sub first variation display 81 is made to stop display the losing mode (lights out), and the sub second variation display 82 is stopped. , the lamp pattern LZ in the jackpot mode (lighting) is not stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to dispense with processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a losing mode (extinguishing) to a big winning mode, and to terminate the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 184 to 185, in the normal game state, when the command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the second special symbol, which is started after the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, is received while the icon (first executing information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is being displayed, the icon is erased. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. Further, since the icon is erased at the timing of receiving the stop command, the icon can be erased without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 184 to 185, in the normal game state, when the command (signal at stop) of the variable display of the first special symbol is received while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed, and when the command (signal at stop) of the variable display of the second special symbol is received during the display of the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the same effect mode is received. , the icon is deleted. Therefore, it is possible to naturally erase the icon without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 184 to 185, in the normal game state, when the second special pending number displayed in the sub second pending display 84 and the second special pending number display area 70F is not "0", when the customer waiting state designation command indicating that the special pending number is "0" is received, the second special pending number displayed in the sub second pending display 84 and the second special pending number display area 70F is reduced to "0". has become Therefore, the player will not have doubts that the variable performance is not executed even though the second special figure pending number is not "0".

In addition, in the normal game state, during the execution of the first variation performance started corresponding to the big win variation display of the first special symbol, when a command (signal at the time of stop) of the loss variation display of the second special symbol started after the end of the variation display of the first special symbol is received, the first variation performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a, variation display of the special symbol TZ) may be terminated in a jackpot mode.

(Specific example 11 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 11 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIG. The upper diagram in FIG. 186 is a timing chart 11 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m in the normal game state, and FIGS. 186(a) to (f) are the timing charts 11 in FIG.

First, at the timing of T0, the specific game state (time-saving game state) is changed to the normal game state, and the second special symbol retention number stored in the main control part 110m during the specific game state is reduced from "1" to "0", thereby starting the second special symbol loss variation display. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (the second special figure reservation number designation command, the special design designation command, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command as the start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0", and the second fluctuation production is started.

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is reduced from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode while the changing BGM is being output. Further, since the second reserved icon display area 70D is not displayed, the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C as a 10-frame animation without shift display (decrease display) of the reserved icon from the second reserved icon display area 70D. Also, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the second lamp pattern LZ is started, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI is in the state of rotating operation (performance operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "0" to "1" by winning a game ball in the first starting port 45. When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (a first special figure reservation number designation command as a winning signal, a look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first special pending number displayed in the sub first pending display 83 and the first special pending number display area 70E is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, the pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the normal addition mode in the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, and the winning sound based on this winning is output as the winning to the first start port 45 during the normal game state (Fig. 186 ( a) see).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Further, the rotating motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 186(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop designation command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the processing for ending the second variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended, and accordingly the output of the changing BGM is maintained (see FIG. 186(c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from ``1'' to ``0'', and the loss variation display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process of starting the first fluctuation production is not performed (see FIG. 186 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop time command (a special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the second variation performance started corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that has been variably displayed on the second sub-variable display 82 is stopped and displayed (turned off) in a failing mode (see FIG. 186(e)). In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the second special symbol as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol reservation number and the second special symbol reservation number memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m are "0", so the state shifts to the customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and waits until the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed or a new special symbol fluctuation display is started (see FIG. 186 (f)).

At the timing of T3 or T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, but the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command (command abnormality occurs). The same processing as when 0m cannot be received normally (command error occurs) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the process of ending the second fluctuation production started in response to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol at this timing is performed. ), the number of the first special figure pending is changed from "1" to "0".

Although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped at ``814'' which is the same as the production pattern 70a, and the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from '1' to '0' in a specific update mode. In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the first special symbols as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

(Specific example 12 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 12 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIG. The upper diagram in FIG. 187 is a timing chart 12 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m in the normal game state, and FIGS. 187(a) to (f) are the timing chart 12 in FIG.

First, at the timing of T0, the specific game state (time-saving game state) is changed to the normal game state, and the second special symbol retention number stored in the main control part 110m during the specific game state is reduced from "1" to "0", thereby starting the second special symbol loss variation display. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (the second special figure reservation number designation command, the special design designation command, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command as the start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0", and the second fluctuation production is started.

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is reduced from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode while the changing BGM is being output. Further, since the second reserved icon display area 70D is not displayed, the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C as a 10-frame animation without shift display (decrease display) of the reserved icon from the second reserved icon display area 70D. Also, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the second lamp pattern LZ is started, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI is in the state of rotating operation (performance operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "0" to "1" by winning a game ball in the first starting port 45. When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (a first special figure reservation number designation command as a winning signal, a look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first special pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special pending number display area 70E is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B in the normal additional mode, and the winning sound based on this winning is output as the winning to the first start port 45 during the normal game state (Fig. 187 ( a) see).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the second variable effect, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Further, the rotating motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 187(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop designation command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the processing for ending the second variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended, and accordingly, the output of the changing BGM is maintained (see FIG. 187(c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from ``1'' to ``0'', and the big hit variation display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process of starting the first fluctuation production is not performed (see FIG. 187 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in the jackpot manner. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop time command (a special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the second variation performance started corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that has been variably displayed on the sub-second variation display 82 is stopped (turned off) in a losing mode, but the first sub-variation display 81 does not stop and display the first lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode (see FIG. 187 (e)). In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the second special symbol as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the opening period of the jackpot game is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m performs processing for starting the opening effect.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and characters of "big win" is displayed. In addition, the first special figure reservation number "1" displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E normally receives the winning command (winning signal) based on the new winning to the first start port 45, or the start command based on the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command as a start signal) The production control unit 130m receives. (See FIG. 187(f)).

In other words, even when the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (winning signal) based on the winning to the second starting port 47 (winning signal) and the start command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (second special figure pending number specification command, special symbol specifying command, special figure fluctuation pattern specifying command as the starting signal), the first special figure pending number "1" displayed in the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E is maintained. .

At the timing of T3 or T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, but the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command (command abnormality occurs). The same processing as when 0m cannot be received normally (command error occurs) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the second variation performance started corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is terminated at this timing and the opening performance is started.

Then, the opening image is displayed (the performances other than the opening performance are substantially completed) without stop-displaying the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a in the losing mode and the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and without erasing the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C as non-animation for one frame.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, in the normal game state, during the execution of the second variation performance started corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, when the stop command (stop signal) of the variation display of the first special symbol started after the end of the variation display of the second special symbol is received, the second variation performance is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the second variable effect is terminated by receiving the stop command, the second variable effect can be terminated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 to 187, in the normal game state, during the execution of the second variation performance started corresponding to the loss variation display of the second special symbol, when the stop command (stop signal) of the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol started after the end of the variation display of the second special symbol is received, the second variation performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a, variation display of the special symbol TZ) is terminated in a losing mode. has become Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to perform processing such as switching the performance pattern from the losing mode to the big hit mode, and to end the second variation performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 to 187, in the normal game state, during the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ started corresponding to the loss variable display of the second special symbol, when the stop command (stop signal) of the first special symbol jackpot variable display started after the end of the second special symbol variable display is received, the sub second variable display 82 is made to stop display the losing mode (lights out), but the sub first variable display 8 1, the lamp pattern LZ of the jackpot mode (lighting) is not stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to dispense with processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a losing mode (extinguishing) to a big win mode, and to terminate the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, in the normal game state, during the display of the icon (second execution information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, when the stop command (stop signal) of the variable display of the second special symbol started after the variable display of the second special symbol is finished, the icon is erased. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. Further, since the icon is erased at the timing of receiving the stop command, the icon can be erased without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 to 187, in the normal game state, when the command (signal at stop) of the variable display of the second special symbol is received while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, and when the command (signal at stop) of the variable display of the first special symbol is received during the display of the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, the same performance mode is received. , the icon is deleted. Therefore, it is possible to naturally erase the icon without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 to 187, in the normal game state, when the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is not "0", when the customer waiting state designation command indicating that the special figure reservation number is "0" is received, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced to "0". has become Therefore, the player does not have doubts that the variable performance is not executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in the normal game state, during the execution of the second variation performance started corresponding to the big win variation display of the second special symbol, when the command (signal at the time of stop) of the loss variation display of the first special symbol started after the end of the variation display of the second special symbol is received, the second variation performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a, variation display of the special symbol TZ) may be terminated in a jackpot manner.

(Concrete example 13 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 13 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIG. The upper diagram in FIG. 188 is a timing chart 13 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m in the specific game state, and FIGS. 188(a) to (f) are the timing chart 13 in FIG.

First, at the timing of T0, the game ball wins in the first start port 45 by hitting to the left by the player, or the game ball wins in the first start port 45 during the normal game state before entering the specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state). be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0", and processing for starting the first variation performance is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E while the fluctuating BGM is being output is reduced from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. Further, since the first reserved icon display area 70B is not displayed, the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C as a 10-frame animation without shift display (decrease display) of the reserved icon from the first reserved icon display area 70B. Also, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI is in the state of rotating operation (performance operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the second special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the second starting port 47. When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (a second special figure reservation number designation command as a winning signal, a look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure reservation number stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure pending number displayed in the sub second pending display device 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in the specific update mode, the pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display part 70D1 of the second pending icon display area 70D, and the winning sound based on the current winning is output as the winning to the second start port 47 in the specific game state (see FIG. 188 (a)) .

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Further, the rotating motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 188(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop designation command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the processing for ending the first variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended, and accordingly the output of the changing BGM is maintained (see FIG. 188(c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the second special symbol reservation number memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from ``1'' to ``0'', and the second special symbol loss variation display is started. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (the second special figure reservation number designation command, the special design designation command, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command as the start time signal) (command abnormality occurs), the second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process of starting the second fluctuation production is not performed (see FIG. 188 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop time command (a special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the first variation performance started corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Further, the first lamp pattern LZ, which has been variably displayed on the sub-first variable display 81, is stop-displayed (turned off) in a failing mode (see FIG. 188(e)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol reservation number and the second special symbol reservation number memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m are "0", so the state shifts to the customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is reduced from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and waits until the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed or a new special symbol fluctuation display is started (see FIG. 188 (f)).

At the timing of T3 or T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, but the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command (command abnormality occurs). The same processing as when 0m cannot be received normally (command error occurs) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the process of ending the variable effect started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol at this timing is performed, and the effect control unit 130m memorizes (grasp). The number of the second special figure pending is changed from "1" to "0".

Then, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped at ``814'' which is the same as the performance pattern 70a, and the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is reduced from '1' to '0' in a specific update mode.

(Specific example 14 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 14 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIG. The upper diagram in FIG. 189 is a timing chart 14 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m in the specific game state, and FIGS. 189(a) to (f) are the timing charts 14 in FIG.

First, at the timing of T0, the game ball wins in the first start port 45 by hitting to the left by the player, or the game ball wins in the first start port 45 during the normal game state before entering the specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state). be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0", and processing for starting the first variation production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E while the fluctuating BGM is being output is reduced from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. Further, since the first reserved icon display area 70B is not displayed, the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C as a 10-frame animation without shift display (decrease display) of the reserved icon from the first reserved icon display area 70B. Also, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI is in the state of rotating operation (performance operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the second special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the second starting port 47. When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (a second special figure reservation number designation command as a winning signal, a look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure reservation number stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special pending number displayed in the sub second pending display 84 and the second special pending number display area 70F is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, the pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display portion 70D1 of the second pending icon display area 70D in a normal additional mode, and a winning sound based on this winning is output as a winning to the second starting port 47 during the specific game state (Fig. 189 ( a) see).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the rotating motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 189(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop designation command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the processing for ending the first variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended, and accordingly, the output of the changing BGM is maintained (see FIG. 189(c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the second special symbol reserve number stored (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from ``1'' to ``0'', and the big hit variation display of the second special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (second special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the second special figure reservation number stored (grasp) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process of starting the second fluctuation production is not performed (see FIG. 189 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a jackpot mode. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop time command (a special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the first variation performance started corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that has been variably displayed on the sub-first variation display 81 is stopped (turned off) in the losing mode, but the second lamp pattern LZ in the jackpot mode is not stopped on the sub-second variation display 82 (see FIG. 189 (e)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the opening period of the jackpot game is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m performs processing for starting the opening effect.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and characters of "big win" is displayed. In addition, the second special figure reservation number "1" displayed in the sub second reservation display device 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F normally receives the winning command (winning signal) based on the winning to the second start port 47, or the start command based on the start of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (second special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command as a start signal) The production control unit 130m receives. (See FIG. 189(f)).

In other words, even when the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (winning signal) based on the winning to the first start port 45 (winning signal) and the start command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special figure pending number specification command, special symbol specifying command, special figure fluctuation pattern specifying command as the starting signal), the second special figure pending number "1" displayed in the sub second pending display 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F is maintained. .

At the timing of T3 or T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, but the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command (command abnormality occurs). The same processing as when 0m cannot be received normally (command error occurs) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the process of ending the variable effect started corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol at this timing and starting the opening effect is performed.

Then, the opening image is displayed (the performances other than the opening performance are substantially finished) without stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a in the losing mode and the variablely displayed special pattern TZ, and without erasing the icon TI (ordinary icon, special icon) displayed in the icon display area 70C as non-animation for one frame.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in the specific game state, during the execution of the first variation performance started corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, when the stop command (stop signal) of the variation display of the second special symbol started after the end of the variation display of the first special symbol is received, the first variation performance is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the first variable effect is terminated by receiving the stop command, the first variable effect can be terminated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in the specific game state, during the execution of the first variation performance started corresponding to the loss variation display of the first special symbol, when the stop command (stop signal) of the second special symbol jackpot variation display started after the end of the variation display of the first special symbol is received, the first variation performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a, variation display of the special symbol TZ) is terminated in a losing mode. has become Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to perform processing such as switching the performance pattern from the losing mode to the big hit mode, and to end the first variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in the specific game state, during the variable display of the first lamp symbol LZ started corresponding to the loss variable display of the first special symbol, when the stop command (stop signal) of the second special symbol jackpot variation display started after the end of the first special symbol variation display is received, either the sub first variation display 81 or the sub second variation display 82 is a lamp diagram of the jackpot mode (lighting). The pattern LZ is designed not to be stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to dispense with processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a losing mode (extinguishing) to a big winning mode, and to terminate the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in the specific game state, during the display of the icon (first execution information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, when a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is started after the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, the icon is erased. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. Further, since the icon is erased at the timing of receiving the stop command, the icon can be erased without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in the specific game state, when the command (signal at stop) of the variable display of the first special symbol is received while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed, and when the command (signal at stop) of the variable display of the second special symbol is received during the display of the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the same effect mode is received. , the icon is deleted. Therefore, it is possible to naturally erase the icon without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in the specific game state, when the second special pending number displayed in the sub second pending display 84 and the second special pending number display area 70F is not "0", when the customer waiting state designation command indicating that the special pending number is "0" is received, the second special pending number displayed in the sub second pending display 84 and the second special pending number display area 70F is reduced to "0". has become Therefore, the player will not have doubts that the variable performance is not executed even though the second special figure pending number is not "0".

In the specific game state, during the execution of the first variation performance started corresponding to the big win variation display of the first special symbol, when a command (signal at the time of stop) of the loss variation display of the second special symbol started after the end of the variation display of the first special symbol is received, the first variation performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a, variation display of the special symbol TZ) may be terminated in a jackpot mode.

(Specific example 15 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 19 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIG. The upper diagram in FIG. 190 is a timing chart 15 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m in the specific game state, and FIGS. 190(a) to (f) are the timing charts 15 in FIG.

First, at the timing of T0, the second special symbol retention variation display is started as the second special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (the second special figure reservation number designation command, the special design designation command, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command as the start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0", and the second fluctuation production is started.

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is reduced from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode while the changing BGM is being output. Also, one pending icon HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D is shift-displayed (reduced display) as an animation of 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the second lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation). Also, the icon TI is in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion).

Next, at the timing of T1, the game ball enters the first starting port 45 for reasons such as left-handed hitting by the player, so that the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "0" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (a first special figure reservation number designation command as a winning signal, a look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in the specific update mode, but since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning to the first start port 45 during the specific game state means that the winning sound based on this winning is not output (see FIG. 190 (a)) ).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the rotating motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 190(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop designation command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the processing for ending the first variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ are extended, and accordingly the output of the BGM during variation is maintained (see FIG. 190(c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from ``1'' to ``0'', and the loss variation display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the first special figure reservation number stored (grasp) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process of starting the first fluctuation production is not performed (see FIG. 190 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop time command (a special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the second variation performance started corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that has been variably displayed on the second sub-variable display 82 is stop-displayed (turned off) in a failing mode (see FIG. 190(e)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol reservation number and the second special symbol reservation number memorized (understood) by the main control part 110m are "0", so the state shifts to the customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-second reservation display device 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is reduced from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and waits until the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed or a new special symbol fluctuation display is started (see FIG. 190 (f)).

At the timing of T3 or T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, but the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command (command abnormality occurs). The same processing as when 0m cannot be received normally (command error occurs) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the time of T6, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the process of ending the variable effect started corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol at this timing is performed, and the effect control unit 130m memorizes (grasp). The number of the first special figure pending is changed from "1" to "0".

Although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped at ``814'' which is the same as the production pattern 70a, and the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from '1' to '0' in a specific update mode. In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the second special symbol as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

(Concrete example 16 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 20 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIG. The upper diagram in FIG. 191 is a timing chart 16 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m in the specific game state, and FIGS. 191(a) to (f) are the timing charts 16 in FIG.

First, at the timing of T0, the second special symbol retention variation display is started as the second special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (the second special figure reservation number designation command, the special design designation command, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command as the start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0", and the second fluctuation production is started.

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is reduced from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode while the changing BGM is being output. Also, the pending icon HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D is displayed as the icon TI by shifting display (reduction display) as an animation of 20 frames in the icon display area 70C. Also, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI is in the state of rotating operation (performance operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the game ball enters the first starting port 45 for reasons such as left-handed hitting by the player, so that the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "0" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (a first special figure reservation number designation command as a winning signal, a look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number memorized (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in the specific update mode, but since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning to the first start port 45 during the specific game state means that the winning sound based on this winning is not output (see FIG. 191 (a)) ).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the rotating motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 191(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the performance control part 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control part 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the processing for ending the second variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended, and accordingly the output of the changing BGM is maintained (see FIG. 191(c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (understood) by the main control part 110m decreases from ``1'' to ``0'', and the big hit variation display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process of starting the fluctuation production is not performed (see FIG. 191 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in the jackpot manner. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop time command (a special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the second variation performance started corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that has been variably displayed on the sub-second variation display 82 is stopped (turned off) in a losing mode, but the first sub-variation display 81 does not stop and display the first lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode (see FIG. 191 (e)). In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the second special symbol as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the opening period of the jackpot game is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m performs processing for starting the opening effect.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and characters of "big win" is displayed. In addition, the first special figure reservation number "1" displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E normally receives the winning command (winning signal) based on the new winning to the first start port 45, or the start command based on the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (first special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command as a start signal) The production control unit 130m receives. (See FIG. 191(f)).

In other words, even when the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (winning signal) based on the winning to the second starting port 47 (winning signal) and the start command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (second special figure pending number specification command, special symbol specifying command, special figure fluctuation pattern specifying command as the starting signal), the first special figure pending number "1" displayed in the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E is maintained. .

At the timing of T3 or T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, but the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command (command abnormality occurs). The same processing as when 0m cannot be received normally (command error occurs) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the second variation performance started corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is terminated at this timing and the opening performance is started.

Then, the opening image is displayed without stop-displaying the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a in the losing mode and the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and without erasing the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C as non-animation for one frame (substantially, the performance other than the opening performance is completed).

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 to 191, in the specific game state, during the execution of the second variation performance started corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, when the stop time command (stop time signal) of the variation display of the first special symbol started after the end of the variation display of the second special symbol is received, the second variation performance is ended. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the second variable performance ends at the timing of receiving the stop command, it is possible to end the second variable performance without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 to 191, in the specific game state, during the execution of the second variation performance started corresponding to the loss variation display of the second special symbol, when the command (signal at the time of stop) of the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol started after the end of the variation display of the second special symbol is received, the second variation performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a, variation display of the special symbol TZ) is terminated in a losing mode. has become Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to perform processing such as switching the performance pattern from the losing mode to the big hit mode, and to end the second variation performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 to 191, in the specific game state, during the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ started corresponding to the loss variable display of the first special symbol, when the stop command (stop signal) of the first special symbol jackpot variation display started after the end of the second special symbol variation display is received, both the sub first variation display 81 and the sub second variation display 82 are in the jackpot mode (lighting) lamp. The pattern LZ is not stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to dispense with processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a losing mode (extinguishing) to a big win mode, and to terminate the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 to 191, in the specific game state, during the display of the icon (second execution information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, when the stop command (stop signal) of the variable display of the first special symbol started after the variable display of the second special symbol is finished, the icon is erased. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. Further, since the icon is erased by receiving the stop command, the icon can be erased without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 to 191, in the specific game state, when the command (signal at stop) of the variable display of the second special symbol is received during the display of the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, and when the command (signal at stop) of the variable display of the first special symbol is received during the display of the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, the same effect mode is received. , the icon is deleted. Therefore, it is possible to naturally erase the icon without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 to 191, in the specific game state, when the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is not "0", when the customer waiting state designation command indicating that the special figure reservation number is "0" is received, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced to "0". has become Therefore, the player does not have doubts that the variable performance is not executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

In the specific game state, during the execution of the second variation performance started corresponding to the big hit variation display of the second special symbol, when a command (signal at the time of stop) of the loss variation display of the first special symbol started after the end of the variation display of the second special symbol is received, the second variation performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a, variation display of the special symbol TZ) may be terminated in a big win mode.

(Second embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a production lever device 23 is provided in addition to the production button 17 as an operation means that can be operated by the player.

First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 192 . FIG. 192 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment. Note that description of the same parts as in the first embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 192, a production lever device 23 functioning as an input device is provided on the central bottom side portion of the upper plate 11 so as to form the front and back of the production button device 16 .
The production lever device 23 is provided on the central bottom side of the upper plate 11 so as to form the front and back of the production button device 16, and is provided with a production lever 24 that the player can pull toward the front side, a production lever detection switch (not shown) for detecting the operation of the production lever 24, and a lever vibration motor (not shown) for vibrating the production lever 24. By operating the production lever 24, the player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1. are

Since the performance button device 16 and the performance lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11, when the button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the performance lever 24 through the upper plate 11 serving as a transmission member. On the other hand, when the lever vibration motor for vibrating the production lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the production button 17 via the upper plate 11.例文帳に追加In other words, when a player operates one operation part by hand, when a vibration effect (vibration effect with/without the validity period of the operation part related to the anticipation vibration effect, the dialogue notice effect, the step-up notice effect, the pseudo continuous effect, the development effect, the cut-in effect, the decision effect, the re-lottery effect, the confirmation effect, etc.) for vibrating the other operation part is executed, the vibration is transmitted to the player's hand via the other control part.

Further, since the performance button device 16 and the performance lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11 attached to the glass frame 4, when the button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the firing handle via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4 which play a role of a transmission member. Furthermore, when a lever vibration motor for vibrating the effect lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 17 via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4. - 特許庁

(decision production pattern decision table)
FIG. 193 is a diagram showing a determined effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a determined effect pattern in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 193, the decided effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each decided effect pattern, and the decided effect pattern to be selected, and the effect structure (effective suggestive effect, effective period, effect content) of each determined effect pattern is described for reference.

'Effective suggestion effect' is an introduction effect suggesting that the effective period may occur, and specifically, it is a effect of moving and displaying a translucent effect button image simulating the effect button 17 and a translucent effect lever image simulating the effect lever 24 on the first image display device 70 and gathering the translucent effect button image and the translucent effect lever image toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 5 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the final effect ends when the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 is operated once or 5 seconds elapse.

The ``operation target'' in the effective period column indicates the type of operation part (performance button 17, performance lever 24) whose operation is valid during the validity period, and if it is a ``performance button'', the operation of the performance button 17 is effective, and if it is a ``performance lever'', the operation of the performance lever 24 is effective.

The ``promoting performance'' is a performance to prompt the operation of the operation part (performance button 17, performance lever 24) during the effective period, specifically, as a result of executing the effective suggestive performance or without executing the effective suggestive performance, an opaque performance button image or an opaque performance lever image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 5 different from the operation sounds 1 to 4 described above is output.

``Normal button white'' in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 which is in a non-protruding normal state and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image.
"Protruding button red" indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.
“Protruding button rainbow” indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

"Normal lever" indicates that an effect lever image imitating the effect lever 24 of a predetermined size is displayed as the opaque effect lever image described above.
“Large lever rainbow” indicates that an effect lever image simulating the effect lever 24 larger than a predetermined size is displayed as the opaque effect lever image described above.

"Operation part state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the operation part (performance button 17, performance lever 24) during the effective period, and "normal (white)" indicates that if the target operation part is the performance button 17, it is in a normal state in which it does not protrude and the performance button 17 emits white light. "Normal (red)" indicates that if the target operation unit is the production button 17, it is in a normal state in which it does not protrude, and the production button 17 emits light in red. "Normal (rainbow)" indicates that if the target operating portion is the effect lever 24, it is in a normal state in which the effect lever 24 does not protrude, and the effect lever 24 emits light in rainbow colors. "Protrusion (red)" indicates that if the target operation unit is the production button 17, it is in a protruding state and the production button 17 emits light in red. "Protrusion (rainbow)" indicates that if the target operation unit is the production button 17, it is in a protruding state, and the production button 17 emits light in a rainbow color to confirm a big hit. In addition, since the production lever 24 does not have a protruding state, it is only in a normal state.

The 'performance content' indicates the content of the performance executed when the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period or when the effective period elapses, and 'decided success performance period 11 seconds (6 seconds for performance mode H)' indicates that the performance execution period related to the determined success performance in the performance mode other than the performance mode H is 11 seconds, and that the performance execution period related to the determined success performance in the performance mode H is 6 seconds.

``Failure'' in the column of the determination mode means that the first movable member 73 does not operate and the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color, so that the determination failure performance suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is executed.
"Success" means that the first movable member 73 operates to the maximum operating position and emits light in rainbow colors, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, thereby indicating that a determined success performance suggesting execution of a jackpot game is executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the column of button vibration indicates that a vibrator for vibrating the performance button 17 determines that a strong vibration performance (determined success vibration performance) is executed in which the vibrator vibrates strongly for 4 seconds from the start of the success performance (=when the performance button 17 is operated or at the end of the effective period) and then strongly vibrates for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second.

"Rainbow light emission (11 seconds)" in the column of button light emission indicates that the performance button LED for lighting the performance button 17 is determined to emit rainbow light for 11 seconds (longer period than the strong vibration of the performance button 17) from the start of the successful performance (=when the performance button 17 is operated or when the effective period ends). Even if the operation target is the production lever 24, the production button 17 emits rainbow light.

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each promotion effect is "normal button white" < "protruding button red" < "normal lever" < "protruding button rainbow" = "large lever rainbow". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot in each operation unit state is "normal" < "protruding".

A first feature of the determination performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 193 is that when a determination success performance is executed, a vibration performance (determination success vibration performance) is executed by generating an effective period and vibrating the performance button 17 or the performance lever 24.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a big winning game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The second feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 193 is that the effective period is generated over the longest period as the effective period generated during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player misses the operation of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the decided effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 193 is that the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 vibrates over the longest period of time as the strong vibration effect that occurs during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of the winning performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A fourth feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 193 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed over a longer period than the vibrating period of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 . Therefore, even after the vibration of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 is finished, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Frame Accessory Initial Operation Pattern Decision Table)
FIG. 194 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17, effect lever 24) in the second embodiment.

The type of command at the time of power ON and the initial operation pattern to be selected are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described for reference.

The "initial operation pattern 01" is determined when a power-on designation command is received, the production button 17 rises greatly, the production button 17 and the production lever 24 continuously vibrate for 2.5 seconds, the production button 17 returns to the origin, and then the production button 17 and the production lever 24 intermittently vibrate for 2.5 seconds (vibration of 1.25 seconds→interval of 1 second→vibration of 1.25 seconds), during which the production button 17 changes from red to green to green. Lights up (lights up) in blue order.

The ``initial operation pattern 02'' is determined when a first power supply restoration designation command indicating that the customer is waiting for a customer is received, the performance button 17 is greatly raised, the performance button 17 and the performance lever 24 are continuously vibrated for 2 seconds, the performance button 17 is returned to the origin after that, and the performance button 17 is lit (lighted) in blue during that period.

The ``initial operation pattern 03'' is determined when a second power supply restoration designation command indicating that special symbols are being variably displayed or a third power supply restoration designation command indicating that a jackpot game is being played is received, the performance button 17 is largely raised, the performance button 17 and the performance lever 24 are continuously vibrated for 2 seconds, the performance button 17 is returned to the origin, and the performance button 17 is extinguished during that period.

Note that the continuous vibration time (2.5 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2.5 seconds) of the performance button 17 and the performance lever 24 are different from the vibration time of the vibration performance executed during the variable performance (vibration performance during the speech announcement performance, vibration performance during the step-up notice performance, vibration performance during the pseudo continuous performance, vibration performance during the development performance, vibration performance during the cut-in performance, vibration performance during the decision performance, vibration performance during the re-lottery performance, and vibration performance during the confirmation performance).

The first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the frame role object (production button 17, production lever 24) differs between when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The second feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is that the initial operation of the production button 17 at the time of turning on the power is to execute an operation that is not in the initial operation of the production button 17 at the time of power restoration. Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

It should be noted that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. In this way, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame object.

The third feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the frame role object (production button 17) is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The fourth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board role object (first movable member, second movable member) is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The performance button LED is extinguished during the variable display of the special symbols or when the power supply is restored during the jackpot game, but the performance button LED may be lit in the same light emission mode as when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state.

The fifth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is that the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is different from the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

Although the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, the opposite may be done.

The sixth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is that the light emission color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 at power on includes a light emission color that is not included in the light emission color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 at the time of power restoration. Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored).

It should be noted that the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power restoration may include a emission color that is not included in the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power-on.

The seventh feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is that the vibration time of the production button 17 and the production lever 24 at the time of power-on or power recovery is different from the vibration time of the vibration production executed during the variable production (vibration production during dialogue announcement production, vibration production during step-up notice production, vibration production during pseudo continuous production, vibration production during development production, vibration production during cut-in production, vibration production during decision production, vibration production during re-lottery production, and vibration production during fixed production). Therefore, it becomes possible to grasp that it is the vibration in the initial operation of the production button 17 and the production lever 24 .

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is that the initial vibration of the button vibration motor and the lever vibration motor, which are not detected as to whether they are at the origin position, is performed by covering the initial action of the production button 17, which is detected as to whether they are at the origin position. Therefore, it is possible to simultaneously check the operation of the effect button 17 and the operation of the button vibration motor and the lever vibration motor, thereby shortening the time required for operation confirmation.

The production lever 24 may be movable between the normal position and the production position, and may be operated (moved, vibrated) simultaneously with the production button 17 at the initial operation, or may be operated (moved, vibrated) in a predetermined order (for example, the production button 17→the production lever 24 or vice versa). In this case, the effect lever 24 may be arranged at the normal position when the "normal lever" is used in the determined effect, and the effect lever 24 may be moved to the effect position when the "large lever" is used.

In addition, although the effective period of the effect lever 24 was only 5 seconds for a single hit related to the determined effect, the effect lever 24 may be operated a plurality of times, for example, such as 5 seconds of continuous pull, and the effect may be advanced for each operation of the effect lever 24 (e.g., the level gauge is raised), and when the number of operations reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 5 times), a success effect or a determined failure effect may be executed, or the effect lever 24 may be continuously operated such as 5 seconds, so that the operation of the effect lever 24 continues. The performance may be advanced (for example, the level gauge is increased) while the game is being played, and when the duration reaches a predetermined period (eg, 3 seconds), the success performance or the failure performance may be executed.

In addition, in the effective period related to the development performance or the pseudo-continuous performance, the performance lever 24 may be operated once, the performance lever 24 may be continuously pulled, or the performance lever 24 may be extended (for example, 2 seconds) when the performance with high expectation for big win is executed. In the case of continuous pulling, the performance is advanced for each operation of the performance lever 24 (for example, the level gauge is raised, etc.), and when the number of times of operation reaches a predetermined number (for example, three times), the SPSP development performance or the pseudo continuous success performance is preferably executed. In the case of a long draw, the performance is developed (for example, the level gauge is raised, etc.) while the operation of the performance lever 24 is continued, and when the duration reaches a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the SPSP development performance or the pseudo continuous success performance is preferably executed.

In addition, when the performance button 17 and the performance lever 24 are pulled or continuously pulled, the performance button 17 and the performance lever 24 may be weakly vibrated every time the performance progresses (the level gauge is raised to the next stage).

Further, the vibration strength of the performance button 17 includes weak vibration and strong vibration, and the vibration strength of the performance lever 24 includes strong vibration, but even if the strong vibration is the same, the strong vibration of the performance lever 24 may be higher than that of the performance button 17, or the strong vibration of the performance button 17 may be higher than that of the performance lever 24. - 特許庁

Also, the type of vibration (vibration time, vibration intensity) may be varied according to the type of effective period (operation prompting image: single-press, long-press, repeated-press, long-pull, consecutive-pull). For example, a single hit of the production button 17 for 3 seconds during the dialog announcement effect or a pseudo-continuous production produces a weak vibration of 1 second, a long press of the production button 17 for 4 seconds during a development production produces a weak vibration of 1 second, a single push of the production button 17 during a cut-in production produces a weak vibration of 3 seconds, a single push of the production button 17 for 5 seconds during a final production produces a strong vibration of 4 seconds → 5 seconds, and a long press of the production lever 24 for 4 seconds produces a strong vibration of 1 second.

In addition, when the reserved icon or the icon changes to a display mode (for example, red or rainbow) with high expectation of big win, the performance button 17 and the performance lever 24 may be vibrated weakly or strongly for one second.

(Third Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In addition, in the third embodiment, the starting winning device 430 having the first starting port 450 and the second starting port 470 is provided at the position where the first starting port 45 in the first embodiment was, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in the order of winning the first starting port 450 or the second starting port 470, and the pending icon display area 70B for displaying the first pending icon and the second pending icon is provided. And, in the normal game state, pre-determination of special figure determination information based on the winning of the first start port 450 and pre-determination of the special figure determination information based on the winning of the second start port 470 are performed, and the look-ahead notice effect is performed. Note that description of the same parts as in the first embodiment will be omitted.

(Configuration of starting prize device)
First, the configuration of the startup winning device 430 in the third embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 195, the starting prize winning device 43 has an internal space S with a ball entrance 440 at the top. Openings 440c and 440d are provided on both left and right sides of the central portion in the vertical direction of the internal space S to allow the inflow of game balls from the game area 5a. A first start port 450 and a first start port detection switch 450a are provided at a position on the left side of the internal space S, and a second start port 470 and a second start port detection switch 470a are provided at a position on the right side of the internal space S.

In addition, immediately below the ball entrance 440 and above the first start port 450 and the second start port 470, there is provided a distribution member 440a that alternately distributes the game balls flowing in from the ball entrance 440 to the first start port 450 and the second start port 470 and flows down. is provided with a discharge port 440d.

The distribution member 440a has a substantially inverted T shape with an upright portion that rises upward from the left-right center of a flat plate portion that extends in the left-right direction. In the right inclined state, the left ball receiving portion is positioned below the ball inlet 440, and when a game ball is received in the left ball receiving portion, the weight of the game ball converts to the left inclined state, and the game ball in the left ball receiving portion flows down toward the first start opening 450. On the other hand, in the left inclined state, the right ball receiving portion is positioned below the ball inlet 440, and when the game ball is received in the right ball receiving portion, the right ball is converted to the right inclined state by the weight of the game ball. By causing the game balls in the receiving portion to flow down toward the second starting port 470, the game balls flowing in from the ball entering port 440 are alternately distributed to the first starting port 450 and the second starting port 470.例文帳に追加

(Concrete example of when a left-handed game ball wins the starting hole in the normal game state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 195, a specific example of a case where a left-handed game ball enters a starting hole in a normal game state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 195(a), in the state where "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70E in the normal game state, the second special symbol variation display (second variation effect) is executed, the icon corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the icon display area 70C, the suspension icon is not displayed in the suspension icon display area 70B, and the distribution member 44a is tilted to the right. shall be When a game ball enters the ball entrance 44 in this state, the game ball is received by the left ball receiving portion of the distribution member 440a located directly below the ball entrance 440, and the distribution member 440a operates in the leftward tilting direction due to the weight of the game ball.

Then, as shown in FIG. 195(b), when the sorting member 440a is converted to the left inclined state, the game ball received in the left ball receiving portion flows down toward the first starting port 450, and after winning the first starting port 450, the game ball flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the first reserved number increases by 1, the first special figure reserved number display area 70F becomes "1", and the reserved icon corresponding to the first special symbol is additionally displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B.

Further, when the game ball enters the ball entrance 440, as shown in FIG. 195(c), the game ball is received by the right ball receiving portion of the distribution member 440a located directly below the ball entrance 440, and the distribution member 44a operates in the rightward tilting direction due to the weight of the game ball.

Then, as shown in FIG. 195(d), when the distribution member 440a is converted to the right-tilted state, the game ball received in the right ball receiving portion flows down toward the second starting port 470, and after winning the second starting port 470, the game ball flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the second reserved number increases by 1, the second special figure reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", and the reserved icon corresponding to the second special symbol is additionally displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B.

Further, when a game ball enters the ball entrance 440, as shown in FIG. 195(e), the game ball is received by the right ball receiving portion of the distribution member 440a located directly below the ball entrance 440, and the distribution member 440a operates in the leftward tilting direction due to the weight of the game ball.

Also, at this time, the variable performance is terminated (the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed) in response to the stop display of the variable display of the second special pattern (second variable performance), and the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C is extinguished and displayed. Further, the first special symbol reserved number display area 70F becomes "0" with the start of the next variable display (first variable performance) of the first special symbol, and the reserved icon displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B is shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon.

Then, as shown in FIG. 195(f), when the sorting member 440a is converted to the left inclined state, the game ball received in the left ball receiving portion flows down toward the first starting port 450, and after winning the first starting port 450, the game ball flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the first reserved number increases by 1, the first special figure reserved number display area 70F becomes "1", and the reserved icon corresponding to the first special symbol is additionally displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B.

(Specific example of when a game ball hit left in a specific game state wins a starting hole)
Next, with reference to FIG. 196, a specific example of a case where a game ball struck left in a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) wins a starting hole will be described.

As shown in FIG. 196(a), the second special symbol variation display (second variation effect) is executed in a state where "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70E in the specific game state, the icon corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the reservation icon is not displayed in the reservation icon display area 70B, and the distribution member 440a is tilted to the right. state. When a game ball enters the ball entrance 440 in this state, the game ball is received by the left ball receiving portion of the distribution member 440a located directly below the ball entrance 440, and the distribution member 440a operates in the leftward tilting direction due to the weight of the game ball.

Then, as shown in FIG. 196(b), when the sorting member 440a is converted to the left inclined state, the game ball received in the left ball receiving portion flows down toward the first starting port 450, and after winning the first starting port 450, the game ball flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the first reserved number increases by 1 and the first special figure reserved number display area 70F becomes "1", but the reserved icon corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B because of the specific game state.

Further, when the game ball enters the ball entrance 440, as shown in FIG. 196(c), the game ball is received by the right ball receiving portion of the distribution member 440a located directly below the ball entrance 440, and the distribution member 440a moves in the right tilt direction due to the weight of the game ball.

Then, as shown in FIG. 196(d), when the distribution member 440a is converted to the right-tilted state, the game ball received in the right ball receiving portion flows down toward the second starting port 470, and after winning the second starting port 470, the game ball flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the second reserved number increases by 1, the second special figure reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", and the reserved icon corresponding to the second special symbol is additionally displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B.

Further, when a game ball enters the ball entrance 440, as shown in FIG. 196(e), the game ball is received by the right ball receiving portion of the distribution member 440a located directly below the ball entrance 440, and the distribution member 440a operates in the leftward tilting direction due to the weight of the game ball.

Further, at this time, the variable performance is terminated (the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed) corresponding to the stop display of the variable display of the second special pattern (second variable performance), and the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C is extinguished and displayed. Further, the first special symbol reserved number display area 70F becomes '0' with the start of the next variable display (first variable performance) of the first special symbol, but the reserved icon displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B is not shift-displayed and the variable performance is executed in a state where the icon is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 196(f), when the sorting member 440a is converted to the left inclined state, the game ball received in the left ball receiving portion flows down toward the first starting port 450, and after winning the first starting port 450, the game ball flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the first reserved number increases by 1 and the first special figure reserved number display area 70F becomes "1", but the reserved icon corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B because of the specific game state.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 195 to 196, in the normal game state, the suspended icon corresponding to the first special symbol and the suspended icon corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed in the suspended icon display area 70B in the order of winning the first start opening and the second start opening. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is possible to easily grasp the number of times the variable performance is executed, while in the specific game state, it becomes easy to urge the player to win the second start port 47 by striking to the right, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 195 to 196, in the specific gaming state, the pending icon corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed in the pending icon display area 70B, but the display of the pending number in the first special symbol pending number display area and the sub-first pending display 83 is updated. Therefore, even if a game ball wins the first start hole in the specific game state, the number of reserved balls can be grasped, and the interest in the game can be improved.

195 to 196, in the normal game state, the icon corresponding to the first special symbol and the icon corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed in the icon display area 70B, and in the specific game state, the icon corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed in the icon display area 70B, but the icon corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. Therefore, in the normal game state, the game can be played without worrying about the type of the special pattern, while in the specific game state, it becomes easy to prompt the right player to win the second start port 47, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the specific game state, the reserved icon corresponding to the first special symbol and the icon are not displayed, but the icon corresponding to the first special symbol may be displayed without displaying the suspended icon corresponding to the first special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity that the variable effect is executed without the icon being displayed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The special icon change effect determination processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 197 is a flow chart showing special icon change effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m. It should be noted that the special icon change effect determination process is executed next to the win-time light emission effect execution process of the look-ahead effect process of the effect control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E580-1. If the prefetch designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E580-2, and if the prefetch designation command has not been received, the current special icon change effect determination process is terminated.

In step E580-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E580-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the present time is a period during which a special icon change effect (MAX pending chance effect, puzzle pending chance effect, which will be described later) can be executed. If it is during the special icon change effect executable period, the process proceeds to step E580-4, and if it is not during the special icon change effect executable period, the current special icon change effect determination process is terminated.

The ʻexecutable period of the special icon change effect` is a case where the jackpot game is not being executed, the normal icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Any one of the above three conditions, or only two conditions may be provided.

In step E580-4, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current total number of reservations is the upper limit of "8". When the total number of reservations is the upper limit '8', the process is shifted to step E580-5, and when the total number of reservations is not the upper limit '8' (1 to 7), the process is shifted to step E580-8 assuming that the MAX reservation chance presentation is not executed.

The ``MAX reserved chance performance'' is a performance that can be executed when the total number of reserved items reaches the upper limit of ``8'', and is a kind of look-ahead forewarning presentation that changes all the reserved icons displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B to a special display mode and changes the display mode to a normal display mode or a special display mode when the icon becomes the icon, thereby making the player expect that a big winning game will be executed.

In step E580-5, the sub CPU 130a selects the MAX pending chance icon final mode determination table (see FIG. 198(a)) for determining the display mode when the pending icon targeted for the MAX pending chance effect becomes the icon. The details of the icon final mode determination table for the MAX holding chance will be described later.

In step E580-6, the sub CPU 130a refers to the MAX pending chance icon final mode determination table to determine the final icon display mode of each pending icon. In step E580-7, the sub CPU 130a sets the MAX pending chance effect execution command corresponding to the determined final icon display mode in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current special icon change effect determination process. As a result, the MAX pending chance effect execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the MAX pending chance effect is executed.

In step E580-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current sum of pending numbers is 2 or more and less than 5 (2 to 4). When the total number of reservations is 2 or more and less than 5, the processing is shifted to step E580-9, and when the total number of reservations is not 2 or more and less than 5, the special icon change performance determination processing of this time is terminated assuming that the puzzle reservation chance performance is not executed.

The ``puzzle pending chance effect'' is an effect that can be executed when the total number of pending is 2 or more and less than 5 (2 to 4), and is a kind of look-ahead forewarning effect that makes a player expect a big winning game by changing a target pending icon to a special display mode and executing a stage effect in response to the pending icon displayed in the special display mode becoming the icon.

In step E580-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current pending memory (the latest pending memory according to the prefetching designation command) is for executing the SP ready-to-win effect or above. If the performance is more than the SP ready-to-win performance, the processing is shifted to step E580-10, and if the performance to be less than the SP ready-to-win performance (no ready-to-win performance, normal ready-to-win performance, etc.) is to be executed, the special icon change performance determination processing of this time is terminated assuming that the puzzle holding chance performance is not executed.

In step E580-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a jackpot or ready-to-win effect in the previous pending memory. When there is no jackpot or ready-to-win performance to be executed, the processing is shifted to step E580-11, and when there is a big win or ready-to-win performance to be executed, the special icon change performance determination processing of this time is terminated assuming that the puzzle holding chance performance is not executed.

In step E580-11, sub CPU 130a selects a puzzle pending chance pattern determination table (see FIG. 198(b)) for determining a puzzle pending chance effect pattern (progress scenario). Details of the puzzle pending chance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E580-12, the sub CPU 130a refers to the puzzle pending chance pattern determination table to determine a puzzle pending chance effect pattern, and in step E580-13 determines whether the determined puzzle pending chance effect pattern is a pattern for executing the puzzle pending chance effect. In the case of the effect pattern for executing the puzzle pending chance effect, the processing is shifted to step E580-14, and in the case of the effect pattern not to execute the puzzle pending chance effect, the current special icon change effect processing is terminated.

In step E580-14, the sub CPU 130a sets a puzzle pending chance effect execution command corresponding to the determined effect pattern in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current special icon change effect determination process. As a result, the puzzle pending chance effect execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the puzzle pending chance effect is executed.

(Icon final display mode determination table for MAX pending chance)
FIG. 198(a) is a diagram showing a MAX pending chance icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the icon final display mode in the MAX pending chance presentation.

The icon final display mode determination table for the MAX holding chance is associated with the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the icon final display mode to be selected.

A character A card icon, which is a normal card icon, and a character B card icon, a character C card icon, and a character D card icon, which are special card icons suggesting the possibility of executing a special game, are set in the icon final display mode.

The degree of expectation for winning a jackpot related to a special card icon is higher in the order of (character A card icon <) character B card icon <character C card icon <character D card icon, and the character D card icon is a card icon that determines the jackpot.

Here, as a first characteristic of the final icon display mode determination table for MAX holding chance shown in FIG. 198(a), the selection rate of the final icon display mode is varied according to the planned variation pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the scheduled variation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, the special card icon is selected at a higher rate than when the scheduled variation pattern is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the MAX holding chance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The second feature of the MAX pending chance icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 198(a) is that the special card icon is selected at a higher rate in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the MAX holding chance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the MAX pending chance icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 198(a) is that, in the MAX pending chance effect, a plurality of pending icons are targeted and displayed with a card pending icon different from the normal display mode, but it does not depend on which card pending icon the ready-to-win effect is likely to be executed, and whether or not the ready-to-win effect is executed depends on the special figure determination information corresponding to the card pending icon. As a result, the player will have a sense of expectation for any card holding icon, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Although the performance customization setting by the player does not change the execution ratio of the icon change performance in the MAX suspension chance performance, the performance customization setting (normal setting, simple setting) may change the execution ratio of the icon change performance in the MAX suspension chance performance.

(Puzzle hold chance production pattern decision table)
FIG. 198(b) is a diagram showing a puzzle pending chance rendering pattern determination table referred to when determining a puzzle pending chance rendering pattern (progress scenario).

The puzzle pending chance performance pattern determination table is associated with the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of the performance pattern of each puzzle pending chance performance, the number of suspensions, and the performance pattern of the puzzle pending chance performance to be selected.

As the performance patterns, a performance pattern 0 in which the puzzle pending chance performance is not executed and performance patterns 1 to 6 in which the puzzle pending chance performance is executed are set.

For example, in production pattern 6, 4 reserved icons including 3 reserved icons already displayed when the game ball enters the starting opening and a newly displayed reserved icon are displayed as puzzle reserved icons, and progress production is started. When the puzzle reserved icon changes from the puzzle reserved icon to the relevant icon before the 3rd change, a puzzle piece appears from the relevant icon and the background of the first image display device 70 is covered to cover 1/4 of the screen, and when the puzzle reserved icon changes to the relevant icon before the 2nd change, the puzzle piece appears from the relevant icon. A performance of covering the background of a first image display device 70 is performed to cover 1/2 of the screen, a puzzle piece appears from the icon when the puzzle pending icon becomes the icon before one change, and a performance of covering the background of the first image display device 70 is performed to cover 3/4 of the screen, and when the puzzle pending icon becomes the icon in the change, a puzzle piece appears from the icon and a performance of covering the background of the first image display device 70 is performed to cover 4/4 of the screen.

Here, as a first feature of the puzzle holding chance production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b), the selection rate of each production pattern is made different according to the planned variation pattern. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the scheduled variation pattern is the SP ready-to-win or the total rotation ready-to-win, the performance pattern for executing the puzzle pending chance performance is selected at a higher rate than when the scheduled variation pattern is the SP ready-to-win. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the puzzle holding chance production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The second feature of the puzzle-holding chance effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that the effect pattern for executing the puzzle-holding chance effect is selected at a higher rate in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the puzzle holding chance production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the puzzle pending chance effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that a plurality of pending icons are displayed with puzzle pending icons different from the normal display mode, similar to the MAX pending chance effect, but the ready-to-win effect is executed by the variable effect corresponding to the last puzzle pending icon instead of the variable effect corresponding to the preceding puzzle pending icon. Therefore, it is possible to gradually raise the player's expectation for the last puzzle pending icon, and to improve the interest in the game.

The fourth feature of the puzzle pending chance effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed when the background of the first image display device 70 is covered and 4/4 of the screen is covered as a result of progress effect. Therefore, the player's expectation can be gradually increased by the progress effect executed while the puzzle pending icon is displayed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

A fifth feature of the puzzle pending chance effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that the rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is executed during the variable effect corresponding to the pending icon that is the specific number (for example, the first first) before the last pending icon displayed in a display mode different from the normal display mode is different between when the MAX pending chance effect is executed and when the puzzle pending chance effect is executed (the MAX pending chance effect is higher). Therefore, it is possible to make the timing of the player's sense of anticipation different between the MAX pending chance presentation and the puzzle pending chance presentation, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The sixth feature of the puzzle pending chance effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that the rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is executed during the variable effect corresponding to the last pending icon displayed in a display mode different from the normal display mode differs between when the MAX pending chance effect is executed and when the puzzle pending chance effect is executed (puzzle pending chance effect is higher). Therefore, it is possible to make the timing of the player's sense of anticipation different between the MAX pending chance presentation and the puzzle pending chance presentation, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the MAX pending chance performance is executed, the ratio of executing the ready-to-win performance during the variable performance corresponding to the reserved icon which is the specific number (for example, the first) before the last pending icon displayed in the display mode different from the normal display mode is higher than when the puzzle pending chance performance is executed, but the ratio of the ready-to-reach performance is executed during the variable performance corresponding to the specific pending icon may be higher in the puzzle pending chance performance.

In addition, although the execution ratio of whether or not the puzzle pending chance performance is executed is not changed by the performance customization setting by the player, the execution ratio of whether or not the puzzle pending chance performance is executed may be changed by the performance customization setting (normal setting, simple setting).

(Production example when MAX pending chance production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 199, an example of an effect when the MAX holding chance effect is executed in the normal game state will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 199(a), the variable display (first variable effect) of the first special symbol is executed in the effect mode A (normal game state), and in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). In addition, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, "4" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, seven reservation icons (white icons) are displayed in the reservation icon display area 70B, and the icon (white icon) TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, when the game ball wins the first starting port 450, as shown in FIG. 199(b), the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "4" and the total number of reservations becomes the upper limit "8" When the MAX reservation chance effect is started. Specifically, a character is displayed in the vicinity of the icon display area 70C, and a character image reading "MAX hold chance" is displayed, and as shown in FIG.

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends after the variable time has passed, as shown in FIG. 199(d), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed with the losing number "728", and the icon disappears and is displayed.

Next, when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. 199(e), the second special symbol pending number display area 70F becomes "3" and the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon.

After that, when the character displayed in the vicinity of the icon display area 70C turns over the card icon which is the icon, the icon is turned up and displayed as the character A card icon in FIG.

Then, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 470, as shown in FIG. 199 (g), the second special figure pending number display area 70E becomes "4", and the pending icon is additionally displayed in the eighth display part of the pending icon display area 70B. However, since it is a pending icon displayed after the start of the MAX pending chance production, it is displayed as a white icon that is a normal icon.

Next, when the variation time elapses and the variation display of the first special symbol ends, as shown in FIG. 199(h), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed with the losing number "872", and the icon disappears and is displayed. 199(f) to (h) are performed until the variable performance corresponding to the pending icon displayed as the card icon is completed, and finally the character is erased to complete the MAX pending chance performance.

In this way, in the MAX holding chance presentation, all eight holding icons are displayed as the same card holding icon, and when the icon is displayed, the card is turned over to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win. Therefore, the player comes to have a sense of anticipation for each reserved icon, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, the suspension icon additionally displayed after the start of the MAX suspension chance presentation is displayed as a normal suspension icon instead of the card suspension icon. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to grasp how far the pending icon targeted for the MAX pending chance presentation is, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Example of production when puzzle pending chance production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 200, an example of an effect when the puzzle pending chance effect is executed in the normal game state will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 200(a), the variable display (second variable effect) of the second special symbol is executed in the effect mode A (normal game state), and in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). In addition, "1" is displayed in each of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, two reservation icons (white icons) are displayed in the reservation icon display area 70B, and the icon (white icon) TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, when the game ball wins the first starting port 450, as shown in FIG. 200(b), the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "2" and the total number of reservations becomes 3, and the puzzle reservation chance presentation is started. Specifically, a character image of "puzzle pending chance" is displayed, and all the three pending icons change to puzzle icons shaped like puzzle pieces.

Then, when the variation time has passed and the variation display of the second special symbol is finished, as shown in FIG. 200(c), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed with the losing number "728", and the icon is extinguished and displayed.

Next, when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. 200(d), the first special symbol pending number display area 70E becomes "1", and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, the pending puzzle icon displayed in the pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon. In addition, progress performance is started, a piece of the puzzle appears from the icon, and performance is performed in which 1/2 of the screen is covered by covering two places of the upper right and lower left of the background image of the first image display device 70, and the degree of expectation that the last puzzle pending icon to be announced will be a big hit is suggested step by step.

After that, when the variable time has elapsed and the variable display of the first special symbol ends, as shown in FIG.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) is started, the second special symbol pending number display area 70F becomes "0" as shown in FIG. In addition, the development performance is continued, a piece of the puzzle appears from the icon, and the performance of covering 3/4 of the screen is performed by covering one place on the lower right of the background image of the first image display device 70, and the degree of expectation that the last puzzle pending icon to be announced will be a big hit is suggested step by step.

After that, when the variable time has elapsed and the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, as shown in FIG. When the game ball wins the second starting port 470, the second special figure reserved number display area 70F becomes "1" and the reserved icon is additionally displayed in the second display part of the reserved icon display area 70B, but it is displayed as a white icon which is a normal icon because it is a reserved icon displayed after the puzzle reserved chance performance is started.

Next, when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is started, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, as shown in FIG. In addition, the development performance continues and a piece of the puzzle appears from the icon, and by covering one upper left place of the background image of the first image display device 70, the performance of covering 4/4 of the screen is performed, and the degree of expectation that the last puzzle pending icon to be announced will be a big hit is suggested step by step.

When a predetermined period elapses from the start of variation, normal ready-to-win performance is started, SPSP ready-to-win performance is executed after that, and when the variable time elapses and the variable display of the first special pattern ends, the icon as the puzzle icon displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, in the puzzle pending chance effect, all of the plurality of pending icons are displayed as the same puzzle pending icon, and the progress effect is performed each time the icon becomes the puzzle pending icon. As a result, the player has a sense of anticipation for the final reserved icon, which is an announcement target, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the degree of expectation for a big hit for the last puzzle pending icon to be announced is gradually suggested by the progress effect. Therefore, it is possible to gradually raise the player's expectation for the final reserved icon, which is the notice target, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the puzzle pending chance production, the puzzle pieces only cover the screen, but an object or character information that expects the execution of the SPSP ready-to-win production may be drawn on each piece, and when the entire screen is covered by the four pieces, the object or character information suggesting the execution of the SPSP ready-to-win production may be completed.

Further, although the degree of expectation (possibility) of execution of the SPSP ready-to-win performance by the puzzle pending chance performance is suggested, the degree of expectation (possibility) of execution of the SP ready-to-win performance may be suggested, the degree of expectation (possibility) of execution of a chance performance other than the ready-to-win performance may be suggested, or the degree of expectation (possibility) of simply winning a big hit may be suggested.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance, all the three performance patterns 70a are temporarily stopped (shaking motion), but the left and right performance patterns 70a may be stopped and only the central performance pattern 70a may be temporarily stopped (shaking motion). At this time, all the three performance patterns 70a may perform the fluctuation motion (performance motion), or only the center performance pattern 70a may perform the fluctuation motion (performance motion) without the left and right performance patterns 70a fluctuating motion (performance motion).

Further, in the present embodiment, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE, which constitute the decorative portion, fluctuate (produce) when the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, but only one of the haptic image SK and the pattern effect image ZE may fluctuate (produce).

Further, in the present embodiment, the identification portion composed of the hexagonal base image and the number portion (identification character) does not perform the fluctuation operation (effect operation) when the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the performance design 70a is designed to swing up and down as a temporary stop of the performance design 70a, but the performance design 70a may be expanded and contracted. In this case, when a start command is received during temporary stop, if the performance pattern 70a is deviated from the stop position in the direction of shrinking (smaller than the normal size) or deviated in the direction of expanding (larger than the normal size), it should be displayed in the normal size at the stop position.

Further, in the present embodiment, the performance pattern 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but the performance pattern 70a may not swing and the decorative part and the number part may protrude from the base image. In this case, when the start command is received during the temporary stop, if the decoration part or the number part is displaced in the direction of protruding from the base image, it should be displayed at the stop position in a state of being within the base image.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the specific game state (time saving game state, variable probability game state), since the production pattern 70a is composed only of the number part (identification character), the fluctuation operation (production operation) of the decoration part is not performed when the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. A performance action) may be performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 during the extension of the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a were not mentioned, but during the extension of the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a, at least one of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the frame lighting device 10 may be set to the same mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower luminance than during fluctuation, light emission mode with less change and movement than during fluctuation). At least one of them may be the same light emission mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower luminance than during fluctuation, light emission mode with less change or movement than during fluctuation, or off). In this case, when the next start command is received, the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76 changes (switches) to a light emitting mode corresponding to the fluctuation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m during the temporary stop of the production design 70a, the variable display of the special design TZ and the lamp design LZ is still continuing, but the fluctuation display may be started after instantaneously deriving and displaying like the production design 70a. In this case, as for the special symbols TZ, it is preferable to display the special symbols TZ deviated from the predetermined stop position at the stop position.

In the present embodiment, when a start command or a customer waiting state designation command is received while the icon TI is being displayed, the icon TI is erased with one frame of non-animation. However, the icon TI may be erased with animation of 5 frames, for example, as long as it is shorter than 10 frames for erasing the icon TI, 20 frames for shift display of the hold icon HI, and 10 frames for additional display of the hold icon based on the reception of the stop command.

Also, in the present embodiment, when the start command is received while the number of reserved icons greater than the number of reserved icons is displayed, the surplus reserved icons HI are erased with one frame of non-animation. However, the number of frames may be shorter than 10 frames for erasing the icon TI, 20 frames for shift display of the reserved icon HI, and 10 frames for additional display of the reserved icon.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start when the special figure reservation number becomes a predetermined number, the special figure reservation number notified from the main control unit 110m and the special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m When inconsistency caused by the command abnormality (abnormality with the same number, abnormality with divergence in the increasing direction) occurs, after displaying the number of reservation icons that are one more than the predetermined number, the predetermined number of reservation icons are displayed. However, the predetermined number of reserved icons may be displayed as they are without displaying the reserved icons that are one more than the predetermined number.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start when the special figure reservation number becomes a predetermined number, the special figure reservation number notified from the main control unit 110m and the special figure reservation number that the production control unit 130m has stored (grasp) If there is an inconsistency due to the command abnormality (abnormality with the same number, abnormality with divergence in the increasing direction), the icon is displayed during the variable production executed in response to the reception of the command at the start, but the start The icon may not be displayed during the variable effect executed in response to the reception of the hour command.

In this embodiment, the normal icon is a white icon regardless of the type of effect mode, but the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon may be changed according to the type of effect mode or game state. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of production mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be changed according to the type of production mode or game state.

In addition, when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon is changed according to the type of the production mode or the game state, the action mode (form of the production action) during the variable production may be changed according to the form of the normal icon. Further, even when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon is changed according to the type of production mode or game state, the operation mode (form of production action) during the variable production may be changed according to the form of the special icon.

In addition, in the present embodiment, only the special icon is displayed as a result of the icon change effect, but a special icon that suggests a change to the special icon (displayed in the process of changing to the special icon) or a specific icon that suggests that a specific ready-to-win effect (for example, SP ready-to-win effect or SPSP ready-to-win effect) will be executed may be provided. In this case, the form of the special icon and the specific icon and the mode of the effect action should be different from the form of the normal icon and the special icon and the mode of the effect action.

In addition, in this embodiment, when both the prefetching designation command of the special figure reservation number designation command as the command at the time of winning are normally received, the reservation icon is displayed. However, when the special figure reservation number designation command is received and the prefetching designation command is not normally received, the reservation icon is displayed. In addition, when receiving only one of the special figure pending number designation command and the look-ahead designation command and displaying the pending icon, the icon change effect for this pending icon may not be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode cannot be changed by operating the effect button 17 by the player, but the effect mode may be changed by operating the effect button 17.例文帳に追加In this case, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a based on the command abnormality that the performance control part 130m cannot normally receive the command, the operation for changing the performance mode is not accepted, that is, the change of the performance mode based on the operation of the performance button 17 is regulated.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pending icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the pending icon may be displayed as a button icon prompting the operation of the effect button 17, and the operation change effect of changing the button icon to any one of a normal icon, a special icon, and a specific icon may be executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 while the button icon that activates the effect button 17 is being displayed. In this case, in the operation change effect, the effect button 17 may be changed at a predetermined rate from the first operation mode (non-vibrating, non-projecting state at the standby position) to the second operating mode (vibrating, projecting state at the effect position). In this case, the rate at which the performance button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change performance should be higher than the rate at which the performance button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the above-mentioned speech advance notice performance and final performance.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the effect button image executed in the effective suggestive effect is translucent, but the effect button image may be not translucent but may be an outline only, or may be a silhouette only effect button image.

Further, in the present embodiment, the vibrating effect of the production button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) can be executed when the advance notice effect (speech notice effect, step-up notice effect) and the development effect are executed, but the glass frame 4 may be provided with a frame movable member, and the action effect of operating the frame movable member may be executed when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed in the pre-reach notice effect or the development effect, or the action effect of operating the frame movable member may be executed instead of the vibration effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the vibration performance of the performance button 17 at the time of execution of the advance notice performance (pseudo-continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, decision performance, final performance) or at the time of matching the patterns, but the glass frame 4 may be provided with a frame movable member, and when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed at the time of matching the patterns, the motion performance of operating the frame movable member may be performed, or instead of the vibration performance, the motion performance of operating the frame movable member may be performed.

In the present embodiment, the title is not displayed to indicate that the ready-to-win performance is being performed during the execution of the SP ready-to-win performance or the SPSP ready-to-win performance, but the title may be displayed in any of the display modes with different expectations of the big win (white characters, red letters with a higher expectation for the big win than the white letters, rainbow characters confirming the big win, etc.), or the title may be displayed in white letters and then changed to red letters or rainbow letters.

Further, in the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is performed at the end of the SP ready-to-win effect, but it may be performed in the middle (first period) or the end (second period) of the SP ready-to-win effect, so that the effect button 17 is more likely to protrude when the cut-in effect is performed at the end of the SP ready-to-win effect than when the cut-in effect is performed in the middle of the SP ready-to-win effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an effective period for long-pressing the performance button 17 is generated in the development performance, but an effective period for long-pressing the performance button 17 may be generated as a jackpot announcement performance other than the development performance, and an operation progress performance for progressing the performance according to the long-pressing period during the valid period may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to determine that the long press continues at a plurality of determination timings in the effective period, and to determine to what stage the effect is to be developed based on the determination results.

<Content 1 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional game machine, it is common to store determination information acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition as pending storage, determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the determination information, and execute a variable performance based on the determination result. Among such gaming machines, by increasing or decreasing the display of the reserved images corresponding to each of the reserved memories, or displaying the execution image corresponding to the reserved memories in which the variable effect is executed, there was a game machine that allows the player to grasp the progress of the game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-018225). However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that it is difficult to immediately grasp the number of reservations when the number of reservations changes.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means (production control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the start opening), the special game advantageous to the player. A judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, wherein the subordinate control means comprises a variable performance executing means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device), and an information display means capable of displaying first pending information (holding number) indicating the number of the pending memories and second holding information (holding icon) showing the identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, The image display means updates the display image every predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms), and the information display means is capable of executing reduced display of the first reserved information and reduced display of the second reserved information when the number of the reserved memories decreases, and the frame update timing at which the reduced display of the first reserved information (update to the reserved number decremented by 1) is completed before the frame update timing at which the reduced display of the second reserved information (movement to the center of the next display section in the reserved icon display area) is completed. is faster. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine provided with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means (production control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the start opening), a special game advantageous to the player. A judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, wherein the subordinate control means comprises a variable performance executing means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device), and an information display means capable of displaying first pending information (holding number) indicating the number of the pending memories and second holding information (holding icon) showing the identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, The image display means updates the display image each time a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms) is reached, and the information display means is capable of performing decreasing display of the first pending information and changing display of changing the second pending information in which the variable effect is started to execution information (the icon) when the number of the pending memories decreases, and the display of the change of the second pending information to the execution information (moving from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed before the first frame update timing. The frame update timing at which the decrement display of the pending information (update to the pending number decremented by 1) is completed is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means (production control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the start opening), a special game advantageous to the player. A judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, wherein the subordinate control means comprises a variable performance executing means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device), and an information display means capable of displaying first pending information (holding number) indicating the number of the pending memories and second holding information (holding icon) showing the identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, The image display means updates the display image each time a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms) is reached, and the information display means is capable of displaying a decrease in the first hold information and displaying a decrease in the second hold information when the number of the hold memories decreases, and when the number of the hold memories increases, can execute an increase display of the first hold information and an increase display of the second hold information. Even before the frame update timing at which the movement to the center of the adjacent display part in the pending icon display area) is completed, the increasing display of the first pending information (update to the pending number incremented by 1) is started. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means (production control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the start opening), a special game advantageous to the player. A judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, wherein the subordinate control means comprises a variable performance executing means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device), and an information display means capable of displaying first pending information (holding number) indicating the number of the pending memories and second holding information (holding icon) showing the identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, The image display means updates the display image each time a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms) is reached, and the information display means is capable of performing decreasing display of the first pending information and changing display of changing the second pending information whose variable display is started to execution information (the icon) when the number of the pending memories decreases, and executing increasing display of the first pending information and increasing display of the second pending information when the number of the pending memories increases, and during the changing display of the second pending information. When the number of reserved memories increases, the increased display of the first reserved information (update to the reserved number incremented by 1) is started even before the frame update timing at which the decrease display of the second reserved information (movement from the reserved icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine provided with main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and sub-control means (production control board 130) for controlling the game production based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means, based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the start opening), is a special game advantageous to the player. A judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, wherein the subordinate control means comprises a variable performance executing means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device), and an information display means capable of displaying first pending information (holding number) indicating the number of the pending memories and second holding information (holding icon) showing the identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, The image display means updates the display image each time a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms) is reached, and the information display means is capable of executing an increased display of the first reserved information and an increased display of the second reserved information when the number of the reserved memories increases, and when the number of the reserved memories increases during execution of the variable effect, the increased display of the second reserved information (enlargement of the reserved icon additionally displayed in the reserved icon display area to a normal size) is completed, and the first reserved information is increased before the frame update timing. The frame update timing that results in the completion of the display (update to the pending digits incremented by 1) is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control means (performance control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the start opening), a special game advantageous to the player. A judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, wherein the subordinate control means comprises a variable performance executing means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device), and an information display means capable of displaying first pending information (holding number) indicating the number of the pending memories and second holding information (holding icon) showing the identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, The variable performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance (SP ready-to-play performance, SPSP ready-to-win performance, all-rotation ready-to-win performance) that expects execution of the special game during execution of the variable performance, and the information display means is capable of executing an increased display of the first pending information and an increased display of the second pending information when the number of the pending memories increases, and when the number of the pending memories increases during execution of the specific effect, the increased display of the first pending information (update to the pending number incremented by 1) is executed. , The increase display of the second reserved information is not executed until a predetermined condition is established (the specific effect is completed, the losing effect pattern or the big win effect pattern displayed in a reduced size is displayed in an enlarged manner). By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and subordinate control means (production control board 130) that controls the game production based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the start opening), is a special game that is advantageous to the player. A judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a (jackpot game), a storage means capable of storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a pending memory, and a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, wherein the subordinate control means comprises a variable performance executing means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device), and first pending information (reserved number) indicating the number of the pending memories. and second pending information (holding icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the holding memories, wherein the information display means can execute an increase display of the first holding information and an increase display of the second holding information when the number of the holding memories increases, and the storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the first starting port) as the first holding memory, and the establishment of the second acquisition condition (entering the second starting port). When the number of the first reserved memories increases in the specific game state, the increased display of the first reserved information (updating to the reserved number incremented by 1) is executed, but the increased display of the second reserved information is not executed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (the last variable performance in the specific game state is completed, and the normal game state is returned to). By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

<Content 2 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to judge whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute the special game according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp whether the game control state has been initialized or restored.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) capable of operating (operating, emitting light) in a predetermined manner, initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before power supply was stopped, and initial operation of the movable effect means after the start of power supply (initial action, Effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing initial light emission) and effecting the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means during execution of the game, and the effect control means is adapted to change the operation mode (operation mode, light emission mode, etc.) of the initial operation between when the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine on which a game can be played, an operation means (effect button 17) that can be operated by a player and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode, an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore the state before the power supply is stopped, and perform initial light emission of the operation means after the start of power supply, and perform effect light emission of the operation means during the execution of the game. A performance control means (a performance control board 130) capable of controlling the game is provided, and the performance control means changes the light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission between when the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

As a third configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of performing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode, initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after power supply is started or restoring the state before power supply was stopped, and initial operation and initial light emission of the movable effect means after power supply is started. and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of effecting the effect operation and effect light emission of the movable effect means during execution of the game, wherein the effect control means makes the operation mode of the initial operation of the movable effect means the same (operation mode of the number of steps, operation of each step, etc.) when the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored, but makes the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable effect means different (light emission mode, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode, initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after power supply is started or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped, and performing initial light emission of the movable effect means after the power supply is started and playing the game. wherein the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), and the effect control means makes at least part of the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable effect means the same when the game control state is initialized and when the game control state is restored, but the second movable effect means The lighting mode of the initial light emission in the effect means is made different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied, a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and an initial processing means (main control board 11) that can initialize the control state of the game after the power supply is started or restore the state before the power supply is stopped. 0), and an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of effect patterns displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, the plurality of effect patterns include identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) that allow each to be identified, and the effect control means, when the control state of the game is initialized, combines the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols displayed on the display means with a first combination (for example, " 135"), and when the game control state is restored, the identification characters in the plurality of performance symbols displayed on the display means are set to the second combination (for example, "753"). Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

<Content 3 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
A conventional game machine generally initializes the control state of a game after power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs an initial operation of the movable effect means after power supply is started (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the movable effect means may not be able to perform a suitable initial action.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70), initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the game control state after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and power supply. A performance control means (a performance control board 130) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of the game and performing a performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of the game is provided, and the performance control means is adapted to perform the initial operation after returning the movable performance means to the first position when the movable performance means is at the second position at the start of power supply (recovery of the power supply) at which the game control state is restored. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70); an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after the game is started and performing an effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game, wherein the effect control means performs a return operation of the movable effect means to the first position when the movable effect means is at the second position at the start of power supply (power supply restoration) at which the game control state is restored; If it does not return to the position, the initial operation is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70); an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after the start of the game and performing an effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game, wherein the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74); When the 2 movable effect means is at the first position, the first movable effect means is returned to the first position, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial action of the second movable effect means is performed without the initial action of the first movable effect means. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70); an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after the start of the game and performing an effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game, wherein the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74); When the second movable effect means is at the first position, the first movable effect means returns to the first position, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the second movable effect means does not perform the initial action. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70); an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after the start of the game and performing an effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game, wherein the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74); When the second movable effect means is at the first position, the first movable effect means is returned to the first position, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial action of the second movable effect means is performed without performing the initial action of the first movable effect means. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70); Effect control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after starting the game, and capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game, wherein the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74) having a portion overlapping a second position of the first movable effect means and its own second position, and the effect control means is a power source for initializing the control state of the game. When the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first position when the supply is started (power is turned on), the first movable effect means is returned to the first position, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial action of the second movable effect means is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

<Content 4 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the power supply stopped during the variable presentation is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied, a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and an initial processing means (main control board 11) that can initialize the control state of the game after the power supply is started or restore the state before the power supply is stopped. 0), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, and in the variable performance, the performance symbols that are being variably displayed can be oscillatingly displayed (temporary stop display) and then statically displayed (stopped display), and the performance control means restarts the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable performance of oscillatingly displaying the performance symbols. When the control state is restored, it is possible to statically display the production pattern on the display means at a predetermined timing (at the time of receiving the special figure stop designation command, at the time of receiving the customer waiting command) without swinging the display. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the start port), and after the power supply is started, the control state of the game is initialized or restored to the state before the power supply was stopped. and production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of production patterns displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, the variable production includes a ready-to-win fluctuation production that executes a ready-to-win production by forming and displaying a ready-to-win state based on some of the production patterns, and the production control means restarts the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the ready-to-win production. When the technique control state is restored, at a predetermined timing (at the time of receiving a command to stop a special figure, at the time of receiving a command to wait for a customer), a combination of performance patterns different from the ready-to-win combination of performance symbols forming and displaying the ready-to-win state can be displayed on the display means in a stationary state. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

<Content 5 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease.

As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition (playing a game ball into a starting port) as a pending memory, determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and a game after the start of power supply. or restores the state before the power supply is stopped, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determining means, and the state of the game machine includes a customer waiting state in which the variable effect is not executed and a first state in which the variable effect is executed in a state without the pending memory. , a second state that is the execution period of the variable effect in the state where the reserved memory is present, wherein the effect control means can perform a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbol on the display means when the control state of the game is restored, the mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen only) when the power supply stopped in the customer waiting state is resumed and the customer waiting state is restored, and the power supply stopped in the first state or the second state is resumed. The display mode of the specific display (display of initial screen + screen during recovery) when recovering to state 1 or state 2 is made different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

<Content 6 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs a customer waiting effect on the display means when the player is not playing a game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the customer waiting effect is not executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when an acquisition condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the starting port), and after power supply is started, the control state of the game is initialized or restored to the state before the power supply was stopped. and production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by a variable display of the production pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, the production control means is capable of executing a customer waiting production (customer waiting demonstration production) on the display means after a predetermined period of time has passed after the production design is statically displayed on the display means, and after the elapse of the fluctuation time of the variable production. The period until the customer waiting performance is executed can be made different between the case where the performance pattern is statically displayed at the beginning and the case where the performance pattern is statically displayed after the control state is initialized or after the control state is restored. Therefore, the customer waiting effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

<Content 7 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays execution information corresponding to determination information during execution of a variable effect on a display means (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-064835). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when an acquisition condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the starting port), and after power supply is started, the control state of the game is initialized or restored to the state before the power supply was stopped. and an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. 70C), it is possible to display execution information (the icon) corresponding to the determination information during execution of the variable effect, and when the power supply stopped during the display of the execution information is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the predetermined display area is secured in a predetermined state (a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed) from the end of the specific display to the start of the next variable display, but the execution information is not displayed in the predetermined display area. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

<Content 8 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that executes a pre-reading advance notice effect over a plurality of variable effects based on the preliminary determination result of the determination information (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply stopped during the pre-reading notice effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition (entering a game ball into a start opening); determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information; Pre-determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining determination information; Initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after power supply is started or restoring to the state before power supply was stopped; Based on the determination result, it is possible to execute a predetermined pre-reading foretelling performance (continuous foretelling performance) for a plurality of times of the variable performance, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the fore-reading foretelling performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the fore-reading foretelling performance is not restarted, and in the variable performance executed next to the variable performance for which the power supply is stopped, the fore-reading foretelling performance different from the foreseeing foretelling performance (for example, alternative foretelling performance) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the continuous advance notice effect due to the stoppage of the power supply, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

<Content 9 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a specific effect that gradually suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed over a plurality of variable effects (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply stopped during the specific effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition (entering a game ball into a start opening); determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information; Pre-determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining determination information; Initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped; It is possible to execute a specific performance (e.g., an icon change performance) stepwise suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed over the performance, and when the power supply stopped during execution of the specific performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the specific performance can be executed in the variable performance executed next to the variable performance in which the power supply is stopped, but it is not executed from the continuation of the stage suggested before the stop of the power supply. Therefore, it is possible to execute an icon change effect in accordance with the contents of the current variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Content 10 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that executes a specific effect that gradually changes the display mode of the identification information displayed corresponding to each piece of determination information for which the execution of the variable effect has not ended (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the power supply stopped during the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, there is a possibility that the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is resumed increases.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition (entering a game ball into a start opening); determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information; Pre-determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining determination information; Initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before power supply was stopped; It is possible to display identification information (the icon, the pending icon) corresponding to each of the determination information that has not ended and the determination information that has not started the variable effect, and by changing the display mode of the identification information in stages, it is possible to execute a specific effect (e.g., icon change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed. When the power supply stopped during the display in the second stage mode of the identification information changing up to the third stage mode is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the identification information displayed in the second stage mode is displayed in the first stage mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after resuming the power supply without being conscious of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped.

<Content 11 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays the number of pending memories, which is determination information for which determination has not been performed, in a display area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it takes time to grasp the number of reserved memories, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game is reduced.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition (a game ball entering a starting hole) as a pending memory, a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and a game after the start of power supply. Initialization means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of or restoring to the state before stopping the power supply, and production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by a variable display of the production pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. , In each of the first display area (sub-first suspension display 83, sub-second suspension display 84), and the second display area (first suspension icon display area 70B, second suspension icon display area 70D) different from the first display area, it is possible to perform a suspension display indicating the number of suspension memories, and when the power supply stopped with the suspension storage is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the suspension display is not performed in the second display area during the execution of the specific display. The hold display can be executed in the first display area. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of reserved memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to suppress the decline of the interest of the game.

<Content 12 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In conventional game machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on acquired determination information, and to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a possibility that the enjoyment of the game may decrease when the stopped power supply is resumed during the effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and the control state of the game is restored.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition (entering a game ball into a start opening); determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information; Pre-determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining determination information, initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by a variable display of the production pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the judgment means (production control board 130), and light emitting means (input) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes. The effect control means is capable of executing a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation for execution of the special game by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode, and when the power supply stopped during execution of the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the light emission means is set to a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishing) different from the specific notification mode. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a player is puzzled by resuming a lamp change performance despite the fact that the change performance is not executed while reducing the control load after restarting the power supply, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

<Content 13 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
A conventional game machine generally comprises main control means capable of controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine provided with movable effect means that can be operated in a predetermined manner (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-187648). However, in such a game machine, no consideration is given to the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means deviate.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined manner, wherein the effect control means comprises the movable effect. It is possible to execute the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means, and when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect corresponding to the signal can be executed, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined manner, and said effect control means comprises said movable effect. It is possible to execute an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the means and an effect operation (effect operation, light emission of effect) of the movable effect means, and it is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in a waiting state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing, and it is possible to execute the initial operation when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution of the customer waiting effect. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined manner, wherein the effect control means comprises the movable effect. It is possible to execute an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the means and an effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means, and it is possible to execute a variable effect for notifying whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution of the variable effect, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined manner, and said effect control means comprises said movable effect. It is possible to execute the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means, and it is possible to execute a special game effect (jackpot effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) during the execution of a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and when a predetermined signal (power supply designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution of the special game effect, the initial operation can be executed. . Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine equipped with main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and capable of emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting mode, and control of the game after power supply is started. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the state or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped, the effect control means is capable of executing the initial operation and initial light emission of the movable effect means, and is capable of executing the effect operation and light emission of the movable effect means. However, the light emission mode (emission color, light emission pattern, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable effect means is made different, and when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect corresponding to the signal can be executed, the initial operation of the movable effect means can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine equipped with main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, voice output device 9) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , image display device) and based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the winning of the game ball to the starting port), a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can initialize the control state of the game after the power supply is started or restore the state before the power supply is stopped. The effect control means is capable of executing the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the movable effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display), and in accordance with the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), and in the variable effect, the variable effect is displayed by swinging (temporary stop display). When the control state of the game is restored by restarting the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the variable effect that oscillates the effect pattern, the effect control means can statically display the effect symbol on the display means at a predetermined timing (when receiving a special figure stop designation command, when receiving a customer waiting command). When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the means, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine equipped with main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, voice output device 9) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , image display device), storage means (main control board 110) that can store determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball into the starting port) as a pending memory, determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and initialization of the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or to the state before the power supply is stopped. Initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring, the effect control means is capable of executing the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). , a customer waiting state in which the variable performance is not executed, a first state that is the execution period of the variable performance in the state without the reserved memory, and a second state that is the execution period of the variable performance in the state with the reserved memory, wherein when the game control state is restored, the performance control means can perform a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the performance symbols on the display means, and when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the customer waiting state is restored. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the display mode of the specific display (only the display of the initial screen) is different from the display mode of the specific display when the power supply stopped during the first state or the second state is resumed and the power supply is restored to the first state or the second state and the first state or the second state is restored (the initial screen + the display of the screen during recovery), and the performance in accordance with the signal can be executed (a customer waiting state, a variable performance, a jackpot performance) It is possible. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine equipped with main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, voice output device 9) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , image display device), storage means (main control board 110) that can store determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball into the starting port) as a pending memory, determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and initialization of the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or to the state before the power supply is stopped. Initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoration, and the effect control means is capable of executing the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display), and according to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable effect with a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), and the effect is displayed on the display means. When a predetermined period elapses after the symbols are statically displayed, a customer waiting effect (customer waiting demonstration effect) can be executed by the display means, and the period until the performance pattern is statically displayed after the variation time of the variable effect has passed and the effect pattern is statically displayed after the control state is initialized or after the control state is restored, and the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the jackpot performance), the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine equipped with main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, voice output device 9) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , image display device), storage means (main control board 110) that can store determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball into the starting port) as a pending memory, determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and initialization of the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or to the state before the power supply is stopped. Initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoration, and the effect control means is capable of executing the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). Based on the results, it is possible to execute a predetermined pre-reading advance notice effect (continuous notice effect) over a plurality of times of the variable effect, and when the control state of the game is restored by resuming the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, it is possible to execute a notice effect (for example, alternative notice effect) different from the pre-reading notice effect in the variable effect executed next to the variable effect in which the power supply is stopped without restarting the pre-reading notice effect, and a control state (customer waiting state, customer waiting state, When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the variable performance, jackpot performance), the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine equipped with main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect buttons 17, various LEDs, voice output devices) capable of operating (movement, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. 9, image display device), storage means (main control board 110) that can store determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball into the starting port) as pending storage, determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and whether to initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or the state before stopping the power supply. and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring to the original state, and the effect control means can execute the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). It is possible to execute a specific effect (e.g., an icon change effect) that gradually suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed over the effect, and if the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the specific effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the specific effect can be executed in the variable effect that is executed next to the variable effect in which the power supply is stopped. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the production), the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine equipped with main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, light emitting means (winning entrance lamp NR) capable of changing to any of a plurality of notification modes, and effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device), determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance of the game ball into the start opening) as storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing as pending storage, determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information (main control board 110), and power supply start. An initial processing means (main control board 110) for later initializing the control state of the game or restoring to the state before the power supply is stopped, the effect control means is capable of executing the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display), and the special game is expected to be executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode. When the control state of the game is restored by restarting the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the change effect, the light emitting means is controlled to a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishing) different from the specific notification mode, and when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect according to the signal can be executed. It is possible to Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with sound output means (voice output device 9) capable of outputting effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) of the game, and the effect control means is capable of outputting power supply from the sound output means. It is possible to output a predetermined notification sound indicating the start (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.), and when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which an effect according to the signal can be executed, the predetermined notification sound can be output. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) of the game, and the effect control means is capable of outputting power supply from the sound output means. It is possible to output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start, and to execute a customer waiting effect in a standby state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game production sounds (BGM, SE, etc.), and the production control means is configured to supply power from the sound output means. It is possible to output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start, and to execute a variable effect for informing whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution of the variable effect, it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling effects in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game production sounds (BGM, SE, etc.), wherein the production control means supplies power from the sound output means. It is possible to output a predetermined notification sound indicating the start (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.), and during execution of a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Special game effects (jackpot effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) can be executed, and when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution of the special game effect, the predetermined notification sound can be output. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

<Content 14 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
A conventional gaming machine generally comprises main control means for controlling the progress of a game and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying effect images (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, in such a game machine, no consideration is given to the case where the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the power supply to the effect control means is continued.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is provided with display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of displaying effect images (fluctuation effects, jackpot effects, etc.), and the effect control means is in a standby state (customer waiting state). state), it is possible to display a game standby screen (a static display screen of performance symbols) on the display means, and when the power supply to the main control means is stopped during the display of the game standby screen, the display of the game standby screen can be continued. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

<Content 15 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
A conventional gaming machine generally comprises main control means for controlling the progress of a game and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there is one that executes abnormality notification based on an input signal from a predetermined detection means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-113441). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a possibility that the abnormality notification is not appropriately performed.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a game machine capable of playing a game is provided with detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) for performing predetermined control (jackpot judgment, abnormality judgment, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means. When the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (disconnected connector, disconnection, etc.) when the supply is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify an abnormality.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a gaming machine capable of playing a game is provided with detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) for detecting predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) for performing predetermined control (jackpot judgment, abnormality judgment, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. If the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (disconnection of the connector, disconnection, etc.) when the control means and the detection means are started, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and if the control means and the detection means are connected during the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued for a predetermined period (30 seconds, until the power is turned off, etc.). Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify an abnormality.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a game machine capable of playing a game is provided with detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) that detects a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot judgment, abnormality judgment, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. Power is being supplied to the game machine. When the control means and the detection means are disconnected (disconnection of the connector, wire breakage, etc.), it is possible to issue a predetermined anomaly report (disconnection report, magnetic anomaly report, radio anomaly report, etc.). Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify an abnormality.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a gaming machine capable of playing a game is provided with detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) and control means (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) for performing predetermined control (jackpot judgment, abnormality judgment, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. When the control means and the detection means become disconnected (disconnection of the connector, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and if the control means and the detection means are connected during execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued for a predetermined period (30 seconds, until the power is turned off, etc.). Therefore, it becomes possible to perform anomaly notification appropriately.

<Content 16 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to a player based on determination information acquired based on winning of a game medium in a starting area, and to execute a game effect according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there was a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect according to the command (signal) from the main control means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, no consideration is given to the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means deviate.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine provided with main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and production control means (production control board 130) that controls production according to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means obtains first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (ball entered into the first start hole) or establishment of the second start condition (ball entered into the second start hole). ) determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by ); variation display means for performing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; storage means for storing the first determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a first reservation memory and storing the second determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a second reservation memory; variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state), and the production control means is capable of executing a variable production accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of production symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the judgment result of the first judgment information in the normal game state, additionally displaying the first holding information (first holding icon) in the display area (image display device 70) according to the increase in the first holding memory, and the first holding information according to the decrease in the first holding memory. It is possible to shift display and decrease each of the pending information, and when the plurality of performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the variable performance, the first pending information can be produced (fluctuation, rotation, etc.), and during the temporary stop of the plurality of performance symbols in which the first holding information is performing the production operation, and during the display of the first holding information of a specific number (e.g., three) that is two more than a predetermined number (e.g., one), the first holding memory becomes the predetermined number. Signal at the start of the variable display ( When a pending number designation command, a special pattern designation command, a special pattern variation pattern designation command) is received, the variable performance is started, and the first pending information corresponding to the specified number (at least the first pending icon from the icon display area side) corresponding to the specific number of the specific number of the first pending information is not shift-displayed (the third pending icon from the icon display area side) is shift-displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) for controlling effects in response to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means obtains first determination information (special figure determination information) or establishment of a second start condition (ball entering the second starting hole) obtained when the first starting condition is satisfied (ball entering the first starting hole). ) determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by ); variation display means for performing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; storage means for storing the first determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a first reservation memory and storing the second determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a second reservation memory; variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state), the production control means, in the normal game state, in the front of the background image so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information, it is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols, it is possible to display the first suspension information (first suspension icon) corresponding to each of the first suspension storage in the display area (image display device 70), and the plurality of the plurality in the variable performance When the effect pattern is temporarily stopped, it is possible to perform the effect operation (scroll, change, etc.) on the background image, and during the temporary stop of the plurality of effect patterns in which the background image is performing the effect operation, a specific number (for example, 1) more than a specific number (for example, 3) While displaying the first reservation information, the first reservation memory becomes the predetermined number. After displaying a number (eg, two) of the first pending information that is one less than the specified number, the predetermined number (eg, one) of the first pending information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) for controlling effects in response to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means obtains first determination information (special figure determination information) or establishment of a second start condition (ball entering the second starting hole) obtained by establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting hole). ) determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by ); variation display means for performing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; storage means for storing the first determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a first reservation memory and storing the second determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a second reservation memory; variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state), the production control means, in the normal gaming state, to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information, it is possible to execute a variable production accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of production symbols, it is possible to display a first reservation number indicating the number of the first reservation memory in a first display area (sub-first reservation display device 83), and the first corresponding to each of the first reservation memories. It is possible to display the hold information (first hold icon) in the second display area (image display device 70), and when the plurality of production patterns are temporarily stopped in the variable production, predetermined elements (character tactile images, pattern effect images) constituting the production patterns can be produced (fluctuation movements, etc.). During the display of the first pending information, when the first pending memory receives the signal (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) at the start of the variable display that is the predetermined number, the execution of the variable production is started, and the predetermined number of the first reservation number (for example, one) is displayed without displaying the first reservation number (for example, two) that is one less than the specific number in the first display area, and a number that is one less than the specific number in the second display area (for example, two). is displayed, and then the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first pending information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130) that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means, the main control means obtains first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or establishment of the second starting condition (ball entering the second starting hole). ) determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by ); variation display means for performing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; storage means for storing the first determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a first reservation memory and storing the second determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a second reservation memory; variable probability game state, time-saving game state), and the production control means is capable of executing a variable production accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of production symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first judgment information in the normal game state, and capable of displaying first reservation information (first reservation icon) corresponding to each of the first reservation memories in a display area (image display device 70), and in the variable production, the plurality of production symbols are displayed. When it is temporarily stopped, it is possible to perform the production operation (fluctuation, rotation, etc.) of the first reservation information, and during the temporary stop of the plurality of production patterns in which the first reservation information is performing the production operation, a specific number (for example, 1) 3 more than a predetermined number (for example, 1) During the display of the first reservation information, the first reservation memory becomes the predetermined number. to display the predetermined number (eg, one) of the first pending information without displaying the number (eg, three) of the first pending information that is one less than the specific number. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine provided with main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and production control means (production control board 130) for controlling production according to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means acquires first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (ball entering the first start hole) or establishment of the second start condition (ball entering the second start hole). ) determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by ); variation display means for performing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; storage means for storing the first determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a first reservation memory and storing the second determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a second reservation memory; variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state), the production control means, in the normal game state, in the front of the background image so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information, it is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols, it is possible to display the first suspension information (first suspension icon) corresponding to each of the first suspension storage in the display area (image display device 70), and the plurality of the plurality in the variable performance When the effect pattern is temporarily stopped, it is possible to perform the effect operation (scroll, change, etc.) on the background image, and during the temporary stop of the plurality of effect patterns in which the background image is performing the effect operation, a specific number (for example, 1) 3 more than the specified number (for example, 4) While the first pending information is displayed, the first pending memory becomes the specified number. display a number of the first pending information that is two less than the specific number (e.g., two) without displaying the first pending information that is one less than the specific number (e.g., three), and then display the predetermined number of the first pending information (e.g., one). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130) that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means, the main control means obtains first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or establishment of the second starting condition (ball entering the second starting hole). ) determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by ); variation display means for performing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; storage means for storing the first determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a first reservation memory and storing the second determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a second reservation memory; variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state), the production control means, in the normal gaming state, to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information, it is possible to execute a variable production accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of production symbols, it is possible to display a first reservation number indicating the number of the first reservation memory in a first display area (sub-first reservation display device 83), and the first corresponding to each of the first reservation memories. It is possible to display the hold information (first hold icon) in the second display area (image display device 70), and when the plurality of production patterns are temporarily stopped in the variable production, a predetermined element (tactile image of the character, pattern effect image) constituting the production pattern can be made to perform a production operation (fluctuation operation, etc.). During the display of the first reserved information, when the first reserved memory receives a start time signal (reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) of the variable display that becomes the predetermined number, the variable production is started, the predetermined number of the first memory number (for example, one) is displayed without displaying the first memory number (for example, two) that is two less than the specific number in the first display area, and the number (for example, three) that is one less than the specific number is displayed in the second display area. A number (for example, two) of the first reservation information less than the specific number is displayed without displaying the first reservation information, and then the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first reservation information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and effect control means (effect control board 130) for controlling effects in response to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means obtains first determination information (special figure determination information) or establishment of a second start condition (ball entering the second starting hole) obtained when the first starting condition is satisfied (ball entering the first starting hole). ) determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by ); variation display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; When the plurality of performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the variable performance, predetermined elements (a tactile image of a character, a symbol effect image) constituting the performance symbols can be made to perform a performance operation (fluctuation operation, etc.), and in the variable performance, when the predetermined elements are in the performance operation and the temporarily stopped performance symbols are displaced from the stop position, the above based on the determination result of the first determination information. When a signal at the start of the variable display (holding number designation command, special pattern designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the performance pattern is displayed at the stop position with the start of the variable performance and then variably displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and effect control means (effect control board 130) for controlling effects in response to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means obtains first determination information (special figure determination information) or establishment of the second start condition (ball entering the second starting hole) obtained when the first starting condition is met (ball entering the first starting hole). ) determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by ); variation display means for performing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; storage means for storing the first determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a first reservation memory and storing the second determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a second reservation memory; variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state), and the production control means is capable of executing a variable production (variable display of production pattern 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second judgment information in the specific game state, additionally displaying the second holding information (second holding icon) in the display area (image display device 70) according to the increase in the second holding memory, and the second holding information according to the decrease in the holding memory. It is possible to shift display the hold information and decrease it by one, and during the display of the second hold information with a specific number (for example, three) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one), the second hold memory becomes the predetermined number. When the start time signal (hold number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the variation production is started, and the second hold information corresponding to the specific number of the specific number of the second hold information (third from the icon display area side). The second pending information corresponding to the predetermined number (first and second pending icons from the icon display area side) is shift-displayed without shift-displaying the pending icon). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130) that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means, the main control means obtains first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or establishment of the second starting condition (ball entering the second starting hole). ) determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by ); variation display means for performing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; storage means for storing the first determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a first reservation memory and storing the second determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a second reservation memory; Variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state), and the production control means is capable of executing a variable production (such as a variable display of the production pattern 70a) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second judgment information in the specific game state, and second holding information (second holding icon) corresponding to each of the second holding memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and two are displayed in the display area (image display device 70). During the display of a large specific number (for example, three) of the second reserved information, when the second reserved memory receives a signal at the start of the variable display (a reserved number designation command, a special pattern designation command, a special figure variation pattern designation command) that the predetermined number is displayed, the variable performance is started, the second reservation information of a number (for example, two) that is one less than the specific number is displayed, and then the predetermined number (for example, one) of the second reservation information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine provided with main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and production control means (production control board 130) that controls the production according to the signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means obtains the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first start condition (ball entering the first start opening) or the establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start opening). determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the ball); variation display means for performing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; storage means for storing the first determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a first reservation memory, and storing the second determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a second reservation memory; (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state), the production control means is capable of executing a variable production (variable display of production pattern 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second judgment information in the specific game state, and capable of displaying a second storage number indicating the number of the second storage in the first display area (sub-second storage display 84), and corresponding to each of the second storage. It is possible to display the second reserved information (second reserved icon) in the second display area (image display device 70), and during the display of the second reserved information of a specific number (for example, three) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one), the second reserved memory is the predetermined number. The predetermined number of second stored numbers (for example, one) is displayed without displaying the second stored number (for example, two), and after displaying the second reserved information of a number (for example, two) that is one less than the specific number in the second display area, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the second reserved information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine equipped with main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game and effect control means (effect control board 130) that controls effects according to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means obtains the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or the establishment of the second starting condition (entering the second starting hole). determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the ball); variation display means for performing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; storage means for storing the first determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a first reservation memory and storing the second determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a second reservation memory; (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state), the production control means, in the specific gaming state, to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information (variable display of the production pattern 70a, etc.) It is possible to execute, and it is possible to display the second reservation information (second reservation icon) corresponding to each of the second reservation memories in the display area (image display device 70), and from a predetermined number (for example, one). During the display of a specific number (for example, four) of the second reserved information, which is three more than the specified number (for example, four), when the second reserved memory receives a signal at the start of the variable display (a reserved number designation command, a special pattern designation command, a special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command), the predetermined number (for example, one) of the second reserved information is displayed without displaying the second reserved information of a number (for example, three) that is one less than the specific number. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and effect control means (effect control board 130) for controlling effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means, the main control means obtains first determination information (special figure determination information) or second start condition (entry into the second start hole) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start hole). determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the ball); variation display means for performing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; storage means for storing the first determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a first reservation memory, and storing the second determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a second reservation memory; (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state), the production control means, in the specific gaming state, to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second judgment information (variable display of the production pattern 70a, etc.) It is possible to execute, and it is possible to display the second reservation information (second reservation icon) corresponding to each of the second reservation memories in the display area (image display device 70), and from a predetermined number (for example, one). During the display of the second reserved information with a specific number more than 3 (for example, 4), when the second reserved memory receives the signal at the start of the variable display that is the predetermined number (holding number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command), start the variable effect, and display the second reservation information of a number (for example, 2) that is 2 less than the specific number without displaying the 2nd reservation information that is 1 less than the specific number (for example, 3), and then the predetermined number (for example) 1) of the second pending information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and production control means (production control board 130) that controls production according to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means obtains first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (ball entering the first start opening) or establishment of the second start condition (entry into the second start opening). determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the ball); variation display means for performing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; storage means for storing the first determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a first reservation memory, and storing the second determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a second reservation memory; (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state), the production control means is capable of executing a variable production (variable display of production pattern 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second judgment information in the specific game state, and capable of displaying a second storage number indicating the number of the second storage in the first display area (sub-second storage display 84), and corresponding to each of the second storage. It is possible to display the second reserved information (second reserved icon) in the second display area (image display device 70), and during the display of the second reserved information of a specific number (for example, four) that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one), the second reserved memory is the predetermined number. 2 The predetermined number of the second stored numbers (for example, one) is displayed without displaying the number of stored items (for example, two), the second reserved information that is one smaller than the specific number (for example, three) is displayed in the second display area without displaying the second reserved information that is two smaller than the specific number (for example, two), and then the predetermined number (for example, one) of the second reserved information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 14th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and production control means (production control board 130) for controlling production according to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means obtains the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or the establishment of the second starting condition (entering the second starting hole). A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the ball), a variable display means for executing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means, and a state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, short-time game state) advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the result, and when the variable performance start time signal (holding number designation command, special pattern designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) based on the determination result of the second determination information is received while the performance symbols temporarily stopped in the variable performance are deviated from the stop position, the performance symbols are displayed at the stop position with the start of the variable performance and then variably displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and effect control means (performance control board 130) for controlling the effect according to the signal from the main control means, the main control means is a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the starting condition (ball entering the starting port); A variable display means for performing variable display of a pattern (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (variable display of a performance symbol 70a, etc.) corresponding to the variable display based on the determination result of the determination information, additionally displaying pending information (a pending icon) in a display area (image display device 70) in accordance with an increase in the pending memory, and the pending memory. It is possible to display one as execution information (the icon) by shift-displaying the holding information according to the decrease of the holding information, and during the display of the holding information of a specific number (for example, three) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one). Without shift-displaying the pending information (the third pending icon from the icon display area side), the required amount of pending information (the first and second pending icons from the icon display area side) is shift-displayed and one is displayed as the execution information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 16th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and production control means (production control board 130) for controlling the production according to a signal from the main control means, the main control means is a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting port) A variable display means for executing variable display of a pattern (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a pending memory. It is possible to display it as execution information (the icon), and during the display of the holding information of a specific number (for example, three) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one), the holding memory becomes the predetermined number. When the signal at the start of the variable display (holding number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is erased, the variable production is started, and the number (for example, two) of the holding information that is one less than the specific number is displayed, and then the predetermined number (for example, one). ) is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 17th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and production control means (production control board 130) for controlling production according to a signal from the main control means, the main control means is a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting port); A variable display means for executing variable display of a pattern (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a pending memory. area 70E, second special figure pending number display area 70F), the pending information (holding icon) corresponding to each of the holding memories is displayed in the second display area (holding icon display area), and the holding information that the variable display is started can be displayed as execution information (the icon). number designation command, special design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is erased, the variation performance is started, and the holding number (for example, two) that is one less than the specific number is displayed in the first display area. display. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (performance control board 130) for controlling the effect according to the signal from the main control means, the main control means is a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the starting condition (ball entering the starting port); A variable display means for executing variable display of a pattern (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a pending memory. It is possible to display as execution information (the icon), and during the display of the holding information of a specific number (for example, 4) that is 3 more than a predetermined number (for example, 1), the signal at the start of the variable display that the holding memory becomes the predetermined number (holding number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern designation command) When receiving, the execution information is erased, the variable production is started, and the predetermined number (for example, 1) is displayed without displaying the reservation information of one less than the specific number (for example, 3). ) is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 19th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and production control means (production control board 130) for controlling the production according to the signal from the main control means, the main control means includes determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the starting condition (ball entering the starting port); A variable display means for executing variable display of a pattern (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a pending memory. It is possible to display as execution information (the icon), and during the display of the holding information of a specific number (for example, 4) that is 3 more than a predetermined number (for example, 1), the holding memory becomes the predetermined number When the signal at the start of the variable display (holding number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is erased, the variable production is started, and the number of the holding information that is 1 less than the specific number (for example, 3) is 2 more than the specific number without displaying the holding information. A small number (eg, two) of the pending information are displayed, and then a predetermined number (eg, one) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and effect control means (performance control board 130) for controlling the effect in response to a signal from the main control means, the main control means includes determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the starting condition (ball entering the starting port); A variable display means for executing variable display of a pattern (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means, and a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a pending memory. area 70E, second special figure pending number display area 70F), the pending information (holding icon) corresponding to each of the holding memories is displayed in the second display area (holding icon display area), and the holding information that the variable display is started can be displayed as execution information (the icon). number designation command, special design designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, erases the execution information, starts the variable production, displays the holding number (for example, 2) that is 2 less than the specific number in the first display area, displays the holding number (for example, 1) without displaying the holding number (for example, 1) that is 1 less than the specific number (for example, 3) in the second display area, and holds the number that is 2 less than the specific number (for example, 2) without displaying the holding information. Information is displayed, followed by displaying the predetermined number (eg, one) of the pending information and the running information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 21st configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine comprising main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and production control means (production control board 130) for controlling production according to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means is a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting port). and a variable display means for executing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern so as to correspond to the variable display, and when the variable display start signal (holding number designation command, special pattern designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received when the production pattern temporarily stopped in the variable effect is shifted from the stop position, the variable display starts with the start of the variable effect. After the performance pattern is displayed at the stop position, it is variably displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

<Content 17 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on establishment of a starting condition, and to execute a game effect according to the result of the determination. In such a game machine, there is also known one that executes an effect using a predetermined effect device (effect button, movable member, etc.) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-033816). However, the game machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the interest in the game is low.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, operation means (production button 17, production lever 24) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of game ball to first start port 45 or second start port 47), and executing the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not, and production control means (production control board 130) for executing a game production (variation production) according to the determination result of the judgment means, wherein the production control means is capable of executing a vibration production that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game production, and the game production includes a specific game production (reach fluctuation production) in which a second production (post-reach production) is executed after the first production (pre-reach production), The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (vibration performance for 1 second such as dialogue announcement performance, step-up announcement performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, etc.) and a second vibration performance different from the first vibration performance (vibration performance of 3 seconds or more such as cut-in performance, determined success performance, fixed performance, pattern matching, etc.), and in the specific game performance, the first vibration performance is easier to execute during the first performance than during the second performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, operation means (production button 17, production lever 24) operable by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of game ball to first start port 45 or second start port 47), and executing the special game based on the determination information. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, wherein the performance control means can execute a vibration performance that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game performance, and the game performance includes a specific performance (ready-to-win) that expects execution of the special game after a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice) of a predetermined performance (pseudo continuous performance) is executed. The vibration production includes a first vibration production (a vibration production for 1 second such as a dialog announcement production, a step-up announcement production, a pseudo-continuous production, a development production, etc.) and a second vibration production different from the first vibration production (a vibration production of 3 seconds or more such as a cut-in production, a decision success production, a fixed production, and a pattern matching). The second vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the first vibration effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, operation means (production button 17, production lever 24) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and executing the special game based on the determination information. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, wherein the performance control means includes a suggestion performance (read-ahead effect performance, look-ahead motion performance) that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed during execution of the game performance, and a vibration performance that vibrates the operation means (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue announcement performance, cut-in performance, decision success performance, etc.). The vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (such as a speech announcement effect, a cut-in effect, and a determined success effect) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation prompting display, and a second vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, etc.) that is executed without the operation prompting display. , the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, operation means (production button 17, production lever 24) operable by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of game ball to first start port 45 or second start port 47), and executing the special game based on the determination information. a game state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect for variably displaying a plurality of types of effect symbols according to the determination result of the determination means, wherein the effect control means executes the variable effect. A vibration performance for vibrating the operating means can be executed inside, and the fluctuation performance includes a first specific fluctuation performance in which a ready-to-win performance is performed by a first type of performance pattern (even-numbered pattern), a second specific fluctuation performance in which a ready-to-win performance is performed by a second type of performance pattern (odd number symbols other than "7"), and a third specific fluctuation performance in which a ready-to-win performance is performed by a third type of performance pattern ("7" pattern). and a second vibration performance different from the first vibration performance (vibration performance of 3 seconds or more such as cut-in performance, determined success performance, fixed performance, etc.). , the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the third specific variation effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, operation means (production button 17, production lever 24) operable by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of game ball to first start port 45 or second start port 47), and executing the special game based on the determination information. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, wherein the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue announcement performance, cut-in performance, decision success performance, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game performance, and the vibration performance includes a first vibration performance that is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation promotion display. and a second vibration performance (read-ahead vibration performance, etc.) executed without the operation prompting display, and when the first vibration performance is executed, a predetermined performance sound (display effect sound of the operation prompting image, the performance sound corresponding to the operation of the performance button, the operation effect sound of the character) corresponding to the operation of the operating means is output, while the predetermined performance sound is not output when the second vibration performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button 17, production lever 24) operable by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of game ball to first start port 45 or second start port 47), and executing the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not, and effect control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game effect (fluctuation effect) according to the determination result of the determining means, the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect, the game effect includes a specific game effect (ready-to-win effect) in which a specific effect (ready-to-win effect) that expects execution of the special game is executed, and the vibration effect includes an operation A first vibration effect (such as a speech announcement effect, a cut-in effect, a determined success effect, etc.) executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the prompting display, and a second vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, etc.) executed without the operation prompting display, wherein when the first vibration effect is executed, a predetermined effect image (operation promoting image, effect image corresponding to the operation of the effect button) related to the operation of the operating means is displayed, while when the second vibration effect is executed, the predetermined effect image is not displayed. In the specific game performance (jackpot reach variation performance) in which the special game is executed, the number of execution times of the second vibration performance (maximum 7 times) after the start of the specific performance tends to be larger than the number of execution times (maximum 3 times) of the second vibration performance before the start of the specific performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button 17, production lever 24) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of game ball to first start port 45 or second start port 47), and executing the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not, and production control means (production control board 130) for executing a game production (variable production) according to the determination result of the judgment means, wherein the operation means includes a first operation means (production button 17) and a second operation means (production lever 24) different from the first operation means, and the production control means vibrates the first operation means during execution of the game production (pre-reading vibration production, dialogue notice) performance, cut-in performance, decision success performance, etc.) can be executed, and when the vibration performance is executed during the operation of the second operation means, the vibration related to the vibration performance is transmitted to the player via the second operation means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, determination information ( Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring special figure determination information), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and effect control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game effect (variation effect) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the effect control means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (jackpot announcement effect) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed during the execution of the game effect. An operation effect (vibration effect, action effect, etc.) for operating (moving, vibrating) the frame effect effect can be executed during the execution of the suggestive effect, and the suggestive effect includes a first suggestive effect (weak advance notice, pre-reach advance notice effect) and a second suggestive effect (strong advance notice, post-reach advance notice effect) having a higher degree of expectation than the first suggestive effect. The degree of expectation for execution of the special game is higher when the operation performance is executed during execution of the first suggestive performance than when the operation performance is not executed during execution. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button 17, production lever 24) operable by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of game ball to first start port 45 or second start port 47), and executing the special game based on the determination information. and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a game production (variation production) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, wherein the production control means is controllable between a first production mode (production modes A to C) and a second production mode (production modes D to G), and is capable of executing a vibration production to vibrate the operation means during execution of the game production, and the vibration production includes the operation means during the operation promotion display. and a second vibration performance (vibration performance such as a look-ahead vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, etc.) executed without the operation prompting display, and the degree of expectation for execution of the special game when the second vibration performance is executed is different between the first performance mode and the second performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button 17, production lever 24) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of game ball to first start port 45 or second start port 47), and execution of the special game based on the determination information. and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a game production (variation production) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, the production control means is controllable between a first production mode (production modes A to C) and a second production mode (production modes D to G), and is capable of executing a vibration production that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game production, and the vibration production includes the operation during the operation promotion display. A first vibration performance executed in accordance with the operation of the means (vibration performance such as speech announcement performance, cut-in performance, decision success performance, etc.) and a second vibration performance executed without the operation prompting display (prediction vibration performance, step-up notice performance, etc.) are included, and the degree of expectation for execution of the special game when the first vibration performance is executed is different between the first performance mode and the second performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, determination information is based on the frame production unit (production button 17 (button vibration motor), production lever (lever vibration motor), frame movable member) provided on the front side of the game frame (frame body consisting of the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4) and the establishment of the acquisition condition (game ball winning to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47). Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring (special figure determination information), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and production control means (production control board 130) for executing game production (variation production) according to the determination result of the judgment means, and the production control means moves the frame production section from the first state (standby state, extinction state) to the second state (vibration state, operation) during execution of the game production. state, predetermined light emitting state) can be executed (vibration effect, action effect, light emission effect, etc.), the variable effect includes a specific game effect (ready-to-win change effect) in which a second effect (post-ready effect) is executed after the first effect (pre-reach effect). In the performance (ready-to-win variable performance of big win), the changing performance is executed during the execution of the second performance regardless of whether or not the changing performance is executed during the execution of the first performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button 17, production lever 24) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of game ball to first start port 45 or second start port 47), and execution of the special game based on the determination information. and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variable effect) according to the determination result of the determining means. etc.), and a second vibration effect executed without the operation promotion display (one of the vibration effects of step-up notice effect, pattern matching, and C pattern matching). The second vibration performance is executed in one predetermined vibration mode (weak vibration for 1 second for vibration performance at step-up notice performance, strong vibration for 4 seconds for vibration performance for pattern alignment, and strong vibration for 1 second for C pattern alignment). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button 17, production lever 24) operable by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of game ball to first start port 45 or second start port 47), and execution of the special game based on the determination information. game state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; and production control means (production control board 130) for executing a game production (variation production) in accordance with the determination result of the judgment means, wherein the production control means performs the operation during execution of the game production. The vibration effect includes a predetermined vibration effect (vibration effect for one second such as a look-ahead vibration effect, a line-notice effect, a step-up-notice effect, etc.) and a specific vibration effect different from the predetermined vibration effect (vibration effect for three seconds or more such as when a success effect is determined, when a pattern is aligned, etc.), and the predetermined vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect at the time of the dialogue-notice effect) executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation-promoting display, and the operation-promoting display. In the game performance in which the special game is executed including a second vibration performance (one of a look-ahead vibration performance and a vibration performance at the time of step-up notice performance) that is executed without the second vibration performance, the ratio of execution of the specific vibration performance after that differs between when the first vibration performance is executed and when the second vibration performance is executed, and the second vibration performance is more likely to be executed during the normal game state than during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button 17, production lever 24) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of game ball to first start port 45 or second start port 47), and execution of the special game based on the determination information. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a variable performance that variably displays a plurality of types of performance symbols according to the determination result of the determination means, wherein the performance control means includes a special performance (determined success performance, final performance, etc.) that suggests execution of the special game during execution of the variable performance, and a vibration performance that vibrates the operation means in one of a plurality of vibration modes (prediction vibration performance, dialogue announcement performance, step-up). (at the time of advance notice, at the time of simulated continuous performance, at the time of development performance, at the time of cut-in performance, at the time of successful success performance, at the time of confirmation performance, when symbols are aligned, when symbols are aligned, etc.), and when the variable performance in which the special game is performed is performed, the execution mode of the vibration performance (execution or non-execution, execution timing, etc.) varies depending on the type of performance symbol (even number symbol, odd number symbol other than "7", "7" symbol) that suggests the execution of the special game, and the execution of the special performance When the vibration performance is executed along with , the vibration mode of the vibration performance is the same regardless of the type of performance symbol that suggests execution of the special game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button 17, production lever 24) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of game ball to first start port 45 or second start port 47), and execution of the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to play, and production control means (production control board 130) for executing a game production (variation production) according to the determination result of the judgment means, the operation means includes a first operation means (production button 17) and a second operation means (production lever 24) different from the first operation means, and the production control means vibrates the first operation means during execution of the game production (pre-reading vibration production, dialogue The vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect such as dialogue effect, cut-in effect, decision success effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the first operating means during the operation prompting display, and a second vibration effect (vibration effect such as anticipation vibration effect, step-up notice effect, etc.) that is executed without the operation prompting display. Differently, in the second vibration performance, the start timing of vibration is predetermined, and when the vibration performance is executed during the operation of the second operation means, the vibration related to the vibration performance is transmitted to the player via the second operation means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 16th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button 17, production lever 24) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of game ball to first start port 45 or second start port 47), and execution of the special game based on the determination information. and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variation effect) according to the determination result of the determination means, wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means, and the effective period of the operating means includes a first effective period (a period of validity related to a dialogue announcement effect, a simulated continuous effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a decision effect, a re-lottery effect, etc.) and the first effective period. includes a different second valid period (valid period during customer waiting), and the vibration performance is more likely to be executed when the operating means is operated during the first valid period than when the operating means is operated during the second valid period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 17th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, operation means (production button 17, production lever 24) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of game ball to first start port 45 or second start port 47), and execution of the special game based on the determination information. and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variable effect) according to the determination result of the determining means, wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means, and the valid period of the operating means includes a first valid period (valid period related to speech advance notice effect, etc.) and a second valid period (valid period related to cut-in effect, fixed effect, etc.) different from the first valid period. and a third valid period (customer waiting valid period) different from the first valid period and the second valid period, and the vibration performance is more likely to be executed when the operating means is operated during the second valid period than when the operating means is operated during the third valid period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an acquisition means (main control board 1) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (a game ball winning a prize in the first start port 45 or the second start port 47) and a production unit (production button 17 (button vibration motor), production lever 24 (lever vibration motor), second movable member 74) operable in a predetermined manner. 10), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and effect control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game effect (variation effect) according to the determination result of the determination means, wherein the effect control means is controllable between a first effect mode (effect modes A to C) and a second effect mode (effect modes D to G), and the effect unit is placed in a first state (standby state) during execution of the game effect. , extinguished state) to a second state (vibration state, operation state, predetermined light emission state) can be executed (vibration performance, operation performance, light emission performance, etc.), and the degree of expectation for execution of the special game when the change performance is executed is different between the first performance mode and the second performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of game ball to first start port 45 or second start port 47), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the determination means. and a production control means (production control board 130) that executes a game production (variable production) according to the determination result of the above, the production control means is controllable between a first production mode (production modes A to C) and a second production mode (production modes D to G), and is capable of executing a stage production (step-up notice production, pseudo-continuous production) that progresses to any of a plurality of stages with different degrees of expectation that the special game will be executed during execution of the game production, and the first production mode and the second production mode. The degree of expectation for execution of the special game when the stage performance progresses to a prescribed stage (one of the 3rd step performance, the 4th step performance, and the 5th step performance in the case of the step-up advance notice performance, or once or twice in the case of the pseudo-continuous performance) differs depending on the performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of game ball to first start port 45 or second start port 47), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the determination means. A production control means (production control board 130) that executes a game production (variable production) according to the determination result of the above, and the production control means is controllable between a first production mode (production modes A to C) and a second production mode (production modes D to G), and is capable of executing continuous production (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading operation production, pre-reading vibration production, pre-reading zone production, etc.) in which the game production is performed one or more times. A specific performance (reach performance) expected to be executed can be executed, and the specific performance is less likely to be executed in the game performance triggered by the execution of the continuous performance when the continuous performance is executed for the predetermined number of times in the second performance mode than when the continuous performance is performed for the predetermined number of times (once) in the first performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 21st configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of game ball to first start port 45 or second start port 47), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the determination means. A production control means (production control board 130) that executes a game production (variable production) according to the determination result of the above, and the production control means is controllable between a first production mode (production modes A to C) and a second production mode (production modes D to G), and is capable of executing continuous production (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading operation production, pre-reading vibration production, pre-reading zone production, etc.) in which the game production is performed one or more times. A specific performance (reach performance) expected to be executed can be executed, and the specific performance is more likely to be executed in the game performance triggered by the execution of the continuous performance when the continuous performance is executed a predetermined number of times in the first performance mode than when the continuous performance is executed a predetermined number of times (two or three times) in the second performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a twenty-second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of game ball to first start port 45 or second start port 47), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the determination means. A production control means (production control board 130) that executes a game production (variable production) according to the determination result of the above, and the production control means is controllable between a first production mode (production modes A to C) and a second production mode (production modes D to G), and is capable of executing continuous production (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading operation production, pre-reading vibration production, pre-reading zone production, etc.) in which the game production is performed one or more times. A specific effect (ready-to-win effect) expected to be executed can be executed, and the specific effect includes a first specific effect (normal ready-to-reach effect) and a second specific effect (SP/SPSP ready-to-win effect) in which the degree of expectation that the special game is executed is higher than the first specific effect. In the second performance mode, when the continuous performance is executed a second number of times larger than the first number of times, the second specific performance is more likely to be executed in the game performance triggered by the execution of the continuous performance in the second performance mode than in the first performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As the 23rd configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button 17, production lever 24) that can be operated by the player, display means (image display device) that can display the production image, and acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (game ball wins to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47). ), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and effect control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game effect (variable effect) according to the determination result of the determination means, wherein the effect control means performs an operation promotion display (opaque button image) to prompt the operation of the operation means during execution of the game effect, and an operation effect (development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, etc.) according to the operation of the operation means. Before performing the operation prompting display, it is possible to perform a suggestive display (semi-transparent button image) suggesting that the operation prompting display may be performed on the display means, and the operation prompting display includes a first operation prompting display (normal state white button image) and a second operation prompting display (normal red button image, protruding red button image, protruding rainbow button image) different from the first operation prompting display. The degree of expectation for execution of the special game when the first operation prompting display is performed is different between the second performance mode and the second performance mode, and in the first performance mode, the degree of expectation for execution of the special game is higher when the operation prompting display is performed after the suggestive display is performed than when the operation prompting display is performed without the suggestive display. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Content 18 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on the establishment of a starting condition, and to execute a game effect (variable effect) according to the result of the determination. In such a game machine, there is also known one that executes an effect using a predetermined effect device (effect button, movable member, lamp, image display device, etc.) (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-033816). However, the conventional gaming machine as described in the above patent document has a problem that the interest in the game is low.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), storage means (main control board 110) for storing the determination information acquired by the acquisition means as a pending memory, and determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variation effect with variable display of the effect pattern, variation effect only with the variable display of the fourth symbol, and variable effect with only the blinking of the lamp) according to the result of the determination, the effect control means is capable of displaying the pending information according to the number of the pending memories, and a first display effect (MAX 8 tarot card change) for displaying a plurality of pieces of the pending information in a predetermined mode different from the normal mode; a second display effect (puzzle change of puzzle ready-to-win) for displaying the reserved information in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode, and a specific effect (predetermined advance notice effect, various ready-to-win effects, etc.) that makes the player expect that the special game will be executed during the execution of the game effect, and when the first display effect is executed and when the second display effect is executed, the reserved information corresponding to the reserved information that is a specific number (for example, first) before a predetermined number (for example, fourth). The rate at which the specific effect is executed during the game effect is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port); Storage means (main control board 110) for storing the determination information based on establishment as a second reserved storage, determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) in which the second acquisition condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the normal game state, and game production (with variable display of production symbols) according to the result of the judgment. and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a variable production, a fluctuation production of only the variable display of the fourth symbol, and a fluctuation production of only the blinking of the lamp), the determination means judges the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition and the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition in the order of acquisition, and the production control means can display the number of pending information (holding icon) according to the holding storage, and in the normal game state, the first The holding information and the second holding information are displayed in the order in which the judgment information is acquired, and in the specific game state, the second holding information is displayed in the order in which the judgment information is acquired without displaying the first holding information. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and variable display of symbols (special symbols) according to the result of the determination. state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed; initialization means capable of initializing the control state of the game at the start of power supply; The state control means terminates the specific game state when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, and the variable display execution means provides the variable display that is the final round in the specific game state that is controlled in a state in which the special game is not executed after the initialization, and the variable display that is the final round in the specific game state that is controlled in a state in which the special game is executed after the initialization. , it is possible to determine the variation pattern using different variation pattern tables. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and variable display of symbols (special symbols) according to the result of the determination. state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed; initialization means capable of initializing the control state of the game at the start of power supply; The state control means terminates the specific game state when the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed, and the effect control means terminates the specific game state controlled in a state where the special game is not executed after the initialization, and when the specific game state controlled in a state where the special game is executed after the initialization ends. It is possible to change the effect mode (start timing, end timing of the end notification effect, contents of the end notification effect, etc.) at the time of ending. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether to execute the special game based on the determination information. And, a variable display execution means (main control board 110) that executes variable display of symbols (special symbols) according to the result of the determination, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and a game effect (variation effect with variable display of effect symbols, variation effect only with variable display of the fourth symbol, The game effect includes a first game effect (variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on establishment of the second acquisition condition, and non-execution of the special game in the specific game state. The number of types of game performance patterns when the second game performance for informing non-execution of the special game in the specific game state is executed is larger than the number of types of game performance patterns for when the first game performance to be notified is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and executing the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, normal short-time game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production with only the fluctuation display of the fourth symbol, and fluctuation production with only blinking of the lamp) according to the determination result. Production control means (production control board 130) that executes The effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect (a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up notice effect, a speech notice effect, a cut-in effect, a decision success effect, etc.) for vibrating the operation means during execution of the game effect, and generating an operation valid period for the vibration effect, and generating a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue announcement effect, a simulated continuous effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a decision effect, a re-lottery effect, etc.) executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period, and the effective period. and a second vibration effect (prefetching vibration effect, step-up notice effect, vibration effect related to confirmation effect, etc.) executed without causing the second game effect, and the game effect includes a first game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on establishment of the second acquisition condition. The execution ratio of the first vibration effect differs between when the first game effect is executed and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and executing the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, normal short-time game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production with only the fluctuation display of the fourth symbol, and fluctuation production with only blinking of the lamp) according to the determination result. Production control means (production control board 130) that executes During execution of the game effect, the effect control means can execute a vibration effect (prefetch vibration effect, step-up notice effect, serif notice effect, cut-in effect, decision success effect, etc.) that vibrates the operation means, and a specific effect (various ready-to-win effects, chance effects, etc.) that expects execution of the special game. production, re-lottery production, etc.) and a second vibration production (prefetching vibration production, step-up notice production, confirmation production, etc.) executed without generating the valid period, and the game production includes a first game production (fluctuation production corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game production (second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. The execution ratio of the first vibration performance during execution of the specific performance is different between when the first game performance in which the specific performance is performed in the specific game state is executed and when the second game performance is performed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific game state (special time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production with only the fluctuation display of the fourth pattern, fluctuation production with only the blinking of the lamp) according to the determination result. is capable of executing a vibration effect (a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up notice effect, a speech notice effect, a cut-in effect, a decision success effect, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect, and an operation effective period is generated for the vibration effect, and a first vibration effect (a dialogue effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period, and is executed without generating the effective period. A second vibration effect (a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up notice effect, a vibration effect related to a confirmed effect, etc.) is included in the game effect, and the game effect includes a first game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the first game effect in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the second vibration effect differs between when the effect is executed and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and executing the special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time-saving game state, special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and game production according to the result of the determination (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth pattern, fluctuation production only for lamp flashing) production control means (production control board 110) 130), wherein, during execution of the game effect, the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect (read-ahead vibration effect, step-up notice effect, serif notice effect, cut-in effect, determined success effect, etc.) that vibrates the operation means, and a specific effect (various ready-to-win effects, special effects, etc.) that expects execution of the special game. production, cut-in production, decision production, re-lottery production, etc.), and a second vibration production (vibration production related to fixed production, etc.) executed without generating the valid period, and the game production includes a first game production (fluctuation production corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game production (corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. The execution ratio of the second vibration performance during execution of the specific performance is different between when the first game performance in which the specific performance is performed in the specific game state is executed and when the second game performance is performed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, movable effect members (first movable member, second movable member) that can operate in a predetermined manner, acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and based on the determination information. A determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time-saving game state, special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not to be executed, and a game effect (variation effect with variable display of effect symbols, variable effect only for variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. The effect control means (effect control board 130) is capable of executing a first action effect (a look-ahead action effect, a performance for notifying the movable effect means at the start of fluctuation, etc.) of operating the movable effect means in a first mode during the execution of the game effect, and a second action effect (decision success effect, etc.) of operating the movable effect means in a second mode, and the game effect includes a result of determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. 1st game production according to (fluctuation production corresponding to the first special symbol), and a second game production (variation production corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, in the first game production informing the non-execution of the special game in the normal game state, the first operation production can be executed, but in the first game production informing the non-execution of the special game in the specific game state, Execution of the first action effect is restricted, and the second action effect can be executed in the first game effect informing the execution of the special game in the normal game state and the first game effect informing the execution of the special game in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, light emitting means (winning entrance lamp) capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner, movable performance members (first movable member, second movable member) capable of operating in a predetermined manner, and acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start hole) or the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start hole). (Main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed, and game production according to the result of the judgment (variation production with fluctuation display of production patterns, only fluctuation display of the fourth pattern) and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a variable performance, a variable performance of lamp blinking only), the performance control means can execute a light-emitting performance (lamp change performance by reading ahead) that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed by causing the light-emitting means to emit light in a predetermined manner, and an operation performance that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed by operating the movable performance means in a predetermined manner during the execution of the game performance. The game effect includes a first game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. At the same time, the operation performance can be executed, and the execution of the light emission performance can be restricted and the execution of the operation performance can be restricted during execution of the first game performance for informing non-execution of the special game in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, production means (winning entrance lamp NR, top lamp 10b, etc.) for performing a predetermined production, and acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special figure judgment information) based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start hole) or the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start hole). , a determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, a state control means (main control board 110) that is controllable to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed, and a game effect according to the result of the determination (variation effect with variable display of the effect pattern, variation effect only for the variation display of the fourth symbol, variation effect only for flashing the lamp. ), wherein the effect control means can execute a suggestive effect (lamp change effect by reading ahead, light emission effect at the time of winning, etc.) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed using the effect means, and the game effect includes a first game effect (variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. and a second game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the above-mentioned effect means includes a first mode (wining hole lamp blinking white), a second mode different from the first suggesting mode (winning hole lamp blue light), a third mode different from the second mode (top lamp emitting), and a fourth mode (winning hole lamp & top lamp off) different from the third mode. When the first suggestive effect is executed, the effect means can be the first mode and the second mode, and when the second suggestive effect is executed, the effect means can be the third mode, and the first game effect is executed in the specific game state more than the first game effect is executed in the normal game state. A ratio of the production means to be in the fourth mode is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. ), a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and a game effect according to the determination result (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, variation effect only with variable display of the fourth symbol, and variable effect only with blinking of the lamp). The game effect can be executed in any one of the game effect patterns (fluctuation effect pattern), and the game effect includes a first game effect (variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on establishment of the second acquisition condition, and notifying non-execution of the special game in the normal game state. The same game performance pattern is more likely to be executed when the first game performance for informing non-execution of the special game is executed in the specific game state than when the first game performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a 14th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth symbol, fluctuation production only for lamp flashing) according to the determination result Production control means (production control) that executes substrate 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing an operation effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period during execution of the game effect, and the game effect includes a first game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; A second game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on establishment of a second acquisition condition is included, and the operation effect is more difficult to execute when the first game effect for notifying non-execution of the special game is performed in the specific game state than when the first game effect for notifying non-execution of the special game is performed in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether to execute the special game based on the determination information. ), a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and a game effect according to the determination result (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, variation effect only with variable display of the fourth symbol, and variable effect only with blinking of the lamp). production mode (including look-ahead mode), and the game production includes a first game production (variation production corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game production (variation production corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on establishment of the second acquisition condition. When the first game performance is executed in the state, the change of the performance mode is less likely to occur (the SP/SPSP ready-to-win performance that results in a loss is less likely to be executed, the mode update lottery is more likely to be won, the look-ahead zone performance is less likely to be executed, the number of performance modes is less, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 16th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth symbol, fluctuation production only for lamp flashing) according to the determination result Production control means (production control) that executes A substrate 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, step-up notice effect, speech notice effect, cut-in effect, determined success effect, etc.) for vibrating the operation means during execution of the game effect, and generating an operation valid period for the vibration effect, and a first vibration effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) that is executed in accordance with the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period. ) and a second vibration effect executed without generating the valid period (prefetch vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.), and the game effect includes a first game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. The execution ratio of the first vibration effect differs between when the first game effect is executed in the normal game state and when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 17th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth symbol, fluctuation production only for lamp flashing) according to the determination result Production control means (production control) that executes A substrate 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, step-up notice effect, speech notice effect, cut-in effect, determined success effect, etc.) for vibrating the operation means during execution of the game effect, and generating an operation valid period for the vibration effect, and a first vibration effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) that is executed in accordance with the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period. ) and a second vibration effect executed without generating the valid period (prefetch vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.), and the game effect includes a first game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. The execution ratio of the second vibration effect differs between when the first game effect is executed in the normal game state and when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. ), a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and a production control means (production control board 130) that executes a variable production with a variable display of production symbols on the display means according to the determination result. It is possible to execute a plurality of advance notice effects indicating the degree of expectation that the technique will be executed, and dynamically display the background image, but it is possible to generate a notice limit period in which the execution of the plurality of advance notice effects is restricted, and the variable effects include a first variable effect (variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second variable effect (a second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. The first variable performance for informing non-execution of the special game in the specific game state tends to occupy a larger proportion of the notice restriction period than the first variable performance for informing non-execution of the special game in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a 19th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether to execute the special game based on the determination information. ), a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and a production control means (production control board 130) that executes a variable production with a variable display of production symbols on the display means according to the determination result. It is possible to execute a plurality of advance notice effects indicating the degree of expectation that the technique will be executed, and dynamically display the background image, but it is possible to generate a notice limit period in which the execution of the plurality of advance notice effects is restricted, and the variable effects include a first variable effect (variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second variable effect (a second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. Corresponding variable performance), and the ratio of the entire performance period to the notice restriction period is different between when the first variable performance is executed in the normal game state and when the first variable performance is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. ), a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and a production control means (production control board 130) that executes a variable production with a variable display of production symbols on the display means according to the determination result. ) can be executed, and the variable performance includes a first variable performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second variation performance (variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. The ratio of executing the performance in which the predictive performance is executed but the ready-to-win performance is not executed is different between the case where the first variable performance for informing the non-execution of the special game is executed in the skill state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a 21st configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth symbol, fluctuation production only for lamp flashing) according to the determination result Production control means (production control) that executes A substrate 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, step-up notice effect, speech notice effect, cut-in effect, determined success effect, etc.) for vibrating the operation means during execution of the game effect, and generating an operation valid period for the vibration effect, and a first vibration effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) that is executed in accordance with the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period. ) and a second vibration effect executed without generating the valid period (prefetch vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.), and the game effect includes a first game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. The execution ratio of the first vibration effect differs between when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state and when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a 22nd configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth symbol, fluctuation production only for lamp flashing) according to the determination result Production control means (production control) that executes A substrate 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, step-up notice effect, speech notice effect, cut-in effect, determined success effect, etc.) for vibrating the operation means during execution of the game effect, and generating an operation valid period for the vibration effect, and a first vibration effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) that is executed in accordance with the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period. ) and a second vibration effect executed without generating the valid period (prefetch vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.), and the game effect includes a first game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. The execution ratio of the second vibration effect differs between when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state and when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a twenty-third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. ), a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (variable probability game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a production control means (production control board 130) that executes a variable production with a variable display of production symbols on the display means according to the result of the determination. and a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is controlled based on the determination that the special game is not to be executed, and the effect control means is capable of dynamically displaying the background image of the display means during the execution of the variable effect, and a plurality of advance notice effects that suggest the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed. , A first variable performance (variation performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second variation performance (variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. In the first variable effect, the proportion of the notice restriction period is likely to increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twenty-fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether to execute the special game based on the determination information. ), a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (variable probability game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a production control means (production control board 130) that executes the game production according to the result of the determination. a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is controlled based on the determination of non-execution, wherein the effect control means is capable of dynamically displaying a background image of the display means during execution of the variable effect and a plurality of advance notice effects suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed; and a second game effect (variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on establishment of the second acquisition condition. It's like Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a twenty-fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, movable effect members (first movable member, second movable member) that can operate in a predetermined manner, acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and based on the determination information. A determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a game production according to the result of the judgment. (probability variable gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state) and a second specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is controlled based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed, and the production control means has a first action production (prefetching action production, variable start role announcement production, etc.) that operates the movable production means in the first mode during execution of the game production, and a second action production (determined success production, etc.) that operates the movable production means in the second mode. The game production includes a first game production (variation production corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game production (variation production corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, the first game production notifying execution of the special game in the first specific game state, and execution of the special game in the second specific game state. In the first game effect that informs, the second action effect can be executed, and in the second game effect that informs the non-execution of the special game in the first specific game state, the first action effect can be executed, but in the first game effect that informs the non-execution of the special game in the second specific game state, the execution of the first action effect is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a twenty-sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, movable effect members (first movable member, second movable member) that can operate in a predetermined manner, acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and based on the determination information. A determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a game production according to the result of the judgment. (probability variable gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state), and a second specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is controlled based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and the production control means is capable of executing the game production in any of a plurality of game production patterns (variable production patterns), and the game production includes a first game production (variation production corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, A second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the same game effect pattern is more likely to be executed when the first game effect of notifying the non-execution of the special game is executed in the second specific game state than when the second game effect of notifying the non-execution of the special game is executed in the first specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a twenty-seventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time reductions) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a production control means (production control board 130) that executes a game production according to the result of the determination. a normal time-saving game state) and a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is controlled based on the determination that the special game is not to be executed, and the production control means is capable of executing a vibration production (pre-reading vibration production, step-up notice production, dialog announcement production, cut-in production, decision success production, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game production, and the vibration production generates an operation effective period and is executed according to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period. 1st vibration performance (vibration performance related to dialogue announcement performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, final performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) and second vibration performance (vibration performance related to look-ahead vibration performance, step-up notice performance, confirmation performance, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period. and a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the above, and the execution ratio of the first vibration effect is different between when the second game effect is executed in the first specific game state and when the first game effect is executed in the second specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a twenty-eighth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a production control means (production control board 130) that executes a game production according to the determination result. and a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is controlled based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up notice effect, a confirmation effect, etc.) executed without generating the valid period, and the game effect includes a first game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the second acquisition. A second game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on establishment of a condition is included, and the execution ratio of the second vibration effect is different between when the second game effect is executed in the first specific game state and when the first game effect is executed in the second specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a twenty-ninth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the start hole), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (definite) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. State control means (main control board 110) controllable to variable game state, various time-saving game states), and production control means (production control board 130) for executing game production according to the result of the determination, said specific game state is a first specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time-saving game state) controlled according to the end of the special game, and a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) controlled based on the fact that the special game is not executed. game state), and the effect control means can execute a specific notification related to the game (display to prevent addiction, display to prevent a card from being forgotten to be taken out, etc.) in relation to the end of the special game, and when the special game (so-called consecutive win) is executed during the first specific game state, the execution of the specific notification is restricted, and when the special game (so-called first hit) is executed during the second specific game state, the specific notification can be executed. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirtieth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the start hole), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (certainty) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. State control means (main control board 110) controllable to variable game state, various time-saving game states), and production control means (production control board 130) that executes game production according to the result of the determination, and the specific game state is a first specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time-saving game state) controlled according to the end of the special game, and a second specific game state (special time-saving game) controlled based on the fact that the special game is not executed. The effect control means is capable of executing a specific notification related to the game in relation to the end of the special game (display to prevent addiction, display to prevent a card from being forgotten to be taken out, etc.), when the special game (so-called first hit) is executed during the normal game state, the specific notification can be executed, and when the special game (so-called consecutive win) is executed during the first specific game state, the execution of the specific notification is restricted, and the second specific game. When the special game (so-called first win) is executed during the game state, the specific notification can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 31st configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of game media in a start area (start opening) provided in the game area, determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and determining that the special game is not to be executed. State control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the game is played, and effect control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game effect according to the result of the determination, wherein the effect control means, when the game medium is shot to the second area of the game area during the normal game state, first notification prompting the shooting of the game medium to the first area of the game area. A performance (right hitting error notification) can be executed for a predetermined period, and when the specific game state is started, a second notification performance (right hitting notification) for prompting the ejection of the game medium to the second area of the game region can be executed, and when the specific game state is started during execution of the first notification performance, the second notification performance can be executed while continuing the first notification. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a 32nd configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth symbol, fluctuation production only for lamp flashing) according to the determination result Production control means (production control) that executes board 130), wherein the effect control means can execute a specific effect (continuous advance notice effect, icon change effect, timer effect, etc.) that makes the execution of the special game expected during the game effect, and can be set to a first setting state (normal setting) and a second setting state (simple setting) in which the execution ratio of the specific effect is different according to the operation of the operating means, and the game effect includes a first game effect (second and a second game effect (variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the specific effect includes a first specific effect (for example, continuous notice effect) and a second specific effect (for example, timer effect) different from the first specific effect, and when the first game effect is executed in the normal game state after the first setting state is set, the first specific effect is performed. When the execution ratio is the first ratio (high appearance rate) and the execution ratio of the second specific effect is the second ratio (high appearance rate), and the second game effect is executed in the specific game state after the first set state is set, the execution ratio of the first specific effect is different from the first ratio (low appearance ratio) and the execution ratio of the second specific effect is different from the second ratio (low appearance ratio). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a 33rd configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and game production according to the determination result (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth symbol, fluctuation production only for lamp blinking) production control means (production control board 130) for executing, The effect control means can execute a specific effect (continuous notice effect, icon change effect, timer effect, etc.) that makes the execution of the special game expected during the game effect, and can be set to a first setting state (normal setting) and a second setting state (simple setting) in which the execution ratio of the specific effect is different according to the operation of the operating means. and a second game effect (variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the specific effect includes a first specific effect (for example, continuous notice effect) and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect (for example, a timer effect). Appearance rate is high) and the execution rate of the second specific effect is the second rate (appearance rate is high), and the first game effect is executed in the specific game state after the first set state is set, the execution rate of the first specific effect is different from the first rate (appearance rate is low) and the execution rate of the second specific effect is different from the second rate (appearance rate is low). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirty-fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and game production according to the determination result (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth symbol, fluctuation production only for lamp blinking) production control means (production control board 130) for executing, The specific game state is a first specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time reduction game state) that is controlled according to the end of the special game, and a second specific game state (special time reduction game state) that is controlled based on the determination that the special game is not executed. It is possible to set a first setting state (normal setting) and a second setting state (simple setting) in which the execution ratio of the specific effect is different, and the game effect includes a first game effect (variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. When the second game effect is executed in the first specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution ratio of the first specific effect is the first ratio (high appearance rate) and the execution ratio of the second specific effect is the second ratio (high appearance rate), and the first game effect is performed in the second specific game state after the first setting state is set. In this case, the execution ratio of the first specific effect is different from the first ratio (appearance rate is low), and the execution ratio of the second specific effect is different from the second ratio (appearance rate is low). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirty-fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and game production according to the determination result (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth symbol, fluctuation production only for lamp blinking) Production control means (production control board 130) for executing, The effect control means can execute a specific effect (continuous advance notice effect, icon change effect, timer effect, etc.) that makes the execution of the special game expected during the game effect, and can be set to a first setting state (normal setting) and a second setting state (simple setting) in which the execution ratio of the specific effect is different according to the operation of the operating means. and a second game effect (variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the specific effect includes a first specific effect (for example, continuous notice effect) and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect (for example, timer effect). Appearance rate is high) and the execution rate of the second specific effect is the second rate (appearance rate is high), and the first game effect is executed in the specific game state after the first set state is set, the execution rate of the first specific effect is different from the first rate (appearance rate is low) and the execution rate of the second specific effect is different from the second rate (appearance rate is low). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirty-sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and game production according to the determination result (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth symbol, fluctuation production only for lamp blinking) production control means (production control board 130) for executing, The specific game state is a first specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time reduction game state) that is controlled according to the end of the special game, and a second specific game state (special time reduction game state) that is controlled based on the determination that the special game is not executed. Accordingly, it is possible to set a first setting state (normal setting) and a second setting state (simple setting) in which the execution ratio of the specific effect is different, and the game effect includes a first game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. When the second game effect is executed in the second specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution ratio of the first specific effect is the first ratio (high appearance rate) and the execution ratio of the second specific effect is the second ratio (high appearance rate), and the first game is played in the first specific game state after the first setting state is set. When the performance is executed, the execution ratio of the first specific performance is different from the first ratio (appearance rate is low) and the execution ratio of the second specific performance is different from the second ratio (appearance rate is low). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirty-seventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and game production according to the determination result (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth symbol, fluctuation production only for lamp blinking) Production control means (production control board 130) for executing, The specific game state is a first specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time reduction game state) that is controlled according to the end of the special game, and a second specific game state (special time reduction game state) that is controlled based on the determination that the special game is not executed. Accordingly, it is possible to set a first setting state (normal setting) and a second setting state (simple setting) in which the execution ratio of the specific effect is different, and the game effect includes a first game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. When the second game effect is executed in the first specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution ratio of the first specific effect is the first ratio (high appearance rate) and the execution ratio of the second specific effect is the second ratio (high appearance rate), and the first game is played in the second specific game state after the first setting state is set. When the performance is executed, the execution ratio of the first specific performance is different from the first ratio (low appearance rate) and the execution ratio of the second specific performance is different from the second ratio (low appearance rate). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Content 19 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on the establishment of a starting condition, and to execute a game effect (variable effect) according to the result of the determination. In such a game machine, there is also known one that executes an effect using a predetermined effect device (effect button, movable member, lamp, image display device, etc.) (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-033816). However, the conventional gaming machine as described in the above patent document has a problem that the interest in the game is low.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, light emitting means (winning entrance lamp) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes, acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the start opening), and execution of the special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to play, state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, normal short-time game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game, and game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth pattern, fluctuation production only for lamp blinking) depending on the result of the judgment. 130), wherein the effect control means can display execution information (the icon) corresponding to the determination information that the game effect has started, and display the execution information in a special mode (special icon) different from the normal mode (normal icon), thereby suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode (blue light emission, red light emission, rainbow light emission, etc.) corresponding to the execution information being displayed in the special mode. In a predetermined period after the start of the game effect (until the first temporary stop after the high-speed fluctuation), an operation effective period is generated, and a predetermined effect is performed according to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.), and vibration effect to vibrate the operation means without generating the operation effective period (pre-reading vibration effect, step-up effect). The execution ratio of the vibration performance during a predetermined period after the start of the game performance (until the first temporary stop after the high-speed fluctuation) is different between during the normal game state and during the specific game state, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the changing performance is resumed and the game control state is restored, the execution information is not performed and the light emitting means changes to a notification mode (white light emission, extinguishing) different from the specific notification mode. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering a ball into the starting hole), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the special game. State control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the game is not executed, and production control means (production control board 130) that executes a variable production that variably displays the production pattern according to the result of the determination. It is possible to execute an operation effect of performing a predetermined effect in accordance with the operation of the operation means during the period (vibration effect related to dialog announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) and vibration effect of vibrating the operation means without generating the operation valid period (pre-reading vibration effect, vibration effect related to step-up advance notice effect, etc.), and in a specific change effect (variation effect with pseudo-continuation) in which the change display of the effect pattern is simulated multiple times, the effect can progress stepwise. It is possible to execute a step production (story production) and a ready-to-win production to expect execution of the special game, wherein the stage production includes a first-stage production (story 1) and a second-stage production (story 2) to be executed after the first-stage production, and the ready-to-win production includes a first ready-to-reach production (normal ready-to-win production) and a second ready-to-win production (SP/SPSP ready-to-win production) in which the special game is expected to be executed more than the first ready-to-win production. In the specific variable performance, the second stage performance can be executed after the first ready-to-win performance is executed, but the second stage performance is not executed after the second ready-to-win performance is executed, and the execution ratio of the vibration performance in a predetermined period after the start of the variable performance is different between the normal game state and the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, operation means (production buttons, production levers) that can be operated by the player, light emitting means (winning entrance lamp) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes, acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the start opening), and execution of the special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to play, and production control means (production control board 130) for executing a game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production with only the fluctuation display of the fourth symbol, fluctuation production with only blinking of the lamp) according to the result of the judgment, and the production control means (production control board 130). ) can be displayed, and by displaying the execution information in a special mode (special icon) different from the normal mode (normal icon), it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode (blue light emission, red light emission, rainbow light emission, etc.) corresponding to the execution information being displayed in the special mode, It is possible to execute a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests the expectation level, and an operation valid period is generated during the execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute an operation effect for performing a predetermined effect in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period (diaphragm announcement effect, simulated continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.), and a vibration effect for vibrating the operation means without generating the operation effective period (prediction vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.). Without execution information, the light emitting means becomes a notification mode (white light emission, extinguished) different from the specific notification mode, and the operation means can be vibrated in different modes between the initial vibration and the vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever, shooting handle) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), and determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a variable production (variation production) that variably displays production patterns according to the result of the determination, wherein the operation means includes a first operation means (production button) and a second operation means (production lever, firing handle) different from the first operation means, and the production control means generates an operation valid period during the execution of the variable production, and performs a predetermined production according to the operation of the first operation means during the operation valid period ( Vibration effects related to serif announcement effects, pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, etc.), and vibration effects that vibrate the first operating means without generating the operation valid period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up advance notice effects, etc.), and in specific variable effects (fluctuation effects accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects) in which the variable display of the effect pattern is simulated a plurality of times, stage effects (story effects) in which the effects can be progressed step by step (story effects), and the above-mentioned special games are expected to be executed. When the vibration effect is executed during the operation of the second operating means, the vibration associated with the vibration effect is transmitted to the player via the second operating means, the stage effect includes a first stage effect (story 1) and a second stage effect (story 2) executed after the first stage effect, and the ready-to-win effect includes a first ready-to-win effect (normal ready-to-win effect) and an expectation that the special game will be executed rather than the first ready-to-win effect. second ready-to-reach performance (SP/SPSP ready-to-reach performance) with a high value, and in the specific variation performance, the second stage performance can be executed after the first ready-to-reach performance is executed, but the second stage performance is not executed after the second ready-to-reach performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, light emitting means (winning entrance lamp) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes, acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the start opening), and the determination information acquired by the acquisition means. Storage means (main control board 110) that stores as a memory, determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, advance determination means (main control board 110) that determines in advance whether or not to execute the special game, controllable state control means (main control board 110) to a specific game state (variable probability game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and controllable state control means (main control board 110) according to the result of the determination. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a variable performance for variably displaying performance symbols, wherein the performance control means is capable of displaying execution information (the icon) corresponding to the determination information for which the variable performance is started, and by displaying the execution information in a special mode (special icon) different from a normal mode (normal icon), it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and a specific notification mode corresponding to the execution information being displayed by the light emitting means in the special mode. (blue light emission, red light emission, rainbow light emission, etc.), it is possible to execute a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation by changing to (blue light emission, red light emission, rainbow light emission, etc.), and during the execution of the variable effect, an operation effective period is generated, and a predetermined effect is performed according to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.). When the control state of the game is restored by restarting the power supply stopped during the execution of the change effect, the light emitting means becomes a notification mode (white light, extinguished) different from the specific notification mode without performing the execution information, and the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is performed during the normal game state is executed. The rate at which the vibration effect is executed is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and executing the special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, normal short-time game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game, and game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth symbol, fluctuation production only for lamp flashing) depending on the result of the judgment. Substrate 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect for vibrating the operation means during execution of the game effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue forewarning effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.), and for the vibration effect, an operation valid period is generated, and a first vibration effect (serif announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect) is generated in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation valid period. , determination effect, re-lottery effect, etc.), and a second vibration effect executed without generating the valid period (prefetching vibration effect, step-up notice effect, vibration effect related to final effect, etc.), the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that the effect period does not overlap, and the game effect includes a first game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; A second game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition is included, and the execution ratio of the second vibration effect in a predetermined period after the start of the game effect (until the first temporary stop after the high-speed fluctuation) is different between when the first game effect is executed in the normal game state and when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, normal short-time game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game, and game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth pattern, fluctuation production only for lamp flashing) according to the result of the judgment. Substrate 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect, and in the vibration effect, an operation valid period is generated, and a first vibration effect (serif announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut) is generated in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period. and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to anticipation vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmed effect, etc.) executed without generating the effective period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that the effect period does not overlap, and the game effect includes a first game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. and a second game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the execution ratio of the second vibration effect in a predetermined period after the start of the game effect (until the first temporary stop after the high-speed fluctuation) is different between when the first game effect is executed in the normal game state and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and executing the special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth pattern, fluctuation production only for lamp flashing) depending on the result of the judgment. Production control means (production control board 110) for executing 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue forewarning effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.), and in the vibration effect, an operation valid period is generated, and a first vibration effect (serif announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in) is generated in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation valid period. and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to anticipatory vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmed effect, etc.) executed without generating the effective period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that the effect period does not overlap, and the game effect includes a first game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. , and a second game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and when the first game effect is executed in the normal game state and when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state, the execution ratio of the second vibration effect in a predetermined period after the start of the game effect (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and executing the special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth pattern, fluctuation production only for lamp flashing) depending on the result of the judgment. Production control means (production control board 110) for executing 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue forewarning effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.), and in the vibration effect, an operation valid period is generated, and a first vibration effect (serif announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in) is generated in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation valid period. and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to anticipatory vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmed effect, etc.) executed without generating the effective period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that the effect period does not overlap, and the game effect includes a first game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. , and a second game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and when the first game effect is executed in the normal game state and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state, the execution ratio of the second vibration effect in a predetermined period after the start of the game effect (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and game production according to the determination result (variation production with variable display of production design, variation production only for variation display of the fourth symbol, variation production only for lamp blinking) Production control means (production control board 130) for executing, The specific game state is a first specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time reduction game state) that is controlled according to the end of the special game, and a second specific game state (special time reduction game state) that is controlled based on the determination that the special game is not executed. The vibration effects include a first vibration effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed in accordance with the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period, and a second vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.) executed without generating the effective period. It is possible to execute the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect so that the effect period does not overlap, and the game effect includes a first game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the second game effect is performed in the first specific game state. The execution ratio of the second vibration performance in a predetermined period after the start of the game performance (until the first temporary stop after the high speed fluctuation) is different between when it is executed and when the second game performance is executed in the second specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth symbol, fluctuation production only for lamp flashing) according to the determination result Production control means (production control) that executes Substrate 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue forewarning effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, determination effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect, and in the vibration effect, an operation valid period is generated, and a first vibration effect (serif announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut) is generated in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation valid period. and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to anticipatory vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.) executed without generating the effective period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that the effect period does not overlap, and the game effect includes a first game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. and a second game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the execution ratio of the second vibration effect in a predetermined period after the start of the game effect (until the first temporary stop after the high-speed fluctuation) is different between when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, normal short game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game, and a game effect (variation effect with variable display of the effect pattern, variation effect only for the variation display of the fourth symbol, variation effect only for lamp flashing) depending on the result of the determination. A control board 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, determination effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect, and the vibration effect generates an operation valid period, and a first vibration effect (speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, a cut-in effect, a final effect, a re-lottery effect, etc.), and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up notice effect, a confirmation effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the effective period. ) and a second game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the execution ratio of the second vibration effect in a predetermined period after the start of the game effect (until the first temporary stop after the high-speed fluctuation) is different between when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. A determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and a game production according to the determination result (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth pattern, and fluctuation production only for lamp flashing) production control means (production control) Substrate 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect, and in the vibration effect, an operation valid period is generated, and a first vibration effect (serif announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut) is generated in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period. and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to anticipation vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmed effect, etc.) executed without generating the effective period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that the effect period does not overlap, and the game effect includes a first game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. and a second game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the execution ratio of the second vibration effect in a predetermined period after the start of the game effect (until the first temporary stop after the high-speed fluctuation) is different between when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a 14th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) operable by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the above. Effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, variation effect only with variable display of the fourth symbol, and variable effect only with blinking of the lamp) according to the result of the determination, wherein the effect control means is capable of executing an initial vibration that vibrates the operation means after the start of power supply, and a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during the execution of the game effect (pre-reading vibration effect, serif notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision). The vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation effective period, and a second vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, step-up advance notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.) executed without generating the effective period. , the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be executed so that performance periods do not overlap, and the operation means can be vibrated in different modes in the initial vibration and the second vibration performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the above. Effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, variation effect with only the variable display of the fourth pattern, and variation effect with only the flashing of the lamp) according to the result of the determination, and the effect control means is capable of executing vibration effects (vibration effects related to anticipatory vibration effects, dialogue announcement effects, pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, cut-in effects, deciding effects, re-lottery effects, confirmation effects, etc.) that vibrate the operating means during execution of the game effects. The vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation effective period, and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to anticipatory vibration effect, step-up advance effect, confirmation effect, etc.) executed without generating the effective period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect are arranged so that the effect periods do not overlap. It is possible to vibrate the operation means in different modes between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 16th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. and a game effect (variation effect with variable display of the effect pattern, variation effect of only the variable display of the fourth symbol, variation effect of only the blinking of the lamp) according to the result of the determination. , during the execution of the game effect, it is possible to execute a vibration effect (vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a dialogue forewarning effect, a simulated continuous effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a decision effect, a re-lottery effect, a confirmation effect, etc.) in which the first operation means is vibrated during execution of the game effect. and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to anticipatory vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.) executed without generating the effective period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that the effect period does not overlap, and when the second vibration effect is executed during the operation of the second operation means, the vibration related to the second vibration effect is transmitted to the player via the second operation means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 17th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), storage means (main control board 110) for storing the determination information acquired by the acquisition means as a pending memory, and the determination information. Determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on, advance determination means (main control board 110) for determining in advance whether to execute the special game, state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and effect control means (performance control) that executes a variable effect that variably displays the effect pattern according to the result of the determination. board 130), wherein the operation means includes a first operation means (effect button) and a second operation means (effect lever, firing handle) different from the first operation means, and the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect (vibration effect related to anticipatory vibration effect, dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.) that vibrates the first operation means during execution of the variable effect, and the vibration effect includes an operation valid period. and a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed in accordance with the operation of the first operating means during the operation effective period, and a second vibration effect executed without generating the effective period (vibration effect related to anticipation vibration effect, step-up advance notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.), wherein the second vibration effect is executed according to the result of the preliminary determination, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect are executed. Vibration performance can be executed so that performance periods do not overlap, and when the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance is performed during the normal game state is executed, the ratio of execution of the second vibration performance is higher before the ready-to-win performance than during the ready-to-win performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and game production according to the determination result (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth symbol, fluctuation production only for lamp blinking) production control means (production control board 130) for executing, The effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue forewarning effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.), and in the vibration effect, an operation valid period is generated, and a first vibration effect that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation valid period (serif announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, repeat effect). and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to a drawing effect, etc.) and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up notice effect, a confirmation effect, etc.) executed without generating the valid period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that the effect period does not overlap, and the game effect includes a first game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the second acquisition condition. and a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on establishment of the above, and the expectation for the execution of the special game is higher when the second vibration effect is executed during the second game effect in the specific game state than when the second vibration effect is executed during the first game effect in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 19th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, normal short game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game, and a game effect (variation effect with variable display of the effect pattern, variation effect only for the variation display of the fourth symbol, variation effect only for lamp flashing) depending on the result of the determination. A control board 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, determination effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect, and the vibration effect generates an operation valid period, and a first vibration effect (speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, a cut-in effect, a final effect, a re-lottery effect, etc.), and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up notice effect, pattern matching, C pattern matching, a confirmed effect, etc.) executed without generating the effective period, and it is possible to execute the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect so that the effect period does not overlap, and the game effect includes a first game effect according to the result of determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (second and a second game effect (variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the number of types of the second vibration effect that may be executed during the first game effect in the normal game state (predictive vibration effect, anticipation vibration effect, Step-up notice effect, pattern matching, C pattern matching, vibration effect related to confirmation effect, etc.) are increasing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth symbol, fluctuation production only for lamp flashing) according to the determination result Production control means (production control) that executes Substrate 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue forewarning effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, determination effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect, and in the vibration effect, an operation valid period is generated, and a first vibration effect (serif announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut) is generated in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation valid period. and a second vibration effect executed without generating the effective period (predictive vibration effect, step-up notice effect, pattern matching, C pattern matching, confirmed effect, etc.). and a second game effect (variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the number of types of the second vibration effect that may be executed during the first game effect in the specific game state (vibration effect related to pattern matching, etc.) than the number of types of the second vibration effect that may be executed during the first game effect in the normal game state (forecast vibration effect, step) Up notice effect, matching pattern, matching C pattern, vibration effect related to confirmed effect, etc.) are increasing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a 21st configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, normal short game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game, and a game effect (variation effect with variable display of the effect pattern, variation effect only for the variation display of the fourth symbol, variation effect only for lamp flashing) depending on the result of the determination. A control board 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing vibration effects (vibration effects related to anticipatory vibration effects, dialogue announcement effects, pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, confirmation effects, etc.) that vibrate the operation means during execution of the game effects, and in the vibration effects, an operation valid period is generated, and a first vibration effect (speech announcement effects, pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, a cut-in effect, a final effect, a re-lottery effect, etc.), and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up notice effect, pattern matching, C pattern matching, a confirmed effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the effective period. 1 special symbol) and a second game effect (variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the number of types of the second vibration effect that may be executed during the second game effect in the specific game state (prediction vibration effect, step-up notice effect, pattern matching, confirmation effect, etc.) There is a possibility of being executed during the first game effect in the normal game state. The number of types of the second vibration effects (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, matching symbols, matching C symbols, vibration effects related to confirmation effects, etc.) is larger. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a 22nd configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth symbol, fluctuation production only for lamp flashing) according to the determination result Production control means (production control) that executes Substrate 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue forewarning effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, determination effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect, and in the vibration effect, an operation valid period is generated, and a first vibration effect (serif announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut) is generated in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation valid period. and a second vibration effect executed without generating the effective period (predictive vibration effect, step-up notice effect, pattern matching, C pattern matching, confirmed effect, etc.). and a second game effect (variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the number of types of the second vibration effect that may be executed during the second game effect in the specific game state (prediction vibration effect, pattern matching, confirmation effect, etc.) is greater than the number of types of the second vibration effect that may be executed during the first game effect in the normal game state. The number of types (prediction vibration effect, step-up notice effect, pattern matching, C pattern matching, vibration effect related to fixed effect, etc.) is increasing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a twenty-third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and game production according to the determination result (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth symbol, fluctuation production only for lamp blinking) production control means (production control board 130) for executing, The effect control means can execute an initial vibration that vibrates the operation means after the start of power supply, and can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue announcement effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.). and a second game effect (variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, wherein the vibration effect is a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before reach), and a second vibration effect (determined effect, vibration effect related to pattern matching, etc.) executed at a timing (during reach) different from the first vibration effect. During the execution of the first game effect in the normal game state, the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed, and the execution of the first vibration effect is restricted while the first game effect is being executed in the specific game state, but the second vibration effect can be executed, and the operation means can be vibrated in different modes between the initial vibration and the first vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a twenty-fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and game production according to the determination result (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth symbol, fluctuation production only for lamp blinking) Production control means (production control board 130) for executing, The effect control means can execute an initial vibration that vibrates the operation means after the start of power supply, and can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect (prediction vibration effect, dialogue announcement effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.), and the game effect includes a first game effect (first special diagram) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. and a second game effect (variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. During the execution of the first game performance in the normal game state, the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be executed, and the execution of the first vibration performance is restricted during the execution of the first game performance in the specific game state, but the second vibration performance is executable, and the operation means can be vibrated in different modes between the initial vibration and the second vibration performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a twenty-fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, normal short game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game, and a game effect (variation effect with variable display of the effect pattern, variation effect only for the variation display of the fourth symbol, variation effect only for lamp flashing) depending on the result of the determination. and a control board 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue announcement effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect, and the game effect includes a first game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the second game effect. A second game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on establishment of the acquisition condition, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to anticipation vibration effect, speech notice effect, step-up notice effect, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before reach), and a second vibration effect (development effect, cut-in effect, determined effect, vibration effect related to re-lottery effect) executed at a timing (during reach) different from the first vibration effect. Including, the execution ratio of the first vibration effect differs between when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a twenty-sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, normal short game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game, and a game effect (variation effect with variable display of the effect pattern, variation effect only for the variation display of the fourth symbol, variation effect only for lamp flashing) depending on the result of the determination. and a control board 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, serif announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect, and the game effect includes a first game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the second game effect. and a second game effect (variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, wherein the vibration effect is executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) (vibration effect related to anticipation vibration effect, serif notice effect, step-up notice effect, etc.), and a second vibration effect (development effect, cut-in effect, determined effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed at a timing different from the first vibration effect (during reach); The execution ratio of the second vibration effect is different between when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a twenty-seventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth symbol, fluctuation production only for lamp flashing) according to the determination result Production control means (production control) that executes substrate 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue announcement effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect; A second game effect (variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on establishment of a condition, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to anticipation vibration effect, dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before reach), and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to development effect, cut-in effect, determined effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed at a timing (during reach) different from the first vibration effect. Including, the execution ratio of the first vibration effect differs between when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a twenty-eighth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start port), and the special game based on the determination information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only for fluctuation display of the fourth symbol, fluctuation production only for lamp flashing) according to the determination result Production control means (production control) that executes substrate 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue announcement effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect; A second game effect (variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on establishment of a condition, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to anticipation vibration effect, dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before reach), and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to development effect, cut-in effect, determined effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed at a timing (during reach) different from the first vibration effect. Including, the execution ratio of the second vibration effect differs between when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a twenty-ninth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, an operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the start hole), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and normal A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) more advantageous to a player than a game state, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game performance (variation performance with variable display of performance symbols, variation performance only with variable display of fourth symbols, and variation performance only with flashing of a lamp) according to the result of the determination, wherein the performance control means vibrates the operation means after the start of power supply. An initial vibration can be executed, and a vibration performance (vibration performance related to a look-ahead vibration performance, a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo-continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a decision performance, a re-lottery performance, a confirmation performance, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during the execution of the game performance can be executed, and the vibration performance is a first vibration performance (vibration performance related to a look-ahead vibration performance, a dialogue preview performance, a step-up preview performance, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) and a timing different from the first vibration performance (reach. Including a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to development performance, cut-in performance, determination performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) executed in the middle), the execution ratio of the first vibration performance is different between the normal game state and the specific game state, and the operation means can be vibrated in different modes between the initial vibration and the first vibration performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirtieth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, an operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the start hole), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and normal A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) more advantageous to a player than a game state, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game performance (variation performance with variable display of performance symbols, variation performance only with variable display of fourth symbols, and variation performance only with flashing of a lamp) according to the result of the determination, wherein the performance control means vibrates the operation means after the start of power supply. An initial vibration can be executed, and a vibration performance (vibration performance related to a look-ahead vibration performance, a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo-continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a decision performance, a re-lottery performance, a confirmation performance, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during the execution of the game performance can be executed, and the vibration performance is a first vibration performance (vibration performance related to a look-ahead vibration performance, a dialogue preview performance, a step-up preview performance, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) and a timing different from the first vibration performance (reach. A second vibration performance (development performance, cut-in performance, decision performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) executed in the middle) is included, and the execution ratio of the first vibration performance is different between the normal game state and the specific game state, and the operation means can be vibrated in different modes between the initial vibration and the second vibration performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a 31st configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, an operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player and can emit light in a predetermined manner, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (ball entering the start opening), and a determination means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the determination information. Control board 110) and production control means (production control board 130) for executing a game production according to the result of the determination (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production with only the fluctuation display of the fourth pattern, and fluctuation production with only blinking of the lamp), and the production control means is related to vibration production (pre-reading vibration production, dialogue announcement production, pseudo-continuous production, development production, cut-in production, determination production, re-lottery production, confirmation production, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game production. The vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before reach), and a second vibration effect (development effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed at a timing different from the first vibration effect (during reach). In the game performance notifying the execution of the special game including a second light emission mode (rainbow light emission) in which the degree of expectation for execution of the special game is higher than that of the first light emission mode, the operation means is more likely to emit light in the first light emission mode when the first vibration performance is executed than when the second vibration performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a 32nd configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, an operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player and can emit light in a predetermined mode, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (ball entering the start opening), and a determination means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the determination information. a control board 110), a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a game production according to the result of the determination (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production with only the variation display of the fourth symbol, and fluctuation production with only the blinking of the lamp). It is possible to execute a vibration effect (vibration effect related to anticipatory vibration effect, speech advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during the execution of the effect, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (prediction vibration effect, dialogue effect, step-up notice effect, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) and a second vibration effect (development) executed at a timing different from the first vibration effect (during reach). production, cut-in production, decision production, re-lottery production, etc.), the execution ratio of the first vibration production differs between the normal game state and the specific game state, the light emission mode of the operating means includes a first light emission mode (white light emission, red light emission) and a second light emission mode (rainbow light emission) in which the expectation that the special game is executed is higher than the first light emission mode, and the second vibration performance in the game performance for notifying that the special game is performed. The operation means is more likely to emit light in the first light emission mode when the first vibration effect is performed than when is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirty-third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the ball into the starting hole), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the above. Effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, variation effect only with variable display of the fourth symbol, and variable effect only with blinking of the lamp) according to the result of the determination, wherein the effect control means is capable of executing an initial vibration that vibrates the operation means after the start of power supply, and a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during the execution of the game effect (pre-reading vibration effect, serif notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision). The effective period of the operation means includes a first effective period (effective period related to dialogue announcement effect and pseudo-continuous effect) generated at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the game effect, and a second effective period (effective period related to cut-in effect, determined effect, etc.) generated at a second timing (during reach) after the first effective period during the game effect, and the operating means during the second effective period. is operated, the operation means can be vibrated in different modes between the initial vibration and the vibration effect executed when the operation means is operated during the second effective period, and different operation sounds can be output depending on whether the operation means is operated during the first effective period or during the second effective period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirty-fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the above. Effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, variation effect only with variable display of the fourth symbol, and variable effect only with blinking of the lamp) according to the result of the determination, wherein the effect control means is capable of executing an initial vibration that vibrates the operation means after the start of power supply, and a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during the execution of the game effect (pre-reading vibration effect, serif notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision). The effective period of the operation means includes a first effective period (effective period related to dialogue announcement effect and pseudo-continuous effect) generated at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the game effect, and a second effective period (effective period related to cut-in effect, determined effect, etc.) generated at a second timing (during reach) after the first effective period during the game effect, and the operating means during the first effective period. is operated, the operation means can be vibrated in different modes between the initial vibration and the vibration effect executed when the operation means is operated during the first effective period, and different operation sounds can be output depending on whether the operation means is operated during the first effective period or during the second effective period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirty-fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the above. State control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time-saving game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game, and effect control means (performance control board 130) for executing game effects (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, variation effect only with variable display of the fourth symbol, and variable effect only with lamp flashing) according to the result of the determination, and the effect control means starts power supply. An initial vibration that vibrates the operation means can be executed later, and a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, step-up notice effect, speech notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, cut-in effect, determined success effect, promotion success effect, etc.) can be executed that causes the operation means to vibrate in accordance with the operation of the operation means during the effective period that occurs during the game effect, and the effective period includes a first effective period (line-notice effect, effective period related to the pseudo-continuous effect) that occurs at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the game effect. ) and a second effective period (effective period related to development effect, determined effect, etc.) generated at a second timing (during ready-to-win) after the first effective period during the game effect, the game effect in the normal game state and the game effect in the specific game state have different execution ratios of the vibration effect in response to the operation during the first effective period, the number of vibrations (time) in the vibration effect executed in response to the operation during the first effective period, and the second effective period. The number of vibrations (time) in the vibration performance executed in accordance with the operation during the operation is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirty-sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button, production lever) that can be operated by the player, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the above. A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game state based on the fact that the special game is not executed, and a game effect according to the result of the determination (a effect control means (a effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (a variable effect with a variable display of the effect pattern, a variable effect with only the variable display of the fourth symbol, and a variable effect with only the blinking of the lamp), and the effect control means is provided after the start of power supply. Vibration effects (pre-reading vibration effect, step-up notice effect, speech notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, cut-in effect, determined success effect, promotion success effect, etc.) can be executed for vibrating the operation means according to the operation of the operating means during the effective period occurring during the game effect, and the effective period includes a first effective period (effective period related to the dialogue predictive effect and pseudo-continuous effect) that occurs at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the game effect. and a second effective period (effective period related to development effect, final effect, etc.) generated at a second timing (during ready-to-win) after the first effective period during the game effect, the game effect in the normal game state and the game effect in the specific game state have different execution ratios of the vibration effect in response to the operation during the first effective period, and the number of vibrations (time) in the vibration effect executed in response to the operation during the first effective period, and during the second effective period. The number of vibrations (time) in the vibration effect executed in response to the operation of . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can also be used for a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jankyu game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment shifts to the low-probability game state after the end of the jackpot special pattern when the type of the jackpot special pattern is the normal pattern, and shifts to the high-probability game state continuing until the next jackpot game after the jackpot game ends when the jackpot special pattern is the specific pattern.

Alternatively, the game machine may shift to a high-probability game state after all jackpot games are finished, and terminate the high-probability game state and return to a normal game state when winning a drop lottery executed at the start of variable display of special symbols in the high-probability game state.

In addition, when a game ball passes through a specific area in a specific round game of a jackpot game, it may be a gaming machine that shifts to a high-probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game ends.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not performed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 game machine 5 game board 44 normal figure gate 45 first starting port 47 second starting port 50 big prize winning port 70 first image display device 71 second image display device 110 main control board 110a main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Effect control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player,
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
Acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition or the establishment of a second acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information;
a state control means capable of controlling a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the special game is finished;
an effect control means for executing a game effect with variable display of effect symbols on the display means according to the result of the determination,
The production control means is
During execution of the game effect , it is possible to execute a vibration effect of vibrating the operation means and a symbol change effect of changing the display size of the effect symbol ,
When the game effect starts and/or ends, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect that changes the effect pattern in a predetermined manner,
In the vibration production,
a first vibration effect that generates an operation effective period and is executed in response to an operation of the operation means during the operation effective period;
and a second vibration effect that is executed without generating the operation effective period,
It is possible to execute the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect so that the effect periods do not overlap,
In the game production,
a first game effect according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition;
and a second game effect according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition,
The number of types of the second vibration effect that may be executed during the first game effect in the normal game state is greater than the number of types of the second vibration effect that may be executed during the first game effect in the specific game state,
The game machine is characterized in that the number of pattern change performance patterns is larger when the first game performance resulting in a loss is executed in the normal game state than when the first game performance resulting in a loss is executed in the specific game state.